jm ftftft ft IrXl 8 wj I * ■ 
iffy ■ < J< * • . ; I ■ mm \uX\nHi\ 

ml 

fe'7,'-' 

H 

H 



•/.,'>!'* 










■ 



I ■ 



■ 
Hill 






.V 






7 >- o> 



fj 














\<+il 
















1 , 






.0* 



o -<,. 



/|^ THE 

\ T ERYES AND THE NERVOUS. 

A PRACTICAL TREATISE 



ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM, 

WITH THE NATURE AND ,CAUSES OP 

ALL KINDS OF 

NERVOUS DISEASES; 

SHOWING HOW THEY MAY OFTEN BE PREVENTED, 

AND HOW THEY SHOULD BE TREATED. INCLUDING 

ALSO, AN EXPLANATION OF THE 

NEW PRACTICE 

OP 

NEUROPATHY; OR, THE NER¥E CURE. 

INTENDED FOR POPULAR EpyRUCTIQN 
AND USE. X^ >-_ °' ' 






By Dr. F. HOLLICK, 

THE AUTHOR AND LECTURER. 



Illustrated bij 40 Engravings, 

AND NUMEROUS REMARKABLE CASES. 



NEW YORK: 4J 
THE AMERICAN NEWS COMPANY, 
PUBLISHER'S agents. 

/fy3 



MY 



Entered according to Act of Congress, i n the year 1873, by 

Db. p. hollick, 

In the office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washingto 



PREFACE. 

It is now over twenty-five years since I commenced, by 
public lectures, and by books, to popularize the study of 
human anatomy and physiology. The success which has 
attended my efforts has been far greater than ever I antici- 
pated. Had I time, I could lecture constantly, to crowded 
audiences, so great and growing is the desire for knowledge 
on these subjects ; but my professional engagements no 
longer allow me sufficient leisure. The circulation of my 
books has been unexampled, and is steadily maintained 
year after year, as will be seen in the detailed account of 
them at the end of this volume. 

Hitherto these books have been exclusively upon marriage, 
and the natural relations of the sexes to each other, as these 
were the subjects upon which information seemed most 
needed, and most difficult to get. I have, however, been 
constantly requested to write a book on the nervous system, 
and its diseases, similar in character and purpose to the 
others. Such a book I have therefore finally determined to 
publish, after writing, and re-writing it many times over. 
The publication has been delayed year after year, from a de- 
sire to first see the result of some most important investiga- 
tions, and experiments, on the nervous system ; and also be- 
cause I desired to first have full experience of my own, 
I* t«0 



6 PREFACE. 

on all the important matters treated upon. As it now stands, 
I believe it gives a faithful and true account of what is known, 
at the present day, on the nervous system and its derange- 
ments, with all the new views and discoveries in full. The 
cases given, both from my own practice and that of others, 
are all selected, with a view to illustrate the various special 
topics treated upon, and to make the explanations more 
clear. 

The style of this book, like that of all the others, is popu- 
lar, so that all can understand it, but at the same time it is 
strictly accurate and scientific ! The object has been to make 
it both instructive, and practically useful, so that ihe student 
and the nervous sufferer can both derive advantage from its 
perusal. The time has gone by for such knowledge to be 
thought dangerous, or useless, except to professional men ; 
and society at large begins to recognize the fact, from dear- 
bought experience, that popular ignorance, upon such mat- 
ters, is a fruitful source of many and serious evils. Human 
beings are able to live rationally, so as to avoid suffering and 
disease, just in proportion as they understand themselves, 
and their relations to the material world in which they ex- 
ist. 

Perhaps on no other subject has there been so much pop- 
ular ignorance, and misapprehension, as upon the 'nervous 
system and its functions ; and the consequences of that ig- 
norance have been many of the worst evils that afflict hu- 
manity. 

In giving the necessary explanations, it has been unavoid- 
able that many old and revered opinions, and beliefs, should 
be totally dissented from. The progress of modern science 
makes these opinions and beliefs, now, untenable, and it is 



PKEFACE. • 7 

both vain and useless to try and make them agree with ob- 
vious and opposing facts. — Especially it has been requisite 
to show that mind, in its broadest sense, is entirely a result 
of organic action, and is totally-dependent, as far as we know, 
upon* the existence and proper action of the brain. What- 
ever belief any one may entertain we have no knowledge of 
mind except in this waj^. Nor does it seem likely that we 
ever can have ! No one, however, is justified in saying there 
is not, or cannot be, such a thing as mind, spirit, or soul, dis- 
tinct from matter, merely because it cannot be explained, or 
comprehended. 

There may be many things of which we are in ignorance, 
simply because we have not the capacity to understand 
them. It must be admitted, however, that at present at 
least, the separate and independent existence of mind is a 
matter only of belief, and not of knowledge ! Nay, farther, 
— it is of no use shirking the fact, — all the knowle dge we 
posess, upon the subject, seems utterly to disprove the separ- 
ate and independent existence of mind ; and this is fully ad- 
mitted by many who still continue to believe, even in direct 
opposition to what they know. 

The truth is that knowledge and belief have no necessary as- 
sociation ; nor should they be expected to agree with or con- 
firm one another. Belief is an individual matter, but knowl- 
edge concerns all, and should be sought for, and dissemin- 
ated, regardless of all belief or opinion whatever. 

This explanation is made here so that the reader may be 
prepared for what follows, and may see, from the start, that 
the object of this book is to state facts only ! — As a celebrated 
modern writer well observes, it should be universally known 
that for every fact of mind, there is a corresponding fact of 



8 PREFACE. 

matter, and the two, so far as we know, always go together. 
We are not justified in saying that they can, or cannot exist 
separately, because we do not know — no matter what we be- 
lieve! — It is best therefore, tp leave belief alone, -and devote 
all our efforts to extending knowledge, of which we can 
never have too much. 

Dr. F. Hollick. 



CONTENTS. 



Preface . 



PART I. 

Introductory — General View of the Human 
Organization. 



CHAPTER I. 
Organs and Functions — General Description of the Hu- 
man Body— The Nerves and Nervous Centres. . . 23-29 

CHAPTER II. 
The Structure of the Different Parts of the Nervous Sys- 
tem, and Nature of the Nervous Substance — Structure 
of the Nervous Apparatus — The Nervous Matter or 
Substance — The Ganglionic Globules or Vesicles — The 
Way the Nerves Terminate — Chemical Composition of 
the Nervous Substance 30-43 

CHAPTER III. 

Nutrition of the Nervous System — Probable Nature of 

(9) 



10 CONTENTS. 

the Nervous Power, and the Way it Acts — Blood-ves- 
sels of the Nervous System — Origin of the Nervous 
Tissue — Regeneration of the Nervous Tissue — The 
Nervous Circle — Nerves of Feeling, or Sensation, and 
Nerves of Motion — Reflex Nervous Action — Velocity 
of Nervous Impressions — Specific Nervous Centres — 
The Special Senses — Similarity of the Nervous to the 
Electric Power— Spontaneous Nervous Action. . 44-56 

CHAPTER IV. 
Dependence of the Nervous Power upon Chemical Action 
— Necessity for Sleep, or Rest — The Nervous Power 
and the Blood — Chemical Action the Source of Nerv- 
ous Power — Correspondence between Mental Work and 
Heat — Necessity of Rest to the 'Nervous System — Men- 
tal Work and Bodily Work Compared 57-68 



PART II. 

Detailed Description of the Structure, and Uses 
of the Different Parts of the Nervous System, 
and of the Wat in which they are Connected 
with Each Other, both Organically and Func- 
tionally. 



CHAPTER V. 
The Spinal Cord and Medulla Oblongata — Development of 



CONTENTS. 11 

the Spinal Cord— Structure of the Spinal Cord— Spe- 
cial Action of the Spinal Cord— The Medulla Oblon- 
gata— Special Uses of the Medulla Oblongata.. . 71-86 

CHAPTER VI. 

The Brain, and the Nerves of Special Sensations— The 
Brain — The Nerves of the Brain, or Cerebral Nerves — 
The Optic Nerve — The Sensorium — The Membranes, 
Ventricles, and Glands of the Brain 87-117 

CHAPTER VII. 
The Great Sympathetic Nerve 118-129 

CHAPTER VIII. 

General View of the Nervous Organs and Functions in 
Men and Other Animals — The Nervous System, from 
the Lowest Types to the Highest Types 130-138 

CHAPTER IX. 

General Summary of the Nervous Apparatus in Man and 
Other Animals 139-141 

m 

CHAPTER X. 
The Will— Tranmission of Impressions — Mutual Rela- 
tions of the Different Nervous Centres — The Differ- 
ent Nervous Centres, their Powers and Associations 

142-149 



12 CONTENTS. 

PART III. 

The Special Functions and Functional Derange- 

MENTS OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE NERVOUS 

System, and the Wat in which they Co-operate 
with Each Other. 



CHAPTER XL 
Functions of the Spinal Cord 153-157 

CHAPTER XII. 

Functions of the Medulla Oblongata — General Observa- 
tions on the Functions of the Spinal Cord 158-164 

CHAPTER XIII. 
Functions of the Sensorium 165-169 

CHAPTER XIV. 

Functions of the Ganglionic Centres, and Nerves of the 
Special Senses 170-174 

CHAPTER XV. 
Functions of the Cerebellum — Structure and Connections 
of the Cerebellum — Experiments on the Cerebellum — 
The Cerebellum and the Sexual Instinct 175-179 

CHAPTER XVI. 
Functions of the Cerebrum — Structure of the Cerebrum 



CONTENTS. 13 

— Connecting Fibres of the Brain — Weight and Size of 
the Brain — Circulation of Blood in the Brain — The 
Cerebrn.ni the Organ of Intellect — Size of Brain as a 
Measure of Mental Power — The Brain of Man Com- 
pared with that of the Lower Animals — Experiments on 
the Cerebrum — Effects of Disease of the Cerebrum — 
Mind is Dependent upon the Senses — Consciousness — 
Emotions 180-199 

CHAPTER XVII. 

On the Different Kinds of Diseases Connected with the 
Nervous System 200-201 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

Functional Diseases of the Nervous System, or Nervous 
Diseases — Epilepsy — Hysteria — Catalepsy — Chorea, 
or St. Vitus' Dance — Mania, or Madness — Hallucina- 
tions and Delusions — Erotomania, or Love Madness — 
Satyriasis and Nymphomania — Drink Mania, Dipsoma- 
nia, or Ooinomania — Homicidal Mania — Kleptomania, 
or Propensity to Steal — Affections of the Memory — 
Aphasia — Angoraphobia 202-241 

CHAPTER XIX. 

Nervousness, with Illustrative Cases — General Remarks — 
Acute Nervousness — Chronic Nervousness 242-255 

CHAPTER XX. 
Some Curious Cases from my own Practice 256-280 



14 CONTENTS. 

PART IV. 

Miscellaneous Facts and Information Concerning 
the Nervous System. 



CHAPTER XXI. 
Subjective and Objective Mental Perceptions 288-291 

CHAPTER XXII. 
Anaesthesia and Hypnotism 292-294 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

The Nervous and Sexual Systems — Connexion between 
the Brain and the Sexual Organs — Influence of the 
Nervous Condition of the Parents, at the Moment of 
Conception, over the Nervous System of the Child ...... 

295-299 
CHAPTER XXIV. 
Influence of Mind upon Mind— Pscy chic Force. 300-303 

CHAPTER XXV. 

Unconscious Brain Work — Unconscious Cerebration— 
Introspection — The Diagnosis of Disease 304-313 

CHAPTER XXVI. 
Influence of the Mind upon the Body 314-317 

CHAPTER XXVII. 
Connection between the Nervous Power and Light, Heat, 



CONTENTS. 15 

Motion, and Electricity — The Philosophy of Hobbies — 
Philosophy of Rest 318-335 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 

Remarks on the Nutrition' of the Body, and on the Source 
of the Secretions — The Blood not the only Source of 
New Material — The Secretions not all Derived Directly 
from the Blood — Chemical Change the True Cause of 
Life, both Bodily and Mental— Health, What is it ? ... . 

330-343 

CHAPTER XXIX. 

Composition of the Human Body and the Changes it Un- 
dergoes — Nourishment and Improvement of the Brain. . 

344-348 

CHAPTER XXX. 

Medicine, Medication — Its Nature and Objects, etc. — 
Medicines in General — Different Kinds of Medicines — 
Chemical Medicines — Nutritive Medicines — Neuro- 
pathic, or Nerve Medicines 349-351 

CHAPTER XXXI. 

The Nervous Influence in Medication — Neuropathy — 
Mental, Emotional, and Electric Medication. . . 352-358 

CHAPTER XXXII. 

Wonderful Power of some Agents, and Rapidity of their 
Action — Peculiar Gases of the Body — Wonderful 
Changes which occur in the Human Body — All Sub- 
stances Act, Chemically, either in the Fluid or Gaseous 



16 CONTENTS. 

States Only — Chemical Changes cause Changes of Tem- 
perature, and of Electrical Condition — Homoeopathy.. . 

359-366 



PART V. 
Organic Diseases op the Nervous System. 






CHAPTER XXXIII. 

Inflammation and Congestion of the Brain — Congestion 
from Bad Quality of Blood — Congestion of the Brain 
arising from Want of Blood — Apoplexy — Extravasation 
of Blood in the Head — Inflammation of the Brain aod 
its Membranes — Chronic Inflammation of the Brain — 
Congestion of the Brain — Delirium Tremens — Hydro- 
cephalus — Paralysis, or Palsy — Headache — Neuralgia 
— Sciatica — Tetanus, or Lock-Jaw — Hydrophobia — 
Softening of the Brain — Hardening of the Brain — Tu- 
bercles and Tumors, and Other Bodies, in the Brain — 
Diseases of the Spinal Marrow 369-415 , 



ILLUSTRATIONS. 



Plate 1. — Fkontispiece. — The Nervous System. 
44 2. — Part of the Sympathetic Nerve of a Mouse, 

much Magnified 32 

44 3.— Tubular Nerve Fibres 34 

44 4. — Various Forms of the Ganglionic Vesicles. . 37 
44 5.— The Nerves of Touch, at the end of the 

Human Thumb. As they Appear under 

the Microscope . 39 

44 6. — Human Pacinian Corpuscles 41 

44 7. — Looped Capillary Blood-vessels on the Skin 

of the Finger 44 

44 8. — Net- work of Capillary Blood-vessels of the 

Nervous Centre 45 

44 9.— The Primitive Trace, Magnified. 72 

44 10. — The Primitive Trace at a Later Period ; 

Commencement of the Brain 73 

44 11.— Different Views of the Spinal Cord 75 

44 12.— The Spinal Marrow Cut Across 76 

44 13. — The Brain and Spinal Marrow, with the 

Nerves proceeding from them 77 

(17) 



18 

Plate 14. 

15. 

16. 
17. 
IS, 
19. 
20. 
21 
22. 
23, 
24. 
25 



26, 

27, 

28, 
29, 

30. 
31, 
32, 



ILLUSTBATIONS. 

—Part of the Spinal Cord, Showing the Nerves 

proceeding from it 78 

—The Medulla Oblongata 86 

— The Brain Viewed Sideways 88 

—The Top of the Brain 90 

— Under Surface, or Base of the Brain 91 

—The Brain Cut through the Middle 94 

—The Olfactory Nerve 95 

.—The Eye and Optic Nerve 98 

—The Eye and its Nerves 100 

— The Ear and Auditory Nerve 103 

.—The Head Cut through the Middle 113 

. — The Brain Cut across Horizontally from 
Ear to Ear, to show the Ventricles, and 
the Situation of the Hippocampus Major, 

and Hippocampus Minor 115 

, — Section of the Brain, to show the Situation 

of the Pineal Gland and other Parts 117 

Connection between the Spinal Nerves and 

the Great Sympathetic Nerve 122 

— The Great Sympathetic in its Whole Length 124 
— Portion of the Sympathetic Nerve within 

the Chest 125 

— Plexuses of the Great Sympathetic Nerve. . 126 
— The Pneumogastric Nerve 127 

— Plexuses of the Great Sympathetic Nerve in 
the Abdomen 129 



ILLUSTRATIONS. 19 

Plate 33.— Brain of a Codfish 140 

" 34.— Plexus of Nerves 147 

" 35. — Cross Section of the Human Spinal Cord, in 

the Lumbar Region 154 

" 36.— The Medulla Oblongata Cut Through 159 

" 37.— Under View of the Cerebellum, from Be- 
hind. 176 



NOTICE 



Any persons wishing to communicate with Dr. 
IL by Letters, can address to 
" Dr. F. Hollick, 

Box 3606, Post Office, 

New York City, N. Y.» 
and they will be promptly replied to. 

All Letters asking an opinion, or advice, must be 
full and plain in their descriptions, so that a correct 
judgment can be formed, and they must always 
contain the customary fee of Five Dollars, or they 
cannot be attended to. 

N. B. — Persons visiting New York can always 
find Dr. H.'s office by sending a note to his P. 0. 
Box. 



PART I. 
INTRODUCTORY. 

GENERAL VIEW OF THE HUMAN ORGANIZATION. 



) m 



OHAPTEE I. 

OKGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 

General Description of the Human Body. 

The human body, like the bodies of other animals 
generally, is composed of a number of different parts, 
called organs, each performing a different kind of work 
or function, for which it is specially adapted. 

These organs and functions may be classed under two 
grand divisions, one of which is solely occupied in pre- 
serving the individual's own existence, and the other in 
perpetuating the species. 

In the first of xhese divisions we recognize two differ- 
ent classes of functions, vegetative, called also the or- 
ganic or vital, and the animal functions. 

The vegetative functions in man are analogous to the 
ordinary functions of plants, and comprise all the pro- 
cesses of nutri'ion, by which the body is nourished. Di- 
gestion, assimilation, the circulation of the blood, and 
breathing, are all stages in the process of nutrition. 
And just as the plant absorbs the material for its growth 
and sustenance from the air, water, and soil, so does man 
asborb them from his food and drink, and from the air 
he breathes. 

The human body, from the moment of its birth, is in 
a constant state of change— no part remaining long com- 
posed of the same material. A special set of organs 
are constantly occupied in taking up and carrying away 
the particles of the body that have served their turn ; 
while the nutritive organs are equally busy in putting 
new particles in the place of the old ones thus removed. 

Both these processes — waste and repair — must go on 

(28) 



24 ORGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 

uninterruptedly, or life cannot be maintained. ■ If the 
old matter is retained too long, the body is poisoned by 
its own refuse, for the rejected matter becomes truly a 
poison. If, on the contrary, the process of renewal does 
not take place as rapidly as that of destruction, the body 
wastes away. 

During growth, renewal is more active than destruc- 
tion, and, when growth is completed, the two processes, 
in a state of health, ordinarily balance each other. 

The animal functions are superadded to the merely 
vegetative functions, and this addition distinguishes 
the animal from the plant. The animal functions con- 
sist, essentially, of consciousness, sensation and volun- 
tary motion. Except something like sensation in a few 
plants, there are no functions like these among vege- 
tables. 

Plants, so far as we know, have no consciousness, 
special sensation, nor voluntary motion ; but animals 
have, and therefore these functions are called the animal 
functions. 

There is a difference in the character of the organs 
employed in these two classes of functions which is in- 
teresting and important to note. The vegetative organs 
are all single and irregular in form. Thus there is one 
stomach, one heart, one liver and one length of intestine. 
The lungs, though apparently double, are really but one 
organ, the two dissimilar parts being connected by the 
bronchial tubes. 

The organs that perform the animal functions, on the 
contrary, are nearly all perfectly double and symmetrical. 
Thus, there are two brains, two sets of limbs, two eyes, 
two ears, and so forth. The body can, in fact, be divided 
into two equal and. similar parts, as far as the organs of 
animal life are concerned; but it is not so with the organs 
of vegetative life — they are not double, nor can they 
be equally divided between the two sides of the body. 

The vegetative functions may go on quite independ- 
ent of the animal functions, though they are much in- 
fluenced by them. Thus the stomach can digest, the 
blood can circulate, and all the other auxiliary functions 
can co-operate with them, though the individual may be 
quite unconscious, and devoid of feeling or power of mo- 



ORGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 25 

tion. Children have been born withont brains, and yet 
have digested food, and lived for a considerable time. 
In these children, the stimulus of the food, when it was 
placed at the back of the mouth, caused the muscles of 
the throat to grasp and swallow it ; and the digestion 
went on as in other human beings. 

Similar cases will be referred to in the course of this 
work ; but they are brought in here to show that the 
mere vegetative functions can act independently of the 
animal functions, although, as will be shown further 
on, they can be, and usually are, much influenced by 
them. 

The animal functions, on the contrary, are entirely 
dependent, in one sense, on the vegetative functions ; 
for if the body be not duly nutrified, so that the organs 
are kept in perfect condition, they cannot act. If the 
brain is starved or diseased, there can be no healthy 
consciousness, or thought ; and if the nerves and muscles 
are not maintained in a state of perfect vigor, there can 
be no effective voluntary motion. 

In short, the vegetative organs can live without the 
animal organs, but these cannot live without the vegeta- 
tive ; or, in 'other words, body may live without mind, 
but mind cannot exist without body. 

It must be observed, however, that mind is still neces- 
sary for the preservation of the body, either directly or 
indirectly ; the animal is not rooted to one spot, like the 
vegetable, but must either go abroad to seek its food, 
or have it brought ; so that the child born without a 
brain must be fed by some other person who has a 
brain. 

All that is meant by what has been stated is that the 
body, or the vegetative organs, can maintain themselves, 
if the necessary conditions exist, without the concur- 
rence of the animal organs or functions. The real con- 
nection between the two, and their mutual influence, 
will be shown further on. 

The sexual or reproductive organs are not concerned 
in the maintenance of the individual's own existence, 
nor are they necessary in any of the functions of vege- 
tative or animal lite, as far as the individual is concerned, 
although, as will be explained, they exert indirectly a 

3 




OKGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 

powerful influence on both, and are much influenced by 
them in return. The essential use of these organs is 
to produce a new being, to continue the species. They 
may be said, in one sense, to be both animal and vege- 
tative. The individual can live without reproductive 
organs, but with an imperfect development. 

Every part of the body is thus formed or organized 
for the purpose of performing some special function, 
and that function is concerned either in maintaining the 
individual's own existence or in perpetuating the species. 

For convenience, we associate together the different 
organs that co-operate in one process, and call them a 
system or apparatus/ Thus the jaws, teeth, tongue 
and cheeks constitute the masticating or chewing appa- 
ratus ; and the stomach, liver, pancreas and other con- 
nected parts, constitute the digestive apparatus. In like 
manner we have the system of the blood-vessels, by 
which the blood is circulated, and the pulmonary appa- 
ratus, by which we breathe, and so on. 

The sexual system, or generative apparatus, is solely 
for the purpose of propagation. 

All the different organs of the body co-operate to- 
gether in the work of maintaining the existence of tho 
individual and of the species. No part is useless, nor 
can any important part, of the vegetative system, at least, 
be dispensed with. Life, or mere vitality, may be con- 
tinued, in an animal organization, without a brain, but 
not without a stomach or heart. 

Digestion, assimilation, the circulation of the blood, 
breathing, absorption, secretion, excretion, and all the 
other vegetative functions, are but steps in the processes 
of nutrition and change ; each one follows the other and 
results from it. Arrest one step and you arrest all. 

The Nerves and Nervous Centres. 

Every part of the body is traversed by certain white 
cords or threads called the nerves, which are connected 
with certain great masses of nervous matter called the 
nervous centres, of which the brain and spinal marrow 
are the principal ones. The nervous power is produced 
in these great nervous centres, and- the nervous cords 



OBGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 27 

convey it to all parts of the body according as it is 
needed, just as the wires of the telegraph convey the 
electricity from one place to another. Every organ, in 
this way, receives the nervous influence, and cannot act 
without it any more than the engine can move without 
steam. Cut the nerves which connect any part with 
the nervous centres, and it at once ceases to act, and 
loses all feeling and power of motion. 

We see, hear, smell, taste, and feel, all by the agency of 
the nervous power. Take the most perfect eye that ever 
was formed, sever the nerve which connects it with the 
brain, and it becomes instantly useless, though just as 
perfect as before. Destroy the little nervous cords lead- 
ing to the limbs of a giant, and those limbs at once be- 
come powerless, not because the muscles are not as 
perfect as ever, but simply because he can no longer 
control them through the nervous influence from the 
brain. 

This primary fact must be thoroughly comprehended 
before the part which the nervous system plays, in health 
and disease, can be at all appreciated. It must be dis- 
tinctly understood that every organ is enabled to act or 
perform its special function only by the influence of the 
nervous power, which it receives through a nervous cord 
from one of the great nervous centres. 

This is the use, then, of the nervous system. It is the 
origin or source of that mysterious power, force, or energy 
that keeps the body working as a living organization. 
It controls, influences and directs, and is the essential 
animal agency. 

But, besides being the living stimulus of all the vital 
organs, the nervous system has certain other functions 
peculiar to itself. It is the seat of sensation , thought, or 
mind. The brain, the great nervous centre, elaborates 
thought, just as the stomach secretes gastric juice, or as 
the liver secretes bile. Without a stomach sufficiently 
perfect in action, we cannot digest food; and without 
a brain in a 'sufficiently perfect condition, we cannot 
think. 

Every animal, from the highest to the lowest, has 
some form of a nervous system, through which it moves, 
feels and lives. 



'28 ORGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 

In the simply formed animals, with few organs, the 
nervous system is simple also, and it becomes more com- 
plicated and perfect just in proportion as the being rises 
in the scale of organization. But even the animalcule, 
which we have to magnify hundreds of times before we 
can see it, possesses a nervous system, as perfect, for its 
simple organization, as that of the human body. 

Some physiologists, indeed, have contended that the 
nervous power is not essential to all bodily action, but 
that some of the vegetative functions, at least, may be, 
to a certain extent, originated without it. The organs 
of these functions, it is said, will always act under the 
influence of proper stimuli, independent of any nervous 
influence. Thus, when food is placed in the empty 
stomach, it causes it at once to secrete the gastric juice, 
and so begins the process of digestion. And, in like man- 
ner, the presence of blood in the heart causes it to con- 
tract ; and so on with many other processes. 

In all such cases, however, the nervous power is prob- 
ably still the primary force, only it acts indirectly. The 
impression caused by the food is, probably, first made 
upon the nerves of the stomach, and by them is con- 
veyed to the proper nervous centre, from which comes 
back the power which causes the gastric juice to be 
secreted. The blood also, probably, causes nervous 
action upon the heart in the same way. 

This explanation will, it is hoped, make sufficiently 
clear the nature and uses of the nervous system, and its 
connection with the other parts of the body. It will be 
necessary now to describe the nervous apparatus itself, 
and to explain its structure and mode of action as far as 
understood. 

It has never been shown, conclusively, that any of the 
vegetative organs can act, to the slightest extent, when 
entirely cut off from all nervous influence. At the same 
time, it is well known how powerfully that influence 
acts upon them all, both directly and indirectly, and 
how intimately they sympathize with each other, and 
with the rest of the system, by means of a special set 
of nerves called the sympathetic. 

All the animal functions — consciousness, sensa- 
tion, and voluntary motion, for instance, are obviously 



ORGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 29 

caused, directly and entirely, by nervous influence 
alone. 

Practically, therefore, we may say, that the nervous 
force is what keeps up the action of the whole system, 
animal and vegetative, as the steam keeps up the action 
of the engine ; and it is, therefore, very important to 
know the nature of this force, how it originates, and 
the way in which it acts upon every part of the system, 
and in all circumstances. 

In some of the lowest organizations there are no spe- 
cial parts which perform the nervous functions only, 
nor, indeed, any other ; but every part is alike, and per- 
forms equally every function essential to the animal's 
life. Thus every part can act as nerve, muscle or stom- 
.acb, indifferently. But, in the higher animals, the 
principle of differentiation comes into play, and we find 
various parts or organs, each one performing a different 
function, one for which alone it is adapted. Hence 
arises the classification of organs already given. It is 
probable that, in the lower organizations, the nervous 
matter is disseminated through the whole substance of 
the body, so that it is not to be distinguished separately ; 
while, in the higher organizations, as in man, it is simply 
aggregated into the nervous cords, and the ganglionic 
centres, constituting the nervous system. In other 
words, it is differentiated, and constitutes an apparatus 
by itself, the structure and mode of action of which will 
now be described. 



o* 



CHAPTER II. 



THE STRUCTURE OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE 
NERVOUS SYSTEM, AND NATURE OF THE NERVOUS 
SUBSTANCE. 



Structure of the Nervous Apparatus. 

On examining the nervous system we find that its 
substance is arranged in two different forms, or structures, 
connected with each other. 

First, we have certain large masses of nerve substance, 
of different forms, called the nervous centres. These are 
the brain, contained in the skull ; the spinal marrow, 
contained in the spine or b sckbone, and certain roundish 
masses of nerve matter, found in different parts of the 
body, called the ganglions. 

Secondly, we find certain cords or threads of nervous 
matter of various sizes and lengths. These are com- 
monly called the nerves, and they connect the nervous 
centres with each other, and with every other part of the 
body. 

The nervous cords ultimately ramify and divide into 
branches and branchlets, so numerous and so fine, that 
it is impossible to trace them any further. They pene- 
trate everywhere, and no part of the body, however 
minute, is without them. The point of the finest needle, 
as is well known, cannot be applied to any part of the 
body without being felt, which shows that it has touched 
a nerve. No change can take place in any part of the 
body but some sensation informs us of the fact. By its 
nervous connections the brain is informed of all the 
bodily wants, and at once originates, also through the 
nerves, the necessary actions to supply these wants. 
(30) 



NERVOUS SYSTEM. 31 

In short, if all the rest of the body were taken away, 
and the nervous substance alone left, it would make up 
the bodily form by itself. 

The great central nerve masses are found only in cer- 
tain parts, but the nervous threads reach everywhere, 
so that by means of them all parts are connected with 
the centres. 

In the frontispiece plate it will be readily seen how 
the nerves are connected with the spinal marrow, which 
is contained in the backbone, and run from thence all over 
the trunk and limbs, branching out, and becoming 
smaller the further they go. They ramify to the ex- 
tremity of the toes, as they do to the extremities of the 
fingers, and to every internal part ; in short, they go 
everywhere. 

The upper part of the spinal marrow, it will be seen, 
joins the lower part of the brain, so that these two 
great nervous centres are directly connected. 

The nerves from the brain, and the ganglionic nerves, 
will be shown further on. 

The use of the nervous centres, the brain, spinal mar- 
row, and ganglions, appears to be that of manufactories, 
or magazines, of the nervous power. The use of the 
nervous threads or cords is simply to convey this power 
where it is wanted, and to connect the centres with each 
other. 

To give an illustration — the nervous centre is a battery 
which engenders the galvanic current, and the nerves 
are the wires which conduct it where it may be wanted. 

As already explained, if the connection between any 
limb and the nervous centre be broken, by cutting 
through the nerves that conuect them, that limb imme- 
diately loses all power of motion and feeling. If it be 
a vital organ, as the heart, for instance, it can no longer 
perform perfectly its peculiar function of propelling the 
blood, but either ceases to beat altogether, or does so 
imperfectly. 

Now, this is strictly analogous to what occurs with 
the magnetic telegraph connecting two cities. The bat- 
teries and recording apparatus may be perfect, in both 
places, but if the connecting wire be cut they can no 
longer communicate with each other. The current must 



32 



NERVOUS SYSTEM. 



flow from the battery at the place from whence the 
message is sent, along the conducting wire, to the corres- 
ponding apparatus at the other place. Cut through this 
wire and the two places have no communication. 

If, however, a proper instrument be connected with 
the wire at the place where it is cut, there can at once 
be communication from there to the place from which 
the message was sent. And just so it is with the nerves. 
If the nerves of the arm are all cut through at the 
elbow, the lower part of the arm loses all power of 
motion and feeling, but the upper part still feels and 
moves, because it is still connected with the nervous centre. 

The different structure of the ganglion, or nervous 
centre, and the nerve trunk, or cord, is shown in the 
following plate : 

Plate II. 

PART OF THE SYMPATHETIC NERVE OF A MOUSE, 
MUCH MAGNIFIED. 




The large central mass is a ganglion composed of nervous threads 
V<r), and of round vesicles {d). Proceeding from the ganglion, in dif- 
ferent directions, are nervous trunks or cords (nerves a, 3, r,) the 
separate threads of each cord all interlace together in the ganglion, 
and the round vesicles are enclosed amongst them. 



NERVOUS SYSTEM. 33 

The nervous centres, as will be seen further on, are 
somewhat differently formed, each from the other, and 
the power emanating from each acts in its own peculiar 
way. Thus the spinal marrow is concerned in ordinary 
sensation and motion, while the ganglions regulate the 
functional power of the heart and other organs, and the 
brain is the seat of thought and of special sensations, 
such as seeing and hearing. 

The globular vesicles or cells are found only in the 
ganglions or central nerve masses, and not in the threads 
or cords. 



The Nervous Matter or Substance. 



A nerve y or nervous cord, is composed of a number of 
smaller cords, each of which is made up of still smaller 
threads called the nerve fibres, analogous to the separate 
threads which compose a rope. 

Every one of these little ultimate fibres is a tube, 
filled with a peculiar substance called the nervous mat- 
ter. This tube, called the neurilema or nerve coat, is 
extremely delicate and quite transparent. No blood- 
vessels penetrate it, and each fibre is kept by it entirely 
unconnected with all the others, though bound up with 
them. The nervous substance, therefore, in each tube 
is a direct prolongation of the nervous centre, from 
which it originated, or, in other words, it is a portion of 
the nervous centre stretched out, and protected by the 
tube or neurilema. 

The nerve substance, contained in the tubes, is a thin, 
clear fluid, so that when one of these tubes is examined 
with the microscope it looks almost like a rod of glass. 
This appearance, however, is only while it is fresh, for 
very soon after it is taken from the body it undergoes a 
change. The clear fluid becomes thick, and partly 
opaque, and the wall of the tube itself is also seen then 
to be double, or composed of two parts, with a space bet- 
ween. This is shown in A, plate 3. In the largest tube 
the central substance is seen coagulated in small grains, 
and the tube walls are double. 



34 



NERVOUS SYSTEM. 



Plate III. 

TUBULAR NERVE FIBRES. 






(A) Shows some of the nerve tubes much magnified. (C) shows 
some magnified still larger. (B) Shows some tubes in a varicose, or 
swelled state. In the walls of the cross one at (C) are seen some little 
nuclei. 



NERVOUS SYSTEM. 35 

The very centre of the tube is still occupied, how- 
ever, with a substance that remains transparent, and 
which is called the axis cylinder or primitive nerve 
land. 

These different parts of the nervous substance are 
composed of different materials, some being albuminous 
and some fatty, the proportions varying under different 
conditions. It is probable that these slight variations 
may depend upon the state of the individual's health, 
and that they may be of great importance in many cir- 
cumstances. 

It is quite conceivable that a minute quantity, more 
or less, of fat, or albumen, in the nerve substance, may 
seriously affect its conducting power, and thus lead to 
imperfect functional action in the organ on which it 
acts. 

The nerve tubes are very delicate and small, being 
ordinarily not more, in man, than from the twelve to the 
fifteen thousandth of an inch in diameter ! In some 
parts of the brain, and the sympathetic nerve, they are 
even less than this, decreasing to the eighteen thousandth 
of an inch, or less. 

The tubes are liable to swell out in some parts, and 
become narrower in others, just like varicose veins, owing 
to the nervous substance being pushed out of some 
parts and piled up in others. This is more especially 
the case with the tubes in the brain. The real cause of 
this seems to be a difference in the cord itself, it being 
less firm in some parts than in others, and therefore 
giving way at those parts. 

It is very possible this may be the case in some nerv- 
ous diseases, and some persons may have a constitu- 
tional tendency to swelled nerve tubes, as others have to 
varicose veins. (See B, plate 3.) 

Besides the ordinary nerve tubes above described, 
there are found some of another kind. These are much 
smaller, and do not possess a double appearance when 
viewed microscopically. The substance they contain is 
also different, being more uniform and jelly-like, and the 
nerves formed from them are of a yellowish gray color, 
while the ordinary ones are white. They are usually 
called the gray or gelatinous fibres, and are more abun- 



36 NERVOUS SYSTEM. 



dant in some parts of the body than in others, especially 
in the smypathetic nerves. 

All these little peculiarities, though they may seem 
trivia], are, no doubt, of immense importance. A man's 
experience of pleasure or pain, his state of health or 
disease, his mental power, his moral disposition, and 
even the duration of his life, may often depend upon the 
form or structure of a few of these little tubes, or upon 
the composition of the substance they contain. The 
result may often depend upon the presence, or absence, of 
a portion of some peculiar matter, so small that we could 
not detect it with the most powerful microscope. 

The Ganglioniv Globules or Vesicles. 

The structural difference between the gangl'ons and 
the nervous cords has already been alluded to. The 
peculiar element of the ganglionic substance appears 
to be made up of cells or vesicles, like minute bladders, 
which contain a substance made up of fine grains or 
granules. 

These cells are usually called the ganglionic globules, 
and they are generally globular in shape, though sub- 
ject to great variations, being sometimes very irregular, 
as will be seen by the cut on the following page : 

The large arms or prolongations, seen in the star 
forms, sometimes reach from one vesicle to another, and 
unite them together, and, at other times, they stretch 
out into the minutest threads and appear to join the 
nervous substance of the fibres or nerves, especially with 
the gray or gelatinous fibres. They are found in all 
the nervous centres, and generally have coloring mat- 
ter enough to give them a reddish or yellow brown ap- 
pearance. 

This coloring matter resembles the coloring matter of 
the blood, and is most abundant in the vertebrate and 
warm blooded animals. In reptiles and fishes there is 
much less of it than in the mammalia ; and in animals 
not vertebrated, there is apparently none. The color 
granules cluster more especially round the nucleus, and 
thus make it distinct. 

There are many other peculiarities of form in the 



NEEYOUS SYSTEM. 37 

Plate IV. 

VARIOUS FORMS OF THE GANGLIONIC VESICLES. 




(A, B ) Star-shaped vesicles, with prolonged arms, from the gray 
matter of the spinal cord, (C), nerve cell with its connecting fibre, (a), 
the cell wall, (£), the granular contents, (c), the coloring matter, (J), 
the nucleus,. (^), the prolongation of the wall forming the sheath of 
the fibre, (_/"), the nerve fibre. (D), nerve cell. (E), smaller cell from 
the spinal cord ; magnified 350 diameters. 

vesicles, "but as they are not constant, but only excep- 
tional, it is not necessary to describe them all. 

The globular vesicles or cells vary in diameter from 
the one thousand three hundredth to the eleven thousand 
two hundred and fiftieth part of an inch. 

These ganglionic globules or vesicles make up a large 
portion of the brain, spinal marrow and ganglions. 
They are massed together and surrounded by a fine 
granular matter, which is traversed in all directions by 
minute blood-vessels. This constitutes what is called 
the cortical or cineHtious, or gray nervous matter, to 
distinguish it from the white or medullary matter, which 
also forms the nerve fibres and a large part of the brain 
and spinal marrow. 

4 



38 NERVOUS SYSTEM. 



In the brain, the cortical or gray matter incloses the 
white or medullary matter, but in the other nervous 
centres the reverse is the case. In the ganglions of the 
invertebrate animals also the gray or vesicular matter 
is internal, or contrary to what is is in man. 

In fact, these names are apt to mislead. Cortical 
means merely the gray outside portion of the human 
brain which envelopes the internal part, like the bark of 
a tree envelopes the wood. Medullary has the same 
meaning as marrow, and is used to designate the inner 
white part of the human brain. Now, the outer part of 
the human brain is composed of the vesicular nervous 
substance, and the interior portion is composed of the 
same white matter which forms the nervous cords. In 
other beings, however, and in the other nervous centres 
of the human being, the vesicular matter is inside, and 
the fibrous white matter outside ; so that either sub- 
stance may be the corticus or bark, and either may be 
the medulla/ry or marrow, according as they are placed. 

The only way to distinguish the two kinds of nervous 
substance, in fact, is by their structure — the true gang- 
lionic matter being always made up of vesicles, and the 
cords or nerves of fibres. 

It is not correct to distinguish them by accidents of 
color, for the ganglionic matter, though usually reddish 
gray (cineritious), is sometimes quite pale, ' while the 
nerve fibres, though usually white, are sometimes yel- 
lowish gray. 

It is certain that the vesicular or ganglionic matter is 
the most essential part of the nervous apparatus, because 
it is in the nervous centres, which are mainly made up 
of this matter, that the nervous power is generated, 
while the fibrous substance merely conveys that power 
where it is needed — the ganglions are the batteries and 
the fibres are the wires. 

The way in which the nerve fibres unite with the 
ganglions is not fully known. Some of the fibrous tubes 
seem to expand and become ganglionic vesicles, and the 
prolongations of some of the star-shaped vesicles seem 
to lengthen into fibrous tubes, and, perhaps, the union 
is generally effected in one or the other of these ways. 
Many of the vesicles, however, seem not to be connected 



NERVOUS SYSTEM. OV 

with fibres at all, and many of the fibres appear totally 
unconnected with vesicles, but merely pass around and 
amongst them. They are apt, however, to be varicosed, 
or to swell out, while passing through ganglions, as 
hown in plate 8. 

It is probable that the ganglionic vesicles may be 
evolved or developed from the fibres, and the fibres from 
the .vesicles, reciprocally. They are only modifications 
of the same material. 

The Way the Nerves Terminate. 

The nervous fibres, as before explained, ramify and 
divide more and more the further they go, till finally 
they become so fine as to be lost to sight. Many of 
them, however, have no proper ending at all ; and this is 
especially the case with the nerves of motion. If we 
take any of those going to the muscles, for instance, we 
find that, at their extreme ends, they are looked, or, in 
other words, the fibre bends round and returns upon 
itself. And so with many others. 

This is well shown in the following cut : 

Plate V. 



THE NERVES OP TOUCH, AT THE END OF THE 
HUMAN THUMB. THIS IS AS THEY APPEAR 
WHEN A VERY THIN SECTION OF THE SKIN IS 
PLACED UNDER THE MICROSCOPE. 




The peculiar looped endings of the nerves are very well shown 
here, and the way they distribute in the lower layer of the skin. 



40 NERVOUS SYSTEM. 



Sometimes, however, the fine ends of a number of 
nervous fibres terminate in a kind of cone-shaped ves- 
icle, or corpuscle, called a nervous papilla, without being 
looped ; and in some cases the nerve thins out finer and 
finer, till at last the sheath or tube quite disappears, and 
only the gelatinous nervous substance is left. This con- 
tinues still further, becoming more and more attenuated, 
and finally fades imperceptibly away, mingling with the 
substance in which it is distributed. 

There is also another way in which the nervous fibres 
sometimes terminate, in certain parts of the body. There 
are certain bodies, called the Pacinian corpuscles, at- 
tached to the branches of the nerves in the hand, foot, 
and other parts. They are a kind of bag or sac, usually 
ovaLshaped, formed of a number of separate sacs, one 
over the other, like the coats of an onion. Inside is a 
transparent fluid, apparently albumen. Into* each of 
these corpuscles there proceeds the end of a nerve fibre, 
which gradually loses its sheath, or tube, in passing- 
through the various coverings of the corpuscles, . and 
finally terminates in the fluid in the interior. It is then 
composed only of the nervous substance, without any 
tubular cover, and ends either in a kind of a knot, or 
divides into two or three branches, each a little thickened 
at the ends. 

This is shown in the cut on next page. 

In the adult, the Pacinian corpuscles are from one- 
fifteenth to one-tenth of an inch in diameter, and from 
one-twenty-sixth to one-twentieth of an inch broad. 

There are, however, so many curious peculiarities in 
the nervous structure that it is impossible to note them 
all — though, doubtless, each serves a purpose not yet 
discovered. 



Chemical Composition of tlie Nervous Substance. 

It might be supposed that a part of our organization 
so important, and so peculiar in its action as the nerv- 
ous apparatus, would be composed of different materials 
from other parts ; but such is not the case to any great 
extent. 



NEKVOUS SYSTEM. 



41 



Plate VI. 

HUMAN PACINIAN CORPUSCLES. 

A t B 




(A) A single corpuscle very highly magnified; (a) is the stem by 
which it is attached to the nerve fibre ; (Z>) is the terminal perve fibre 
entering the corpuscle; (c) the outer coat; and (d) the inner coat 
of the corpsucle ; (>), the nerve fibre in the transparent fluid, now 
become thinned out, and deprived of its tube or sheath; {/) shows the 
way in which it divides at the end — in this case into two branches. 

(B) Shows a branching portion of the nerves of the finger, with the 
pacinian corpuscles attached, like small fruits growing on the branches 
of a tree. This is little less than the natural size. 



42 NEBVOUS SYSTEM. 

Most of the materials forming nervous substance are 
the same, essentially, as those which compose other 
parts of the body, but they are peculiarly combined ; 
and there is one element, phosphorus, which seems to 
belong especially to the nervous matter and to be neces- 
sary to it. So much so, in fact, is this the case, that 
many physiologists think phosphorus is the life of the 
brain, and that without ife the brain would be useless. 
In fact, one celebrated German has laid it down, as an 
axiom — " No phosphorus, no thought /" and many others 
are of opinion that a man's mental vigor depends, in a 
great measure, upon the proportion he possesses of this 
element. It is quite possible that the man of genius 
may owe his lofty thoughts and far-seeing insight, 
merely to a few grains of phosphorus, while other men 
are of feeble mind merely from the want of it. 

This idea is, in fact, borne out, to a great extent, by 
chemical analysis, as the following table will show ; 

Composition of the Nervous System. 

Infants. Youths. Adults. Old People. Idiots 

Water 82.00 74.00 72.00 73.00 70.00 

Albumen 7.00 10.00 9.00 8.00 8.00 

Fat 3 00 5.00 6.00 4.00 5.00 

Ozmazome and Salts.. 6.00 8.00 10 00 12.00 14.00 
Phosphorus 0.80 '1.65 1.80 1.00 0.85 

This is the percentage, or proportions in 100, bat 
omitting unimportant fractions. 

It will be seen that, in healthy adults, phosphorus 
constitutes nearly two per cent, of the nervous matter, 
while in idiots it constitutes only a little over two-thirds 
of one per cent., or about the same as in infants. 

The phosphorus is chiefly combined with the fatty 
mr.tter, forming two peculiar acids, called the cerebric 
a<Ad and the oleophosplioric acid. 

In the dried brain there is found about three and a- 
half per cent of salts, chiefly phosphates and carbonates 
of soda, potash, and magnesia. 

The cortical, or vesicular matter of the brain, is, how- 
ever, somewhat different in its composition from the 
white or medullary matter. The cortical has eighty fixe 



NERVOUS SYSTEM. 43 

per cent, of water, while the medullary has but seventy- 
three. There is also iu the cortical three and a half per 
cent, of a peculiar red fatty matter, of which we scarcely 
find a trace in the medullary matter. On the other 
hand, there is a peculiar white fatty matter in the med- 
ullary, winch is almost entirely absent in the cortical 
matter. 

The phospJwrised fat seems to be the chief element in 
the peculiar semi-liquid, transparent, portion of the ner- 
vous substance found in the centre of the tubular ner- 
vous fibres, called generally the white substance of 
Schwann. It also forms a large part of the ganglionic 
vesicles. 

The amount of phosphorus is certainly greatest at the 
period when the brain is most vigorous. It is small in 
infancy, and decreases in old age, while in idiots it is 
seldom over one-half what we find it in people of ordi- 
nary intellect. 



CHAPTER III. 

NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. PROBABLE 
NATURE OP THE NERVOUS POWER, AND THE WAY 
IT ACTS. 

Blood-vessels of the Nervous System. 

The whole of the nervous substance is abundantly 
nutrified by blood-vessels, which vary, in form and man- 
ner of distribution, according to the part to which they 
are sent. In the case of the nervous fibres the blood-ves- 
sels ran side by side with them, following their course 
in a straight line. At the ends they also loop, just as 
the nerves do. 

Plate VII. 

LOOPED CAPILLARY BLOODVESSELS ON THE SKIN 
OF THE FINGER. 




In the vesicular ganglionic substance the blood-vessels 
form a kind of net-work, in the spaces of which lie the 
vesicles. This is shown in the following cut : • 
(44) 



NUTRITION OF THE NIEYOUS SYSTEM. 45 



Plate VIII. 

NET-WORK OF CAPILLARY BLOOD-VESSELS OF THE 
NERVOUS CENTRE. 




The human brain, it has been estimated, receives 
about one-sixth of all the blood in the body, and yet its 
weight is only about one-fortieth of the whole body. It, 
therefore, receives far more blood than any other part 
which contains the same amount of solid matter. 

This large amount of blood is needed both in feeding 
or nourishing the nervous apparatus itself, and also in 
producing the nervous power. 

The nervous apparatus wastes away, and is re-formed 
constantly, the same as the muscles, and every other 
part, and it is probably the chemical processes connect- 
ed with this change that produce the nervous power. 

A close inspection of the cortical substance of the 
brain shows that the fully- developed vesicles are con- 
tinually decaying, or breaking up, and that new ones 
are being constantly formed. They may be seen at all 
stages, from the primary granule (apparently) to the 
perfect vesicle. 

It is the same also with the tubular fibres, in which, 
and in their contained nervous substance, similar changes 
are constantly taking place, though not so rapidly, 
nor extensively, as in the ganglionic structure, because 
they do not produce power, but only convey it. 

Nervous power, like galvanic power, is a product of 
chemical action ; and just as chemical action is exhibited 
in the oxidation of the zinc in the battery, so also is it 



46 NUTRITION OF THE NEHVOUS SYSTEM. 

\ 

exhibited in the oxidation of the tissues of our bodies. 
And, just as the battery wears out, and is renewed, more 
rapidly than the conducting wires, so do the ganglionic 
centres wear out, or change, more rapidly than the con- 
ducting nerve fibres. 

It has already been stated how essential the nervous 
power is, to the due performance of .the most important 
functions of the body ; without it there is neither sensa- 
tion nor motion, and any part deprived of it is, so to say, 
dead ! And this is true of the nervous apparatus itself. 
For not only must it be nutrified by blood- vessels, as al- 
ready shown, but it also needs its own power to carry on 
its own nutrition. 

If a nerve be completely divided, there is seen a dif- 
ference in the two parts. That portion still connected 
with the ganglionic centre acts as usual, and is nutrified 
by its blood-vessels. The other part, however, ceases to 
act, and also begins to waste away, for though it still 
has its blood-vessels, they give it no nourishment. The 
nervous current must flow in the nerve, not only to cause 
those parts to act to which it is distributed, but also that 
the nerve itself may receive nutrition. 

Origin of the Nerwus Tissue. 

The nerve tubes appear to originate in simple granules, 
or minute grains of matter, which unite together an'd 
form a kind of gelatinous thread, around which the tube 
seems to condense. 

The ganglionic vesicles also develop in a similar way. 
First there is a simple nucleus, or mere spot as it were, 
around which the granular matter concentrates, and ul- 
timately the investing membrane, or capsule, condenses 
on the surface. 

The formation of all the parts of the body is nearly 
on the same plan. The material first forms into little 
grains, or granules, like seeds, and these unite together, 
either as threads or globules, and become covered with 
a sheath, or capsule. From this primary organization 
the largest and most complicated parts are gradually 
built up. 

The primary granules, with their nuclei, much resem- 
ble eggs or seeds. 



NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 47 



Regeneration of the Nervous Tissue. 

If a nerve be cut through, unless a long portion be 
removed, it will gradually grow together again. New 
granules are thrown off, at each end, which unite and 
extend, in the form of the nerve they sprang from, till 
the two extremities meet, and a perfect union is again 
formed. This perfect union is necessary, for a nerve 
cannot conduct the nervous power unless it be perfectly 
unbroken. 

This is shown, in a very interesting manner, in many 
surgical /operations. A piece of skin, or flesh, is often 
transplanted from one part of the body to another, to 
cover a wound, and of course it contains the severed 
ends of the nerves that went to it. It soon begins to 
grow in its new situation, if the operation be successful, 
like a graft on a tree. Very often, however, after it is 
perfectly united, there will be no proper feeling in it for 
some time, because the fragments of nerves in the graft- 
ed piece are not in perfect connection with the nervous 
centre. After a time, however, these fragments of nerves, 
in the grafted piece, unite with the nerves nearest to 
them, and thus re-establish the connection, and then the 
grafted piece becomes again sensitive. 

Sometimes it is required to make a new nose ; and, to 
effect this, a piece of skin, on the forehead, is cut into the 
shape of a flattened nose, and carefully dissected off. It 
is not, however, completely detached, but a little neck 
of skin is left at the top of the nose. The flap is then 
twisted round at this neck, brought down, and shaped 
over wax, in its new position, the cut edges being let in 
down the sides of the cheeks. Such a nose will grow 
when it is thus transplanted, and be very satisfactory, 
both in use and appearance. 

If, however, such a nose be touched, the sensation will, 
for a time, appear to be on the forehead, where it came 
from, because its nerves are still connected with those 
of the forehead, through the neck of skin which still 
unites them. In the process of time, however, the 
nerves of the new nose unite themselves with the nerves 
belonging to its new situation, and the connection with 
the forehead by the little neck becomes extinct ; then 



48 NUTEITION OF THE NEKVOUS SYSTEM. 

when it is touched, the feeling is experienced in the pro- 
per place. 

Sometimes the connection with the forehead becomes 
extinguished first, and then, for a time, the nose will 
have no sensation at all, till it becomes perfectly united 
with the nerves in its new position, and so obtains proper 
local sensibility. 

The end of a finger or nose may be cut, or bitten off, 
and if it be re-applied promptly, and kept in its place 
firmly, it will perfectly unite again. Generally, in such 
a case, the part so attached is destitute of feeling at 
first, but the cut nerves re-unite, and sensation may be- 
come as perfect as before. 

M. Brown Sequard has shown that a large nerve may 
be divided — like the one leading to an animal's limb — 
so as to destroy all power of motion and feeling in the 
limb, and yet, in some months, it will perfectly re-unite. 
And not only will it re-unite, but the power of sensation 
and motion will return, and if the animal be killed and 
examined, no trace of the cut may be found. 

M. Brown-Sequard went even farther than this, for he 
divided, in a pigeon, the spinal gord itself. All the parts 
below the point of separation became at once paralyzed, 
and utterly without feeling or power of motion. In the 
course of a few months, however, even the spinal marrow 
began to mend itself, the same as a simple nerve would 
do, so that sensation and the power of motion came grad- 
ually back, and by the end of fifteen months all traces 
of injury had nearly disappeared, the bird walking, run- 
ning and flying nearly as before. 

The Nervous Circle — Nerves of Feeling, or Sensation, 
and Nerves of Motion. 

A nervous system, in its simplest form, is composed 
of a ganglionic or nervous centre, and two sets of nerve 
fibres connected with it. One of these sets, called the 
afferent fibres, commences on the surface of the body by 
a network of fine threads, which, after uniting together, 
proceed to the ganglion or centre, and are united with 
it. The other set, called the efferent fibres, commences 
in the ganglion or nervous centre, by one trunk, which 



NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 49 



proceeds to the muscles on the surface of the body, and 
here divides into what is called a plexus. 

Such is the nervous circle, and it acts in this way. Sup- 
pose a man, unintentionally, puts his hand on a hot iron, 
instantly some of the afferent nerve fibres feel the heat, 
convey the sensation to the brain, and the man feels he 
is burnt, and instantly also the will sends a nervous cur- 
rent down the efferent fibres, to the muscles, and they 
promptly move the hand away. All seems to be done 
instantaneously, and yet there is a certain portion of 
time needed, both for the sensation of heat to reach the 
brain, and for the order to the muscles to move, to come 
back. 

In this case, then, the circle is as follows ; from the 
surface of the body to the brain, .and back from the 
brain to the surface. 

Neither of these sets of nerves can perform the func- 
tion of the other. The one conducts to the brain, and 
the other from it. In the case of the man referred to, 
if the afferent nerves were cut through, he could not 
feel when he was burnt, because no knowledge of it could 
go to the brain, and if the efferent nerves were cut, he 
could not take his hand away when he did feel it burn, 
because the will could not be sent to the muscles. If 
both were cut, he could neither move the hand nor feel 
when it was injured. 

The difference between the two *Mnds of nerves will 
now be understood. They are sometimes called the 
nerves of sensation, and the nerves of motion, and were 
first fully demonstrated and described by Sir Charles Bell. 

It is sometimes the case in disease, that persons lose 
only the power of motion, or only the power of feeling, 
in different parts of the body, and sometimes they lose 
both. 

A sailor, Francisco Cesario, at Rio Janiero, fell from 
a scaffold twenty feet high, and was at first quite uncon- 
scious. On recovering, it was found that the two sides 
of his body were paralyzed in different ways. The left 
side, from the shoulder down, lost all power of motion, 
but could still feel as well as ev; r ; the right side, on the 
contrary, could move perfectly, but had no sensation ! Even 
when a sharp instrument was plunged deep into the 

5 



50 NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

flesh, he felt no pain. From the middle of his neck up- 
wards, both feeling and the power of motion were* as 
perfect as ever, and the line between this perfect part 
and the paralyzed parts below, was so sharp that it could 
be covered by a thread. 

In some animals a simple circle, of a ganglionic centre,. _ 
and two cords form the whole nervous apparatus. In! 
others there are many distinct circles. Thus in the star 
fish, there is a circle of ganglions, round the mouth, 
which is in the centre, and one of these ganglions be- 
longs to each arm, or ray, along which run afferent and 
efferent fibres connected with that ganglion. 

Each arm, therefore, has its own nervous circle, but 
still they are all connected together, so that an injury 
done to one is at once felt by all the others, 

The higher the animal is in the scale of organization, 
the more complicated becomes the nervous system. Thus 
in man we have the brain, the spinal marrow, and nu- 
merous ganglions, each being an independent centre of 
nervous power, connected with particular organs, and 
yet all are more or less connected together. The simple 
circle is seen in voluntary muscular action, as shown in 
the case of the man burning his hand ; but, in the per- 
formance of the various bodily functions, the different 
organs are so connected together, directly or indirectly, 
that usually one excitation of nervous power leads to 
many others, and the* process becomes obscured. 

There are afferent and efferent nerves proceeding from 
the spinal marrow, as well as from the brain, and also 
from many small ganglions lying outside the spine. 
Now some parts are connected, by their nerves, with these 
ganglions only, and may be excited to action from them 
without any consciousness, or true sensation.. 

Beflex Nerwus Action. 

When an action is thus excited without sensation, or 
ordinary feeling, and without conscious respondence. 
but only in unconscious response to external stimula- 
tion, it is called a reflex action, or sometimes exciti-motor. 

Reflex is not a good term to employ, however, because, 
in one sense, all actions are reflex which result from the 



NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 51 



operation of a nervous circle, whether there be sensa- 
tion and consciousness or not. The external impression 
is conveyed to the nervous centre, and is reflected hack in 
all muscular action, as in the case of the man with the 
burnt hand. 

In cases where action is excited by nervous influence, 
without sensation or consciousness, exciti-motor is a bet- 
ter term, but reflex is commonly employed. 

The simple nervous circle, such as is found in ani- 
mals of a low type, chiefly serves to bring the different 
parts of the organization into relationship with each 
other, and to make them act co-operatively. 

And in these beings most nervous actions are simply 
reflex or exciti-motor. 

Velocity of Nervous Impressions. 

Mr. W. F. Barrett communicates to the Intellectual 
Observer for June, 1806, a paper " On the Velocity of 
Nervous Impressions," from which the following are ex- 
tracts : 

" What, then, is the result of the investigations of 
Helmholz, on the velocity of the nerve force ? It is one 
which, at first sight, is most astonishing ; for the rate 
of propagation, compared with other forces, is extremely 
slow. The velocity of light is about 190,000 miles a se- 
cond, and of electricity, even more ; but the velocity of 
the nerve force is only 90 feet a second, one-twentieth of 
the velocity of a cannon-ball, about one- thirteenth of the 
velocity of sound in air, and about equal to the speed 
of an express train. No sensible difference was found 
between the velocity in the nerves of a man, and in 
those of a frog, and other animals. In a creature so long 
as the whale, the rate of nervous transmission becomes 
very perceptible, when the extremities have to be moved. 

" The fact of a harpoon having been thrust into the 
tail of a good-sized whale, would not be announced in the 
brain of the creature till a second after it had entered ; 
and, as it would take a little more than another second, 
before the command to move its tail would reach the 
appropriate muscles, a boat's crew might be far away 
before the animal they pierced began to lash the sea. 



52 NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

The nervous force travels more slowly when the nerves 
are submitted to a low temperature, than when they are 
influenced by a high one. Besides the time required for 
the transmission of a stimulus through the nerves, the 
mind takes a certain period to form a conception, and 
then to prompt the limbs to act accordingly. This time, 
measured by a similar method, has been found to be 
about one-tenth of a second. The passage of a rifle 
bullet through the brain would not occupy more than 
one-thousandth of a second, a stroke of lightning would 
pass through the body in much less time, and thus a 
person killed, by either of these means, would die without 
consciousness having time to be produced. The placid 
aspect of those who have thus died, goes to prove that 
no pain was felt, prior to the insensibility which follow- 
ed the shot.'* 

The speed of the nerve current being greater when the 
body is warm, than when it is cold, explains why 
extreme cold benumbs — it completely stops the nerve 
current. It also explains why the current is slower in 
winter than in summer. 

Specific JSferwus Centres. 

In the higher order of animals, however, and especially 
in man, there are certain masses of ganglionic nervous 
matter, distinct from those concerned in simple reflex 
action, although connected sympathetically with them. 
The brain is the type of these specific centres, and its 
function is to elaborate thought, to originate consciousness, 
and excite voluntary motion. The product of its action, 
in short, is mind, in the widest acceptation of the term. 

The brain is connected with every other part of the 
nervous apparatus, and exerts a controling, guiding, and 
directing influence over all. The ordinary ganglionic ner- 
vous circle may exist, even in human beings, without any 
brain, and all the vegetative functions may be carried 
on without it, but there can be no consciousness, nor vol- 
untary motion exhibited when the brain is absent. 

Human infants have been born without brains, as 
before stated, and have lived for some time, simply by 
the action of the vegetative organs. 



NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 53 



Although the brain thus plays such an exalted part 
in the life process, still there is nothing remarkable in 
its structure or connections. It is merely a mass of 
ganglionic nervous matter, with afferent and efferent 
nerves going to and coming from it, the same as any 
other ganglion. Its more exalted power probably de- 
pends upon its larger size, and more perfect develop- 
ment, and, perhaps, upon a more perfect organization. 

TJie Special Senses. 

Directly connected with the brain are the organs of 
the special senses— sight, hearing, smelling, tasting and 
feeling. Afferent and efferent nerves connect each of 
these organs with the brain, making a complete nervous 
circle, and it is only by their action that we gain our 
ideas of the external world. 

To give a familiar illustration — a ray of sunshine sud- 
denly strikes the eye, and makes an impression, which 
the afferent nerves convey at once to the brain. The 
brain takes cognizance of the sensation, and send3 down 
the efferent nerves a message to the muscles of the eye- 
lids, which immediately close to shut out the sunshine. 
If the afferent nerves were cut through, no sensation 
would be conveyed to the brain ; and if the efferent 
nerves were cut, no message could go to the eyelids, and 
they would remain open. 

All the other senses act in the same way, by a simple 
nervous circle, which connects the brain with the special 
organ. 

Similarity of the Werwus to the Electric Power. 

Of the nature of the nervous power we know nothing 
certain. It, however, presents many analogies *with 
electricity, and many eminent physiologists have con- 
sidered them to be identical. Many well-known facts 
lend great probability to this theory, though there are 
some that seem opposed to it. An electric current sent 
along an afferent nerve excites sensation in the brain, 
whether it be sent from the terminal fibres or from the 



54 NUTKITION OF THE NEEVOUS SYSTEM. 

middle of the trunk. In like manner, if an efferent 
nerve, (nerve of motion,) be disconnected with the brain, 
and connected with an electric battery, the electric cur- 
rent will cause contraction, in the muscles which that 
nerve goes to, just the same as if it were still connected 
with the brain, and receiving the ordinary nervous cur- 
rent. And, if either of the vital organs, the stomach, 
for instance, be weakened in its action, by having its 
proper nervous influence cut off, an electric current sent 
along the proper nerves will cause it to act just as the 
nervous current did. The electric current, therefore, 
performs the work of the nervous current, and in the 
same way, Even after death, as is well known, the 
electric current will restore all the functions of the body, 
in almost their full power. Under its influence the dead 
man opens his eyes and his mouth, and moves his limbs, 
his heart contracts, his lungs breathe air, and the secre- 
tions take place as in life. Whether there be conscious- 
ness, or sensation, we do not "know, but there seems good 
reason to suppose that there may be. 

Conversely to this, the brain can be so disposed as to 
act the same as a galvanic battery, and produce a real- 
electric current, which can be used for chemical decom- 
position, or for sending messages by telegraph. 

To a great extent, therefore, the nervous and electric 
currents resemble each other, and may be made, recipro- 
cally, to do each other's work ; but whether they are 
really identical, we do not certainly know. 

It may be remembered further, as bearing upon this 
point, that the electric current always results from 
chemical decomposition, and the nervous current, in all 
probability, does the same. The constant decomposition, 
and recom position, of the material of the body, which is 
perpetually going on, especially in the great nervous 
centres, is a chemical process, as truly as the solution of 
the zinc in a battery. If these changes are arrested, there 
is no nervous power; if they take place rapidly, the 
power is evolved so much the more rapidly ; just as the 
power of the galvanic battery is increased, or decreased, 
by the slow or rapid decomposition of the zinc. 



NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 55 



Spontaneous Nervous Action. 

In all animals without brains, or who have them merely 
rudimentary, the actions are entirely reflex, and result 
from the action of a simple nervous circle. Some stimu- 
lant excites the afferent nerves, (nerves of sensation) — 
the sensation is sent to the ganglion, and the reflex ac- 
tion comes back through the efferent nerve, (nerve of mo- 
tion). And this is the case, as beiore explained, in many 
instances, even in the human being. 

Where there is a brain, however, and consequently 
consciousness, thought, and emotion, we may have vol- 
untary motion, and direct nervous influence, without any 
reflex action whatever. Thus a man feels an impulse to do 
many things, and does them, merely from a mental im- 
pression, a thought, or an emotion. He simply wishes to 
do a thing, and does it. The impulse is then in the brain 
itself, and does not originate directly from any external 
impression. There has been no sensation conveyed by 
an afferent nerve at all, so far as can be ascertained, and 
yet the influence has gone from the brain down the mo- 
tor nerve, the same as if there had been. 

In such cases the act seems spontaneous and we see 
that, in animals with brains, the nervous influence may 
be caused to act on the different organs in two ways, 
namely, by external impression, or by internal spontane- 
ous impulse, mental or moral ; that is, either by thought 
or emotion ! 

This shows how mere mental action or powerful emo- 
tion may affect the vital organs ; and explains the effect 
of over-study, of mental trouble, fear, and other powerful 
emotions. The mere directing the thoughts to any or- 
gan will frequently excite it to action, as is well known 
in regard to the sexual organs. The thought may excite 
the organ ; and, conversely, a certain condition of the or- 
gan may excite the thought. In beings without brains, 
if there be such, there can be no spontaneous nervous ac- 
tion, but everything results from external impulse only. 
This is apparently the case also with ourselves, in the 
early stages of our existence, and always so with com- 
plete idiots, in whom the brain is too imperfect to ori- 
ginate thought. It is a question, however, if any per- 



56 NUTRITION OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

feet animal, even among the lowest, is entirely brainless. 
On the contrary, as will be shown further on, there is 
every reason to believe that all have brains, but different 
in size and development. Insects, and even animalcules, 
have apparently brains, and consequently mind, as will 
be shown. 

It should be remarked, in conclusion, that mental, and 
emotional impulse, though apparently spontaneous, in 
all probability result from changes in the brain itself, or 
from some influence affecting it from without which we 
are not yet able to detect. 



CHAPTER IV. 



DEPENDENCE OE THE NERVOUS POWER UPON CHEMI- 
CAL ACTION— NECESSITY FOR SLEEP OR REST. 

The Nervous Power and the Blood. 

All manifestations of nervous power are entirely de- 
pendent upon the blood, or, in otlier words, upon nutri- 
tion ! Every part of the apparatus forming the nervous 
circle may be perfect in structure, as far as can be ascer- 
tained, and yet it may be totally inactive. If there be 
not a sufficient supply of pure arterial blood circulating 
in the blood-vessels of the nervous system, there will be 
no nervous power. 

The reason of this will be obvious from what has been 
before explained. Nervous power results from chemical 
changes in the nervous substance ; such changes result- 
ing from the decay of old vesicular and fibrous matter, 
and the formation of new. The more active the nervous 
system is, the more rapid will be the waste and re-forma- 
tion, and, consequently, the more regular and perfect 
must be the nutrition. 

As before stated, however, the change is not so great 
nor so rapid in the conducting fibres, as it is in the vesi- 
cular ganglions, because these produce the nervous 
power, while the fibres merely cod duct it ; but still, with 
both, there is needed the constant presence and active 
circulation of pure arterial blood. 

The amount of blood needed by the great nervous 
centres, and especially by the brain, is enormous, and 
any stoppage of the supply is immediately followed by 
the most serious consequences. If the circulation of the 
blood through the brain be stopped, for a moment only, 

(57) 



58 DEPENDENCE OF NEEVOUS POWER 

the person becomes insensible — losing all consciousness 
and power of motion — nor can restoration take place till 
the blood again circulates through the brain. 

Sir Astley Cooper showed this fact by an experiment on 
a dog. He tied both the carotid arteries, which take the 
blood to the brain, and at the same time made a pressure 
on the large vessels passing down the spine. Insensi- 
bility came on immediately, the dog falling down power- 
less, but with some convulsive movements. The brain 
was completely paralysed, but the spinal marrow only 
partially so. On removing the ligature, and allowing 
the blood to circulate again in the brain, consciousness 
returned, and voluntary muscular power, so that the dog 
stood on his feet again. The spasmodic motions also 
ceased. This was proof of the dependence of nervous 
power on the circulation of the blood through the nerv- 
ous centres. 

In ordinary fainting or syncope, the heart fails to act 
with sufficient #force, and consequently the blood is not 
propelled to the brain, and spinal marrow, in sufficient 
quantity. The consequence is, that there is a more or 
less complete loss of consciousness and power of motion, 
constituting what is called a fainting fit. Directly the 
heart begins to act with more force, and the blood 
circulates through the brain and spinal marrow more 
quickly, the swoon or fainting fit passes off. 

The familiar accident of one of the limbs going to sleep, 
as it is termed, when pressed upon in a certain position 
for a long time, is another illustration of this fact. The 
continued pressure prevents the circulation of the blood N 
in the small vessels, which nutrify the ultimate fibres of 
the afferent nerves ; and, in consequence, they have no 
power to convey any sensation to the brain. While the 
limb is thus asleep, it may be pinched, or cut, without 
causing pain, because the afferent nerves have no con- 
ducting power. But immediately the circulation recom- 
mences, the feeling returns, because the nerves again re- 
ceive their proper nutrition. 

The opposite condition, or a too rapid circulation of 
the blood through the nervous centres, causes a nervous 
state exactly the reverse of fainting, or unconsciousness. 
Thus, in congestion of the brain, or determination of blood 



UPON CHEMICAL ACTION. 59 

to the head, sensation "becomes more acute, and the mind 
restlessly active, till delirium sets in. If the spinal mar- 
row be congested also, there will be great excitement of 
the nerves of motion, causing convulsions. 

People of sanguine temperaments are more restless, 
and energetic, than others, because with them the circu- 
lation of the blood through the brain is naturally more 
active. Exciting emotions will drive the blood to the 
brain, causing heat, and subsequent exhaustion, or head- 
ache. Intense mental application does the same, and 
hence the great injury that is often done to children, by 
making them study too long 1 , or too hard, while the brain 
is young and imperfect. By such a practice its growth 
is stimulated, out of all proportion with that of the rest 
of the system, and its development consequently is forced, 
and imperfect, entailing mental feebleness in future years, 
and probably disease and suffering, if not untimely death. 
Thousands are yearly sacrificed in this way, through the 
ignorance of teachers and parents, or to gratify a foolish 
vanity. People who would denounce the cruelty of forc- 
ing a child to try to carry a man's burden on its back, will, 
nevertheless, try to force it to carry a man's burden in its 
head, which is both harder to do, and more hurtful. 

It must be remarked further that not only must the 
nervous system have a constant and abundant supply of 
blood, but that blood must be in a state of purity, or it 
will not serve the purpose. Impure blood, instead of 
stimulating and strengthening the nervous system, 
deadens -and weakens it, and will finally destroy its power 
altogether. 

When a person is suffocated, death results mainly from 
the circulation of impure blood through the brain. The 
process of healthy breathing removes, from the impure 
venous blood, the poisonous carbonic acid with which it is 
charged, and which is peculiarly hurtful to the brain. 
But when breathing is prevented, this poisonous carbonic 
acid is, of course, retained, and death results from it just 
the same as if the individual* had breathed the fumes of 
charcoal. Tbe poisoning takes place in the one case 
from talcing in the deadly matter, and, in the other case, 
from preventing its being taken out — the result is the 
same in both cases. 



60 DEPENDENCE OF NERVOUS POWER 

The first symptoms of poisoning by carbonic acid are, 
usually, a gradual deadening of consciousness and sensa- 
tion , which, if pure air be not now breathed, increases 
till total unconsciousness results, with loss of all sensa- 
tion — a state of temporary death, in fact. 

This is always felt, more or less, by those who breathe 
the air of crowded or ill-ventilated rooms. First, there 
is felt a dull, heavy sensation in the head, with inability 
to attend to, or understand what is going on. Soon the 
limbs begin to feel tired, and the power of motion is less- 
ened, till finally fainting comes on. This all results from 
breathing carbonic acid, given off by the breath of those 
present, and is often met with in badly arranged school- 
rooms, as well as in churches and public halls. 

The more active the brain is, the more blood it needs, 
and the purer it should be. In a school, therefore, this 
is especially important, and yet is too generally neglect- 
ed. It is common enough to see the poor children with 
heated faces, aching heads, languid limbs, and dull 
brains, yet compelled to study, and punished for not be- 
ing bright and ready at their work. It is just as absurd 
to expect the brain to be capable of proper effort, in 
such circumstances, as it would be to expect a man to 
labor hard, who had been kept a long time without 
food, and forced to take weakening drugs at the same 
time. 

In fact, the evil from breathing impure air is twofold 
— the brain is both poisoned and starved. It is deprived 
of the pure blood, which it needs for nutrition, and is 
supplied with noxious matter instead. 

In several diseases also, poisonous matters are found in 
the blood, and, by being carried to the brain, produce 
symptoms similar to those described above. 

Thus, when the bile is in too large quantity, or is not 
properly used up, it is apt to pass into the circulation, and 
so reaches the brain, giving rise to symptoms very simi- 
lar to those which result from breathing impure air. 
This is why bilious people are dull, lethargic, and 
drowsy ; their brains are oppressed by the poisonous 
biliary matter. 

The same thing also may result from some forms of 
kidney disease ■, in which the hurtful matters that should 



UPON CHEMICAL- ACTION. ■ 61 

pass away in the urine, are retained, and pass into £he 
blood. 

Some of these poisons mostly affect the brain, and, ac- 
cording to their nature, either cause simple unconscious- 
ness, or wild excitement, with delirium or furious mania. 
Other poisons affect the cerebellum or spinal marrow 
most, causing either perverted sensations, and convulsive 
excitement of the muscles, or total insensibility and utter 
powerlessness. 

It is more than probable that a large number of nerv- 
ous diseases, and those of the most troublesome kinds, 
are caused either by deficiency of pure bloo 1 in the nerv- 
ous system, or by the actual presence in it of poisonous 
matters. 

These poisons, it must be borne in mind, may not be 
taken into the body, but engendered in it, by natural 
processes, by the action of disease, by improper food or 
drink or by imperfect digestion, assimilation, and secre- 
tion. 

Chemical Action the Source of Nervous Power. 

The quantity of blood circulating through the nervous 
system, and especially through the brain f is much more 
than is needed for the mere purpose of ordinary nutri- 
tion. The mutual changes which are effected between 
this blood and the elements of the nervous substance 
are, in fact, active chemical reactions, similar in character, 
as stated before, to those that take place in a galvanic 
battery. The e'ements of the nervous tissues are, in 
fact, rapidly oxidized, or burnt, by the oxygen of the 
blood, and this oxidation is the source of the nervous 
power ; just as the oxidation of the zinc, in the battery, 
is the source of galvanic power. 

The circulation of the blood through the nervous 
system serves, therefore, a double purpose ; it both keeps 
up the necessary nutrition of the nervous substance, 
and also engenders the nervous power, by the active oxi- 
dation which it causes in that substance. 

The two processes, waste and repair, or destruction and 
reconstruction, are perpetually going on ; and it is from 
the process of destruction, (or oxidation,) that the nerv- 
ous power results. 

6 



62 DEPENDENCE OF NERVOUS POWER 

A man with an active mind, therefore, works up a 
large amount of brain ; and if his nutrition is not cor- 
respondingly active, he must decline, both in substance 
and in vigor. 

Mind means brain, and brain results from pure oxy- 
genated blood, which is the product of good and abund- 
ant food, good digestion, and the breathing of pure air. 

Yes ! talk as we may about the exalted mind, it all 
conies down to good food, pure air, and a healthy stom- 
ach at last. 

It is of the utmost importance that human beings 
should recognize the fact, and act upon it, that mind is 
merely a function of the body, and is, in no sense what- 
ever, independent of it. Just as good digestion depends 
upon a healthy stomach, so does good thinking, and all 
other mental operations, depend upon a healthy brain ! 

" Pure Air and Exercise. — Thus, the oxygen of the 
hills wisely breathed ; the food of the hills wisely eaten ; 
the waters of the hills wisely, that is, sparingly, drunk, 
but freely used as plunge and douche,in lake and cataract ; 
the light and warmth of the sun ; the muscle's action 
and the brain's repose, lift a man from the very sediment 
of life to this moral and aesthetic height, and even tap 
the closed springs of religious emotion. Blessed are the 
uses of Materialism ! Wise men know this, and act upon 
their knowledge. During the last session of Parliament, 
for example, a statesman whose bared head Phidias, in 
passing, would have turned twice to look upon, practiced 
daily upon the bicycle. There was a mystic value in this 
morning rite — it was a fresh illustration of the connec- 
tion of Physics with Intellect, Will and Emotion. We 
begin here with mechanics, and from the rhythmic mo- 
tion of a pair of legs and treadles, pass on to the expand- 
ed chest, the quickened circulation, the freshened brain ; 
and thence in unbroken sequence to those finer essences 
which descend as sweetness and light on the House of 
Commons, or fall, like the honey from Chrysostom's lips, 
in the presence of a deputation. Thrice blessed, surely, 
in this case, for us and him, are the uses of Material- 
ism ! Mind, like force, is known to us only through 
matter. Take, then, what hypothesis you will — con- 
sider matter as an instrument through which the in- 



UPON CHEMICAL ACTION. 63 

sulated mind exercises its powers, or consider both as so 
inextricably mixed that they stand or fall together ; from 
both points of view, the care of the body is equally im- 
portant. The morality of clean blood ought to be one 
of the first lessons taught us by our pastors and masters. 
The physical is the substratum of the spiritual, and this 
fact gives to the food we eat and to the air we breathe a 
transcendental significance. Boldly and truly writes 
Mr. Ruskin, ' Whenever you throw your window wide 
open in the morning, you let in Athena, as wisdom and 
fresh air at the same instant ; and whenever you draw a 
pure, long, full breath of right heaven, you take Athena 
into your heart,, through your blood ; and with the blood 
into thoughts of the brain.' No higher value than this 
could be assigned to atmospheric oxygen." — Professor 
Tyndally in the "Fortnightly Review" 

Correspondence oetween Mental Work and Heat. 

It has long been known, even as a familiar fact, that 
muscular exertion causes heat^ and we habitually exer- 
cise to warm our bodies. In this case motion is trans- 
formed into heat. It is not so generally known, how- 
ever, that mental work causes heat, as certainly as mus- 
cular work, but such is the fact, and Dr. J. S. Lombard 
has proved it by direct experiment. He adapted to his 
head some specially arranged, and very delicate instru- 
ments for measuring temperature, and then set himself 
to observe. The result was that the heat, in the head, 
was always in proportion to his mental activity. When 
perfectly quiet, torpid, and not thinking, the tempera- 
ture fell, and rose again directly anything engaged his 
attention, and set him thinking. If agitated, or excited, 
the temperature rose much higher, showing that 
emotion affected it even more than mere thought. In 
short, his experiments proved, as might have been anti- 
cipated, that the amount of heat produced is in direct 
proportion to the activity of the brain ; and thus we see 
that mental work, as well as muscular work , is changed 
into heat, as a result of chemical changes in the blood. 

Conversely to this, if the brain become heated from 
organic changes, as in fever, it sets actively to work, and 



64 • DEPENDENCE OF NERVOUS POWER 

may be excited even to delirium. In this case the heat 
causes, or is changed into thought, or mental work ; be- 
ing first caused itself by chemical action. 

The headache, burning brows, and bloodshot eyes of 
the too close student, or worrying man of business, are 
thus easily accounted for ; the excessive mental work is 
changed into heat, and the brain may be literally con- 
sumed, by the fire which its own intense action has 
kindled and fed. 

Necessity of Best to the Nervous System. 

In a state of mental activity, the process of oxidation 
of the nervous substance, — or, in other words, its chemi- 
cal decomppsition, — from which the nervous power re- 
sults, is more rapid than the process of nutrition ; and 
if there were not some way of compensating for this, the 
nervous apparatus would soon be exhausted. This ex- 
haustion is, however, prevented by a spontaneous ten- 
dency to rest, at regular intervals, by sleep ! the tired 
brain gradually ceases acting, and becomes torpid, dur- 
ing which state but little waste, if any, takes place, but 
the process of nutrition still goes on. On waking, there- 
fore, the brain is restored again to its old state, and can 
work for another period, till exhaustion comes on again, 
and another period of rest is required. 

Some parts of the nervous system, however, never rest, 
but, in a state of health, constantly waste, and repair, 
exactly alike. This is the case with the nerves and the 
ganglions which act upon the breathing apparatus, for 
this must never stop, but go on always the same, whether 
we are sleeping or waking. In every part of the nervous 
system, also, where this constant action is needed, the 
waste and repair are always equal, and no rest is called 
for. 

The brain is not thus needed to be in constant action, 
because none of the vital organs are entirely dependent 
upon it ; and therefore it can, when necessary, pass into 
a state of perfect repose, without any of the vital pro- 
cesses being, in consequence, interrupted. This neces- 
sity for rest to the brain, in the form of sleep, is experi- 
enced with tolerable regularity about every sixteen 



UPON CHEMICAL ACTION. 65 

hours, and the time spent in sleep averages from five or 
six to eight or nine hours out of every twenty-four. 

This necessity for regular rest to the brain need not 
be wondered at, when the work it does is understood, 
and the destruction of nervous substance which that 
work causes. 

Not only does the brain originate all the busy thoughts 
that fill the mind, during the working hours, but it also 
has to take cognizance of all the sensations, to attend to 
all the bodily wants, and to find power for all the volun- 
tary motions that are performed. In short, it is never at 
rest for a moment while the individual' is awake, but is 
all the time attending to a number of different things at 
once, each one requiring more or less expenditure of ner- 
vous power. 

Now, this incessant action of the mind, — this inces- 
sant giving out of nervous power, — all results from the 
actual destruction of the substance of the brain, by the 
chemical process of oxidation/ Every thought that 
springs up, every sensation that is felt, and every volun- 
tary motion that is performed, each and all burn up, or 
consume, more or less of the brain matter ! This mat- 
ter, it is true, is replaced by the process of nutrition, but 
not so rapidly as it wastes. In some fifteen hours, on an 
average, the waste has so much exceeded the repair that 
the brain begins to be exhausted, or worn out, and sleep 
is required. 

During healthy sleep the brain entirely rests,— thoughts 
are not produced, except imperfectly, sensation is dor- 
mant, and there is no voluntary motion. The waste of 
the brain matter is therefore suspended, but nutrition 
goes on, and now gets ahead of the waste ; so that, on 
waking, the individual finds his brain restored to its 
original state, and he can again think, feel, and move, as 
before, ^leep is required, therefore, to give opportunity 
for restoration of the nervous substance, which has been 
exhausted during the waking hours. Some parts of the 
nervous apparatus, as before explained, are always at 
work, and never need rest, because with them the waste 
is small, and is exactly made up by nutrition, so that 
they never need go to sleep ! This is the case w T ith those 
parts that influence the vegetative or vital organs, be- 



bb DEPENDENCE OF NERVOUS POWER 

cause these must never stop, but go on with their work 
all the time, sleep or awake. 

Rest, or sleep, therefore, is required especially by those 
parts of the nervous system connected with the animal 
functions, with sensation, thought and voluntary motion, 
all of which consume the nervous substance with great 
rapidity,— but particularly intense thought and strong 
emotion. 

Every one is aware how exhausting mental work is, 
when too long continued, and how it necessitates pro- 
longed sleep. T ne same effect also follows any powerful 
emotion, if long sustained. 

Mental Work and Bodily Work Compared. 

Prof. Houghton, of Trinity College, Dublin, has 
studied this matter, in order to find out which kind of 
work exhausts the most ; and the result of his computa- 
tions is, that two hours of hard mental work take away, 
from the human system, as much vital strength as is 
taken away by a whole day of mere oodily work ! This 
shows how careful men should be, in working their 
minds, not to over-do it. And it also shows why they 
should combine bodily work with mental work, and al- 
ternate them. 

When the term working-men is made use of, by dema- 
gogues, or by the laborers themselves, it is assumed 
that the only workers are those who work with their 
hands, but this is a great error, as the above will show. 
Many work harder with their brains, and exhaust them- 
selves more, than any laborer can do by using his hands 
only. There are, however, very great constitutional dif- 
ferences in this respect in different people. Some need 
very much sleep, and feel exhausted with very little men- 
tal or emotional excitement. Others, on the contrary, 
can endure violent emotions, or continue powerful men- 
tal efforts, for a long time with but little sleep, and yet 
feel little effect from it. The old Napoleon was a re- 
markable instance of this kind. He could attend, for 
days and nights at a stretch, to the most complicated mili- 
tary, social and political affairs, all at once, taking a 
short nap now and then, when he willed it, and waking 



UPON CHEMICAL ACTION. 67 



up to work again in an instant. This tie could do, day 
after day, and night after night, without a sign of fa- 
tigue or mental weariness. 

To most people sleep is an overwhelming necessity, 
and any attempt to do with less than is needed, by forc- 
ing the nervous system to work when weary, is sure to 
result in great injury. 

The nervous system is sure to suffer if kept on the 
strain too long, with insufficient rest, in the form of 
sleep, especially in the young. Its nutrition is then im- 
perfectly performed, and its waste becomes greater than 
ics repair, in consequence of which it loses, in actual sub- 
stance, and consequently in power. As a rule, children 
should sleep all they are inclined to ; and should never 
be roused tip ! 

In acute mania we often see astonishing mental activ- 
ity, kept up for a long time with little or no sleep ; but 
such a state is always followed, sooner or later, by a 
period of corresponding exhaustion ; and, if this occurs 
too frequently, complete mental imbecility is sure to re- 
sult. 

Great and prolonged exhaustion of the nervous sys- 
tem, especially by powerful emotions, or by intense men- 
tal effort, is also frequently indicated by certain matters 
in the urine. On examining this fluid, in such circum- 
stances, it is often found much loaded with certain salts, — 
the Alkaline phosphates ; the bulk of which come from the 
nervous system, and they show that it is in a state of de- 
composition. Any great worry, or wear of the mind, is 
apt to be followed by this peculiar urinary loss, and it is 
always a serious indication. Men immersed in business, 
students, authors, and others whose minds are hard 
driven at certain times, will nearly always be found to 
thus lose nervous matter in the urine, at those times. 
Men addicted to sexual, and other excesses, also sun%r in 
the same way, and thus arise numerous cases of soften- 
ing of the brain, and mental imbecility. 

In many cases when the brain has become weak, and 
the mind uncertain, complete rest alone, with plenty of 
sleep, will effect a recovery, but any attempt to use the 
brain too soon, in such circumstances, is nearly sure to 
be followed by discharge of the phosphates in the urine. 



68 DEPENDENCE OF NERVOUS POWER, ETC. 

Directly this is seen, mental effort must cease at once, 
and strong emotion must be guarded against. ^ Most 
acute diseases of the nervous system are followed oy this 
loss of the phosphates in the urine, and the amount of 
the loss is usually proportionate to the intensity of the 
disease. 

Hard work of the nervous system, especially of the 
brain, necessitates increased nutrition equally with hard 
muscular work. And when a man works prudently 
with a healthy brain, he needs food in proportion to his 
work, just as much as a man laboring in the fields does, 
in proportion to his work. All good healthy brain work- 
ers are hearty feeders, and generally good sleepers. 

No man can long maintain prolonged mental effort on 
insufficient or poor food. Meagre diet makes meagre 
thought, and a brain merely stimulated, by alcohol, or 
coffee, for instance, may give out a few bright flashes, 
but is incapable of steady solid work. 

Some substances, such as tea, and especially the coca 
plant, have the peculiar property, apparently, of arrest- 
ing nervous waste ; so that, while taking them, a man 
may do without food, and yet labour, mentally and bodily, 
without exhaustion. It is certain, however, that this 
cannot be done, to any great extent, without evil conse- 
quences following, as many have found out who have 
used such articles too much. 

The same remarks apply to opium, and other narcot- 
ics, which act in a peculiar manner on the brain, but 
they will all be referred to more fully further on. 



I regard the urinary deposits as very important indi- 
cations, in Nervous Diseases, and always make a 
thorough examination of the urine, in all doubtful 
cases. 



PART II. 



DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE STRUCTURE, AND 
USES, OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE NERV- 
OUS SYSTEM, AND OF THE WAY IN WHICH THEY 
ARE CONNECTED WITH EACH OTHER, BOTH 
ORGANICALLY AND FUNCTIONALLY. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE SPINAL CORD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 

Development of the Spinal Cord. 

The spinal marrow, with the parts accessory to it, called 
sometimes the spinal axis, is described first, because it 
is really the foundation, as it were, of the nervous sys- 
tem. In some beings it is the chief ganglionic centre, 
and though in the higher animals the brain is super- 
added, yet still, even in them, the spinal marrow is most 
intimately connected with all the vital functions, and any 
injury to it is more serious, vitally, than an injury to the 
brain itself. 

In studying the development of the nervous system, 
in the embryo, we find that the spinal marrow is the first 
part formed, and the other parts seem to grow upon, 
or from it. 

Immediately after the female egg is impregnated, there 
forms in it, from the yelk, a globular body called the 
germinal vesicle, which is surrounded by a membrane, or 
skin, called the germinal membrane, and this eventually 
divides into two layers, one called the animal, or serous 
layer, from which originates the spinal column and ner- 
vous system, and the other called the mucus, or vegeta- 
tive layer, from which originates the whole of the nutri- 
tive organs. The first indication of development is seen 
in the serous layer of the germinal membrane, in the 
form of a pale white line, called the primitive trace, 
which is the beginning of the spinal marrow. At first 
this is only a simple line, but soon the upper part thick- 
ens a little, denoting where the brain will be. 

This is well shown in the following cuts : — 

(71) 



72 THE SPINAL CORD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 



Plate IX. 

THE PRIMITIVE TRACE, MAGNIFIED EIGHT TIMES. 




(a) is the transparent portion of the impregnated germ, called the 
area pellucida; (3) is a thin membrane, called the dorsal laminae • (c) 
is the primitive trace, or line denoting the very commencement of the 
spinal marrow. 

In the last plate it will be seen that the walls of the 
membrane, called the dorsal lamina?, are coming close 
together, and eventually the edges join, so that it forms 
a tube, which is the beginning of the spinal column, or 
backbone, in which the spinal marrow is enclosed. 

As the rudimentary spinal marrow develops, it is seen 
to divide into four parts, or separate cords, and several 
globular vesicles appear on the upper part, which are the 
rudiments of the brain, medulla oblongata, and the 
organs of sight, hearing, and smell. ■ 

At first, the nervous substance is only like a thin 



THE SPINAL COUD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 



73 



Plate X. 



THE PRIMITIVE TRACE AT A LATER PERIOD ; COM- 
MENCEMENT OF THE BRAIN, MAGNIFIED EIGHT 
TIMES. 




In this plate it will be seen that the upper end of the primitive 
trace, or spinal cord, is enlarging ; at («), showing the commencement 
of the brain ; at (c), rudiments of the hones of the spine, or vertebra? ; 
(d) is the lower end of the spine, or sacrum. 

transparent fluid, but gradually it thickens, and then 
forms round each part a kind of skin, or membrane, 
which becomes, at a later period, the nerve tube, or ves- 
icular capsule. 

The parts above described are the rudiments or begin- 
nings of the nervous apparatus, the other parts growing 
out of them, by degrees, as development progresses The 
different parts of the brain, the sympathetic nerves, the 
ganglions, and the nerve fibres, all appear in succession, 
the spinal marrow being first. 

The different stages of development of the nervous 



74 THE SPINAL COED AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 

system, in the human embryo, correspond to the perfect 
states of the nervous system in the different orders of in- 
ferior animals. So that, at one period or other of its 
growth, the rudimentary human being resembles, in its 
nervous system, every kind of animal below it. At one 
period it has the nervous system of a fish, and at another 
that of a reptile, and so on. 

In alZ the classes of vertebrate animals the nervous 
system commences in the same way, and the after-differ- 
ences result from some animals stopping at one stage of 
development, while others go on to another stage. Thus 
some have, apparently, only a spinal marrow, and nerves 
connected with it, while others have an imperfect brain. 
In man the brain is more perfect than in any other ani- 
mal, some parts being developed in it that are not found 
in the others at all, while some other parts, though com- 
mon to other beings, are more fully developed in man. 

The mental superiority of one human being, or 
of one animal, over another is entirely a result of 
brain development. In many animals, however, if not 
in all, there are portions of the brain merely rudimen- 
tary, but which are capable in extraordinary circum- 
stances of being developed. Thus domestic animals 
have faculties developed in them, by breeding, and train- 
ing, that they never show in a wild state, and this could 
never be done if they had not such rudimentary parts of 
the brain to act upon. 

In the brain of man himself there are parts of which we 
do not know the use, and which, in fact, seem to be, at pres- 
ent, superfluous. These may be the rudiments of organs 
yet to be developed, and which, when in action, may 
make the future man as far above the most intellectual 
one, now known, as he is above the lowest ape. 

Structure of the Spinal Cord. 

Having traced the growth of the spinal cord, we will 
now proceed to describe its structure when fully devel- 
oped. 

The spinal marrow, or cord, is placed within the tube 
formed by the bones of the spine ; it is oval, or elliptical 
in form, and is composed of two different kinds of mat- 



THE SPINAL COBD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 75 



ter ; one white, which, is the outside, and the other grey, 
which is in the interior. At the upper part it is connect- 
ed with the brain, and in the foetus it extends nearly the 
whole length of the back bone, but in the adult it ter- 
minates at what is called the first, or second, lumbar ver- 
tebrae, or just below the loins ; the rest of the bone below, 
forming the sacrum, being then solid, is called the Cauda 
Equina, or horse's tail. 

The cord itself does not quite fill up the tube, or space 
in the back-bone, but is rather suspended in it, as it were. 
The rest of the space, however, is not unoccupied, but 
contains the roots of the nerves, the sheath of the cord, 
some ligaments and blood-vessels, and also a peculiar 
liquid. 

The subjoined figures will show the peculiarities of 
the form of the spinal cord : 

Fig. i. Fig. 2. Fig. 3. 
Plate XI. — DIFFERENT VIEWS A C 

OF THE SPINAL CORD. 

Fig. i. A front view of the spinal cord. 

Fig. 2. The hind view. 

Fig. 3. This is intended to show how the 
cord is composed of two parts, or strands, 
which start from opposite sides, and cross 
each other, where they separate. Down each 
of these parts extend two furrows^ which 
divide it into three parts, called the anterior, 
the middle, and the posterior columns ; as 
may be seen in the figure. 



It has already been explained that 
the outside of the spinal cord is com- 
posed of the white nervous matter, 
and the inside of the grey. The fol- 
lowing plate will show the relative 
proportion of each, and how they 
are placed. 

The cord, as already stated, is in 
two portions, one on each side, and 
these again are divided each into 
three, as will be shown by the 
plate. 




76 THE SPINAL COED AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 

Plate XII. 

THE SPINAL MARROW CUT ACROSS. 




(i, 2,) Are the two equal halves of the spinal cord — the right and the 
left. \a) is the anterior, or front column ; (c,) the posterior or be- 
hind column — the middle, or lateral column being between them. 
The other side corresponds to this. 

(d) is a nerve of motion, or efferent nerve, proceeding from the 
front or anterior column, and (e) is a nerve of sensation, or afferent 
nerve, proceeding to the posterior or behind column. They both unite 
at (y"), — on this nerve of sensation is &knot at (^), which is a gang- 
lion. The nerves on the other side correspond. 

All the spinal nerves have these two roots, one anterior and one 
posterior, because they all have sensiferous fibres, and motor fibres. 

The cord is enclosed in three sheaths, or membranes, 
the outer one called the dura mater, the middle one the 
wachnoid, and the inner one the pia mater ; they ex- 
actly correspond to the three that enclose the brain. 

As before stated, the spinal nerves are all in pairs, and 
in each pair one is sensory, and the other motor. There 
are thirty-one of these pairs on each side ot the spine, 
distributed to corresponding parts in the two like halves 
of the body. All the organs of animal life, as before ex- 
plained, are symmetrical, and double, and the nerves con- 
nected with them are the same. The nerves connected 
with the vegetative organs, as will be shown further on, 
are irregular, both in form and manner of distribution, 
like the organs themselves. 



THE SPINAL COED AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 77 



Plate XIII. 



THE 



BRAIN AND SPINAL MARROW, WITH THE 
NERVES PROCEEDING FROM THEM. 



(A) the spinal marrow ; (B) the 
brain; ( c, /, n.) are spinal nerves, 
given off in pairs, on each side, from, 
the spinal marrow. They are cut off 
short, but it can readily be conceived 
how they radiate all over the body, as 
shown in the frontispiece. (g, g.) are 
those nerves which proceed to the 
arms; and (k, k,) those that proceed 
to the lower limbs — the figures i, 2, 
etc., indicate different parts of the 
brain. 

At the very top of the spinal mar- 
row, where it is connected with the 
brain, a number of nerves are to be 
seen which may be supposed con- 
nected with both; and which prob- 
ably are so. 

The white portion of the 
spinal cord is continuous with 
the white matter of the brain, 
and is composed, in a great 
measure, of the fibres of the 
spinal nerves, which are con- 
nected with it. but there are 
also independent fibres proper 
to the cord itself. 

It was formerly thought 
that every one of these nerve- 
fibres continued straight up 
the cord to the brain, but this 
view is not fully supported by 
modern research. It seems 
more probable that they unite 
with the grey, or vesicular, 
matter of the cord itself, 
which is but a continuation 
of the vesicular, or grey mat- 
ter of the brain. 




78 THE SPINAL COED AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA, 

The above plate shows the manner in which the spinal 
nerves proceed from the cord, and the way in which 
that is connected with the brain. The frontispiece also 
shows the same thing. 

There are a few nerves, also in pairs, the origin of which 
cannot be exactly ascertained, and which are, by some 
physiologists, thought to be connected with the spinal 
cord, and by others with the brain ; so that the spinal 
nerves are sometimes reckoned at forty-one, and some- 
times at thirty ; but usually at thirty -one pairs. 

The regular spinal nerves all project horizontally from 
the spinal cord, or crosswise to the body, and none of 
them run lengthwise to it. They are usually reckoned 
at being eight cervical, or neck ; twelve dorsal or back ; and 
five or six sacral, or pelvic. 

On inspecting the separate bones of the spine, in any 
vertebrat d animal, it will be seen that there are small 
round holes in every one ; and it Is through these holes 
that the spinal nerves pass, from the spinal cord, to be 
distributed over the body. 

Plate XIV. 

PART OF THE SPINAL CORD, SHOWING THE 
NERVES PROCEEDING JROM IT. 




This, being a front view, shows only the roots of the anterior 
nerves. From about n upwards is the medulla oblongata, which 
connects the cord with the brain. 

(i.) The pons varolii, (2), roots of the fifth pair of nerves; (3,) the 
sixth pair of nerves; (4,) the facial nerve ; (5,) the auditory nerve, 
or nerve of hearing; (6,) the intermedian nerve; (7,) the glosso- 
pharyngeal nerve; (8,) the pneumo-gastric nerve; (9,) the spinal 
accessory nerve; (10,) the hypoglossal nerve; from 11 to 11, the eight 
cervical nerves; from 12 downwards, the dorsal nerves; (20,) the 
dentated ligament, which separates the anterior and posterior roots. 

Most of these nerves will be shown better further o^when de- 
scribing the brain. 



THE SPINAL COED AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 79 

Special Action of the Spinal Cord. 

It Las already been stated that each part of the ner- 
vous apparatus has some distinct use, or performs some 
particular function, though all the parts are connected, 
and co-operate together. 

The spinal cord conveys to the brain any impressions 
made on the surface cf the body, and also conveys back 
from the brain the influence by which the muscles are 
put into action. If a hot iron touch the body, in any 
part, one of the nerves of sensation at once conveys the 
sensation to the spinal cord, by which it is sent up to 
the brain ; the brain then sends a message back, down 
the cord, which is transmitted, by one of the nerves of 
motion, to the muscles, which move the part away. 

A familiar illustration of this may be given in the case 
of a mosquito bite. One of these insects alights on a 
man, and inserts his venom in the wound he makes, 
causing a smarting sensation, which is instantly convey- 
ed along a nerve of sensation to the spinal cord, and by 
that up to the brain. The brain then instantly sends a 
message down the spinal cord, and from thence along a 
nevve of motion, to the muscles of the arm, which is im- 
mediately raised to crush the offender, or drive it away. 

If the nerves of sensation around the bitten part were 
cut through, the bite would not be felt. And if the 
nerves of motion going to the arm were cut through, it 
could not be raised to drive the mosquito away, though 
its bite might be felt acutely. 

There is no fact in physiology more interesting than 
this, of the double nature of the spinal nerves, and there 
is no fact better demonstrated. All the anterior nerves, 
or those coming from the front part of the cord, on each 
side, are nerves of motion, and all the posterior nerves, 
or those coming from the back part of the cord, on each 
side, are nerves of sensation. 

If the spinal cord be cut through, or seriously injured, 
in any part, as before explained, all the parts below the 
injury lose their connection with the brain, and, conse- 
quently all feeling and power of voluntary motion ; while 
the parts above the injury can still feel and move as be- 
fore, because they are still in connection with the brain. 



80 THE SPINAL CORD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 

In such cases, however, the part of the cord cut 
off from the brain still exercises an influence, through 
the nerves, on many of the vital organs, and can 
even cause motions, but they are quite involuntary, 
and unconscious, because the brain has nothing to do 
with them. iite/to*action occurs in such circumstances. 

If one half of the cord only be injured, it may affoct 
only that side of the body, and the injury may be such 
as to destroy only sensation, or only the power of motion, 
or both. And it may even happen that sensation, or feel- 
ing, may T)e lost on one side, and the power of motion 
on the other, as in the case of the sailor, described in an- 
other place. 

In paralysis there may be loss of motion, or feeling, 
or both, either on one side of the body, (Hemiplegia) or 
in the lohole of the body, from some point in the spine 
downwards, (Paraplegia). And such an affliction may 
arise either from injury, or from changes in the spinal 
cord itself, from disease, or from the pressure of a small 
clot, or swelling, in one of the blood-vessels. 

The spinal cord also transmits impressions across its 
substance, as well as up and down it. Thus, if it^.be cut 
ha»lf through on both sides, with some distance between 
ton cuts, impressions may yet pass along the interme- 
diate part, probably by means of the vesicular matter. 

It appears also that sensations usually pas3 crosswise 
along the spine ; that is, if an impression is made on any 
part of one side of the body, the resulting sensation 
reaches the brain by the opposite half of the cord, and 
not by that half on the side where the impression was 
made. Owing to this peculiarity, if the spinal cord be 
injured on one side, so as to destroy sensation, the loss 
of sensation is experienced, not on the side of the injury, 
but on the opposite side. The same is the case with the 
brain, the effects of such an injury being felt in the op- 
posite side, and not in the side injured. 

Impressions may be sent to the spinal cord, and mo- 
tions may be excited by it in return, without the brain 
being concerned in them at all, as before explained. 
These are called reflex actions, and they are essentially 
unconscious. The act of swallowing is an instance of 
this kind. When a portion of food touches the top of 



THE SPINAL CORD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA, 81 

the throat, it makes an impression, which is conveyed, 
by sentient nerves, to the spinal cord ; and from thence 
comes back, instantly, the influence which sets in motion 
the muscles that accomplish the act of swallowing". All 
this is quite involuntary, and may take place uncon- 
sciously — it is simply a reflex action. We masticate the 
food and send it to the back of the mouth, voluntarily 
and consciously, but when it once gets there the swallow- 
ing muscles act involuntarily, by reflex action, and we 
could not call the food back if we tried, when it gets to 
a certain part of the throat. 

Breathing is also an involuntary, or reflex action, and 
cannot be prevented, for any length of time, by an act 
of the will. There is also much constant, necessary 
muscular action, in many of the vital organs, that is 
purely reflex, — involuntary, and unconscious. The con- 
stant perist^tic motion of the bowels, and the perpetual 
contraction of the sphincter muscle, are instances of this. 

There are also some motions that may be either volun- 
tary or reflex. Thus, the generative organs may be vio- 
lently excited, by licentious thoughts, and they may also 
be in voluntarily excited, by reflex action, from the testicles 
being overcharged with semen, — from the influence of 
drugs — or even from a full bladder. 

In this case the involuntary reflex action may react 
upon the brain, excite a libidinous consciousness, and 
lead to voluntary gratification. 

In some cases actions that are usually thought to be 
only voluntary, may be performed from reflex action 
only. Thus, if a frog's head be cut off, he will stand up 
on his legs as before, and will shrink away if his skin be 
irritated. And if a chicken be beheaded, it will often 
run a considerable distance afterward. Now, these motions 
are caused solely by reflex action from the spinal cord, 
the brain, of course, having nothing to do with them; they 
are therefore involuntary and unconscious,— there can be 
no knowledge of them, nor any sensation with them. 

Many cold-blooded animals exhibit these reflex actions 
in a remarkable degree, but they also occur in human 
beings. Thus, if the finger be pressed on the palm of a 
sleeping child, it will often grasp it instantly, and firmly, 
without waking, — the action being simply reflex. 



82 THE SPINAL COKD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 



Natural reflex operations of the spinal cord, such as 
breathing, never cease during life, but they never cause 
fatigue. All voluntary actions, however, which occur 
through the brain, cause fatigue, sooner or later, and can 
only be kept up for a time, after which there must be 
rest, and sleep, to give the exhausted brain time to re- 
plenish its power. 

In some cases of disease, and under the influence of 
certain drugs, the cord may be unduly excited, so that 
the resulting reflex motions may be of the most violent 
character. Thus, in lock-jaw, (tetanus), an injury to 
some part of the surface of the body may so excite the 
spinal cord as to cause the most forcible muscular con- 
traction, especially of the jaws, so that the patient can- 
not open them. Strychnine will also act in a similar 
manner, and cause most violent convulsions. 

All such actions are simply reflex, and thAgh they are 
usually confined to the cord, yet the brain may also be- 
come affected, as in hydrophobia. 

It should be observed here that the anterior, and pos- 
terior, columns of the spinal cord partake of the nature 
of the nerves connected with them ; that is, the anterior, 
or front colamn, is motor, and the posterior, or rear col- 
umn, is sensory. If the anterior portion of the cord be 
irritated, it causes motion in all the parts below, which 
receive spinal nerves ; and if the posterior portion be irri- 
tated, it causes pain in the same parts. 

If the posterior part of the cord be cut through, and 
the two parts irritated, it will be found that pain will be 
felt only from the upper portion, because that is the 
only one connected with the brain, and the course of in- 
fluence is upward in the posterior column. 

If the anterior portion of the cord be cut through, and 
both portions irritated, motion will take place only in 
the lower part, because the nervous influence only pro- 
ceeds downwards in the anterior column. 

Usually, however, in such experiments, motion and 
sensation, to some extent, occur together, probably from 
reflex influence in the cord itself. 

From these explanations it will be seen that the spinal 
cord is, in some relations, a primary source of nervous 
power, and is independent of the brain. But still they 






THE SPINAL CORD AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 83 

are so connected that each influences the other, and es- 
pecially the brain influences the spinal cord. 

So much so is this the case, that many of the spmal- 
' functions can be controlled, or influenced, at will, 
through the action of the brain. There are some ani- 
mals that have no brain, or only a merely rudimentary 
one ; and, of course, in them all the functions are carried 
on by the action of the spinal cord alone, but they are 
merely vital, or vegetative functions. In sound sleep 
it is the same in man. The brain is then perfectly inac- 
tive, but all the vital functions still continue, through 
the influence of the spinal cord. 

This explains how a foetus may be born, and live, 
without a brain. Such a being has no consciousness, nor 
conscious sensation, but lives like a vegetable ; needing no 
other nervous influence than that from the spinal cord. 

The Medulla Oblongata. 

Between the brain and the spinal cord is a peculiar 
body of nervous matter called the Medulla Oblongata, 
which is connected with the cord below and with the 
brain above. It is composed of the medulla proper, and 
of a number of variously-formed bodies, all connected 
together, the special functions of many of which are not 
known. These different parts are represented in the 
following plates, which represent the medulla, and the 
connected parts, from different points of view. 

It is quite possible that some of these bodies, and some 
others in the brain, whose uses are unknown, are rudi- 
mentary organs, which may yet be developed, and evolve 
new faculties in man, different from, and superior to, any 
he now possesses. 

It is probable that man has thus been developed from 
some inferior animal, by the gradual evolution of organs 
which inferior beings possess, but only in a rudimentary 
state. 

There are many questions in which man now feels a 
deep interest, which he is utterly incapable of compre- 
hending, any more than a horse can comprehend mathe- 
matics. The future man may, however, comprehend 
them, and even matters still more abstruse than any we 



84 THE SPINAL COED AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 

now puzzle over. It is only a matter of brain, and as 
the brain of man is merely a more complete develop- 
ment of that of the ape, so may the brain of the future 
man be only a still more complete development of the 
present human brain. 

The medulla oblongata proper commences at the fis- 
sure (8) in Fig. 1, (Plate XV.) and goes downwards, till it 
insensibly passes into the spinal cord. All the other 
parts are placed on the top of the medulla. 

Special uses of ihe Medulla Oblongata. 

The medulla oblongata may be considered as the ter- 
mination of the spinal cord, or as the connecting link be- 
tween it and the brain. The general functions of .some 
of its parts are the same as those of the several portions 
of the cord. Thus, the anterior pyramids, and the oli- 
vary tracts, are like the anterior portion of the cord, and 
convey from the brain the influence that causes motion. 
The posterior pyramids, like the posterior portion of the 
cord, convey only sensation. 

The medulla is, however, a nervous centre itself, and 
from it originates the nervous power that influences 
breathing and swallowing. Experiment has shown that 
the brain may be removed from an animal, and even the 
spinal marrow destroyed up to the neck, without causing 
death, providing the medulla oblongata be uninjured. 
Immediately this part is seriously hurt, however, death 
ensues because the power of breathing is lost, owing to 
there being no nervous influence evolved to set the requi- 
site muscles in action. 

It is the medulla oblongata that is injured when a man 
is garroted, as practised in Cuba. The victim is seated 
in a chair, with a kind of iron collar round his neck, 
through which, behind, works a powerful screw, with a 
sharp point. This point is placed against the back of 
the neck and one turn of the screw forces it into the me- 
dulla oblongata. If the point be rightly placed death 
is instantaneous. 

Some forms of difficulty of breathing arise from dis- 
ease of this part of the nervous system, and are attrib- 
uted to disease of the lungs. Difficulty of swallowing 
may also arise from the same cause, because the process 



THE SPINAL COED AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 85 

of swallowing as well as breathing, depends upon nerv- 
ous influence from the medulla oblongata. The power 
of speech may also be similarly affected. 

Being an independent nervous centre, the functions of 
the medulla oblongata can be carried on unconsciously, 
and involuntarily, by simple reflex action, and thus we 
breathe, and swallow, — the saliva, for instance, — while 
we are asleep. Still it is connected with the brain, and 
we can influence both breathing and swallowing, to a 
certain extent, by an act of the will. We can stop 
breathing, but only for a time, because the necessity for 
air soon becomes too urgent to be longer resisted 
Breathing, therefore, is not a voluntary act, but can be 
partially influenced by the will, for a time. No man 
could hold his breath long enough to die from it, because 
the reflex nervous action would compel him to breathe in 
spite of his will. 

Medicines which affect the brain, or spinal marrow, may 
not affect the medulla oblongata ; and thus a person may 
become quite insensible, from chloroform, for instance, 
and yet keep on breathing, because the drug paralyses 
only the brain. Some drugs, however, do affect the me- 
dulla, and cause difficulty of breathing, or swallowing, 
and sometimes this difficulty arises spontaneously. Many 
persons have felt the peculiar sensation of suddenly not 
being able to swallow, or breathe, as if they had forgot- 
ten how. This arises from temporary suspension of nerv- 
ous influence from the medulla, which is soon restored, 
however, by reflex action. 

The Pons Varolii. — This part is a bond of connec- 
tion, or bridge, between the two parts of the cerebellum, 
and between them and the medulla oblongata proper, and 
therefore connects the spinal cord with the brain. It 
also appears to be, to a certain extent, an independent 
nervous centre, like the medulla itself. For experiment 
has shown that when the entire brain is removed, some 
sensation seems still to be left if the pons be irritated, 
and some motions also originate from it. 

It will thus be seen that many parts of the nervous 
apparatus have certain peculiar functions, more or less 
independent, and peculiar to themselves, though all the 
parts cooperate together, and influence one another. 



86 THE SPINAL C03D AND MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 



Plate XV. 

THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 
Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 




Fig. i. Front view of the medulla oblongata, (i), portion of the 
optic nerves ; (2), the crus cerebri ; (3), tuber cinereum ; (4), corpora- 
albicantia ; (5), locus perforatus ; (6), pons varolii ; (7), part of the cere- 
bellum; (8), the Assure which separates the pons varolii from the me- 
dulla; (9), enlargement of the medulla; (10), the anterior pyramid; 
(11), olivary body; (12), anterior portion of the restiform body; (13), 
neck of the medulla oblongata; (16) shows the fissuie dividing the me- 
dulla oblongata, and cord, into its two portions; (17) is the anterior 
lateral furrow. 

Fig. 2. Posterior view of the medulla oblongata. (1), part of the 
optic tract ; (2), tubcrcula quadrigemina ; (3), triangular band ; (4), 
crus cerebelli ; (5), medulja oblongata ; (6), the fourth ventricle ; (7), fis- 
sure of the fourth ventricle, which forms part of the calamus scrip- 
tori us, ox pen nib, the form of which may be plainly seen, this fissure 
representing the split of the pen ; (8), the mammary swelling, close by 
the pen nib ; (9), part of the restiform body ; (12), the middle fissure ; 
(13,) the lateral furrow ; (14), posterior furrow. 

Fig. 3. Anterior view of the medulla oblongata. (6), the anterior 
column of the spinal cord, divided into two parts ; (7), the middle, or 
lateral column, (the columns are all seen to divide into three or four 
parts, v/hich cross and intermix with each other) ; (8, 8), the pyramids ; 
(9), white fibres of the pyramid ; (10), part of the pons varolii ; (11), 
deep section of the fibres of the pons ; (12), olivary body ; (13), the 
right olivary body. 



CHAPTEK VI. 

THE BRAIN, AND THE NEKVES OF SPECIAL SENSATIONS. 

The Brain. 

It lias already been explained that the spinal cord is, 
as far as organic, or vegetative life is concerned, the 
principal nervous centre, to which the brain is added, as 
the nervous organ of animal life. In some of the inferi- 
or beings the spinal cord alone seems to suffice for all 
nervous needs ; but a brain of some kind must always 
exist where there is consciousness, or mind, and volun- 
tary motion. And, in fact, there is good reason to sup- 
pose that no perfect animal, however small and inferior 
it may be, is without brain, and consequently mind, # the 
same as the brain and mind of man — only different in de- 
gree, as will be shown further on. 

The brain is therefore an addition to the spinal mar- 
row, and, in fact, its principal parts originate from it, and 
partake of its powers, only in an exalted degree. 

The two main masses of the brain are called the cere- 
brum, and the cerebellum. 

The cerebrum comprises all the upper and frontal part 
of the brain, overlapping the cerebellum, which lies 
under it, at the top of the spinal marrow, as shown in 
the annexed plate. 

(87) 



THE BRAIN. 



Plate XVI. 

THE BRAIN VIEWED SIDEWAYS. 




(i) is the tipper part of the spinal cord, or medulla oblongata ; (3) is 
the cerebellum, which has the appearance of being formed of sir ice or 
cords, owing to a number of furrows, or fissures, which descend into 
its substance. The large mass^ above is the cerebrum, which is seen to 
be»formed in folds, or convolutions, the fissures between which extend 
to a considerable depth. 

The exterior of both these bodies is formed of vesicu- 
lar, or grey nervous matter, but internally they are 
formed of nervous fibres. 

The fibrous, or inner portion, of both cerebrum and 
cerebellum, is only a continuation, or expansion, of the 
fibrous substance of the spinal cord, which is continued, 
as previously explained, from the cord itself up into the 
medulla oblongata. From the medulla the fibrous mat- 



THE BBAIN. 89 

ter of the cords ascends to the crus cerebri, and then 
divides, forming two masses, or bundles — one being the 
base, or foundation, of the cerebrum, and the other of 
the cerebellum, each of which contains both kinds of 
fibres, sensory and motor, owing to the crossing and in- 
terlacing of the auterior and posterior fibres. 

So far, then, as before remarked, the brain is merely an 
expansion of the spinal marrow. But the exterior, or 
vesicular matter of the brain, is not derived from, nor 
connected with, the vesicular or grey matter of the 
spinal cord ; on the contrary, it is quite unconnected 
with, and independent of it. 

The vesicular matter of the cord is, it is true, continued 
up into the corpus striatum, where it forms a dark col- 
ored mass, called the locus niger ; but it is in no way 
continuous with the vesicular matter of the brain. 

The only direct connection, therefore, between the 
spinal cord and the brain is by the fibres, and these, as 
before explained, form the interior, both of the cerebrum 
and the cerebellum, and they also radiate upon the sur- 
face of the cerebral convolutions in all directions. So 
fine are these fibres, and so universally are they distrib- 
uted, that it is calculated there must be many millions 
of them altogether. 

The convolutions, or folds, of the cerebrum and cere- 
bellum, increase the amount of surface presented by the 
vesicular matter, and thus gives more space, on which 
the nervous fibres, and the bloodvessels, can be distribu 
ted. If this surface was smooth, it would only be a few 
inches in extent; but the depth of the furrows, and the 
windings and turnings of the convolutions increase it so 
much, that it is calculated to be equal to some six hun- 
dred and seventy square inches, for both cerebrum and 
cerebellum. 

Underneath the brain, at its base, are a number of dif- 
ferent ganglions, or vesicular masses, some of which are 
connected with the organs of the special senses — sight, 
hearing, smell, and taste. But the functions of the 
others have not yet been made out. These parts are all 
connected with each other, and, being double, are also 
connected with their like on the opposite aide of the 
brain. 



90 



THE BKAIN. 

Plate XVII. 

THE TOP OF THE BRAIN. 




In this view nothing is seen but the cerebrum, (a) shows the fis- 
sure that divides it into the two halves ; (£, b, £, £,) show the convolu- 
tions, or folds. 

In fact, all the parts of the brain are connected, both 
directly and indirectly, with each other, in the most be- 
wildering manner, so that it is difficult to study, or think 
of, any part as an independent organ. 

The following cue will show the appearance of the 
base, or under part of the brain. 



THE BRAIN. 91 

Plate XVIII. 

UNDER-SURFACE, OR BASE OF THE BRAIN. 




(a, a, a, «,) are the convolutions, or folds of the cerebrum ; (<5, £,) 
are the two halves of the cerebellum ; (c, c,) are the two branches of 
the optic nerve, one for each eye ; (<f,) the pons varolii ; (e, e,) part of 
the medulla oblongata ; (_/",) part of the spinal marrow ; (£-,) the ol- 
factory nerve, or nerve of smell. 

The brain is enclosed in three coverings, or membranes, 
analogous to those which enclose the spinal cord, and 
probably continuous with them. The outer covering", called 
the dura mater, is strong and tough, and at certain parts 
grows fast to the inside of the skull. The middle mem- 
brane, called the arachnoid, or spider web, is so fine that 
it is scarcely visible. The inner membrane, or pia mater 



92 THE BRAIN. 

covers the brain completely, in every part, and even de- 
scends, in some places, iDto the interior. 

In the inside of the brain are several cavities, or hol- 
low spaces, two of which are pretty large ; they are 
called ventricles. Into these cavities there is constantly 
exuded a clear fluid, which is absorbed, in a healthy state, 
as fast as it is secreted, but in disease it sometimes ac- 
cumulates in large quantities, and distends the whole 
head. In some cases many gallons have thus accumul- 
ated. This is called, hydrocephalus, or water in the head. 

The brain itself is almost entirely devoid of sensibility, 
and may be even cut away without causing any pain. 
In many cases when the skull has been fractured, and 
part of the brain has extruded, it has been shaved off, 
without any evil consequences, and in some of the lower 
animals it has been entirely removed, without any sign 
of suffering. If, however, the medulla oblongata be 
touched, then the most acute pain is felt. 

M. Flourens performed some very curious experiments 
on the brain, to show how it was affected by wounds, 
and especially how curable many such wounds were. 
He took dogs, and rabbits, made holes in the top of the 
skull, and through the membranes into the brain, and 
then dropped lead bullets into the wounds. The weight 
of the bullets carried them down, through the substance 
of the brain, tUJL they reached a firm part, where they 
became imbedded. This was through the cerebrum, and, 
strange to say, no particular distress seemed to be caused 
by the bullet, nor were any of the mental faculties at all 
affected. There remained for some time a canal, or pas- 
sage, down which the bullet had passed, but this even- 
tually closed, and finally healed up perfectly. When, 
however, the hole was made further back, so that the 
bullet, when it reached the bottom, pressed upon the 
base of the brain, or sensorium, death soon ensued. 

These experiments explain many of those cases where 
soldiers have had bullets in their heads for years, with 
no apparent inconvenience, and which appear so strange. 
If the bullet be merely in the cerebral hemispheres, it 
may lodge where it may do no harm, but if it reach the 
sensorium, or cerebellum, it may cause paralysis, or death. 

It has also been found, in some cases of sudden death, 



THE BRAIN. 93 

• 

that one half of the brain has been totally destroyed by 
disease, without the patient showing any very unusual 
symptoms. 

This, however, will not appear so inexplicable, when 
it is borne in mind that the two halves of the brain, 
though connected, can act. each by itself. They are, 
in fact, in one sense, two brains, and can act either se- 1 
parately, or unitedly. All the organs connected with.; 
them are in pairs, one of each belonging to each side, 
and all the corresponding parts being exactly alike. 

Generally the two halves of the brain, and the parts 
connected with them, are exactly equal ; but sometimes 
one side is more powerful, or active than the other. In- 
deed Dr. Brown-Sequard believes, as the result of his 
experiments, that the right side of the brain is* more im- 
portant, for organic life, than the left side. lie also says 
that, though the two sides are alike, at birth, yet the 
right side, eventually, becomes quite different to the 
other, owing to its greater functional activity. ' 

Although the nerves of the special senses, and others, 
in connection with the brain are usually spoken of as the 
cerebral, or brain nerves, yet it is not by any means sure 
that they are so in reality. Some anatomists think that 
they can all be traced to the top of the spinal marrow, and 
that no nerves originate directly from the brain itself. 

These so-called brain nejves, unlike those of the spinal 
cord, are not always found in symmetrical pairs, one sen- 
sory and one motor, though most of them are double, 
both parts performing the same function, but on oppo- 
site sides of the body. They have, however, connected 
with them, ordinary nerves of sensation and motion, to 
assist them in the performance of their functions. 

Whether the cerebral nerves are really derived directly 
from the brain, or n t, It is certain that they are inti- 
mately connected with it, and influenced by it, and they 
also exert a marked effect on the brain in return. All 
our ideas, and all our knowledge of the world we live 
in, is acquired through the actions of these nerves. 



94 THE BRAIN. 

• Plate XIX. 

THE BRAENT CUT THROUGH THE MIDDLE. 




(«, «, «,) The cerebrum ; (£,) the cerebellum, the centre of which 
is formed something like a tree ; (c,) the medulla oblongata ; (d,) the 
spinal marrow ; (/,) the lateral ventricle, or cavity in the centre of 
the brain — usually containing a fluid. 

(1), The olfactory nerve, or nerve of smell, going to the nose ; (2), 
the optic nerve, or nerve of sight, going to the eye ; (3, 4, 5, 6,) the 
third, fourth, fifth, and sixth nerves ; (7), is the auditory nerve, or 
nerve of hearing, (the short one, which is cut off, below the figure 7,) 
the large branching nerve on which the figure 7 is placed, is called 
the portio dura of the seventh nerve ; ^3), (branching), the glosso- 
pharyngeal nerve. The nerve without branches, marked 8, which de- 
scends straight down, parallel with the spinal cord, is the par vagum ; 
(8"), the spinal accessory nerve; (9), the hypoglossal nerve ; (10), the 
sub-occipital nerve ; (11, 12,) two pairs of spinal nerves. 

Having thus shown the location of the different cere- 
bral nerves, we will now proceed to show the nature of 
their special functions, and the connection which exists 
amongst them. 



THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN". 95 

The Nerves of the Brain, or Cerebral JSferves. 

The Olfactory Mrve.—The function of this nerve, 
which is distributed on the inner surface of the nose, 
is to enable us to smell ; without it we should have no 
idea of odor at all. The manner of its distribution will 
be shown by the following cut : 

Plate XX. 

THE OLFACTORY NERVE. 

i and 2. Show the manner 
in which this nerve ramifies 
on the inner membrane of the 
nose, and of the air passage 
leading from it. 

In some persons this 
nerve is very sensitive ; 
and they can detect slight 
odors which other people 
oannot perceive at all. 
Sometimes it is absent, 
or dormant, for there 
are people utterly without smell, and I believe deaf- 
and dumb people usually are so. Many diseases will 
destroy the sense of smell, and some will make it preter- 
naturally acute, or pervert it in a singular manner. A. 
common cold, as is well known, will, for a time, fre- 
quently destroy all power of smell, and taste too. 

Certain persons, and also animals, are peculiarly af- 
fected by certain odors. The excitement which the 
smell of valerian will cause, in a cat, is amusing to ob- 
serve, while the oil of rhodium will irrisistably attract 
many animals, and even fish, who are often caught by it. 
Different odors affect the brain in different ways, caus- 
ing a variety of sensations, pleasing or disagreeable, 
and sometimes producing the most uncontrolable excite- 
ment, as in the case of the dog, when his olfactory 
nerve is affected by the scent of the female, when in 
heat. This is an illustration of reflex action, the odor 
affecting the brain, and the brain reflecting the influence 
back on the sexual organs. 




96 THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 

In the case of sneezing, also, we have a good illustra- 
tion of reflex action. Some irritating substance, like snuff, 
for instance, attacks the mucous membrane of the nose, 
and immediately the sensation is conveyed to the nervous 
centre, from which comes back, along a motor nerve, the 
influence which sets in action the appropriate muscles 
which cause a sneeze, to expel the intruder. This re- 
flex action will occur in spite of our will, if the irrita- 
tion is powerful enough, and is, in fact, usually quite 
involuntary. 

Smelling is probably only a modification of the gene- 
ral sense of touch, or common feeling, which we possess 
more especially at the ends of the fingers. But owing 
to some peculiarity of formation in the olfactory nerve, 
the sense is here specialised, or modified in a certain 
manner. In fact, all the senses, sight, hearing, smell, 
and taste, are probably only modifications, or special 
manifestations of the sense of touch. 

Animals can sometimes smell things an astonishingly 
long way off— further, probably, than they can see ; and 
in some cases they can detect odors of whose existence 
our noses give us no idea. The uneasiness that dogs 
sometimes exhibit when people are dying, is supposed 
to be caused in this way, — they really smell the changes 
which approaching dissolution is causing in the bodily 
substance. 

The perverted sense of smell may cause, in some cases 
of nervous disease, peculiar hallucinations, as will be 
shown further on. And in many cases we can act upon 
Diseases, or medicate for them, by means of odors, 
through the sense of smell, better than we can by giving 
drugs into the stomach ! 

This may seem strange to those unacquainted with 
such subjects, but it is very simple. A scent, or odor, 
is merely some of the odorous substance in a fine gaseous 
state, which can be drawn into the nostrils, and absorbed 
from thence, like air. In this state it can reach parts of 
the system that grosser medicines cannot— especially the 
nervous centres, in whose organic changes and functions 
gases play an important part. 

This matter will however, be more especially treated 
upon in a subsequent chapter. 

It is, perhaps, scarcely necessary to state, that if the 






THE NEKVES OF THE BEAIN. 97 

olfactory nerve were cut through, so that there should be 
no connection between its terminal fibres and the brain, 
there would be no sense of smell, though there might be 
sneezing when the nostril was irritated, because that is 
simply a reflex muscular action. 

The Optic Nerve. 

This is one of the most wonderful and important 
nerves in the body. It connects the eye with- the ner- 
vous centre, and its function is to convey the impressions 
made on the eye to the brain, so that we may become 
conscious of them. The eye itself is a perfect optical in- 
strument, which receives, and transmits, the images of 
objects presented before it, but we cannot see by the eye 
alone, any more than we can by a glass one. The optic 
nerve must connect tue instrument with the brain, be- 
fore the brain can take cognisance of what is presented 
to the instrument. 

A loss of the power of seeing, or blindness, may there- 
fore arise in two different ways. There may be some- 
thing wrong with the eye, — t\m instrument,— or with the 
optic nerve. Blind people are often found with perfect 
eyes, but owing to some change in the optic nerve, no 
impressions made upon them are conveyed to the 
brain ; and this causes blindness, as certainly as if the 
eye itself were destroyed or injured. Such blindness is 
called Amaurosis. 

There are as many peculiarities, and diversities, in the 
sense of sight, as in that of smell. Some people, as it is 
well-known, can see small objects at a greater distance 
than others, owing to peculiarities in the construction of 
the eye. But there are certain peculiarities of vision, by 
which some people differ from most others, that ap- 
parently do not depend on the eye, but upon peculiarities 
in the optic nerve, or the part of the nervous centre it is 
connected with.. This is especially the case in regard to 
color. Most people perceive, and distinguish all the 
ordinary colors, but there are persons who are 'more or 
less color blind ! That is, they never see certain colors 
at all, or cannot distinguish them from other colors, and 
occasionally even there is no distinction, but all things 



98 THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 

have the same hue. This seems strange, but it is never- 
theless the case, and a man's eye may be perfect, as far 
as seeing everything else is concerned, and yet to him all 
things have the same color. 

Plate XXI. 

THE EYE AND OPTIC NERVE. 



u~.ar 



(o) is the optic nerve, proceeding from the bottom of the ball of the 
eye to the brain. The different parts of the eye are seen arranged 
like the glasses of a telescope, and the image, which is formed on 
them, is reflected, through the ball, on to the bulb of the optic nerve, 
at the bottom, from whence perception of it is excited in the brain. 

In some diseases the forms, size, and colors of sur- 
rounding objects change in the most singular manner, 
and images may be seen of objects that are really not 
present. The same effect may also follow the use of cer- 
tain drugs, especially the Indian Hemp, or Haschich ! 
In such states a man knows not how far anything 
which he sees is real or not, and such states are more 
common than is supposed, especially in certain condi- 
tions of the nervous .system. 



THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 99 

• 

In a state of high nervous excitement, such as that 
caused by extreme religious enthusiasm, both sight and 
hearing are deranged, and the person sees objects that 
are not present, and hears words that are not spoken. 
So vivid, in fact, may be the false impressions, that they 
may overpower real ones made at the same time ; 
and a man may honestly testify to having seen sights, 
and heard sounds, that never existed. 

There have been many instances of this kind, in 
which persons have seen false images of people so dis- 
tinctly, from a morbid state of the eye, that they could 
not tell the false appearances from real ones. One gen- 
tleman afflicted in this way used to have his room, at 
times, crowded with people, and could tell them from 
real beings only by speaking to them, or trying to touch 
them. When he met a friend in the street he was never 
sure, without accosting him, whether it was really his 
friend or his image. Being a scientific man, he was 
neither terrified at this, nor superstitious about it, but 
put himself at o"nce under a course of medical treatment, 
which soon banished all the ghosts. 

An uninformed and superstitious person would have 
regarded such an occurrence as a Supernatural visita- 
tion, intended as a learning; and instead of the physician 
would have gone to the priest. 

The early history of all religions abounds in instances 
of visions, and of mysterious- voices, all of which, when 
not invented, arose from a morbid condition of the ner- 
vous system, and of the eye and ear/Indeed, such things 
occur even now, at love-feasts and prayer-meetings, and 
are believed to be real, just as they were thousands of 
years ago. Nothing can banish such superstitions, and 
cause such occurrences to be regarded in their true light, 
but the universal dissemination of real scientific knowl- 
edge, — not the mere scholastic and dogmatic icord learn- 
ing, which is now called knowledge. 

Connected with the eye are many nerves of common 
sensation, and of motiou, to assist in its various opera- 
tions. Thus it has to be moved in different directions, 
and its lids have to be opened and shut, to admit or ex- 
clude the light, all of which are ordinary muscular 
motions. 

This opening and closing of the lids gives a good il« 



100 THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 

• 

lustration of both reflex and voluntary action. Thus we 
can close the eyelids voluntarily, whenever we choose, but 
if a sudden gleam of intense light falls upon the eye, or 
any object be thrust at it, the lids close at once, involun- 
tarily, by reflex action. 

This is well shown in the following cut. 

Plate XXII. 

THE EYE AND ITS NERVES. 




(a) is the eye ; (bb) the muscles of the eyelid ; (c) is the optic nerve. 
The arrows show the direction of the influence from a beam of light, 
down the optic nerve, by (d and e) y till it reaches the nerve of motion, 
(/), which is seen to branch and ramify on the eyelid, at (gg)\ {k) is a 
portion of the brain, where the optic nerve terminates. 

Suppose, now, a suHden beam of light strikes the eye, 
it sends an impression, or sensation, down to the optic 
nerve, as shown by the arrows. This impression is then 
conveyed, by the optic nerve, to the brain, from whence 
a nervous impulse is transmitted down the nerve of mo- 
tion/, which acts on the muscles of the eyelid and. closes it. 
This is purely a reflex action, the light acting down the 
optic nerve, to the nervous centre, and from thence back 
along the nerve of motion to the eyelid. 

If the optic nerve were to be cut, the light would not be 
feltj and if the nerve of motion were to be cut the lid 
could not be closed, though the light were felt ever so 
painfully. 

The same muscle can be also acted upon, and the eye- 
lid closed, or opened directly, by the will, acting on the 



THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 101 

nerve of motion, without any external stimulus whatever. 
Such an act may therefore be either voluntary or reflex. 

The Third Nerve. — This is exclusively a nerve of 
motion, and it originates from the anterior column of the 
spinal cord, where it runs up to the cerebrum. It goes 
to the muscles of the eye alone. 

The Fourth Nerve. — This^is the smallest nerve in the 
bouy, and in man is only about the size of a small sewing 
thread It is connected only with one muscle, called the 
trochleator, which moves the eye. Like the third, it is a 
nerve of motion only, and probably it originates from 
the spinal cord also, but its commencement has not yet 
been fully traced. 

The Fifth Nerve. — This is a large, and important 
nerve, with extensive ramifications. It arises by double 
roots, and is therefore both sensory and motor, and is the 
highest in the body of that class. It has many branches, 
going to different parts of the face, the first of which, 
(marked 5, in Plate 19,) is distributed to the eye, eye- 
brows, forehead, and neighboring parts, to which it gives 
common sensation, or touch. This branch arises altogether 
from the posterior, or sensitive column of the spinal 
cord. 

It is very instructive to consider what would happen 
if this branch of the 5th nerve were destroyed. None of 
the parts to which it is distributed would then have any 
sense of touch, or feeling, and might be cur, or pinched 
without any sensation. Even the eye itself would nob 
feel any hurt,- tender as it ordinarily is ; but still it would 
be sensitive to light, just the same as before, because that 
is a special sensation, depending on the optic nerve. 

The second branch (5", Plate 19,) also arises from the 
posterior column of the spinal cord, and it gives common 
touch, or .feeling, to the upper jaw and lips, and to the 
palate. It is a sensory branch only, like the first branch. 

The third branch, (5", Plate 19,) is both sensor and 
motor, and it has fibres which arise from both the 
anterior and posterior columns of the spinal cord. It 
gives both sensibility and motion to the muscles, skin, and 
other parts, of the lower jaw, the tongue, and the mouth. 

It is usually the sensory branches of the fifth nerve 
that are affected in cases of Tic Dcloureux, and also in 
most cases of Toothache and Xeuralgia. 



102 THE NERVES OE THE BRAIN. 

When the extensive ramifications of this nerve are 
considered, and its numerous connections with other 
nerves of the head, we need not be surprised at the suffer- 
ing which results from an affection of any of its branches. 
Tic Doloureux, as it is well-known, will often dart like 
lightning, from one part to another, and the pain of 
toothache will affect the whole head. The twitchings 
which are often experienced, in different parts of the 
face, arise mostly irom reflex action, through branches 
of the fifth nerve. In some cases, there is a permanent 
tie, as it is called, and the patient all the time practices 
some grimace, or twist of the features, occasionally of an 
extremely ludicrous or disagreeable character. This is 
quite involuntary, and arises from some permanent cause 
of irritation in the motor nerve. 

By concentrating all the power of the will on the action, 
it may be, in some cases, temporarily arrested, but re- 
turns again when the attention is withdrawn from it. 
The only cure is to destroy the motor nerve connected 
with the twitching muscle, and this cannot always be done. 

The Sixth Nerve. — This, like the third and fourth, 
arises only from* the anterior column of the spinal cord, 
and is therefore only a nerve of motion ; end, like the 
fourth nerve, it causes motion only in a single muscle of 
the eye. 

The Seventh Nerve. — This has two parts, one called 
the portio dura, or hard portion, and the other the sjft 
portion. 

The hard portion of the nerve (7, Plate 19,) is a nerve 
of motion coming from the anterior column, and is dis- 
tributed to the muscles of the cheeks and forehead. If 
this nerve be cut through, on one side of the face, the 
muscles around the mouth, on that side, will cease to 
act, and it will be drawn over to the other side* This is 
often seen in paralysis of one side of the face. 

The short nerve j ust below the figure 7, in plate 19, 
is the soft portion of the seventh nerve ; it is sensory, 
and goes to the inside of the ear, constituting the audi- 
tory nerve, or nerve of hearing. 

Without this nerve we should have no perception of 
sound, but should be deaf No matter how perfect the 
ear might be, it could distinguish no sound without this 



THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 103 

nerve — the same as the eye is incapable of imparting 
vision without the optic nerve. 

The structure of the ear is admirably adapted to collect 
sound, and to modulate it, so that the most delicate 
tones can be distinguished. It is a perfect instrument 
for the purpose, as the eye is for seeing, but the instru- 
ment is useless without the nerve to connect it with the 
nervous centre. 

Plate XXIII. 

THE EAR, AND AUDITORY NERVE. 




(A; is the external ear, which collects the sound ; (m) the canal 
leading to the inner parts ; (t) the drum, or sounding box ; (d) the 
membrane of the drum ; (b) the small bones of the drum ; (k) the 
cochlea, or snail shell ; (s) the canals ; (e) the Eustachian tube, which 
leads from the ear into the throat ; in) is the Auditory Nerve. 

A morbid condition of the auditory nerve may affect it 
in various ways. In some cases hearing may become 
agonisingly acute, so that sounds can be heard which are 
too low for ordinary good hearing to distinguish at all. 
It seems impossible, in some of these cases, to shut out' 
sound ; and, just as the excited eye can see, in what is 
usually called darkness, so can the excited ear dis- 
tinguish sounds, when all seems perfectly still to the 
normal ear. 



104 THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 

In cases of delirium, or great excitement, persons will 
often bear voices, and other sounds, which have never 
been uttered, j ust as others will often see what is not 
present. Unscientific people usually think such things 
are supernatural, and we have on record numerous 
communications of this kind, which are believed in as 
realities, though only the results of disease. Dying peo- 
ple, whose perceptions of the realities around them are 
getting dim, are very apt to have the last remnants of 
vitality concentrated in the special senses, and hence 
they see, and hear, in a morbid state, uncontrolled by 
the judgment. The visions which haunt the dying pil- 
low, and the voices that salute the dying ear, pleasing 
or painful as the case may be, though they are often 
thought to be supernatural, originate in this way. 

A religious enthusiast, or a conscience-haunted crimi- 
nal, can readily hear voices, or see visions ; and so also 
can any one while suffering under peculiar forms of 
disease. It is therefore'important to bear in mind that 
seeing, and hearing, are not always to be believed, no 
matter how strong may be the conviction, or assertion of 
their reality ; and it must be further borne in mind, that, 
in periods of great excitement, thousands of people may 
all be afflicted with the same disease, or illusion, at the 
same time. Hearing is merely a modification of touch, 
or common feeling, the same as seeing, and smelling. 
It is due to the vibrations of the air striking on the drum 
of the ear. Deafness may arise either from malforma- 
tion, or derangement of the ear, or from abscence. or tor- 
pidity of the nerve. But even deaf people have a cer- 
tain amount of sensation similar to hearing, though it is 
not localized. They can feel the tremor of loud sounds, 
such as thunder, or artillery, and thus may be said to 
hear in the whole body. 

No. 8. The Glossopharyngeal Nerve. (The branching 
nerve marked 8.) — r lhis is so named because it is dis- 
tributed both to the tongue and to the pharynx. Its 
nature and functions are not yet perfeclly understood. 
Some physiologists consider it to be only a motor 
nerve, while others think it both motor and sensiferous, 
and others again consider it to be the exclusive source of 
the sense of taste. Those who adopt this view think 
that the Glossopharyngeal nerve gives special taste to 



THE NERVES OF THE BEAIN. 105 

the tongue, and the third branch of the fifth nerve com- 
mon sensation or touch. 

It has been thought, however, with good reason, that 
both the special sense of taste, and also common sensa- 
tion, may both be derived from the fifth nerve, because 
taste is merely a modification of touch. 

In short, this nerve is not yet well understood, and its 
functions are probably complicated. It certainly appears 
to influence the muscular action of swallowing, to some 
extent, and when it is cut, all sense of taste in the 
tongue is not wholly lost. 

One peculiarity of this nerve is, that if cut, and the 
ends irritated, it is not the end connected with the mus- 
cle that causes contraction, as is usually the case, but the 
end connected with the brain ! This is probably from 
reflex action. There is, however, in all probability, a 
mixing up here with the motor fibres of the pneumo- 
gastric nerve. 

No. 8. The Pneumogastric JSferve, or jmr vagum. 
(The single stem nerve marked 8, which descends verti- 
cally.) # 

The fibres of this nerve are distributed principally to 
the lungs and stomach, and hence its name. The real 
functions they perform, however, are not certainly known, 
though there seems no doubt but that they give motor 
fibres to the windpipe, pharynx, and throat, and perhaps 
also to the lungs. Some experiments seem to show also 
that they give a certain amount of sensation to the 
lungs. 

But, besides this, it seems probable that the pneumo- 
gastric nerves influence the functions of the stomach 
also, for when they are cut, below these branches which 
go to the windpipe, the process of digestion is nearly 
always suspended. We thus see that, in most cases, 
nervous influence is essential to the proper action of the 
stomach ; and probably in those cases where digestion 
still goes on, after these nerves are cut, it is because some 
of the numerous branches still convey the necessary in- 
fluence. All the different nerves in this region inter- 
lace with one another, sometimes much more so than at 
others ; and thus, though the direct road may be destroy- 
ed, there may still be bye-paths, along which the ner- 
vous power can find its way. 



106 THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 

If the nervous influence was not essential to the pro- 
cess of digestion, there seems no reason why its with- 
drawal should arrest this process, at any time — as we 
know it does. The evil influence which over-study, vio- 
lent grief, or long-continued worry and anxiety has upon 
digestion, is well-known, and the reason for it will be ob- 
vious enough from the above explanation. If a man 
use up all his nervous power in thinking, as so 
many do, he has none to spare to act upon the stom- 
ach ; and, therefore, he becomes dyspeptic. The same 
result follows if, under the paralysing influence of grief, 
or anxiety, he does not produce sufficient power for all 
his requirements. In either case, the same result fol- 
lows to a certain extent, as if the pneumogastric nerves 
were cut through. 

Dr. Philip tried some curious experiments on these 
nerves, which were also very instructive. He cut them 
through in animals, whose stomachs were commencing 
to act upon a full meal, and, immediately, digestion 
stopped. He then passed a current of electricity down 
tlfe cut nerve, to the stomach, in the same way that ttie 
nervous current used to flow, and immediately digestion 
recommenced again. By continuing the electric action, 
the meal was finally digested ; the same as it would have 
been under the stimulus of the nervous influence. 

In short, electric power performed, in the living body, 
the same function that the nerve power usually performs. 

As a corollary to this, it may be stated that an experi- 
ment the reverse of this has been performed. Slices of 
a fresh brain have been taken, and used as elements in a 
battery, and have produced an electric current, exactly the 
same as from one of the metal batteries in ordinary use. 

If these experiments do not prove that the electric and 
nervous powers are identical, they at least prove them 
to be very similar; and that one can, at least in some 
circumstances, do the work of the other. 

No. 8". The Spinal Accessory Nerve. — This appears to 
be only a motor nerve, influencing the muscles of the 
neck and shoulder. By some physiologists, this has been 
considered the third branch of the eighth pair of nerves 
— the other two branches being the glossopharyngeal 
and pneumogastric. 

No. 9. The Hypoglossal, or ninth pair of Nerves. — This 






THE NERVES OF THE BRAIN. 107 

is merely a nerve of motion, influencing the muscles 
which m£>ve the tongue. If this nerve be inactive, or 
severed, the tongue remains motionless, in spite of all ef- 
forts of the will. In one case, a severe kick, under the 
chin, so bruised this nerve that it could not convey the 
nervous current, and the tongue was motionless for sev- 
eral days. The patient and his friends, thought the wind- 
pipe was hurt, because he could. not speak nor swallow ; 
but, as soon as the nerve recovered its conductivity, the 
tongue moved again, and speech and the power of swal- 
lowing returned 

No. 10. The Sub-Occipital Nerve. — This is a true spinal 
nerve, having a motor and sensory root, coming from the 
anterior and posterior columns of the spinal cord. It 
conies out just below the occiput or back of the head, 
and is distributed to the muscles of the neck. 

All the nerves below this are true spinal nerves. 

Some physiologists reckon twelve pairs of these 
nerves connected with the brain (cranial or encephalic 
nerves) ; others only nine — as we have done. It is of no 
consequence ; as the principal nerves are the same, what- 
ever division may be adopted, and it makes no difference 
whether we reckon all the branches of a nerve as one 
nerve, or give each a separate name, though it is usual 
to speak of them in pairs — the first pair, second pair, 
and so on, in the order we have enumerated them. 

It may be regarded as nearly certain, that none of 
these nerves are connected directly with the brain, nei- 
ther with the cerebrum nor cerebell urn. They all pro- . 
ceed from the medulla oblongata, or upper part of the 
spina! cord, but have intimate relations with the brain. 

One great distinction between the cranial nerves and 
the spinal, is in their mode of origin. The spinal nerves, 
as already explained, all arise from two roots— one ante- 
rior and one posterior — but the true cranial nerves have 
one root only. Nor could this well be otherwise ; for, in 
the medulla oblongata, the anterior and posterior col- 
umns are not kept distinct, as in the spinal cord, but in- 
extricably crossed and intermixed. The fifth nerve is 
the only one among the cranial nerves that arises from 
two roots, with a ganglion on the posterior root, and is 
both motor and sensory. Tt is, therefore, by some physio- 
logists, classed among the spinal nerves. 



108 THE SENSOEIUM. 



The Sensorium. 

The mass of nervous substance within the skull is com- 
posed, principally, of the cerebrum and cerebellum, con- 
stituting the brain, underneath which, at the base of the 
brain, are a number of irregular nervous masses of vari- 
ous sizes and forms, called the sensory ganglia, already 
referred to in connection with the nerves of special sen- 
sation, which are connected with them. These ganglia 
are partly shown, in plate 18, which represents the un- 
der-surface of the brain. 

The functions of these smaller ganglions are quite 
distinct, and unlike those of the spinal marrow ; and, in- 
deed, unlike, for the most part, those of any other parts 
of the nervous system. J5Tot only do they act like the 
ordinary nervous centres, in receiving impressions and 
causing motions, but there is a certain amount of con- 
sciousness attending these {processes. Not only are the 
organs of our special senses of sight, hearing, smell, and 
taste, impressed by appropriate external agencies, causing 
them to react upon the appropriate muscles, but we are 
conscious that they are so affected, and that the appropri- 
ate motions take place. 

These ganglia, therefore, form a separate and distinct 
part of the nervous apparatus, by the action of which we 
receive sensation from, and have consciousness of, the 
physical world. They constitute, in fact, the seat of 
conscious sensation, or the sensorium ! 

So far as we can judge, the powers of the sensorium 
are limited to simple consciousness and sensation ; the 
higher powers of reasoning, memory, and other more 
exalted mental processes, are connected solely with the 
brain proper, or the cerebral hemispheres. 

The consciousness here spoken of, in connection with 
the sensorium, it must be. remembered, is simple or pas- 
sive, and not active, intelligent consciousness. It is 
rather a simple perception of the fact, unaccompanied 
by any reasoning process — something like what is expe- 
rienced under the influence of some drugs. 

A man may live, if the cerebrum or reasoning part of 
trie brain be removed, and will exhibit a kind of half- 
consciousness, in connection with special sensation — 



THE SENSOEIUM. 109 

something like that shown by a person half-awake. This 
results from the action of the sensorium. 

In some of the lower animals there is no higher con- 
sciousness than this, which results from the action of the 
sensorium; and in softening of the brain, and some other 
diseases, it is all that is left. 

In these lower animals, the sensory ganglia constitute 
the whole brain — there being no cerebrum ; — and, conse- 
quently, mind, with them, is limited to sensation and 
simple consciousness ; the same as it must be in those 
human beings born without brains. 

The cerebral hemispheres (or true brain) are, therefore, 
superadded to the sensorium, and give the reasoning fac- 
ulty, which can take cognizance of, and control, more or 
less, all other nervous operations. 

Some beings need only a simple spinal cord, and nerves, 
to effect all the nervous influence they require. In them, 
probably, all motions are reflex ; and there is neither 
true sensation nor consciousness. Other beings have the 
sensorium superadded to the spinal cord, and they, in 
addition to reflex action, have conscious sensations. Still, 
other beings have the cerebrum superadded to the senso- 
rium, and such beings exhibit, not only reflex action and 
conscions sensation, but also reason! — like man! 

All these new parts, superadded to the spinal cord or 
original nervous centre, give, therefore, new nervous 
powers — the most exalted of which, as far as yet known, 
are those given by the human cerebrum, or true brain. 

It may, however, well be questioned, whether this de- 
velopment of the nervous apparatus is not destined to go 
still further, and whether some future being may not 
have a nervous organ as far above the cerebrum, as that 
is above the sensorium. 

There is nothing unreasonable in this idea, but the 
contrary ; and mental faculties may yet be evolved, as far 
above our present reason, grand as it appears, as that is 
above simple conscious sensation. 

It will be seen, further on, that there are parts of the 
human brain apparently rudimentary, which may yet be 
developed, and become the sources of unknown mental 
powers. In some beings, we find some parts rudimen- 
tary, and, in other beings, other parts ; many of the 
lower beings possessing only the germs of nervous or. 

10 



110 THE SENSORIUM. 

gans, which are found fully developed in those above 
them. 

The following are the principal nervous masses situ- 
ated at the base of the brain, including the known sen- 
sory ganglia, and some others whose functions are not 
yet ascertained. 

By referring to Plates 15, 18, and 19, the situation of 
these parts will be readily understood. They are all 
close together, at the top of the medulla oblongata and 
under the hemispheres of the brain. In one or other of 
the above plates, all the parts referred to may be found. 

The Olfactory Ganglia.— These ganglia are situated in 
the front part of the base of the brain, and from them 
originate the olfactory nerve, or nerve of smell. 

The Optic Ganglia. — These are further back, behind the 
olfactory ganglia ; and into them can be traced most of 
the roots of the optic nerve or nerve of sight. They are 
sometimes called the corpora quadrigemina. 

The Auditory Ganglia, from which originate the audi- 
tory nerve or nerve of hearing, are not so prominent as 
some of the other ganglia, but are buried in the medulla 
oblongata ; nevertheless, they can be found by dissection. 

The Gastatory Ganglia gives origin to the nerve of 
taste, which goes to the tongue. The nerve of taste is 
described as the glossopharyngeal, which may be traced 
to this ganglia, as may also a part of the sensory root of 
the fifth pair of nerves. Like the auditory ganglia, the 
gastatory ganglia are buried in the medulla oblongata, 
and have to be sought out by careful dissection. 

The Thalami Optici and Corpora Striata.— These .are 
two large ganglionic bodies, on each side of the base of 
the brain, which observation and experiment point out 
as very important parts of the sensory apparatus. 

The Thalami Optici. — The sensory fibres from the spi- 
nal cord, after passing through the medulla oblongata, 
are distributed through the substance of the thalami op- 
tici, with which are also connected the olfactory and op- 
tic nerves, and probably, also, those of hearing and smell. 

The thalami optici seem, therefore, to form a kind of 
centre or focus — both for the nerves of special sensation, 
and also for those of common sensation — coming from 
the medulla. 

The Corpora Striata. — These seem to form just such 



THE SENSORIUM. Ill 

a centre, or focus, for the motor fibres from the medulla 
oblongata, as the thalami optici do for the sensory fibres. 
They all pass into it, and from it special motor influence 
seems to issue. 

Both these bodies are intimately connected with each 
other, and they bear a similar relation, it will be seen, to 
the anterior and posterior columns of the spinal cord. 

These, then, are the principal ganglionic masses, situ- 
ated at the base of the brain, which essentially constitute 
the sensorium, Each of them is, to a certain extent, an 
independent nervous centre — having its own special func- 
tions, and giving out its own special nervous influence — 
but all having a common centre or focus in the thalami 
optici and corpora striata. 

The sensorium may, in fact, be considered as a distinct 
portion of the nervous apparatus, equally with the cere- 
brum and cerebellum ; the three together formiug the 
complete brain or encephalon. 

The uses of some of the sensorial ganglia, and also of 
some other ganglionic bodies about the base of the brain, 
are utterly unknown. Some of them are found only in 
certain animals. Thus, the olivary bodies are found only 
in man and monkeys, and the mamillary bodies only in 
man. Perhaps some of these have yet to be developed, 
and become the sources of new powers. 

As before stated, in some animals there is no cerebrum 
nor cerebellum, but only the sensorium — which then forms 
the whole brain. The different .ganglionic masses are 
also very unequally developed, in different beings — some 
having the optic or the olfactory ganglia unusually large 
— while in others again these are small, and other por- 
tions are more prominent Each separate nervous centre 
is thus expanded in proportion as its special nervous in- 
fluence is needed. 

In Plate 18, the whole of the sensorium is shown at 
the under-surface of the brain, and the different parts in 
Plates 15 and 19. The ganglia of the nerves of special 
sensation, are understood to be situated where the nerves 
begin. 

Some of the special functions of the sensorial ganglia 
will be more fully explained further on, but there are 
some other adj uncts of the brain to be explained first. 



112 THE MEMBRANES, ETC., 



The Membranes, Ventricles, and Glands of the Brain. 

The parts now to be described are merely adjuncts to 
the different nerve masses, serving to connect, or sep- 
arate them from each other, and to support, or maintain 
them in position. They do not, as a rule, take any part 
in the nervous functions, nor are they in structure like 
the nerve masses. 

It is requisite, however, to describe them, because they 
are often referred to, when treating upon the organiza- 
tion and functions of the brain, 

The Membranes of the Brain. — It has already been 
stated that the brain, like the spinal marrow, is enclo- 
sed in three membranes, an outer one, the Dura Mater, 
firm and tough. A middle one, the Arachnoid, very fine 
and thin, like a spider's web. And an inner one, the Pia 
Mater, which varies in density and structure in differ- 
ent parts. This inner membrane is the medium in 
which the arteries ramify that convey the blood 
which nut rifles the brain, 

The Dura Mater is first seen when we open the skull, 
as it covers the brain mass like a sack. Not only does 
it cover the outside of the brain, but sheets of it de- 
scend between different parts of it, to keep them asun- 
der, and support them ; the two halves of the brain are 
thus separated by a firm strong sheet of the dura mater, 
which descends to where they are united, at the base of 
the brain. It also forms into tubes to cover and protect 
the nerves as they issue from the skull. 

The following plate will show how the dura mater 
separates the two halves of the brain, 

Most of these parts can be well studied, and their re- 
lations well understood, by carefully opening and in- 
specting the brain of a sheep, in the same way that the 
human skull is here shown to be opened. 

The Arachnoid is what is called a serous membrane, 
and secretes a fluid called the cerebrospinal fluid, which 
occupies the spaces between the convolutions and nerve 
masses generally. Such a fluid is necessary, as a bed on 
which the parts can lie, and it also serves to prevent 
them pressing unevenly and injuriously upon each other. 
It is, in fact, a water bed. 



OF THE BEAIN. 



113 



Plate XXIV. 

THE HEAD CUT THROUGH THE MIDDLE. 
5 !|J63 




In this section the brain is removed from the upper side, (i i), 
the cut edge of the skull bone ; (2), the frontal sinus, or hollow- 
space between the two plates of bone which form the skull ; (3), is 
the falx cerebri, or plate of the dura mater, which descends from the 
top of the skull, just in the middle, to separate the two halves of 
the cerebrum like a wall. If the falx were taken away the half of 
the cerebrum on the other side would fall out. It is called falx^ 
because in shape it resembles a sickle^ the Latin name for which is 
falx ; (4), shows where the falx descends to in front ; (5), shows where 
it is attached at the top ; (6), shows its lower edge ; (7), shows where it 
ends below, by joining what is called the tentorium ; (8), the tentori- 
um, this is also a plate of the dura mater, but placed horizontally, its 
use being to support the back part of the cerebrum, and to separate 
it from the cerebellum, which lies below. If it were not for the 
tentorium the cerebrum would press upon the cerebellum ; (9), shows 
-where the tentorium is attached to the temporal bone ; (10), is the 
edge of the tentorium ; (11), some of the convolutions of the front 
lobe of the cerebrum ; (12), the front extremity of the corpus cal- 
losum, or band of hard substance which unites the two halves of the 
brain below ; (13), the septum lucidum, a thin clear wall of separa- 
tion, which will be spoken of further on ; (14), the anterior com- 
missure ; (15), the front crus of the fornix ; (16), the middle^ of the 
fornix; (17), the back termination of the fornix, where it joins the 
corpus callosum ; (18), part of the thalamus optici ; (19), part of the 
corpus striatum ; (the situation of these two important ganglia, re- 
ferred to in the previous article, as the centres of the^ sensorium, can 
here be plainly seen,) (20), the walls of the third ventricle, one of the 
hollows, or cavities, which exist in the centre of the brain ; (21), a 
flap of the dura mater turned over ; (22), the internal carotid artery- 



114 THE MEMBRANES, ETC., 

The quantity of the fluid is less in youth than in old 
age. In the adult there is usually about two ounces of 
it, but in some diseases it increases to a great extent, as 
in Hydrocephalus, or water on the brain. 

The Pia Mater is mainly composed, in most parts, of 
the minute blood vessels from which the brain derives its 
nutriment, but in a few places it becomes hard and 
fibrous, like the dura mater. It envelopes the whole 
brain, like the other two membranes. 

The Corpus Callosum. — The two halves of the cere- 
brum, which are kept apart by the falx cerebri in their 
upper parts, are joined below by a firm band of 
fibres, passing from one to the other. This is the 
corpus callosum, — the great commissure of the cere- 
brum, — or the beam of the brain. It is about four inches 
long, (12, Plate 24) 

The Ventricles. — If the corpus callosum be cut into, on 
each side of the middle line, there will be found two 
cavities, of an irregular form, one on each side. These 
are called the lateral ventricles. 

The middle cavity of each ventricle is triangular in 
shape in the middle, with three corners, (cornua) or 
horns, one front, one in the middle, and one behind. 

The anterior, or front cornu of the ventricle, is tri- 
angular in shape, and projects into the front lobe of the 
cerebrum. 

The posterior, or behind cornu of the ventricle, 
extends into the posterior or back lobe of the brain. 
There is a curiously formed mass of nervous matter, 
(ganglionic) which projects into this cornu of the ven- 
tricle called the hippocampus minor. 

The middle cornu of the ventricle extends into the 
middle lobe of the brain. It is very irregular in its direc- 
tion, and also has a very peculiar projecting mass of 
ganglionic matter, called the hippocampus major. 

These two masses of nerve matter, the hippocampus 
minor, and hippocampus major, are only projections from 
the convolutions of the cerebrum. Their special trses, if 
they have any, are unknown. They are, however, im- 
portant anatomically, and, as it will be shown further on, 
are much referred to in the discussions respecting the 
difference between men and monkeys. 



OF THE BRAIN. 



115 



Plate "XXV. 

THE BRAES' CUT ACROSS HORIZONTALLY FROM EAR 
TO EAR, TO SHOW THE VENTRICLES, AND THE 
SITUATION OF THE HIPPOCAMPUS MAJOR AJSD 
HIPPOCAMPUS MINOR. 




(i i) the cerebrum cut through horizontally ; (a a d a) is the hollow 
of the two lateral ventricles, divided by the fornix 2, down the middle; 
(3 3) the anterior cornua of the ventricles ; (4 4) the posterior cornua; 
(9 9) shows the commencement of the middle cornua. 

The hippocampus major commences in the middle cornua, opposite 
the figures 9 9; the hippocampus minor is located by figures 7 7, in the 
posterior cornua, one on each side. 

From this description it will be seen that there are two 
ventricles, or hollow spaces, one on each side of the 
corpus callosum, and they are both formed alike. Each 
one is triangular in the middle part, with three cornua 



116 THE MEMBRANES, ETC., 

or corners, in each hind cornu being a hippocampus mi- 
nor, and in each middle cornu a hippocampus major. 

The Fornix is a sheet of firm white fibrous matter, 
below the corpus calosum, and continuous with it. It 
extends into each of the lateral ventricles, forming part of 
their surrounding walls. 

The Septum Lucidum is the thin partition which 
separates the two lateral ventricles from each other. 

The Third Ventricle. — This a hollow space between 
the two thalami optici. 

The Fourth Ventricle. — This is connected with the 
cerebellum, and is situated on the back of the medulla 
oblongata and the pons varolii. Portions of the cere- 
bellum project into this cavity, as the portions of the 
cerebrum forming the hippocampi do into the cornua of 
the lateral ventricles. These projections of the cere- 
brum are called by various names, the principal being 
the noduluSy the uvula, and the amygdala, or tonsils. 

The uses of these bodies, if they have any special func- 
tions, like those of the hippocampi, are unknown. 

lhe Fifth Ventricle is a small hollow space in the 
septum lucid um, and it therefore lies between the two 
lateral ventricles. 

The Pineal Gland. — This is a small grey body, of a 
reddish tinge, placed nearly in the centre of the base of 
the brain, between the corpora quadrigemina, where the 
optic nerves begin. In plate 18, it is situated above the 
pons varolii, (d), ani below the fork of the optic nerves, 
(c, c). 

This small gland was supposed, by some of the 
old physiologists, to be the seat of the soul. It always 
contains a number of small stony bodies, composed of 
phosphate of lime, magnesia, and ammonia, with organic 
matter. It would seem that these small stones are 
some way necessary, as they are always there, but no 
use is known for them. It may well be a puzzle, also, 
to those who have not studied the process of nutrition, 
how this stony matter could get into the centre of the 
brain, but there it is. 



OF THE BEAIN. 



117 



Plate XXVI. 

SECTION OF THE RRAIN, TO SHOW THE 
TION OF THE PINEAL GLAND AND 
PARTS. 



SITUA- 
OTHER 




(i), Convolutions of the cerebrum ; (2), the cerebellum ; (3), the 
medulla oblongata ; (4), the corpus callosum ; (<0, (the black spot,) 
the pituitary gland; (6), (the black spot), the pineal gland; (7), the 
spinal marrow. 

The black spot, (6), is placed merely to show the situa- 
tion of the gland, and not its relative size ; it being in 
fact very small. 

The pituitary gland, (5) is also not relatively so large 
as the spot, which merely shows its location, the uses of 
the pituitary gland are also unknown. 

Having now completed our view of what may be call- 
ed the regular parts of the nervous system, it is necessa- 
ry still to explain another part, entirely dissimilar in its 
structure and in the mode of distribution of its parts. 
This is what is called the great sympathetic nerve, 
or the nerve of organic life, because its branches are 
distributed to the vital organs, and bind them, and the 
other parts of the system, in one bond of sympathetic 
action. 



CHAPTER VII. 

THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 

This is also called the ganglionic, vegetative, and 
organic nerve. 

Its central, or main part, consists of a series of 
ganglionic knots, connected together by a trunk of ner- 
vous matter, and extending down the outside of the 
spine, from the bottom of the skull to the lowest part of 
the back bone. 

Each of these ganglionic knots appear to be a kind of 
small independent brain, entirely distinct from any part 
either of the brain or spinal marrow. It is, however, con- 
nected with them in this way. It gives off branches which 
connect with each of the spinal nerves, and also with 
some of the nerves of the brain. At the place where 
these branches of the sympathetic communicate with 
the other nerves, there is a ganglion formed ; and from 
that it gives off nerves which ran side by side with the 
arteries, to most of the vital organs whose functions are 
involuntary. From its upper ganglion it gives off ner- 
vous twigs, which connect with the sixth pair of crani- 
al nerves, and also with part of the fifth pair, which 
again connects it with the ophthalmic ganglion 

There are three of these sympathetic ganglions in 
the neck, twelve in the bach, five in the loins, with three 
and sometimes four, in the sacrum. At the bottom 
there is commonly a small end ganglion, called the 
coccygeal, but sometimes this is absent, and there is 
merely a band of communication between the sympa- 
thetic of the other side, for, it must be borne in mind, 
there are two great sympathetic nerves, one on each 
side of the spine, exactly alike. The sympathetic gang- 
(118) 



THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 119 



lions are different in their structure from either the 
brain or the nerves, being somewhat intermediate be- 
tween the two. They are reddish gTay in color, and 
rather pulpy in consistence, bat apparently more fibrous 
than gelatinous. 

There has been much discussion as to the special 
functions of these nervous centres, but observation seems 
to show that they act like the brain, and spinal marrow, 
originating nervous power, which is apparently speci- 
ally used by the vegetative organs. Cuvier has remark- 
ed that when the brain is too small, the sympathetic 
ganglions are larger than common, as if to compensate 
for the deficient brain. • They also appear to render the 
organs which receive nervous influence from them in- 
dependent of the brain, or will — at least in many cases. 
So independent, in fact, is the sympathetic nerve that, 
though connected both with the brain and with the 
spinal marrow, it may yet be but slightly influenced by 
the n. This is shown by the fact that the vital organs, 
with which the sympathetic is connected, can continue 
performing their functions after being separated from 
both brain and spinal cord. The heart and intestines 
may be even removed from the body, and yet, if con- 
nected with the sympathetic nerve, will still continue 
acting. This, of course, is owing to the nervous influ- 
ence which they get from the sympathetic, and it goes 
far to show that this nerve is really an independent 
source of nervous power. 

The sympathetic nerve is especially connected with 
the digestive organs, — those of assimilation, — of secre- 
tion, — and with the heart aud blood-vessels. It also con- 
nects all these organs with each other, and with the 
brain and other parts of the system ; thus establishing a 
sympathetic union among the whole. 

The peculiar connections of the sympathetic nerve ex- 
plain, very obviously, why one organ sympathizes so 
readily with another — though they may be far apart, and, 
apparently, in no way related. It shows, for instance, 
how derangements of the stomach or other organs may 
affect the brain, or the reverse; thus, the optic ganglia 
are connected with the upper sympathetic ganglia, and 
the stomach with the middle ones, so that the eye and 



120 THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NEKVE. 

the stomach are nervously connected, and can influence 
each other, as we often find them doing. A disordered 
stomach frequently affects the vision, and certain im- 
pressions made on the eye will affect the stomach. The 
generative organs especially, in both sexes, but par- 
ticularly in the female, have a remarkable sympathetic 
relation with other parts of the system, and sometimes 
exert an almost paramount influence over them ; as will 
be shown further on. The action of the mind — through 
the brain — the functions of the stomach, intestines, heart, 
and other organs, may all become deTanged through a 
morbid or over-active condition of the womb, or testicles. 

There is nothing strictly analagous to the sympathetic 
nerve in the lower orders of beings, or invertebrates, al- 
though the vital orgai:s are prominent enough in them. 
This would seem to show, therefore, that the function of 
the great sympathetic is, not merely to give nervous 
power to those organs, and thus make them and the ani- 
mal organs independent of each other, but really to bring 
them both into sympathetic relation, and to connect them 
with the rest of the organization, as above illustrated. 
The great sympathetic nerve is more immediately con- 
nected with the visceral organs, or those of the chest and 
abdomen ; and it has a more obvious and decided influ- 
ence over them than over any others. As before stated, 
these organs receive so much nervous power from the 
sympathetic, that they are, to a great extent, independ- 
ent of the brain and spinal cord; and, therefore, act in- 
voluntarily. Consciousness, or will, has nothing to do 
with the normal action of the heart, stomach, or intes- 
tines, because they are not dependent upon the brain for 
nervous influence, but chiefly upon the sympathetic. 

The nerves given off from the sympathetic to the dif- 
ferent visceral organs, form several large masses of inter- 
laced fibres called plexuses, resembling masses of white 
cord crossed and intertwined in every direction. One of 
these plexuses, called the cardiac plexus, supplies nerves 
to the heart and great blood-vessels. Another, much 
larger, called the solar plexus, supplies the liver, spleen, 
kidneys, stomach, intestines, and testicles, or womb and 
ovaries. This solar plexus is formed by the interlacing of 
the fibres of two others, called the semi-lunar plexuses. 



THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NEKYE 121 

which are derived from a large branch of the sympa- 
thetic, called the splanchnic, or visceral nerve. This 
splanchnic nerve descends from the upper sympathetic 
ganglions, in the top of the chest, through the dia- 
phragm. See Plates XXVIII, XXX, XXXII. 

The branches of the sympathetic nerve, almost invari- 
ably, accompany the blood-vessels to all the visceral or- 
gans, so that nutriment and nervous influence go to- 
gether. 

The investigations of some eminent physiologists hav^ 
made it probable, however, if not certain, that the vis- 
ceral organs do not entirely depend on the great sympa- 
thetic for their nervous power, but that they derive some 
power from the eighth pair also. 

Sir Astley Cooper cut the great sympathetic nerve in 
a dog, on both sides, and found that it affected the action 
of the heart very little ; but, when he tied the eighth 
pair, and the phrenic nerve as well, the animal died, in 
about a quarter of an hour, from inability to breathe. 

Such an experiment, though it proves that nervous in- 
fluence is necessary to the action of the breathing appa- 
ratus, would seem to show, also, that this influence is 
not derived exclusively, nor principally, from the great 
sympathetic nerve. It may be, however, that the part 
of the nerve below the cut could give power enough, in- 
dependent of the part above : and, indeed, some physi- 
ologists contend, that every section of the sympathetic 
nerve, and every one of its ganglions, is an independent 
centre of nervous power. 

The actual origin of the sympathetic nerve is not 
known; some supposing it to be an offshoot from the 
spinal cord or brain, while others suppose it has an inde- 
pendent origin, and that its various ganglions are inde- 
pendent nervous centres. It is also asserted, by some 
physiologists, that the sympathetic nerve is formed be- 
fore any other part of the nervous system, at the same 
time with the visceral organs. It is also stated to have 
been found in imperfect beings, that had neither brain 
nor spinal marrow. In such a case, it must, therefore, 
alone, have supplied nervous influence enough to excite 
the vital organs to action. 



122, THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 

Plate XXVII. 



CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SPINAL NERVES AND 
THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 




(C C), the two columns of the spinal cord ; (a) the motor nerve, con- 
nected with the anterior or frond column ; (/) the sensory nerve, con- 
nected with the posterior or behind column ; {/) the knot, or gan- 
glion, where the two enter together, but emerge again at a and/; 
(s) is the sympathetic nerve \(e) shows the two filrments, or threads of 
the sympathetic — one white and one grey — 'going to form a double 
junction with the spinal nerves. 



THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 123 



It must be remembered, however, in regard to the sym- 
pathetic nerve, that, though its branches are distribu- 
ted on so large a scale to the viscera, its associations 
are not confined to them alone. On the contrary, it 
is connected with every internal organ of the head, chest 
and abdomen. Its twigs interlace with those of the 
nerves of the brain, as well as with the spinal nerves, and 
it thus establishes a common bond of union and sympa- 
thy, through the whole nervous system. And this ex- 
plains how the brain, heart, lungs, stomach, and other 
organs all act upon and influence each other. 

Plate XXVII shows the manner in which the spinal 
nerves and the great sympathetic are connected. 

Every pair of the spinal nerves is connected, in this 
way, with the sympathetic, as shown in Plate XXIX. 

All the branches of the sympathetic nerve, it will be 
seen, are compounds, since they contain, not only the 
sympathetic itself, but also cords from both the motor 
and sensory columns of the spinal cord, and they there- 
fore influence both sensation and motion. This, how- 
ever, is only through the spinal nerves, for the sympa- 
thetic appears to be neither sensory nor motor itself. 

It is noticeable, also, that the sympathetic nerve is not 
so quick in conveying impressions as the other nerves. 
It seems as if an influence passing through its ganglions 
is retained or delayed a little. This, probably, allows 
of its being distributed in new channels, or perhaps, even, 
of more or less of it being stored up for future use. In 
this way it may act as a regulator to the nervous system, 
by which the nervous power is evenly distributed to the 
internal organs, instead of some parts receiving too 
little and others too much. Now, when the stomach is 
digesting it needs a large amount of nervous power ; 
but when digestion is completed, not so much. Here 
comes in the regulating influence of the sympathetic gan- 
glia, which send this overplus of power, when the stomach 
no longer needs it, to some other part, where it is required. 

These sympathetic reactions will be more fully re- 
ferred to further on, audit is therefore desirable that the 
subject should be well understood. 

Plate XXXVI 1 1, also shows the sympathetic in the 
whole of its course. 



124 



THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 



Plate XXVXII. 

THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC IN ITS WHOLE LENGTH. 

I* 



(#, «, a). The sympathetic 
nerve, i Upper ganglion of the 
neck. 2. Ascending branch. 3. 
Descending branch. 4. External 
branchj communicating with 
the spinal nerves of the neck. 
5. The branch on the opposite 
side, communicating with the 
facial, and with the eighth and 
ninth pairs of nerves, as well as 
with the pharyngeal plexus. 6. 
Superior cardiac nerve. 7. The 
middle cardiac, and 8, the lower 
cardiac nerve • all going to the 
heart, (&). 9. The first dorsal, or 
back ganglion. 10. The last 
dorsal ganglion. 11. Spinal 
nerve. 12. The great splanchnic 
nerve. 13. The semi-lunar gang- 
lion, the two forming the solar 
plexus. 14. The lesser splanch- 
nic, forming the renal plexus. 
15. Branches from the lumbar 
ganglia, forming, 16, The hypo- 
gastric plexus. 17. Sacral gang- 
lia. 18. The last, or coccygeal 
ganglion. 




THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 125 

Plate XXIX. 

PORTION OF THE SYMPATHETIC NERVE WITHIN 
THE CHEST. 




#, «, «, The backbone; f, f, the ribs; k y the large artery; ?«, #*, 
the great lymphatic vessel; q, q, ganglions of the sympathetic nerve ; 
r, the branch going to the bowels; j, j, branches of the sympathetic 
nerve connecting with the spinal nerves; t y /, upper and lower endsof 
the sympathetic nerve cut off. 



126 



THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 




* Plate XXX. 

PLEXUSES OF THE 
GREAT SYMPA- 
THETIC NERVE. 



i. Commence- 
ment of the 
great sympa- 
thetic nerve in 
the ganglions 
of the neck; 2, 
shows the 
plexus of its 
branchesabout 
the heart; 3., 
the plexus 
about the 
stomach; 4, 
the kidney; 5, 
the plexus 
about the 
bowels; 6, the 
bladder; 7, the 
rectum; 8, the 
spermatic 
plexus, con- 
nected with 
the internal 
generative or- 
gans; 9, the 
backbone. 



THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERYE. 127 



Plate XXXI. 

THE PNEUMOGAS- 
TRIC NERVE. 




i. The commencement of the nerve; 2, branches going to the heart; 
3, branches distributed to *he lungs; 4, branches distributed to the 
stomach; 5, the gall-bladder; 6, the large vein going to the heart. 



128 THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE. 



At every joint of the backbone, Plate 29, may be 
seen the two branches leaving the sympathetic to go 
and join the spinal nerves. 

These diagrams show how all the internal organs re- 
ceive their network of nerves from the main trunk of 
the sympathetic nerve, and tow they are, consequently, 
in sympathetic union with each other. The upper end 
of the trunk of the sympathetic, it must be remembered, 
is also connected with the cerebral nerves, issuing from 
the sensorium ; and thus all the visceral organs are con- 
nected with the special senses, and with the brain, as 
well as with each other. 

The importance of this fact, in many derangements of 
the system, will be at once apparent, especially in many 
otherwise inexplicable nervous diseases ! Thus, a diseased 
womb may affect the stomach, heart, or brain ; or, con- 
versely, the womb may be'affected through them. 

It should further be remarked that all the internal 
organs receive nerves from the spinal cord, as well as 
from the sympathetic, and some of them from the 
cerebral nerves — as shown in Plates XXIX, XXX, 
XXXI. 

These diagrams, of course, show only the large branches. 
It would be impossible to represent the thousands of 
minute twigs, ramifying, interlacing, and crossing each 
other in every conceivable direction. 

The mass of nerves in Plate XXXI. it must be borne 
in mind, is only the branching of the pneumogastric ; 
burt, besides these, there are those already shown from 
the sympathetic, and also others from the spinal axis, 
all to the same organs, and all intermixed and connect- 
ed together. 

Every one of these fibres, even the minutest — such as 
require a powerful microscope to make them visible — 
all convey the nervous influence, and are concerned 
either in sensation, nutrition, or motion, and all are con- 
nected with each other, and with every other part of the 
nervous system. 

All the other plexuses are equally as extensive and 
complicated as those shown. 



THE GKEAT SYMPATHETIC NEBYE. 



129 



Plate XXXII. 

PLEXUSES OF THE GREAT SYMPATHETIC NERVE 
IN THE ABDOMEN. 







The upper plexus is connected with the intestines, as will be seen,; 
the middle and lower ones with the generative organs, bladder, and 
rectum. 



CHAPTEE VIII. 



GENERAL VIEW OF THE NERVOUS ORGANS AND FUNC- 
TIONS IN MEN AND OTHER ANIMALS. 

The explanations already given will have shown that 
the nervous system, in man and the higher vertebrated 
animals generally, is composed of a number of nervous 
centres, connected with each other, and with the rest of 
the organization, by nervous fibres. These centres are 
the sources of nervous power, which the fibres merely 
convey where it is needed, and each centre appears to 
have some power or function .peculiar to itself. It is, 
however, difficult to find out what these peculiar powers 
of the different nervous centres are, owing to their being 
so intimately connected, and mutually influencing each 
other. Indeed, if our attention be exclusively directed 
to the nervous system in man, and the higher animals, 
only, it is not possible to find out much about the special 
functions of its different parts, on account of this mutual 
action and reaction. Fortunately, however, in the lower 
animals, the number of these nervous centres is less, and 
they are more disconnected, in fact, often standing alone, 
so tbat their special functions can be more readily as- 
certained. 

It is, in fact, from a study of the nervous system in 
different classes of beings, from the lowest upwards, 
that much of our recent knowled°e of it as it exists in 
man, has been obtained, as the following brief statement 
will show : 

The Nervous System, from the lowest types to the 



Observation, analogy, and experiment, all lead to the 

conclusion that no animal, no matter how minute, or 

how simple in its organizaiion, is without some kind of 

nervous material, which enables it to receive impres- 

(130) 



NERVOUS ORGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 131 

sions from external objects, and to respond to such im- 
pressions by motions more or less voluntary. In the 
very lowest beings, it is true, the nervous apparatus can- 
not be distinguished separate from the other parts of the 
organization ; but neither can the muscular, the diges- 
tive, nor any other organs. In these beings, in fact, the 
whole system is uniform ; so that every part is nerve, 
muscle, stomach, and everything else at the same time. 
It is only in beings higher in the scale of organization 
that one part becomes all nerve, another all muscle, 
another only stomach, and so <»n. This is called differ- 
entiation, or the separation of the various functions, and 
their location in separate organs. This principle of the 
differentiation of parts is an important one, and it is 
very instructive to notice how it first begins to work. 
In the Ameeba, one of the lowest kind of beings, con- 
sisting of little more than a minute uniform bag of jelly- 
like matter, every part is exactly alike, and can perform 
every function of which the being is capable. From any 
part of it a prolongation will stretch itself out like a 
leg, or as an arm, to lay hold of things, and in any part 
of it a hollow will form, by the side sinking in, and this 
hollow acts as a stomach. And thus every part may 
be limb one moment, and stomach another, and keep on 
thus changing perpetually, inside or outside all the 
same — there is no differentiation of parts ! 

The very lowest type of a separate nervous apparatus 
consists of a single nervous centre, or ganglion, with 
afferent and efferent, or sensor and motor nerves, form- 
ing a simple nervous circle. Something of this kind is 
found in most of the very simply organized animals ; and 
the whole nervous action, in such beings, is apparently 
merely reflex, or excito-motor. Something acts exter- 
nally on the nerve of sensation, which conveys the im- 
pression to the ganglionic centre, and from thence pro- 
ceeds an influence, along the nerve of motion, which leads 
to some necessary action. 

A small jelly fish, for instance, floating in the water, 
stretches out its tiny feelers in all directions, and even- 
tually one of them comes in contact with some particle 
of substance, suitable for its nutriment. This particle of 
nutritious matter makes an impression on the sensor 



132 GENERAL VIEW OF THE 



nerve of the feeler, which is instantly transmitted to 
the ganglionic centre, and from thence comes back, down 
the motor nerve, an influence which causes the muscles 
of the feeler to contract, to grasp the particle, and con- 
vey it to the animal's month. Now, all this, as before 
remarked, appears to be simple reflex action ; and there 
is, as far as we can ascertain, no such thing as conscious- 
ness, or even special sensation. The animal appears 
to live only a vegetative or organic life, and to have 
nothing analagous to true animal life, such as special 
sensation, consciousness, or knowledge. In fact, it would 
seem impossible that there shonld be any such functions, 
because such a being, as far as can be ascertained, has 
no such thing as a brain, or organs of special sense, but 
merely a single spinal ganglion, with its sensor and 
motor nerves. 

Still we are not justified in saying that such a being 
cannot have, or has not, any trace of consciousness. 
We are merely justified in saying that we cannot find 
any such trace, nor the rudiments of any organ anal- 
agous to the brain. But many physiologists are of 
opinion that, to some extent, consciousness does exist, 
and probably, also, some form of intellect and special 
sensation, in all classes of animals, down to the very 
lowest and simplest of all. 

Mr. H. J. Cartter mentions, in the Annals of Natural 
Histor,y, an instance where one of the very lowest 
kinds of beings, such as scarcely appear alive at all, 
showed decided indications of mind ! This was one of 
the Infusorial, such as are produced in water, when it 
contains any decaying animal or vegetable matter. The 
whole being is only like a minute ball of jelly, with no 
very distinct form, and so small that it can be studied 
only with a microscope ; and yet this minute animalcule 
evidently had mind, as the facts will show. Mr. Cartter 
watched it taking grains of starch, as they flowed from 
a ruptured vegetable cell, for food. It would watch till 
one came, and then seize it ; but, finally, apparently tired 
of watching and waiting, as no more flowed out, it went 
up to the cell and drew them out. Now, here was, un- 
questionably, intelligence, or mind, just as decided, in 
proportion to its minute nervous system, as is the mind 



NERVOUS ORGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 133 



of man ia proportion to his. This mere animalcule 
knew, from observation, that the grains it wished for 
flowed out of that ruptured cell, and that it had only to 
watch for and get them. But, finally, when they ceased 
to come, it reasoned further that more could be got by 
going to the source of supply itself, and then it went ac- 
cordingly. Now, here are, apparently, observation, re- 
flection, and deduction, or a regular process of reasoning, 
the same in kind as that displayed by a Newton or a 
Faraday, only different in degree. 

Mr. Cartter also mentions another instance of an 
Amoeba, the mere minute jelly-bag before referred to, 
with literally no regular form, nor any distinct organs, 
which exhibited evident signs of intelligence in procur- 
ing its food. This being is merely a minute bag, or 
bladder, which keeps continually changing its form, and 
is nourished by stiilmore minute beings, which are con- 
veyed to its interior by the water, which flows constantly 
in and out. It is, in fact, all s:omach, apparently, and 
may be turned inside out without causing it any incon- 
venience. Yet even this being was observed to watch 
for the ovse or eggs, as they were thrown off from the 
ovary of another being, nearly as simple as itself; and, to 
make sure of them, it even placed itself round the open- 
ing through which they came, so as to intercept them. 

In all such primitive organizations, as before explained, 
what is called the principle of differentiation is not yet 
brought into play ; — that is to say, separate parts of the 
organization are not set apart for different uses, and en- 
dowed with distinct faculties, as we see them to be in 
beings higher in the scale of development. Thus, in 
man, one part feels, another thinks, another moves, 
another digests, and so forth, but in the Amoeba, and 
other such beings, every part is alike, and performs 
every function of which the being is capable. Thus, it 
digests with its whole body, every part alike, inside or 
out ; and every part is also, probably, equally endowed 
with nervous power, such as it needs — the organs are not 
differentiated. 

Another fact may also be mentioned, to show that 
mind is exhibited by the lower animals. Dr. Wm. 
Ogle, in the " Popular Science Review," tells us that 

12 



134 GENERAL VIEW OF THE 



different bees proceed in different ways to get the nectar 
out of bean -blossoms. Thus, the majority of the bees 
simply push themselves down the open blossom as far 
as possible, and try to reach it that way as well as they 
can ; but, now and then, a bee will come who finds that 
the nectar cannot be readily and perfectly got at in that 
way, and he at once adopts a better method. This ex- 
ceptional bee, of greater intellect, bites a hole in the side of 
the calyx tube, close down by the nectar, and sucks it all 
out at his ease. Now this bee always does so ; but none 
of the others, who enter the best way they can, a< the open 
mouth, ever adopt such a plan ; they evidently have not in- 
telligence enough to see its advantages. Each one acts ac- 
cording to his intellect, and there are different degrees of 
intellect among them, as there are among human beings. 

Many of the lower animals and insects will also change 
their habits materially, under new circumstances, show- 
ing that they act from intellect, and not from a mere 
blind, unvarying instinct, as formerly supposed. 

Among others, Dr. Lander Lindsay, in a recent issue, 
contends that the mind of one of the lower animals and 
the mind of a man differ only in degree, and not in kind. 
Each possesses, he remarks, the same faculties, affec- 
tions, moral sense, and capacity for education, only in 
different degrees ; they are also subject to exactly the 
same mental disorders. 

Dr. Emberton also read a paper before the British Asso- 
ciation, in which he showed that the brain of the chimpan- 
zee differed in no essential respect from that of a man ; 
— the parts all corresponding exactly— except in size. 
The same view is also taken by other eminent anatomists. 

It has already been shown that, in its primitive form, 
animal substance comprises in itself all the special prop- 
erties which, in higher organizations, are distributed to 
separate parts. As we ascend in the scale, however, we 
find come into play the law of differentiation, or the 
performance of particular functions only by particular 
parts of the organization. Thus, some parts begin to 
feel only, and others to contract only, while others again 
secrete, or assimilate only ; and, finally, in some parts, 
we have the function of consciousness. 

And here comes in two very interesting questions. 



NERVOUS ORGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 135 



First, since we' have certainly sensation and motion, 
with the function of nutrition, in every part of the simple 
animalcule, may there not be also the other, grander, 
faculty of consciousness, though but in a minute degree ? 
If this be so, mind exists, in a rudimentary state, in the 
minutest and simplest beings that the microscope can 
reveal to us, as the facts already narrated, in fact, prove. 

Secondly, since the functions of sensation, motion, and 
nutrition, and, possibly, also consciousness, exist in every 
part of the simple animalcule, may they not also exist 
in every part of the more perfect being to some extent ? 
Or, in other words, though we have — in man, for instance, 
some parts performing only the function of sensation, 
some of motion, and some of assimilation, and so forth, 
yet may not all parts still retain, to some extent, the 
primitive power of performing all these functions, as 
they do in the rudimentary being ? And, further, may 
not even consciousness, or mind, though known ordin- 
arily only as a special function of the brain, be yet pos- 
sible, under some exceptional circumstances, in connec- 
tion with other parts of the body ? 

It may be possible that, in some exceptional states of 
exaltation, or disease, any part of the body may feel, or 
act, or assimilate, or secrete, or even think! And, in 
fact, many curious cases of nervous disease, and of func- 
tional derangement, would seem to lend countenance 
to this view. Much of the mysterious and unknown in 
animal magnetism, and kindred phenomena, may pos- 
sibly come to be explained in this way. 

This, however, it must be borne in mind, is simply 
speculation, and each one must judge of its probable, or 
possible, truth or falsehood for himself. 

Some animals have a number of simple nervous cen- 
tres, with afferent and efferent nerves, but all alike. 
This is the case especially with those whose bodies are 
composed of many parts, all alike, there being a special 
nervous centre, with its nerves, for each part, but each 
resembling the other, so that there is no diversity of 
function, but merely a repetition of the original simple 
nervous circle. Still, even in this case, the different 
centres are all connected together, so that each one is 
affected through the others, — as in the star fish. 



136 GENERAL VIEW OF THE 

Tn other beings, still higher in the scale of organiza- 
tion, whose parts are not a mere repetition of one simple 
plan, but vary in form and uses, the several nervous 
centres also vary. Some of them influence locomotion, 
some digestion, and some other special functions. Bat 
still there is more or less union amongst them, though 
each has its own particular sphere of action. 

Physiologists formerly thought that none of the lower 
animals, below the vertebrates, possessed any trace of 
the cerebral ganglions, or brain proper, and that, conse- 
quently, they had no true consciousness and never rea- 
soned. Some even of the very lowest of the vertebrates, 
were thought, by them, to be equally deficient. 

The exactly opposite view is, however, now held ; and 
the most eminent physiologists contend that all animals, 
even to the lowest, have consciousness, or mind, propor- 
tioned to their development. 

Among all of them, except the very lowest inverte- 
brates, we find the sensorial ganglia more or less com- 
plete, so that they possess the special senses : some ex- 
celling in one, and others in another. Thus, some beings 
are noted for their acute sight ; others for their smeil ; 
and others for their hearing, and so on. It is contended, 
however, by those who deny consciousness to all except 
the higher beings, that the action of the special senses 
in the lower beings is simply reflex, or excito-motor, and 
that it is not accompanied by consciousness. These per- 
sons contend that, in the lower invertebrate animals, see- 
ing, hearing, smelling, and so forth, are not accompanied 
by any consciousness of these acts, as with us, but that 
they are simply reflex ; like breathing or digestion. 

I cannot, however, think so myself; for, ifc seems cer- 
tain to me that any such special act must be more or less 
a conscious operation. It is true, no trace of brain pro- 
per can be found in many beings, but still it may exist, 
or some other part may officiate for it. 

Immediately we find distinct traces of a brain, no mat- 
ter how small, all the other ganglionic centres seem to 
be connected with it, and to be more or less under its 
influence. 

There has always been a great fear of allowing any- 
thing like reason to the lower animals, even to those 



NERVOUS OKGANS AND FUNCTIONS. 137 

nearest to man — and hence has arisen the term, instinct ! 
This term was meant to convey the idea, that, in all be- 
ings bat man, every action arose either from a mysteri- 
ous internal impulse, — originated, no one knew how, — 
or, from the direct influence of external agents upon the 
organs of special sense ; and that emotion, consciousness, 
or reason had nothing to do with it. Or, in other words, 
it was thought that these actions were all automatic, or 
merely reflex, and that there was no more mind in them 
than in the growth of a tree. 

It was contended that animals who acted from in- 
stinct, always did the same, every individual alike, and 
that they were incapable of doing otherwise, — in fact, 
that they did not know what they were doin^, but did 
it for the same reason that the plant produces leaves and 
flowers, because it was their nature to do so, and they 
could not help it. 

It is, however, now considered, by most modern inves- 
tigators, that what is called instinct, is in no respect dif- 
ferent from human reason, except in degree. As before 
remarked, it is all a matter of brain/ Just as human be- 
ings vary from each other in mental endowments, accord- 
ing to the different degrees in which their brains are 
developed, so do the lower animals differ from man. 
And there is no more reason for supposing that the 
mind of a dog, for instance, is different from that of his 
master, in its nature, than there is for supposing that 
his master's mind is different, in its nature, from that of 
some other man. The man has some faculties superior 
to the corresponding ones in the dog, and he has some 
that the dog has not at all ; but this is simply because 
his brain is more perfectly developed in particular parts. 
In some faculties, the dog is the superior ; and the parts 
of the brain with which those faculties are connected, 
are, with him, better developed than they are in man. 

This term, instinct, to denote something essentially 
different from, and below reason, originated from man's 
vanity, and is perpetuated by the same feeling. It is 
common to say that animals have not this faculty or that 
faculty, when no thorough investigation has been made 
to ascertain whether they have it or not. My own im- 
pression is, that animals are often much underrated, and 

12* 



138 GENERAL VIEW OF NERVOUS ORGANS. 

that they do possess, in a modified degree, many facul" 
ties that have been denied them. Besides, we must re" 
member, that we have often no means of judging what 
mental endowments they really do possess, and oar dog- 
matic denial of this or that faculty is often made with- 
out any grounds whatever. 

This, however, is more fully referred to in another 
place. 

The existence of the higher faculties — reason, will, or 
intelligence — always depends upon the development of 
the great cerebral ganglia — the cerebrum. But the cere- 
brum receives all its impressions, which excite it to ac- 
tion, from the special senses of the sensorium, through 
which alone the brain receives its knowledge of the ex- 
ternal world. Without the cerebrum, there would be no 
conscious knowledge of anything seen, heard, smelt, felt, 
or tasted ; and, without these senses, the cerebrum would 
be powerless to originate a single idea. 

Among many of the lower animals, the nervous sys- 
tem forms but a small portion of the organization, and 
is, apparently, merely an adjunct to more important 
parts ; but, in the higher vertebrates, it dominates over 
all, and the form and arrangement of every other part is 
specially adapted to ensure its protection and facilitate 
its action. Thus, in man, the bones of the spine are so 
shaped, that they enclose the spinal axis and brain in a 
secure receptacle, where they are preserved from injury. 

In regard to mind, and so-called instinct, it must be 
borne in mind, as elsewhere shown, that some of the 
\ery lowest beings, such as require a microscope to ex- 
amine them, exhibit unmistakable signs of intellect, sim- 
ilar to what we see in man. Much of what is called in- 
stinct is merely inherited habit / Children do, instinct- 
ively, what the parents did habitually, because they in- 
herit from them a similar form of brain, with similar 
tendencies to action. And, in this way, each generation 
is born with more capacity than the one preceding. 



CHAPTER IX. 



GENERAL SUMMARY OF THE NERVOUS APPARATUS IN 
MAN AND OTHER ANIMALS. 

The primary or fundamental portion of the nervous 
system, in man, is the cerebro spinal axis-— that is, the sjji- 
nal marrow, the medulla oblongata, and the sensorium / 
From these originate all those movements necessary to 
life, or the organic functions, and all reflex or automatic 
motions. With these parts alone the body may live and 
thrive, as a vegetative organism, but without conscious- 
ness. 

In the invertebrated animals, this cerebro-spinal axis, 
with its nerves, constitutes the whole nervous apparatus ; 
and even in one of the lowest of the vertebrates it is 
the same. In the fish called the a?npMoxus, there is not 
a trace of brain — neither cerebrum nor cerebellum — and ( 
even the sensorium and the nerves of the special senses 
are only rudimentary. In fact, the spinal cord itself, in 
this curious animal, is imperfect also ; being composed 
of a number of separate parts, or ganglions, placed close 
together, but still distinct. 

In man and all the higher vertebrate animals, not 
only do we find a perfect, continuous, spinal cord, and a 
sensorium, with organs of special sense, but also a cere- 
brum and a cere ellum. The cerebrum is also so much 
developed, that it covers over the sensorium and the gan- 
glia of the special senses, so that they lie underneath, at 
the base of the brain, as in man. 

In some of the lower animals, however, we find this 
reversed ; the sensorium being very fully developed, and 
the brain almost rudimentary. This is shown in the iol- 
lowing plate : 

(139) 



140 



GENERAL SUMMARY OF 



Plate XXXIII. 

BRAIN OF A CODFISH. 




(A) the olfactory ganglia (nerve of taste) ; (B) the cerebral lobe, or 
cerebrum ; (C) the optic ganglia (nerve of sight) ; (D) the cerebellum. 

It will be seen from this, that the optic ganglia in the 
codfish are greater than all the brain put together. 
They lie between the cerebrum and cerebellum, and 
separate them ; whereas, in man, the cerebrum extends 
back till it reaches and stretches over the cerebellum. 
The codfish, therefore, has more eye power, and man 
more brain power, or mind, in accordance with the ner- 
vous developments of each. 

These optic ganglia seem to be strictly analogous to, 
if not identical with, the corpora striata in the human 
being, and are, apparently, the centre from which pro- 
ceed the motor columns of the spinal cord. 

At this point it should be remarked, that the cerebrum 
it?elf, or the true brain, has, so far as observation goes, 
no direct connection with any of the nerve fibres, nor 
with the spinal cord. No sensor nerves terminate in it, 
nor do any motor nerves issue from it. On tracing these 
nerves, all the sensor fibres seem to end in the tlmhvmi 
optici, whether they form part of the spinal cord, or part 
of the cephalic nerves ; and the motor fibres, whether 
going direct to the spinal cord, or forming part of the 
cephalic nerves, all seem to originate in the corpora stri- 
ata. 

The nerves of special sense have their own ganglia, as 
already shown, in which they apparently terminate ; and 
thus no nerves can be shown to terminate in the brain 



THE NERVOUS APPARATUS. 141 

proper, though formerly it was' thought theycou'd all be 
traced there. 

The cerebrum, in fact, is placed over all, and exerts an 
influence over all, without being directly connected with 
any part. Its only mode of communication with the ma- 
terial world, as far as we can see, is through the sensori- 
motor apparatus, or the special senses ; but the precise 
manner of its connection with them is not known. 

The brain itself is not the immediate source of any ac- 
tions, not even voluntary ones ; it only sends forth an 
influence, which excites the spinal nerves ; and they ex- 
cite the muscles. The brain is not the engine but the 
engineer ; overlooking and regulating all the parts of the 
machinery which are under its influence. 

Wherever we find the cerebrum placed over the sen- 
sorium, we also find another brain mass (the cerebellum) 
placed over the medulla oblongata ; and usually they 
bear a certain proportion to each other, but not always; 
for in some fishes, the cerebellum is very small — iu fact, 
almost rudimentary. 

The cerebellum is directly connected with both col- 
umns of the spinal cord, but only slightly with the other 
parts, or with the brain ! It is, therefore, probably, more 
connected with spinal nervous action, than with true 
brain action, as will be shown further on. 

As before remarked, the cerebrum, or brain proper, is 
placed over all, and literally above all the other parts of 
the nervous system, and can, more or les^, control and 
regulate them* Each section of the spinal cord, and 
each of the sensorial ganglia, is a distinct nervous cen- 
tre and an independent source of nervous power — though 
this is not apparent, unless they are disconnected — but 
they are all used by the brain in the performance of its 
functions. 

* Excepting those parts that are concerned in the organic pro- 
cesses necessary to the support of life or nutrition, and these are 
independent of consciousness or will. 



CHAPTER X. 



THE WILL.-—TRANSMISSION OF IMPRESSIONS.— MUTUAL 
RELATIONS OF THE DIFFERENT NERVOUS CENTRES. 

The Will 

The peculiar state of mind, or action of the cerebrum, 
which immediately precedes any voluntary action, and 
which appears to cause it, is called the will ! And thus, 
all that we do, or refrain from doing, is said to be deter- 
mined by the will, which controls every bodily action, 
except those concerned in the maintenance of organic 
life. Nutrition goes on without consciousness, and inde- 
pendent of the will ; and so does every function connected 
with it, except breathing and swallowing, which, to a 
certain extent, can be controlled by the will. 

Over all other bodily actions, except those necessary 
to organic life, the will can exert a preponderating influ- 
ence, irom the lowest extremity up to the head, and it is 
instructive to trace out how this follows, from the pecu- 
liar arrangement of the nervous apparatus. 

Any impression caused by excitement to a sensor 
nerve, if not arrested at some inferior ganglion, goes up 
till it reaches the brain, causing no reflex action on the 
way. On reaching the sensorium, it gives rise to a con- 
scious sensation, and this being transmitted to the cere- 
brum originates an idea. This idea may either be asso- 
ciated with some emotion of pain or pleasure, or may be 
simply intellectual, and terminate in thought ; or it may 
eventuate in action — in which case we call it will ! The 
will, therefore, as before stated, is simply that state of 
the great nervous centre (or of the mind) which exists 
just before any voluntary action, and which originates 

(142) ■ 



THE WILL. 143 

that action. The will, in fact, bears the same relation to 
voluntary action, as the condition of the spinal cord does 
to involuntary or reflex action. If a frog's head be cut 
off, and, afterwards, one of the limbs be pinched, the sen- 
sation reaches the spinal marrow through the sensor 
nerve ; and, by reflex action, the motor nerve stimulates 
the muscles to act and draw the limb away. Now, there 
is no consciousness in the animal, and, therefore, no will, 
as an intellectual operation ; but the reflex action of the 
spinal marrow serves the same purpose. If the animal 
still possessed its brain, it would feel and know of the 
injury ; and, by a mental operation, or act of the will, 
exerted through the spinal cord, would act on the mus- 
cle and remove the limb. The act is the same, and is 
effected immediately by influence from the spinal cord in 
both cases ; but, in the one case, the cord is incited to 
act by the brain ; and, in the other case, it acts of itself. 
It is brain will, when the head is on, and spinal will, 
when the head is off*. 

The current metaphysical explanations 01 mental phen- 
omena, and the terms used in them, have so confused the 
whole matter, that it is difficult to speak on the subject 
so as to be understood. Metaphysicians undertake to 
speak of the mind as something separate from the body, 
and only using the nervous organs as instruments! 
This is basing the science of mental phenomena on 
mere speculation, instead of fact, and it can never lead to 
the discovery of the truth. 

This is well exemplified in regard to the will. Volumes 
upon volumes have been written to prove that the will 
is, or is not, free I And still the contest goes on, year after 
year, concluding nothing, but leaving the subject just 
where it was a thousand years ago. And so it must ever 
be, as long as the will is thus spoken of as a kind of myste- 
rious, independent being — a sort of sprite, or fairy, living 
in the brain, and deciding upon what shall be done, and 
what shall not be done, with all parts of the body, and 
even deciding ichen itself shall come into existence ! 

When an impression is made upon a man's cerebrum, 
through a sensor nerve, or by mental reflection, of a 
character to cause some action, we call it will', but to 
apply the terms free, or not free, to such a process is 



144 TRANSMISSION OF IMPRESSIONS. 



meaningless. Free, or not free, apply to actions, but not 
to will. A man can certainly do as he likes, if nothing 
prevents him, but to say he likes as he likes, or wills 
what he will?, is absurd, and yet it is just what meta- 
physicians do say. 

Will, or decision as to action, is merely the dominant 
impulse, and is a result of a certain condition of the 
brain, brought about, primarily, by externa! influences 
operating through the sensor nerves,. and according to 
the nature of those influences, so will be the decision, 
or will. For the will to be changed, the condition of 
the brain must be changed, and we can effect it in no 
other way. To speak of the will as forming itself, and 
capriciously making itself this, that, and the other, in- 
dependent of all causation, is both ridiculous and mis- 
leading. 

Transmission of Impressions. 

If the spinal cord be cut through, so that an impress- 
ion passing up it cannot reach the brain, that impress- 
ion will then cause a spasmodic reflex action, through 
the cord, which in such a case, acts as an independent 
nervous centre. Instead of being stimulated from the 
brain, it is stimulated directly, by the impression, but 
acts upon the muscles the same in both cases. This is 
true excito-motor, or reflex action, unaccompanied by 
special sensation, or consciousness. 

If the impression travels upwards till it reaches the 
8ensorium,\)xit still stops short of the cerebrum, the 
phenomena exhibited aie different. In this case there 
may be reflex action from the sensory ganglia, instead 
of from the spinal cord, and they may, as the organs of 
the special senses, guide and direct muscular action, 
at least to a certain extent. 

This is often seen when a person is much abstracted, 
and so occupied by his thoughts that external objects 
are quite unnoticed by him. A man in this state will 
often walk about as if he were asleep, and yet not come 
in contact with external objects, because his actions, 
though not directed and overlooked by the mind, are 
yet under the control of the sensoriuna. His mind takes 



TRANSMISSION OF IMPRESSIONS. 145 



no cognizance of objects, but his senses do, and that is 
sufficient to give him a certain amount of guidance. 

Such actions are called sensorimotor or consensual, 
and they are such as are exhibited by beings without 
the cerebral hemispheres, or in whom they are not de- 
veloped. Most of the early actions of an infant, such as 
nursing, are of this character. 

But, besides being directly excited by external impres- 
sions, the cerebrum may also be excited by an idea, or 
emotion, such as often arise, we know not how. Thus, 
while dreaming, or when in deep reverie, but especially 
in somnambulism, some idea or emotion will take the 
place of the wide-awake mind, and cause motions of 
which the individual is quite unconscious ! People will 
often do, in such cases, things of which they have no re- 
collection afterwards, because they had no conscious- 
ness of them at the time. 

In such cases, there is no proper conscious action of 
the cerebrum, but merely irregular flashes, as it were, 
of disconnected ideas and emotions, sufficient to cause 
muscular actions, or even, in some cases, fitful intellec- 
tual processes ; but no true perception of things, nor any 
connected trains of thought. 

Such actions are called idea-motor, when resulting from 
ideas, and emotional, when resulting from emotions ; and 
they are as truly automatic or reflex, as those which oc- 
cur when the spinal cord is irritated. In fact, ideas and 
emotions, or passions, are the most powerful of all nerv- 
ous irritants ; and, when they act in a morbid manner, or 
to an undue cegree, the individual is insane. In such 
cases there is no tcill, as we usually understand it, but 
the mind d ifts about, as it were, like a ship without a 
rudder. Something is wrong with the cerebrum ; it is 
torpid or diseased, or the rest of the nervous system acts 
so powerfully as to be beyond its control. There is still 
a will, but it is an emotional, and not an intellectual one. 

The Different Xervous Centres — their Powers and As- 
sociations. 

There seems to be no doubt, as already remarked, that 
each of the several ganglionic nervous centres exerts a 

13 



146 THE DIFFERENT NERVOUS CENTRES, 

peculiar modification of the nervous power, and can act, 
to some extent, independently of the others ; though all 
can co-operate, and all are controlled by the cerebrum. 

The various nerve fibres, therefore, going to, or coming 
from, the different ganglionic centres, convey somewhat 
different impressions, and influence somewhat different 
actions, according to the ganglion with which they are 
connected. Most of our impressions, however, are more or 
less compound, and most of our actions are more or less 
complex ; owing to the fibres from different centres in- 
termixing, which they do in the most intricate manner. 
In fact, it is seldom that the fibres from any centre pro- 
ceed directly, and without connection with others to any 
part. We find everywhere plexuses, or intricate net- 
works, composed of nerves from various centres, all 
crossed and interlaced in every way. 

This arrangement, it will be evident, makes the differ- 
ent parts of the body more thoroughly in unison with 
each other than they would otherwise be. No part can 
receive an impression without its exciting some influence 
upon neighboring parts ; and scarcely any action can be 
effected by motor-nerves from one centre only, but by the 
combined influence of those from several centres. 

This combination of various motor influences makes 
our muscular actions more varied also, and enables us to 
modify and combine them in an infinity of ways. It is 
this arrangement which enables the musician, and the 
mechanic, to do half a dozen different things at the same 
time, with the same muscles. If those muscles were acted 
upon by only one set of motor nerves, from one centre, 
they would perform but one kind of action, with no 
modification. 

In like manner, if the sensor nerves from any part, — 
from the finger, for instance, — went straight to only one 
nervous centre, they would convey but one simple im- 
pression. But, interlacing and crossing with similar 
fibres from various centres, as they do, the impression is 
compound, and gives us a more perfect conception of the 
nature of the object causing the impression. Thus, by 
touching an object, we learn, at the same time, whether 
it is rough or smooth, even or uneven, hot or cold, hard 
or soft, and various other properties besides, which a sin- 



THE DIFFERENT NERVOUS CENTRES. 147 

Plate XXXIV. 

PLEXUS OP NERVES. 
.1 




In this plate, the fibres from various centres are seen interlaced and 
crossed together in ail directions ; the figures denoting the separate 
trunks. 

See also the plexuses shown in the previous plates of the great sym- 
pathetic nerve, 

gle set of sensor fibres, unconnected with others, could 
never teach us. 

Besides this, such an arrangement is a security, to a 
certain extent, against paralysis of any part, because it 
is not dependent upon one source of motive power alone. 
Thus, for instance, the arm is supplied with its nerves 
from a large plexus called the brachial plexus, which is 
made up of fibres from five different parts of the spinal 
cord. From the plexus, five different main trunks go to 
the arm, and ramiiy in all directions to the ends of the 
fingers ; but each of these main trunks is made up of 



148 THE DIFFERENT NERVOUS CENTRES. 

fibres from all the five different parts of the spine. The 
result is, that every part of the arm is connected with 
each of the five parts of the spine, instead of with only 
one. 

Now, it might so happen, that one of these parts of 
the spine might receive some injury, or become diseased, 
and, if the nerves of the arm came only from that one 
part, the limb would be paralyzed. But, receiving its 
nerves, as it does, from all the five different parts, com- 
plete paralysis would not ensue, unless they were all thus 
injured. The arm would, however, be weakened, just in 
proportion to the extent of the injury., ..Thus, if one sec- 
tion of the spine were injured, a certain amount of de- 
bility would result, and, if two were injured, the debility 
would be still greater, and so on : but complete paraly- 
sis would not ensue till all the five parts were injured. 

The inosculation and mixing of different nerve fibres 
is well shown in the fifth nerve and some others. Some 
of them are solely motor or sensor in one part of their 
course, and both motor and sensor in other parts, owing 
to their receiving twigs from other nerves. 

And thus, a mutual connection and interdependence is 
established between all the parts of the nervous system, 
notwithstanding that the several parts may have special 
endowments of their own. 

The organs of vegetative life, usually called the vis- 
cera, afford another instance of the combined action of 
different nervous centres. These organs, as already ex- 
plained, receive most of their nervous influence from the 
great sympathetic nerve, but that is directly connected 
with the cranial nerves, and also with the spinal, some of 
which also go directly to the viscera along with the sym- 
pathetic fibres. In fact, there is a union both wa\s ; for 
sympathetic fibres intermix with the spinal nerves, and 
spinal fibres with the sympathetic nerves. 

The branches of the great sympathetic nerve, which 
come from the semi -lunar ganglion, are mostly distribu- 
ted to the abdominal organs ; and those from the cardiac 
ganglion, to the heart and to the blood-vessels connected 
with it. In fact, fibres of the sympathetic nerve run 
alongside of the arterial trunks in their whole length, 
and are evidently closely connected with them. There 



THE DIFFERENT NERVOUS CENTRES. 149 



is no doubt but that, in some way or other, these nerves 
affect the action of the heart and arteries, and influence 
materially the circulation of the blood ; but in what 
way we do not know. They ramify on the surface of 
the arteries in the minutest manner, and accompany 
them everywhere. 

There can be no question but that nutrition and secre- 
tion are, to a certain extent, if not entirely, dependent 
upon the nervous influence they thus receive from the 
great sympathetic ; and it is equally certain that they 
can be, and are, affected by other parts of the nervous 
apparatus, which are connected with the sympathetic. 

In the invertebrate animals, the sympathetic does not 
exist as a distinct and separate system, as it does in the 
vertebrate, though scattered ganglia are often found, 
which appear to correspond with it. Even in some of 
the vertebrates, the sympathetic and spinal nerves are 
not so distinct as they are in man. In some fishes, the 
heart and the intestines, in their whole length, are sup- 
plied with nerves entirely from the par vagum ; there 
being no trace of a sympathetic nerve. In serpents, also, 
the lower part of the intestines is supplied' with nerves 
directly from the spinal cord, and the upper part from 
the par vagum. A few cords of the sympathetic may be 
traced, but with very few ganglia. Even in human be- 
ings, many of the glands, especially those influenced by 
the mind, are supplied with part of their nerves from 
the brain or spine. Thus, the tear glands (lachrymal) and 
the glands under the tongue (sublingual), receive 
branches from the fifth pair, and the milk glands (mam- 
mary), receive branches from the intercostal nerves, 
which proceed directly from the spinal cord. 

Having now completed this general view of the nerv- 
ous system, we will next proceed to describe in detail 
the special functions of each separate part. 



PART III. 



THE SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, AND FUNCTIONAL 
DERANGEMENTS, OF THE DIFFERENT PARTS 
OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM, AND THE WAY 
IN WHICH THEY CO-OPERATE WITH EACH 
OTHER. 



CHAPTER XI. 

FUNCTIONS OF THE SPINAL CORD. 

The spinal cord extends from the foramen magnum, or 
hole where it enters the skull, down to the first or second 
lumbar vertebrae. In fact, it is continued, in the form of a 
small thread, called the Filwm Terminate, to the very end of 
the cavity in the spine. It is divided, in its whole length, 
into two halves, exactly alike and equal, which are connect- 
ed together only in the middle, by a small band, called the 
Commissural band, through the centre of which runs a hollow 
passage, called the Spinal canal. 

The two halves of the spinal cord lie, one on the right 
side, and the other on the left, and the division spaces be- 
tween them are called the Median fissures, the one in front 
being the Anterior Median fissure, and the one behind, 
the Posterior Median fissure as shown in the next plate. 

The two halves of the spinal marrow, as seen in the 
plate, are united only in the centre, by the commissural 
band, through the middle of which rims the spinal canal. 
The outside portion of each column is composed of white 
nervous matter, while the interior is formed of grey ner- 
vous matter, which also forms the commissure, or connect- 
ing band. It is with the grey matter that the spinal nerves, 
b,b, b, and c, c, are connected. (Plate XXXV.) 

This grey matter is partly composed of vesicular, or 
ganglionic matter — as seen at d, d, and at the pare- wiiere 
the "nerves are connected — and partly of two peculiar sub- 
stances, called the substantia gelatinosa, as seen at q, and the 
substantia spmgiosa, as seen at d, d, in the anterior el !Tuns. 
The substantia spongioia, is, however, largely compose! of 
vesicular matter, and the number of the vesicles is always 
proportionate to the size of the nerves connected with the 
anterior portion of the grey matter. 

A large portion of the grey matter is also fibrous, and it is 
tliis fibrous substance which forms the connecting band 
between the two halves. The fibres are exceedingly small, 

(153) 



154 FUNCTIONS OF THE SPINAL COED. 

Plate XXXV. — cross section of the human 

SPINAL CORD, IN 

THE LUMBAR 
* REGION. 




(A, A,) the front 
columns, (anterior), 
of the spinal marrow, 
right and left ; («), the 
anterior median fissure divi- 
ding the anterior columns ; 
(PiP)i tne posterior, or behind columns ; ('/), is the posterior median 
fissure, which divides the posterior columns; (L, L), the lateral or 
side columns, which are not marked off by any distinct fissure, but 
only by an indentation, as seen at <;, c ; (£, £, b y b), roots of anterior 
spinal nerves, (motor); (r, tr), roots of posterior spinal nerves, (sensor) ; 
(d, «T), tracts of vesicular, or grey nervous substance; (g), ^substantia 
gelatinosa ; (/), points to the hole in the centre, which is 's- spinal 
canal, running the whole extent of the spinal cord. 



FUNCTIONS OF THE SPINAL COED. 155 



not more than the ten-thousandth of an inch in diameter, 
and some even not more than the fifteen-thousandth, but 
they are perfect tubes. They run in various directions, and 
cross and interlace with each other in a variety of ways, 
both in the body of the grey matter, and in the connecting 
band, as will be seen in the plate. 

The spinal cord varies in size in different parts of its 
length, being usually largest at thope parts where the most 
nerves are given off. This is seen also in animals, and especi- 
ally in birds — those which have great powers of flight hav- 
ing the spinal cord largest where the nerves are given off to 
the wings, while those which depend most upon running, 
have that part largest from which the nerves are given off 
to the legs. 

In birds, and mammalia, the amount of grey matter in the 
cord is less, in proportion to the nerves running from it, 
than in the lower animals. This is owing to the circum- 
stance that, in the lower animals, most of the actions are 
simply reflex, and are excited directly from the cord, while 
in the higher animals many actions are voluntary, and pro- 
ceed primarily from the brain. In proportion, therefore, as 
the brain is developed, the mere reflex action of the spinal 
cord diminishes, and the amount of its grey, or vesicular 
matter becomes less. 

It is now generally conceded by physiologists that the 
spinal cord fulfils her functions. It is, in the first place, an 
independent nervous centre, capable of receiving external 
impressions, and originating reflex motions ; and, in the sec- 
ond place, it is the channel by which external impressions 
reach the sensorium, and the instrument by which the brain 
transmits its motor influences. Each of these functions must 
"De separately considered. 

In one sense the spinal cord may be considered simply as a 
large nerve trunk, or as a conductor of nervous power, in 
which capacity it acts like any other nerve trunk. Thus, if 
it be cut through, as before explained, all the parts below 
the point of division, are deprived of sensation and the 
power of voluntary motion. Such a state has frequently 
been produced in the lower animals purposely, for experi- 
ment ; and often results in man from disease or accident, and 
is then called paralysU. In the lower animals the completely - 
divide<il cord may reunite, and all traces of the injury, and its 
effects, disappear, as in the case of the pigeon, before rela- 
ted. Even in man, such a restoration is quite possible, and 
does often take place, but it usually requires much time. 
An attack of paralysis does, now and then, pass off very 
quickly ; but in such cases there is probably no actual injury 
to the spinal cord, and the paralysis results only from a 



1E6 FUNCTIONS OF TEE SPINAL CORD. 



shock to the nervous system, which may be speedily recover- 
ed from. 

An injury to the cord may affect only the anterior column, 
in which case the paralysis will be of motion ; or it may- 
affect only the posterior column, when the paralysis will be 
of feeling ; but if it affect both, then the paralysis is perfect, 
both feeling* and motion being destroyed. 

It should be remarked, however, on this point, that though 
this is true substantially, yet there may be some apparent 
exceptions. The posterior and anterior columns are 
connected, and fibres, both of the cord itself, and of its 
nerves, run from side to side, and unite with each other in 
various ways, so that an influence may easily pass from one 
part to another. This explains why the sensor nerves ap- 
pear, under some circumstances, to cause slight motion, and 
motor nerves to cause slight sensation ; and it also explains 
why motion, and sensation, may still be kept up, on either 
side, though the spinal cord on that side be seriously injur, 
ed. In such cases, the necessary nervous influence comes 
from the other side of the cord. 

And it should further be remarked, in reference to the con- 
ducting power of the cord, that it may still remain, more or 
less perfect, when the structure of the cord is very much 
changed by disease. A case is recorded where the spinal 
cord was softened, by disease, till its substance was almost 
fluid, for some distance, and yet the patient felt pain in his 
lower limbs, though he could not voluntarily move them. 
It is evident, therefore, that the cord could still conduct im- 
pressions upward^ to the brain, though it could not conduct 
the motor influence from the brain downwards. The lower 
limbs, however, moved involuntarily, by reflex action, the in- 
fluence being probably transmitted from the sensorium. 
There was, therefore, a certain amount of downward trans- 
mission, and it was obviously affected by certain emotions, 
the influence of which could be distinctly traced. 

In some cases, even the whole length of the cord has been 
similarly diseased, and yet its functions continued to be, to a 
certain extent, performed as usual. It is quite probable, 
therefore, that the substance of the cord, even when partially- 
fluid and disintegrated, still retains more or less of its usual 
power ; and it is similarly the case in softening of the brain, 
as we shall see further on. 

But, in all such cases, the functions of the diseased parts 
are not perfectly performed, and they are liable to sudden 
stoppage at any moment. * 

It, lias been a point of dispute, whether the spinal cord is 
ever, like the brain, the seat of conscious sensibility! that is, 
when its connection with the brain is interrupted, if it really 



FUNCTIONS OF THE SPINAL CORD. 157 



feels any impression conveyed along the sensor nerves ? In 
man, we know that it does not ; for no sensibility is experi- 
enced in any part, unless it be connected with the brain ; bnt 
some observations lead to the opinion that, in the lower ani- 
mals, it may be different. Reflex actions, of the most ener- 
getic character, may result from the spinal cord, after the 
whole brain is removed, but there is no evidence that they 
are connected with the slightest sensation. If a chicken be 
suddenly beheaded, both head and body will exhibit the most 
energetic motions ; the mouth will open, the legs kick, and 
the wings flap, for some time, and the animal may even run 
for a considerable distance. These motions are, however, 
all reflex ; and, in all probability, are totally unaccompanied 
by conscious sensibility. They, in fact, resemble the motions 
which occur during fainting or deep sleep, and in cases of 
St. Vitus' dance. 

After all reflex motions have ceased, in a beheaded animal, 
if fresh blood be made to circulate through the cord, they 
will recommence, and the muscles may be excited to act, by 
pinching or pricking, the same as at first. In fact, the cord 
retains this power, of exciting reflex action in the limbs, for a 
long time, providing the circulation of the blood be kept up 
in it, and it may be readily restored by re-establishing the 
circulation. Probably, also, the functions of the brain, or 
mind, could, in the same way, be restored in the head, when 
separate from the body. 

All such spinal motions, however, in man and the higher 
vertebrata, at least, are simply reflex, and take place with- 
out any design or purpose ; but, in some of the lower ani- 
mals, they appear to have a different character. Thus, if a 
frog be beheaded, it will still support itself on its limbs, and 
will even get up again if turned over. If its feet be irritated, 
it will even jump ; and, if the anus be irritated by a small 
stick, it will try to push it away. Now, all these motions 
are performed for certain purposes, and perfectly, just the 
same as if the animal still had its head on ! The question 
then comes — how or why are they so performed, without any 
concurrence of the brain ? As before stated, some physiolo- 
gists allow, in these lower animals, a certain amount of con- 
sciousness or mental power to the spinal cord, and thus ex- 
plain these singular actions. Others, on the contrary, con- 
ceive all such actions to be merely automatic, or mechanical, 
— that is. simply reflex. 

In man, it is evident, the spinal cord is simply concerned 
in reflex and involuntary actions; but is in no way con- 
nected with consciousness nor sensibility, — so far as we 
know. 



14 



CHAPTER XII. 



FUNCTIONS OF THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 

The medulla oblongata is simply that portion of the spinal 
cord which is contained within the cranium, or skull. It is 
composed, essentially, of similar parts to those which form 
the rest of the cord, and it is also similarly concerned in re- 
flex actions — having its own afferent and efferent nerves. 
There is, however, this important peculiarity about the me- 
dulla oblongata, at least in man and the higher vertebrates, 
that it is essential to life ! The cerebrum, and cerebellum, 
may be removed, and even most of the spinal cord, but still 
life may continue if the medulla be uninjured. 

On this account, it has been supposed, by some, to be the 
essential seat of vitality, or life. But the simple explanation 
of the fact is this — that the peculiar ganglion which gives 
the nervous influence necessary to breathing, is located in the 
medulla oblongata. If this ganglion, or the nerves which 
connect it with the breathing apparatus, be destroyed, breath- 
ing immediately stops, and death ensues. The reflex action 
of the medulla is the same as that of the rest of the cord, 
only it is concerned in the essential vital function of respira- 
tion, and also in swallowing. Many animals, such as reptiles, 
frogs, and the amphibia, breathe more or less from the whole 
surface of the body ; and, in them, the whole medulla ob- 
longata may be removed, and yet breathing, swallowing, di- 
gestion, the circulation of the blood, and secretion, will go 
on as usual for weeks and months. Finally, however, these 
animals die, apparently from want of more perfect respira-. 
tion ; they can exist only for a certain period without the ac- 
tion of the lungs. 

The general structure of the medulla, and the arrangement 
of its different parts, have been fully given before, in a pre- 
vious article, to which it will be well to refer in connection 
with this. The only thing necessary to call attention to here, 
is the distribution of its two essential constituents. 

The white or fibrous substance of the medulla is princi- 
pally contained in eight bundles or strands,— four in each 

U88) 



FUNCTIONS OF THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 159 

half, — tlie medulla, like the cord, being divided into two 
equal and similar parts. These strands are, first, the two an- 
terior x>yramids ; second, the two olivary bodies ; third, the 
two restiform bodies ; and, fourth, the two posterior pyra- 
mids. 

The grey, or vesicular matter, is principally contained in six 
ganglionic centres — three in each half. These centres form 
the nuclei of the olivary body, the restiform body, and of 
the posterior pyramidal body. 

These parts are connected with the brain above, and with 
the cord below ; but in precisely what manner, is not, in all 
cases, fully known. The folio wing plate shows their several 
positions, and then* connections with each other. 

Plate XXXVI. 

THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA CUT THROUGH. 




(A) the corpus striatum ; (B) the thalamus opticus • (C D) the cor- 
pora quadrigemina ; (E) the commissure, or band, connecting the 
quadrigemina with the cerebellum ; (F) the corpora restiformia ; (PP) 
the pons varolii ; (s t, s f) the sensory tract of nerves ; (m t, m t) the 
motor tract of nerves ; (g-) the olivary tracts ; (j>) the pyramidal tract ; 
(o g) the olivary ganglion ; {op) the optic nerve ; (3 tti) root of the 
third pair of nerves — motor ; (5 s) the sensor root of the fifth pair of 



160 FUNCTIONS OF THE MEDULLA OBLONGATA. 



* "This plate shows very well how the different fibres— motor 
and sensor — cross and intermix with each other. All the 
fibres, it will be seen, terminate in the corpus striatum and 
thalamus opticus ; the sensor in one, and the motor in the 
other, as before explained. 

In the ordinary spinal nerves, the two roots unite, just be- 
yond the ganglion ; and, the common trunk thus formed, 
divides into two portions: the anterior, going to the front 
part of the body, and the posterior, going to the back part. 
Each of these parts contains both motor and sensor nerves, 
which chiefly ramify in the skin and muscles. The ganglion 
is always situated on the posterior trunk, and the anterior 
trunk is the one that communicates with the sympathetic 
nerve. 

The nerves of the medulla oblongata are, some of them, 
similar to the ordinary spinal nerves, while others, (the cranial 
nerves,) are different ; each one having some peculiar structure 
and function. The nerves of special sensation are also cran- 
ial nerves, but each is connected with a special ganglion of 
its own — and not with the medulla. Some of the cranial 
nerves connected with the medulla oblongata are sensor, and 
some are motor ; and the two kinds are often intermixed, so 
that some fibres have one property,, and some the other. 
Thus, the fifth pair, or trigeminus, has two distinct sets of 
nerves, and on one of them is a ganglion, as on the spinal 
nerves. The first and second parts of this nerve go mostly 
to the skin, and the mucous surfaces, while only a few fibres go 
to the muscles, and most of the fibres of the third part go 
to the muscles alone. This would show, from analogy, that 
the two first parts are sensor, and the third part motor ; and 
experiment proves this. Thus, if some of the branches of 
the trigeminus are cut, sensation is lost in the parts they go 
to ; while if others are cut, motion is lost. 

But the fibres of all the cranial nerves are connected with 
each other, and intermixed, in the most intricate manner, so 
that it is scarcely possible for the effect of any sensation, or 
motion, in the head to be confined exclusively to any one 
part; ; but, what is done, or felt, in one part, influences more 
or less all other parts. 

Physiologically considered, therefore, the medulla oblong- 
ata is merely a portion of the spinal cord, and all general ob- 
servations on the functions of the cord apply to the medulla 
as well. The whole cord, as before explained, is both an in- 
dependent nervous centre and a medium of communication 
between the brain and the spinal nerves. 



GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 161 



General Observations on the Functions of the Spinal Cord, 

When we consider the independent functions of the spinal 
cord, we find that they are entirely reflex and non-conscious, 
and are essentially concerned in the vital or organic pro- 
cesses, by which life is maintained. All tjie openings into, 
and out of, the body, are controlled by the spinal cord, which 
regulates the action of the throat in swallowing, of the heart 
in propelling the blood, and of the sphincters of the anus, 
bladder, and other outlets. It is true the will exerts a certain 
amount of influence over the action of the fundament, and 
neck of the bladder, but that influence is limited. In fact, 
it only slightly affects the action of the spinal nerves, by 
which alone these parts really act. Thus the action of the 
bladder, and intestine, can be retarded, or hastened, or even 
suspended, by the will, to a certain extent ; but eventually, 
involuntary action ensues in spite of the will. A man may 
determine he will not breathe, and can really hold his breath, 
for a time, but in spite of him the spinal nerves will at last 
force the act of respiration. If the spinal nerves going to 
the bladder, or anus, be cut, those parts immediately lose all 
■oower, and act quite involuntarily — no effort of the will hav- 
ing any effect upon them then. 

The emission of the semen is another instance of excito- 
motor, or reflex action. When the seminal vesicles are 
urcharged with semen, the sensor nerves convey the im- 
pression to the spinal cord, from which an influence imme- 
diately runs, down the motor nerves, to the muscles of the 
penis, causing erection, and fiually, if the impression be pow- 
erful enough, ejaculation, or seminal emission. 

If the lower portion of the spinal cord be separated from 
the upper, these actions may still take place, providing there 
be plenty of healthy semen, Ifut there is no sensation, because 
there is no connection with the brain. Sensation, or feeling 
is not, therefore, necessary to erection and seminal emission. 

If, however, the lower "portion of the spinal cord be destroy- 
ed, or if the nerves leading from it to the genital organs 
be cut, the power of emission and erection is entirely lost. 

The will only exerts a limited and regulating influence over 
the genital functions, but the essential nervous power, on 
which they depend, comes from the spinal marrow. With 
plenty of- healthy semen, and the organs properly connected 
with the spinal cord, by the proper nerves, erections and 
emissions will occur, in spite of the will. This is a fact that 
must be duly considered, both medically and socially, and 
taken fully iuto account when treating these matters, either 

14 s 



162 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE 



in connection with bodily disease or with social vices. It 
is no more possible, in certain conditions, to prevent erec- 
tion, and emission of semen, with its accompanying sensa- 
tions and desires, than it is to prevent urination when the 
bladder is full, 

A sexual thought may cause action of the genital organs, 
but only when they are in a proper condition. If there be no 
semen present, £>r if the nerves Connecting the genitals with 
the spinal cord be cut, no mental effort, nor any exciting ob- 
ject, can cause the slightest sexual manifestation.. 

The act of child-birth, like that of swallowing, is, in its 
first stages, to a certain extent, influenced by the will ; but 
when it has progressed to a further stage, the spinal influ- 
ence is excited, and the rest of the process is involuntary. 

The spinal cord, however, has something more to do, be- 
sides merely maintaining the functions which are necessary to 
life. There are certain actions called protective, which are 
not always essential to life, but the non-performance of which, 
under certain circumstances, would lead to bodily injury. 
Coughing, and sneezing, to remove offending substances 
from the throat or nose, are actions of this kind, and so is 
the instantaneous closing of the eye when threatened by any 
object, or when a strong light flashes upon it. Such actions 
all result from the spinal cord, and may be effected quite in- 
voluntarily, and without our even being conscious of them. 
An experiment of Dr. M. Hall proves this. He found that 
the eyelids would close, when irritated on their edges by a 
feather, even after the brain was removed, so long as the 
spinal cord and its nerves remained perfect. There was no 
tuill, nor consciousness, in t3ie case, but still some power in 
the cord to cause such an action when necessary. The ac- 
tion of winking is commonly a voluntary act, but it is also 
involuntary, and is all the time being performed, without 
our knowledge or will ; probably it is necessary in some way 
or other to the healthy action *of the eye. The eyelids are 
kept open by the will, and immediately that ceases to act, as 
in sleep, the spinal influence closes them, and keeps them 
closed. This, with other illustrations before given, prove, 
as was formerly stated, that the spinal system never rests I 
It is the brain only that sleeps / The spinal cord, and its 
nerves, are always awake, while we live. 

In the organs of the special senses we have a mixture of 
nerves. In the nose, for instance, there is the olfactory 
nerve, which gives the special sense of smell, and there are 
nerves of common sensation, derived from the fifth pair. 
When any irritating substance touches the lining membrane, 
it excites an impression, which is conveyed by the nerves of 
common sensation to the spinal cord, and from thence ema- 



FUNCTIONS OF THE SPINAL CORD, 163 



nates the influence which excites the muscles to the act of 
meezirtg, to remove the offending body. The nerve of 
smell is not concerned in this act, for the irritating sub- 
stance may have no smell at all. 

The sensations which precede or accompany various reflex 
actions, have no direct part in producing them, though it is 
commonly thought that they have. The use of these sensa- 
tions seems to be to act upon the brain, and to cause will, or 
determination to do certain things, which are necessary to 
bring about certain reflex aod voluntary actions. Thus, the 
sensation of hunger leads to the taking of food, and the sex- 
ual sensation leads to the propagation of the species. Con- 
ception can take place without any feeling on the part of either 
sex, but the act of coition would not be often performed, 
if there were no pleasurable sensation connected with it. 

The movements of the limbs in man are generally volun- 
tary, and result from mental impulses operating through the 
spinal cord. Thus, in playing a musical instrument, every 
motion is calculated, and willed, to produce a certain effect, 
and all the complicated train of motions are timed and adap- 
ted to each other. In dancing, in walking, and, in fact, in 
all that we do, it is the same. All the varied actions that we 
daily perform have to be learnt by trying, or experiment. 

The amount of muscular experimentation required in learn- 
ing to play the violin, is something prodigious, and so is that 
which a child has to practice in learn .ng to walk, or even in 
bringing its hand to its mouth. A number of muscles have 
to be tried before the right ones are found to do the act, and 
then they have to be used many times before the child al- 
ways remembers which to use for any particular purpose, and 
how much force to put into it. 

In all these cas ,s, it is the brain that excites the muscles — 
using the spinal nerves as its instruments. But there is good 
reason to suppose that the spinal cord itself, in some cases, 
without the brain, can cause many of our habitual movements 
without auy ml\ and even without our consciousness. Thus 
soldiers have been known to march while asleep, and musi- 
cians have performed on musical instruments while sleeping. 

It is also well known that a man may have his mind com- 
pletely abstracted, thinking on something else than what he is 
doing, and yet he will continue on walking, the same as if he 
were in his ordinary state. Now, in this case, the brain has 
probably nothing to do with his locomotion, and it is per- 
formed simply by the spiual cord and sensorial ganglia. 

In many of the lower vertebrated animals, it is probable 
most actions are of this character. This subject will, how- 
ever, be referred to again, under the head of u Unconscious 
Brain-Action. ' ' 



164: GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 



The regular and constant action of the muscles, by which 
they always exactly balance each other in force, and preserve 
the body in its natural condition of position, is also kept up 
entirety by the spinal cord, and not by the brain. If the 
brain of a rabbit be destroyed, but the spinal cord left unin- 
jured, the muscles will still retain most of their firmness, 
and the limbs their proper rigidity. But, if the spinal cord 
as well be removed, the muscles at once become relaxed, and 
the limbs hang in every direction. 

A frog, with his head cut off, will remain sitting ; but, de- 
stroy the spinal marrow, and he falls over at once. 

The functions of the spinal cord may be completely sus- 
pended for a time, as we see in syncope or fainting. Such a 
state may result from any violent impression — either bodily 
or mental — which acts on the whole nervous system at once, 
and, for the time being, paralyzes it. 

This condition always begins in the brain ; but, in the pro- 
cess of recovery, the spinal cord is the first part to return to 
life. ' Thus, the patient begins to breathe, to sigh, to weep, 
and to perform every other reflex action, long before con- 
sciousness returns. 

The spinal cord, from imperfect nutrition, may act in a 
partly torpid manner, as we often see in persons afflicted 
with muscular debility ; or the same condition may result 
from disease, causing a change in the structure of the cord. 
It may also, on the contrary, act too energetically, from irri- 
tation or over-stimulus, and then we have excessive muscu- 
lar action, as in lock-jaw ! In this disease, the muscles act 
with such fearful energy, as to break the teeth and even the 
large bones of the limbs. 

Hysterical convulsions also result in this way, from spinal 
irritation, and so do many forms of infantile convulsions. 

The spinal cord may also be irritated indirectly by the state 
of many of the internal organs, acting through the sympa- 
thetic nerve. Thus, convulsions may result from a disordered 
stomach ; from costive bowels ; from diseased uterus in wo- 
men ; and from overcharged testes in men. 

Various medicines act upon the spinal cord, in different 
ways ; some decreasing, and others increasing its action. 
And, what is most remarkable, some of these medicines will 
act upon one part of the cord only, and others upon another 
part. It is often supposed that a remedy is acting directly 
upon some particular organ — as the bladder, or rectum, for 
instance — when, in reality, it acts only on the spinal cord ; 
but on that part of it from which the organ derives its nerv- 
ous power, and thus either increases or decreases its energy. 



CHAPTER XIII. 



FUNCTIONS OF THE SENSORIUM. 

The sensorial ganglia, at the "base of the brain, have been 
already described ; and it has been shown that they are sepa- 
rate and distinct nervous centres. The peculiar functions of 
some of them are tolerably well known ; some have been 
made out only partially, and others are quite unknown. Some 
of them may be defined as small, independent br.dns! each 
one having some particular faculty, or function, of its own. 
They are distinct, from both the spinal cord and the brain, 
standing, as it were, between the two, and partaking, to 
some extent, of the nature of both. 

Like the spinal cord, the sensory ganglia minister to reflex 
actions ; and, in addition to this, they are, as their name im- 
plies, intimately connected with special, as well as general 
sensation! In fact, many of the reflex actions of these gan- 
glia have a semblance of consciousness, and of apparent pur- 
pose, in the actions they originate. Many movements, which 
we call unconscious, but which seem, nevertheless, to be 
guided by something, no doubt result from the sensory gan- 
glia, which have enough of a power analogous to that of the 
brain, to guide us, in certain circumstances, when the brain 
itself is torpid, or otherwise emploj^ed. 

The sensory gauglia constitute the whole acting brain in 
some animals, and provide them with all the guiding power, 
or mind, which they require. We need not, therefore, be sur- 
prised, that, in some exceptional conditions, they should suf- 
fice for us. In fact, we often see men doing a variety of 
things, mechanically, as we say, while the brain is hard at 
work on something else. In these cases, the movements are 
apparently regulated by the sensorium, or se??4-brain! 

Experiments have shown, as before stated, that many ani- 
mals,— reptiles, birds, and even mammalia, — may live for 
months after the true brain (the cerebrum) is removed, pro- 
viding they are properly nourished. An animal, in this state, 
can balance itself on its limbs, and get up again properly, if 
pushed over. Now this is apparently something beyond 

(165) 



166 FUNCTIONS OF THE SENSOKIUM. 



mere reflex spinal action. There is, evidently, not only sen- 
sation, but something analogous to consciousness and will, 
which probably comes from the sensorium. 

If an animal have its true brain, or cerebrum, cut away, 
it, of course, loses all true consciousness and power of will. 
Strictly speaking, it has no thoughts, no mind, and lives only, 
like a vegetable. Still, there is something left of the nature 
of mind, and which corresponds, in a degree, to conscious- 
ness and will. If a bird, mutilated in this way, be laid on its 
back, it will turn right side up on its feet again, and will even 
walk, if gently pushed along, and fly, if thrown up in the air. 
A frog, whose cerebrum has been sliced away, will also jump 
when touched, and will swallow food, when put in its mouth, 
and even digest it, and pass its excrement as usual. 

Magendie tells us of some remarkable experiments upon a 
pigeon, which had its cerebrum cut away. Not only did it 
exhibit all the phenomena above described, but it also evi- 
dently had the special senses more or less perfect. Thus, 
when confined in a partly darkened room, it would find out 
the light parts ; and, in walking about, would avoid objects 
which were in its way. While sleeping, with its eyes closed, 
and its head under its wing, it would raise its head, in a very 
curious manner, at any unusual ncise, and then return at once 
to a state of apparent unconsciousness. It would also spend 
much of its time in pruning its feathers and scratching itself. 
Now, here was an animal with no true brain, no mind, and 
no true consciousness, and yet performing movements for a 
Bet purpose, and in a definite way. 

In another similar case, the pigeon would close its eyelids 
when a strong light fell suddenly upon them, and, if kept 
some time in darkness, would turn its head to follow a 
lighted candle, when it was waved round in a circle. 

We often see something like this during deep sleep. The 
semes will be wakeful enough to take note of movements, 
of light, and of noises, and will mix them up in dreams; but 
still there will be no true perception, nor conscious knowledge 
of them. The body will also be turned, while in such an un- 
conscious state, if it be in an uneasy position; or, if any part 
be pricked, it will be withdrawn. 

Now, the state of the pigeon without a cerebrum is al- 
most identical with this ; and it is exceedingly curious to no- 
tice the appearance and expression of the animal. It looks 
all the time as if it was in a waking sleep — noticing nothing 
intelligently, and evidently unconscious of everything. It 
will swallow food, if placed far enough into its mouth to ex- 
cite the muscles concerned in swallowing, but it will not seek 
food, nor take it up ; though its eyes may be open, and its 
vision perfect enough to enable it to avoid objects when 



FUNCTIONS OF THE SENSOKIUM. 167 



walking. Digestion, and all the functions auxiliary to it, will 
go on, if the animal be fed ; and thus it may be kept alive. 

Now, it is quite possible for a man to be placed in the same 
state, by accident, or by an operation, and thus be made to 
live utterly mindless. Indeed, children have been bom, as be- 
fore stated, without brains, and yet lived ; they were, there- 
fore, exactly in the state of the pigeon in the experiment. 
The amount, and quality of mind, in any man, depends, there- 
fore, upon the amount and quality of his brain, and if he has 
no brain, he has no true mind. 

Other experiments have also been made upon the sensory 
ganglia, equally showing their intimate connection with 
many of the ordinary movements of the body. Thus, if one 
of the optic lobes, — or corpora quadrigemina, — be removed, 
it occasions total blindness, with inability to move the eye, 
and much muscular weakness on the opposite side ! If the lobe 
be partially removed, the blindness, loss of motion, and 
weakness, will also be partial, and the animal will often ex- 
hibit a peculiar tendency to spin rapidly round and round. 
Irritation of one of the corpora quadrigemina will make the 
pupils of both eyes, contract, showing the sympathetic con- 
nection between it and the eyes. 

Many cases have been noticed in which tumors have formed, 
which pressed on the optic lobes, causing blindness, and 
sometimes a tendency to irregular movements, similar to 
those produced in the pigeon by the operation. This singu- 
lar tendency to irregular movements, when the optic lobes 
are injured, is probably due to the fact that vision has much 
to do with regulating all our ordinary actions, and when vi- 
sion is deranged, movement becomes irregular for want of 
the usual corrective. In some animals, as in pigeons, simply 
blinding one eye will lead to similar unusual motions, be- 
cause, in them, motion is regulated more by the sensory gan- 
glia than by the brain, and a little deviation from the ordin- 
ary condition leads to great disturbance. In some men even, 
there is a peculiar sensitiveness of the optic lobes, and look- 
ing with one eye only will cause in them a feeling of giddi- 
ness. Others are similarly affected by any rapid or irregularly 
moving body, and this is probably one cause of sea-sickness. 

Injuries to certain portions of the hearing apparatus also 
produce analogous effects to those above described. Thus, 
if the part of the ear, called the semi-circular canal, be cut, 
on both sides, the animal immediately begins to jerk its head 
rapidly from side to side ; and, when it attempts to walk, it 
invariably turns to the right or left, and seems quite unable 
to go straightforward. If one of the vertical canals be cut, 
the animal moves its head violently up and down, vertically. 
If both the horizontal and vertical canals be cut, the motions 



168 FUNCTIONS OP THE SENSOBIUM. 



will be mixed, from side to side, and up and down. Theso 
curious movements will continue for months. 

Irregular movements of this kind are often seen in idiots, 
and in some diseases, or after accidents, — probably from in- 
jury to the parts referred to, or from their malformation. 

The effect upon rabbits is more constant even than upon 
pigeons, but not so violent. If the anterior vertical canal be 
divided, the animal begins to turn somersaults forward ; but, 
if the posterior vertical canal be divided, it turns them back- 
wards. While the animal is still it has no tendency to do 
this, but the somersaults commence immediately it attempts 
to move, and the more rapid the motion, the more violent the 
somersaults. 

The experiments of this is probably the same as that given 
for the eye. This animal is accustomed to regulate its move- 
ments, to a great extent, by hearing, as well as seeing ; and 
the confusion of hearing, caused by the injury, leads to cor- 
responding confusion, or irregularity, in the movements. 

Numerous experiments have been made ont he corpora stri- 
ata, and thalami optici, but not always with the same results. 
This is owing to the circumstance that ttyese parts are so sit- 
ated, and so intimately connected with other parts, that no 
injury can well be done to them alone ; and, consequently, 
when an experiment is made upon them, we are not sure 
what part is most concerned in the results obtained. It ap- 
pears, however, to be established, that the thalami optici are 
intimately connected with voluntary movement. An animal 
may retain the power of standing, and may even walk, after 
the cerebrum and corpora striata are both removed ; but 
when the thalamus is removed, from one side, all sensation, 
and power of voluntary motion, seems to be lost on the other 
side, towards which the animal immediately falls over. If 
the thalamus, instead of being removed, is merely cut into, 
and the cerebrum not interfered with, the animal keeps turn- 
ing to one side, in a circle. 

Experiments upon the corpora striata are still less uni- 
form in their results, than those upon the thalami. Some- 
times their removal gives rise to singular movements, and 
loss of sensation, and sometimes not. This is probably ow- 
ing to the fact, that the different experimenters have all oper- 
ated in a different way, and often injured more or less the 
neighboring parts. 

Both the thalami and the corpora striata may be cut, 
pricked, or pinched, without any sign of pain, or any muscu- 
lar movement. But this is common to the most important 
nervous centres. The brain itself may be cut, or pricked, 
without the least pain being felt. This is because the brain 
proper is not concerned in feelimg, but only in thinJcing ! 






FUNCTIONS OF THE SENSOBIUM. 169 



The thalami, and corpora striata, are connected with the 
medulla oblongata by a series of fibres, commonly called the 
crura cerebri. If these fibres are cut through, all sensibility 
and power of voluntary motion, in the whole body, is at once 
lost. If the crura on one side be only partly cut through, 
in a rabbit, the animal shows a constant tendency to turn to- 
wards the opposite side, moving in a circle, which is smaller 
the nearer the cut goes to the pons varolii. If, however, the 
crura be cut quite through, the animal at once falls over to 
the opposite side, because that side is then totally uncon- 
nected with the brain, and is, consequently, paralysed. There 
is a body also called the tuber annulare, or sometimes the 
mesocephale, which appears to be, in some way, intimately 
connected with voluntary motion. Some physiologists have 
supposed the tuber annulare, and the pons varolii, to be one 
and'the same body, but they are really distinct,— the tuber, 
being, apparently, a projection from the medulla oblongata. 
It is found in some of the lower animals, who have no per- 
fect cerebellum. There is a considerable nucleus of vehicu- 
lar, or grey nervous matter, in the tuber annulare, which 
makes it a true ganglionic centre, or independent source of 
nervous power. But for what particular purpose this power 
is used, we do not know. When the tuber annulare is irri- 
tated, or an electric current sent through it, there are excited 
strong convulsive movements, similar to epileptic fits. 

The cerebrum, cerebellum, corpora striata, corpus callo- 
sum, spinal marrow, and the olfactive and optic nerves, may 
be injured without causing turning ; but, if any of the other 
centres are injured, turning or rolling results. 

The turning is in some cases towards the injured side, and 
in others towards the opposite side. Rolling seems to result 
when the injury is excessive, and often follows turning if a 
new injury be practised. 

Injuries to the facial nerve, in rabbits and guinea pigs, will 
cause turning and rolling for a time. Similar results also fol- 
low incisions made in the spinal marrow ; the motions being 
usually on the opposite side to the cut. The slightest punc- 
ture, on a certain part of the medulla oblongata, or even of 
the acoustic nerve, will cause an animal to roll rapidly, or 
turn, every time it attempts to walk. 

Such injuries are not necessarily followed by fatal effects — 
at least not immediately — for the animal so treated may live 
a long time, and not exhibit the turning or rolling, unless 
when trying to walk. In most cases of turning, the body is 
bent, like an arch, more or less ; but, if certain parts of the 
pons varolii, or the quadrigemina, be punctured by a pin, the 
rolling and turning tike place, but the body remains straight. 
Such punctures may also cause convulsions of the eyeballs. 



is 



CHAPTEE XIV. 



FUNCTIONS OF THE GANGLIONIC CENTRES, AND NERVES OF 
THE SPECIAL SENSES. 

The functions of the organs of the special senses are toler- 
ably well known, and can be spoken of with some degree of 
certainty. Sight, hearing, smell, taste, and touch, are the 
means by which the cerebrum, or mind, is brought into con- 
scious association with the material world. Without them we 
should know nothing of the objects and beings around U3, 
and should, consequently, be destitute of all ideas. The im- 
pressions made upon these senses, when conveyed to the 
brain, excite there a consciousness of the properties, or condi- 
tions of the objects which make the impressions, and this 
constitutes our knowledge of them. A stock of such knowl- 
edge is gradually acquired and stored up, as it were, in the 
memory, for the mind to use in future, and thus, ideas of 
things, which may be recalled, may exist long after the 
things themselves have disappeared. 

The nerves of the special senses are not like the spinal 
nerves, neither in then action, nor in the manner of their 
distribution. Except the sense of touch, which resides all 
over the body, the nerves of the special senses are distributed 
only to particular parts, which are the organs of these senses. 

The precise manner in which they are connected with the 
cerebrum, we do not know. 

The first pair, or olfactory nerves, convey the impression of 
odor or smell. They have nothing to do with motion nor 
common sensation. No pain is felt when the olfactory nerve 
is cut, nor does irritation of it cause any movements ; it sim- 
ply smells. When this nerve is destroyed, the sense of smell 
is lost; but common sensation still remains in the nose, 
which may be irritated by snuff, for instance, till sneezing 
ensues, although the offending substance is not smelt at all. 
Many persons, who have little or no smell, have a very irri- 
table nose, owing to an excitable condition of the nerve of 
common sensation, which is distributed over its inner lining. 

The olfactory nerve, and with it the sense of smell, may be 

(170) 



GANGLIONIC CENTRES. 171 



utterly destroyed, without any serious results, and, in fact, 
with liSle inconvenience. Some persons naturally have no 
smell, and yet seem to he unaware of their loss. Still, the 
sense of smell is highly useful, and its loss is a great depriva- 
tion, though not equal to that of either of the other special 
senses. 

If a dog be taken, with his eyes bandaged, in the neighbor- 
hood of a strongly-smelling piece of meat, he will be guided 
to it by his sense of smell — providing his olfactory nerve be 
intact. If, however, his olfactory nerve be previously cut, 
he may be led up to it, and yet be quite unaware of its ex- 
istence. 

Irritating substances excite the nostrils, and cause sneezing, 
in those who have no smell, merely by acting on the nerve 
of common sensation of the lining membrane, which is de- 
rived from the fifth pair. Irritation of the optic nerve, as in 
the case of the olfactory, also causes ho pain, nor does it lead 
to any muscular movements ; which shows that it is a nerve 
of special sensation only. If it be destroyed, there is an end 
to all power of vision, though the eye may still jeel as acutely 
as before ; owing to the presence in it of nerves of common 
sensation. 

The optic nerve, however, differs from the olfactory in one 
particular, — it can excite certain reflex muscular movements, 
which are necessary for its own action or preservation. Thus 
an increase of light leads to contraction of the pupil of the 
eye ; and, if the light.be very intense, or sudden, it also leads 
to the closing of the eyelids. In some persons, a sudden 
gleam of strong light also causes sneezing, by irritating the 
nerve of common sensation in the eye, which, being con- 
nected with the similar nerve on the lining membrane of the 
nose, that becomes irritated at the same time. 

A number of the fibres of each optic nerve cross over to 
the optic nerve on the other side, and mix with its fibres, so 
that they become intimately connected, which explains, in 
part, why the two eyes act so thoroughly together, and also 
why an injury to the nerve on one side affects the eye on the 
other side. 

The auditory nerve, in like manner, is a nerve of special 
sensation only, and irritation of it causes neither pain nor 
muscular movement. Destruction of it destroys completely 
the sense of hearing, though the ear may still be sensitive, 
frpm the presence of nerves of common sensation. 

The nerves of taste are different from those of smell, hear- 
ing, or seeing. They are, in fact, only branches of the ordin- 
ary sensor nerves,— of the fifth pair, and the glossopharyn- 
geal. The sense of taste differs from ordinary sensation, 
merely from the structure of the . tongiw^ which makes the 



172 FUNCTIONS OF THE 



sensation more acute, and probably modifies it somewhat. 
If these nerves are irritated, it causes pain, as in thexase of 
any other ordinary sensor nerve. 

The nerves of touch are found all over the body. Every 
afferent nerve fibre, all over the body, is connected, directly 
or indirectly, with the ganglionic centre of general sensation, 
and thus is concerned in touch ; but those, in certain parts, 
ao the ends of the fingers, for instance, are better adapted to 
receive impressions than others, and so we usually touch with 
those parts. 

There is no doubt but that, in all people, the senses could 
be made much more acute than they usually are, by judicious 
training ; and they might thus become much more service- 
able, in many ways, than they ordinarily are. It is stated 
that some of the wine tasters, in Spain, will distinguish five 
hundred different kinds of wine, by the taste alone, and name 
each one. Many tea -merchants also will distinguish the dif- 
ferent classes and qualities of tea by taste, with the greatest 
accuracy. James Mitchell, who was born deaf, blind, and 
dumb, distinguished persons by his sense of smell, which 
was so acute,^ that he could tell immediately when a stranger 
entered the room. In this case, as in many others, especially 
the celebrated one of Laura Bridgman, tie extra develop- 
ment of one sense is made to compensate, in a great measure, 
for the deficiency of the other. 

In the Journal of the Learned, for the year 1684, is men- 
tioned the case of a certain monk of Prague, whose sense of 
smell was most astonishingly perfect. It is said that "he 
not only knew different persons by the smell, but, what is 
much more singular, could distinguish a chaste woman, mar- 
ried or unmarried, from one that was not so." 

Those nerves which convey sensation most acutely do not, 
as a rule, act most powerfully in inducing reflex motion — in 
fact, it is often the reverse. Thus, the par vagum is a great 
exciter of reflex action, but has little to do with sensation. 

The intricate ramifications, and the numerous interlacings 
of the cephalic nerves, is very important and interesting to 
trace. They are all mutually connected with each other ; and 
all are in sympathy, if not direct connection, both with the 
brain, and with every other part of the nervous system. 

The sensory ganglia and organs of the special senses, there- 
fore, have certain independent powers of their own, and are 
also under the control of the cerebrum, and can be influenced 
by it, like the spinal cord and its nerves. Their special func- 
tions appear to be to act as the instruments of those move- 
ments whiclj result from sensation,, and of which we may be 
either conscious or unconscious. They can influence many 
actions which we need constantly to perform, without the 



GANGLIONIC CENTRES. 173 



mind, or brain, taking any cognizance of them. Thus, in the 
case of a man studying, while walking, the sensory ganglia 
take care of his movements, and guide hi:n, while his brain 
is at work on his problems, and pays no attention to what his 
limbs are doing. In this state, as far as his bodily motions 
are concerned, the man is in the same condition that most of 
the invertebrate animals, and even some of the vertebrates 
are naturally. They have no active cerebrum, and the sen- 
sory ganglia in them constitute the highest nervous centre. 
They are guided by sensation only, whiie man can be guided 
either by sensation or by reason, which either makes use of 
the senses as instruments, or leaves them to act alone. Many 
idiots are guided by the sensorium alone, like the inverte- 
brates. 

In proportion as the true brain is developed in animals, 
the independent action of the sensorium is limited ; and, con- 
versely, as the brain decreases in functional power, the sen- 
sorium increases. But, even in man, the sensory ganglia may 
supply all the nervous power really necessary to life! 

Ordinary spinal reflex actions are called excito-motor, be- 
cause they directly result from some exciting impression, but 
the reflex actions of the sensory gauglia are called sensori- 
motor, because they directly result from sensation — they are 
also called con-sensual! 

We are in the constant habit of performing many of these 
sensori-motor acts, without being at all conscious of them. 
"Winking the eyes, and yawning, which generally results from 
insufficient breathing and weariness of position, are acts of 
this kind. It is true we can yawn and wink the eyes when 
we will to do so, but it is also true that we do both constantly, 
without willing to do so, and even without knowing that we 
do so. The vomiting which is often caused by seeing some 
disgusting object, or smelling some vile odor, is also purely 
sensori-motor,' and. is independent of the will. Sea-sickness 
also comes under the same category, and so do all those pur- 
poseless and irritating movements called the fidgets. 

In some cases the sensory ganglia are in a state of irrita- 
tion, and then they act with more power. In such cases 
the senses are remarkably acute, and smell, sight, hear- 
ing, or touch, may become p ret ernatur ally acute, sc that 
the patient can smell, hear, feel, or see, what nobody else can. 
In other cases the sensory ganglia are sluggish, or torpid, 
and then the sensations and actions resulting from them cor- 
respond. 

Persons who walk about in a state of somnambulism 
are guided entirely by the sensorium. The muscular sense, 
or touch, will enable such persons to walk safely over places 
of danger, whicn they would not dare to approach when 

15* 



174 GANGLIONIC CENTKES. 



awake. A man may walk steadily and firmly along a 
narrow plank, while awake, if it be only a little way above 
the ground, who would certainly fall if it were placed across 
a deep chasm. And yet the same man may pass over such a 
plank safely, in the most dangerous position, while asleep. 
This is because, while he is asleep, his limbs are moved 
solely by reflex action of the sensory ganglia, and not by the 
brain, and consequently there is neither thought nor con- 
sciousness concerned in the act. But when he is awake his 
brain is active ; he reflects, sees danger, and feels fear, and 
dare not attempt what he might do safely when alseep. 

Many of the apparently dangerous movements of animals, 
such as goats on the edges of precipices, can perhaps be ex- 
plained in this way. The animal does not reason, nor calculate 
whether it is safe or not ; he is simply influenced by his well- 
developed sensory ganglia, which guide him better, in such 
circumstances, than the best brain could do. 

The two senses of sight and touch are, perhaps, the most 
concerned in directing bur unconscious movements. These 
senses take cognizance of all objects around us, and enable 
us to walk safely about while the mind is ruminating upon 
other matters. 

It is thought, by many physiologists, that the brain acts 
directly upon the muscles, in all cases of voluntary movement, 
by means of motor fibres, which run direct from the convolu- 
tions of the cerebrum to the spinal cord and the roots of its 
motor nerves. But there is no positive evidence of this ; 
and, indeed, a different opinion is now very generally enter- 
tained. It is thought that, in a voluntary movement, the 
brain really acts only on the ganglionic centres, and that from 
them proceeds the influence which causes the movement. 
The brain, therefore, according to this view, acts upon the 
ganglionic centres, and excites them the same as an external 
impression would do. The movements thus excited are 
called ideo-motor, in contradistinction to ordinary excito-motor, 
to show that they originate from ideas, and not from external 
impressions. 

In cases of somnambulism and reverie, such as those re- 
ferred to, there is no real consciousness of what is being done, 
nor of the objects around; but merely a sensual perception, 
sufficient for muscular guidance. The movements are due 
to the sensorium, and not to the brain. True consciousness 
is mental perception, and may be reproduced by memory. 






CHAPTER XV. 

FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBELLXJ^ 

Structure and Connections of the Cerebellum. 

The Cerebellum, or little brain, is peculiar to vertebrate 
animals. In the plan of its structure it resembles the Cere- 
brum, or true brain, being composed of two halves, or hemi- 
spheres, made up of nerve fibres in the interior, and of an 
investing coat of vesicular substance on the outside. There 
is also a central lobe between the two halves, called the 
vermiform process, which connects them together, and which 
is also composed of both fibrous and vesicular matter 
curiously arranged. The hemispheres are also further con- 
nected by the fibrous band, called the Tons Varolii, which 
passes under the medulla oblongata. 

The Cerebellum is directly "connected also, by nervous 
fibres, with both columns of the spinal cord, and with the 
medulla oblongata, but it has no direct connection with the 
cerebrum. 

The following plate will show the relative positions of the 
different parts referred to : — 

In the lower classes of vertebrate animals the cerebellum 
is only rudimentary, and consists merely of the central lobe, 
or vermiform process, the hemispheres not being found 
till we ascend to birds. As we ascend still further, among 
mammiferous animals, the development of the cerebellum 
increases rapidly, till in man it exceeds all others. The gen- 
eral rule appears to be that the cerebellum is larger and more 
perfect, just in proportion to the number and variety of the 
muscular actions which the animal habitually performs. It 
is true that many animals surpass man in particular kinds of 
muscular action, but he surpasses all others in the number, 
variety, and perfection of the various movements he per- 
forms. Even man's mode of walking, in the erect posture, 
necessitates an incalculable number and variety of minute 
muscular movements, all working in unison, to retain the 
balance and effect progression. No animal supported on 

'175) 



176 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBELLUM. 

Plate XXXVII. 

U10)ER VIEW OF THE CEREBELLUM, FROM BEHIND. 




W, W , the two hemispheres of the cerebellum ; r, the pons varolii* 
connecting the hemispheres underneath ; m, the medulla oblongata, 
where it is cut off; /, the pyramid. Between $ and m is the lower 
vermiform process, or central lobe. «, n, the amygdalae, or almonds ; 
*, e, part of the crus cerebri. The figures denote various nerves con- 
nected with the medulla oblongata, 7 being the facial and auditory 



four legs requires anything of the kind, nor do those whose 
bodies are placed horizontally and balanced in the middle, 
like birds. 

Birds who fly constantly and rapidly have cerebellums 
larger than those of slow habits, who mostly walk ; and the 
same rule holds also in fishes, those having the largest cere- 
bellums who are the most active. In reptiles, who are 
naturally sluggish, the organ is smalL 

Experiments on the Cerebellum, 

Many experiments have been made upon the cerebellum, 
from which much has been learned regarding its functions. 
Unlike some other parts of the brain, it may be removed 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBELLUM. 177 



entirely, without any immediate danger to life, and it is so 
situated that in acting upon it other parts need not he in- 
jured. 

If- the cerebellum he cut or pinched, there are no signs of 
pain, nor are there any convulsions ; but when it is sliced 
gradually away, the case is different. After a f ew slices have 
been removed, the animal becomes restless, and performs a 
variety of irregular movements, the restlessness increasing 
with each succeeding slice. Finally, when the last portion 
is removed, all power of standing, walking, or flying, seems 
totally lost. The limbs may still be moved, from reflex 
action of the spinal cord, but the different movements have 
no sort of association or unity of purpose, but are simply in- 
dividual and irregular. Thus, if an animal in this state 
be laid upon its back, it will struggle, but cannot rise, nor 
turn over ; and if placed upright, it will stagger and fall, like 
a drunken man. If a blow be aimed at it, the animal per- 
ceives it, and evidently tries to escape it, but cannot. 

The loss of the cerebellum, therefore, does not destroy the 
power of voluntary motion, but takes away all power of 
regulating movements, of co-ordinating them, or of making 
them work together for a given purpose. 

If one half only of the cerebellum be removed, it affects 
motion on the other side of the body. 

It will be observed that it is only the voluntary motions 
which are thus affected by injuries to the cerebellum, the 
organic or vital processes going on as usual, because they 
are not dependent upon this organ, but upon the spinal cord 
and sympathetic. 

Magendie found that when a deep cut was made into the 
cerebellum, on both sides, the animal seemed to have, in 
many instances, an irresistible impulse to move backward. 
This, however, was not always the case ; but, when one of the 
Crura Cerebelli was cut through, the animal always fell over 
on one side, and began rolling very rapidly — sometimes as 
often as sixty times in a minute — for days together without 
stopping. The direction in which the animal turns, in these 
cases, depends upon the locality where the cut is made, so 
that it may be made to turn any way we choose. 

In all these experiments, and in cases of disease of the 
cerebellum also, the mind is not affected in any way, show- 
ing that this organ is not connected with the intellect, but 
merely with the function of motion. It may, in fact, be 
completely softened, as it is in some diseases, without affect- 
ing the mind in the least, or its membranes may be highly 
inflamed without any sign of delirium. But no serious in- 
jury can take place to the cerebellum without motion being 
in some way or other interfered with. 



178 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBELLUM. 



It must, however,, not be forgotten that the cerebellum 
does not originate bodily motion, but merely regulates and 
combines the muscular movements which originate from 
other parts of the nervous system. There may be move- 
ments without the cerebellum, but they are irregular, spas- 
modic, and utterly unconnected. Thus, the legs may move, 
and so may the muscles of the trunk at the same time, but 
the animal does not walk, because the different movements 
in no way accord, or work together ; on the contrary, they 
may be opposed to one another. 

The cerebellum is, therefore, essentially the organ of the 
muscular sense, by which the bodily movements are regulated 
and combined. 

The Cerebellum and the Sexual Instinct. 

Phrenologists consider the cerebellum to be essentially the 
organ of the sexual instinct, and this view was, at one time, 
very generally entertained. Recent observations, however, 
do not sustain this doctrine, and it is now held almost ex- 
clusively by the phrenologists themselves, and not by 
physiologists. 

The size of the cerebellum, in different animals, is not at 
all in proportion to the intensity of their sexual instincts. 
In fact, it is larger in many animals who do not copulate at 
all, than it is in others of the same kind who do. The male 
bird of our common fowls, who satisfies, with ease, a harem 
of ten or a dozen females, has a smaller cerebellum than the 
male hawk, who contents himself with one. Monkeys are 
remarkably licentious, and will even commit masturbation if 
deprived of female society, but their cerebellums are not at 
all remarkably developed. It is the same with the kangaroo, 
which has a very small cerebellum, but is very salacious ; 
and so it is with cats, and rabbits, also, who will breed all 
the time, but whose cerebellums are not at all remarkably 
developed. 

The results obtained by phrenological observations, on the 
outside of the head, are of no real value whatever, and it 
may be safely stated that there is no actual anatomical evid- 
ence whatever to support the doctrine of the phrenologists, 
respecting the function of the cerebellum. 

Actual experiment has, in fact, utterly disproved the 
theory that the development of the cerebellum is in propor- 
tion to that of the sexual instinct. It has been found that 
this organ is really larger in mares, and in horses that have 
been castrated, than it is in stallions, while the very contrary 
should be the case, if it were really the organ of amative- 
ness. 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEBEBELLUM. 179 



It is true that disease or injury of the cerebellum, is often 
attended by failure of sexual power ; but so a]so is injury or 
disease of the spinal cord. It must be remembered also 
that, in man at least, muscular motion, of different kind-, is 
required in the performance of the sexual act, and a failure 
in this may very well arise from lesion of the cerebellum. 

Some physiologists have advanced a medium theory ; they 
suppose that the hemispheres of the cerebellum may be con- 
nected with the motor functions, and the central lobe with the 
sexual. There is no proof of this, however ; but rather the 
contrary, for the central lobe is not found to be any larger 
in bulls than it is in oxen. 

Still, there is good reason to suppose that the generative 
functions are, in some way or other, connected with either 
the cerebellum or the medulla oblongata, but with what 
part, or in what way, we do not know. A blow on the back 
of the head has been known to cause complete impotence, 
and a tumor on the pons varolii has been known to cause 
the most uncontrollable sexual frenzy. Great muscular 
exertion also, as is well known, will lessen considerably 
sexual ardor, as we should expect if the cerebellum be con- 
nected with both the sexual and motor functions. Friction 
on the back of the head will often excite the sexual instincts, 
and so will a fly-blister, while the application of cold will 
tend to subdue it. It should be remarked, however, that 
similar results have followed similar treatment to the spinal 
cord, so that the subject is still in doubt. There is, probably, 
somewhere in the sensorium, a ganglion specially connected 
with the sexual powers, but it has not yet been discovered. 



CHAPTER XVI. 

FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 

Structure of the Cerebrum. 

The Cerebrum, or true brain, is, unquestionably, the most 
potent and important organ in the body, both from the 
superior nature of its own proper function, and from the 
influence it exerts oyer nearly every other part. 

Formerly the brain was supposed to rule absolutely over 
the whole system, and to habitually control every function, 
both mental and bodily ; but careful investigation gradually 
limited its powers, and proved that many parts of the system 
act quite independently of its influence. It was ascertained 
that many of the most important functions, especially those 
necessary to the support of life, are dependent entirely upon 
the spinal cord, or the sympathetic nerve, and are carried on 
perfectly, even when the cerebrum is all cut away. But, af- 
ter this fact was established, it was still thought that all men- 
tal operations, and all true sensation, originated from the 
brain. But this view was also modified considerably, and the 
functions of the brain still more circumscribed, when those 
of the sensorium became known. It was then seen that all 
con-sensual acts, and many of those we call instinctive, result 
from the action of the sensory ganglia, which are capable of 
guiding the movements of the body when the true brain is 
torpid. 

Perfect consciousness, however, and all true mental opera- 
tions, are unquestionably dependent on the cerebrum, and its 
true function i3 to produce thought, or mind proper. Man 
can live without a cerebrum, or true brain, but he cannot 
think without it. 

As a rule, the cerebrum is found only in vertebrate animals, 
although the rudiments of it exist in some of the higher in- 
vertebrates, and probably in all, even to the lowest. It is first 
met with, in a distinct form, in fishes, and from them up- 
wards its development increases — every increase? causing 

(180) 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 181 



greater mental power — till we reach man, who has the most 
perfect cerebrum, and, consequently, the most perfect mind. 

Like all the ganglionic masses of the nervous system, the 
cerebrum is composed of two different kinds of nervous mat- 
ter, namely : the vesicular, or grey, aud the fibrous, or white 
matter. There is, however, this difference, that, while in 
other ganglionic masses the vesicular substance ia in the cen- 
tre, in the cerebrum it is on the outside, and the fibres form the 
centre. The reason for this will be obvious when we con- 
sider what the brain has to do. The nervous power, in all 
cases, originates in the vesicular matter, and the fibres mere- 
ly convey, or conduct it where it is needed. But the power 
of the vesicular matter to engender nervous force, in all 
cases, depends upon the amount of blood which circulates in 
it, and upon the rapidity with which that blocd undergoes 
the necessary organic changes. Now the cerebrum, in man, 
is the largest of all the nervous centres, and the most ener- 
getic in its action ; its vesicular matter, therefore, requires 
a proportionately large amount of blood, and must, in conse- 
quence, be so disposed, that the blood can be readily obtained. 
It is, therefore, placed on the outside, where, of course, it 
has a larger surface, which is still further increased by the 
convolutions, or folds. The membrane, called the pia mater, 
which carries the small blood-vessels, spreads over the whole 
outside of the cerebrum, and follows it down between all the 
folds, so that the blood is brought, in abundance, to every 
part. It has been estimated that, if all the convolutions of 
the cerebrum were unfolded, and laid out flat, the whole sur- 
face, in man, would cover about six hundred and seventy 
square inches ! These folds, or convolutions, decrease as we 
descend in the animal scale, till finally the surface of the cere- 
brum becomes quite smooth, as in the rabbit. 

Mental power, therefore, depends, primarily, upon the size 
of the surface of the cerebrum, and upon the quantity of 
blood circulating in it. 

The interior of the cerebrum, as before stated, is composed 
of fibres, of which there are three kinds, or sets. First, there 
are those connecting the vesicular matter with the thalami op- 
tici, and which are probably sensory , second, there are those 
connecting the vesicular matter with the corpora striata, and 
which are probably motor ; third, there are those called com- 
missural fibres, which connect the two hemispheres together, 
and also the different detached parts of the cerebrum with 
each other. These commissural, or connecting fibres, form 
the great bulk of the cerebrum in man, and in the higher 
animals, so that all the different parts of the brain are well 
connected, and can act in concert. 

It seems probable, as before stated, that the proper fibres 

1.6 



182 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 



of the cerebrum do not connect directly with the fibres of the 
great nerve trunks, but only with the sensory ganglia, through 
which all its impressions are received, and its influence largely 
disseminated. 

Connecting Fibres of the Brain. 

The corpus callosum, or beam of the brain, shown in the 
previous plates, is a mass of commissural fibres, connecting 
the two hemispheres with each other ; but, besides this, there 
are other connecting bands. The corpus callosum is not 
found in fishes, reptiles, nor birds, and is only partially found 
in many of the lower mammalia. The fornix, which is placed 
under the corpus callosum, is another large connecting band, 
which attains its most perfect development in man and the 
higher animals. The commissural, or connecting fibres of 
the cerebrum, constitute, in fact, a very important part of 
that organ, and are found to be largest, and most numerous, 
in man and the higher animals. In the lower animals they 
are fewer in number, and small in size, so that the different 
parts of the brain have but an imperfect connection with each 
other. 

Mr. W. H. Flower published, in the proceedings of the 
Royal Society, a very interesting article on the commissures 
of the brain in such animals as the kangaroo, and other mar- 
supials. These animals, though true vertebrates, and suckling 
their young, have no placenta in the female, and do not, in 
consequence, perfect their young in the womb. This shows 
a great fundamental difference between them and the perfect 
mammalia, and that difference extends to the brain, especi- 
ally to the great commissure, or band, that connects the 
two halves of the brain together, which differs in many ways 
from the corpus callosum of the true mammals. Mr. Flower 
remarks, however, that all animals that suckle their young, 
even the most imperfect, have this band, or corpus callosum, 
connecting the two halves of the brain together, but that no 
other animals have it at all. In neither birds, reptiles, nor fish, 
has there ever been found a trace of this connecting band ; 
but it is never absent in those that suckle their young, and 
is most perfect in man. 

It is very probable that deficiency of mental power, even 
in man, may often depend upon imperfect development, or 
destruction, of these connecting bands. This may especially 
be the case where there is small power of concentration or, 
inability to bring all the powers of the mind to bear on any 
given subject. In these cases, the different mental powers 
cannot act together, because they are not connected; — they 
are like the disconnected wheels of a clock, which may all be 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEBE3EUM. 183 



in motion, separately, but cannot act together to tell the 
hour. In fact, a man imperfect in this respect, is, as regards 
this part of his brain, in much the same state as some of the 
lower animals, and partakes of their mental imperfections. 

As remarked before, mind is, in every respect, a result of 
brain development, and is perfect, or imperfect, just in pro- 
portion as the brain is perfect or imperfect. 

Several eases are on record, in which examination of the 
brain, after death, has shown remarkable natural deficiencies 
in the commissural bands ; and in every case there had been, 
during life, some peculiar corresponding mental deficiency. 
Thu3,"in one case— that of a servant girl — there was no pro- 
per corpus callosum, but merely a thin sheet of fibrous sub- 
stance, while the middle of the fornix, and the whole of the 
Septum Lucidum were absent. The brain generally was 
healthy, and the middle commissure was rather large. 

The' mental condition of this girl exhibited nothing very 
peculiar, except a lack of forethought, and an inability to 
judge of the probable consequences of anything which might 
happen. She had a good memory, a good disposition, and a 
good temper ; her moral character was also good, and her 
mental capacity equal to that of her class, generally, but she 
was rather heedless. 

Now, these are exactly the failings which might be looked 
for from such a deficiency. The different faculties were 
there, but they were not properly connected ; they, there- 
fore, never acted in concert, and this prevented a proper 
appreciation of the connection between cause and effect/ 
Such a person would naturally be heedless, because she had 
no proper perception of probable results ; nor would past ex- 
perience be of much use to her for future guidance. In all 
respects, this girl much resembled some of the inferior ani- 
mrls, who naturally have no perfect corpus callosum, and 
who commonly exhibit a total lack of forethought, and profit 
little by experience. 

Now such facts are of the first importance, as showing us 
how certain peculiarities of mind, or disposition, may beTthe 
direct result of a certain condition of the brain, both in the 
sane and the insane. The notion that the mind is something 
quite independent of the body, and that it can be acted upon 
by intellectual or moral influences only, is an unfortunate 
one in many respects. It stands in the way of all practical 
attempts at the intellectual improvement of our race, through 
proper systems of training and education, and it leads to the 
most erroneous treatment of the criminal and the insane. To 
understand the human mind, and to act upon it, so as to de- 
velop it to the highest possible point, we must recognize the 
fact that it is essentially a product of brain action ; and that, 



184 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 



consequently, we must first attend to the proper development 
of the brain itself. Preaching, teaching, or moral suasion, 
can no more cure mental or moral defects of character, when 
the brain is imperfect, than they can cure dyspepsia, when 
the stomach is out of order. 



Weight and Size of the Brain. 

The weight of the whole brain, or encephalon, in men, 
ranges from forty to sixty ounces ; the average being about 
fifty ounces! The largest brains on record have been sixty- 
four to sixty-six ounces, and the smallest from thirty-three to 
thirty-one ounces. In females the brain averages about five 
or six ounces less than in men. In idiots, the brain is often 
much less ; being, in some cases, less than twenty ounces. 

The proportion of the different parts of the brain may be 
stated to be, nearly, as follows : If the whole encephalon be 
divided into two hundred and four parts, the cerebrum will 
contain one hundred and seventy of those parts, the cerebellum 
twenty-one, and the medulla oblongata, corpora striata, and 
optici thalami, thirteen — that is by weight ! The spinal cord, 
on the same scale, would weigh about seven parts. 

It will be seen, therefore, that the mass of the cerebrum is 
four times as much as all the rest of the brain, and the whole 
of the spinal marrow added together ! It is more than eight 
times as much as the cerebellum alone ; thirteen times as much 
as the medulla oblongata and its appendages ; and twenty-four 
times as much as the spinal cord. 

The proportional weight of the whole brain, compared 
with the rest of the body, is nearly one to thirty-six. This is 
a larger proportion than in most other beings ; for the aver- 
age of the whole class of mammalia is only about one to one 
hundred and eighty-six ; in birds alone, about one to two hun- 
dred and. twelve ; in reptiles, about one to thirteen hundred and 
twenty-one ; and, in fishes, one to five thousand, six hundred and 
sixty-eight. 

As a general rule, the proportion which the whole encepha- 
lon bears to the rest of the body, is much larger in man than 
in any other beings ; and yet there are some singular excep- 
tions. Thus, in the bird called the Blue-headed Tit, the pro- 
portion is only one to twelve, and, in the field-mouse, it is one 
to thirty-one ; while in man, as above stated, it is one to thirty- 
six! It must be remembered, however, that this refers to the 
encephalon, or the whole brain, which includes all within the 
skull. The cerebrum, or true brain, is not nearly so large, 
proportionally, as in man, while the sensory ganglia are much 
larger, and form in fact the really active brain of those ani- 



functions or the cerebrum. 185 



mals, whose actions are chiefly con-sensual, and not reflective. 
Besides, the bird has no commissural hand, as before ex- 
plained. In the rodentia, and especially in beavers, the sen- 
sory ganglia are remarkably developed — which shows the 
source of^the wonderful skill which these animals exhibit in 
building their houses and dams. They work by brain power ; 
but it is chiefly by the power of the sensorium, and not of 
the cerebrum, as in man. The beaver works chiefly by sensa- 
tion, and, therefore, always works in a similar manner ; but 
man works by thought as well, and can, therefore, change his 
manner of working, and profit by experience. 

It is important to bear in mind the difference between the 
different parts of the brain, as all comparisons made on the 
whole mass are likely to mislead. In comparing different 
races of men, in regard to brain, this fact should be especially 
borne in mind. Some races have the sensoHum proportionately 
the largest, some the cerebellum, and some the cerebrum ; there 
are also, in all probability, differences as to the perfection, 
and amount of the commissural fibres ; and all these differences 
in development make permanent differences in character. 
Thus, the Indians are naturally different, in brain, from the 
white man, the Chinese from the Europeans, and the Negro 
from the Caucasian ; and this difference in brain makes a 
difference in mind, habit, morals, and capability of development, 
and no efforts of education or training can ever make them 
all alike. It is the same with individuals of the same race, 
who must, and do, vary in character as they vary in brain, 
and never can be made exactly alike. One man, with a 
large cerebrum, must always reason about everything, and 
cannot believe what he cannot demonstrate to be true by obvi- 
ous facts ; while another man with a brain differently pro- 
portioned, believes without any demonstration, or even against 
actual facts! This fact, that men must vary in character, as 
they vary in brain, should form the very foundation of edu- 
cation, and should never be lost sight of in our social ar- 
rangements, and in our mutual daily intercourse with each 
other. 

The man with large reasoning powers, who can believe 
only that which he can prove, should bear always in mind 
that there are men to whom, on many subjects, neither proof, 
nor reason, is at all necessary to the formation of belief, be- 
cause their convictions are entirely emotional, and not intel- 
lectual. 

The man of ready belief, whose convictions spring from 
his feelings, or emotions, and not from his knowledge, or 
perceptions, should be told also that there are other men 
whose minds are naturally different from his. He should 
be told that these men cannot believe what cannot be demon- 



16* 



186 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBEUM. 



strated, by hard facts, and that convictions like his are to 
them impossible. 

If both understood this, they would not be calling each other 
infidel, bigot, and other unmeaning names, as they do now ; 
but each would recognize the fact that their mental consti- 
tutions were naturally different, owing to different develop- 
ment of brain, and that they can never be otherwise than 
different, without any fault in either. 

Circulation of Blood in the Brain. 

The amazing activity of the brain (as before explained) by 
rapidly wearing out its substance, necessitates a constant 
process of nutrition, which is effected by the circulation 
through the encephalon of an immense quantity of blood. 
No other portion of the organization receives anything like 
the amount of this fluid that the brain does. In fact, it ab- 
sorbs nearly one-fifth of the whole ami unt of blood in the 
body, and of this large proportion the cerebrum gets the 
largest part. 

Each half of the brain is supplied with blood through its 
own set of vessels, the main trunks on each side being the 
carotid and vertebral arteries. These vessels, however, 
though complete for each half separately are, nevertheless, 
intimately united, by what are called anastomosing branches, 
which cross from one to the other. These connecting branches 
are very numerous, so that if the main arteries which supply 
one side were to be destroyed, or become obstructed, that 
side could still obtain blood from the vessels of the other 
side, through the anastomosing branches. The importance 
of this will be seen in a moment, when it is borne in mind 
that thejbrain is paralyzed in a moment, if deprived of blood. 

There is also another important matter connected with the 
circulation in the brain, and that is the regulation of the 
pressure which the blood vessels make upon the nervous 
substance. Sometimes they are much fuller than at other 
times, and in some cases they are subject to very sudden dis- 
tension, and of course the amount of pressure which they 
exert depends upon their expansion. Now pressure upon 
the brain, even slight, may be attended with the most seri- 
ous consequences, but there is a peculiar arrangement in the 
structure of this organ which obviates the danger. There 
is found beneath the arachnoid membrane (as before ex- 
plained) a peculiar fluid, called the cerebrospinal fluid, 
amounting ordinarily to about two ounces. This fluid, like a 
water bag, operates as a yielding cushion, regulating the 
pressure exerted by the blood vessels, and distributing it 
over a larger surface. In some diseases of the brain this 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 187 



fluid is largely increased in quantity, and in other diseases 
it is decreased. The functions of the brain are often carried 
on, with but little disturbance, when this fluid is in veiy 
large quantity ; but any great decrease of it usually causes 
serious disturbance, by allowing the blood vessels to press 
directly on the nervous substance. 

The cerebro-spinal fluid has been found, in some cases, to 
be altogether absent, and it may vary very much in quantity 
at different times. Any increase in the size of the brain 
(or of its blood vessels) may cause more or less absorption 
of it, permanently ; and this is probably one of the condi- 
tions which favor headache and apoplexy. Any strong 
mental or emotional excitement, by causing a sudden rush 
of blood to the head, and so expanding the blood vessels, 
and increasing their pressure, may possibly cause temporary- 
absorption of the cerebro-spinal fluid. The excitement of 
alcohol may also do the same, but such a temporary loss 
may soon be made up, because this fluid is produced very 
rapidly when needed. 

Strong emotion, protracted study, and alcoholic or other 
excitement, if too long continued, may, in all probability, 
cause an absorption of the cerebro-spinal fluid, by keeping 
the blood vessels constantly too full. This disposes to 
head-aches and to apoplexy, because there is no longer f the 
usual cushion, or water bag, interposed between the blood 
vessels and the nervous substance. 

When any sudden decrease of the cerebro-spinal fluid is 
needed, in the brain, it can pass into the spinal cavity , and 
return from thence to the brain, if required. Or it can be 
totally absorbed, and removed, as rapidly as it is generated. 

It appears, in short, to be of the first importance that the 
brain should be constantly subject to an equal pressure in 
all its parts, and that any increase, or decrease, of that pres- 
sure should not be too great, nor too sudden. In cases of 
injury to the skull, uncovering a portion of the brain, it has 
been observed that if this portion so uncovered be pressed 
upon, unconsciousness is immediately produced, or rather, a 
state like deep sleep, which lasts as long as the pressure is 
continued. On removing the pressure, however, conscious- 
ness and mental activity return at once, and thus the mind 
can be put to sleep, or wakeQ up, at pleasure, in a moment ; it 
being literally under the thumb ! Thus undue pressure, upon 
even a small portion of the brain, suspends the action of the 
whole organ in an instant, and with it all sign of mind! 
The reflex actions, however, and all the vital functions, re- 
main unaffected, because they are not dependent upon the 
brain ; and thus the individual may live,~hx\.t be utterly mindless. 
The touch of a baby's finger, laid upon a small portion of 



188 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 



the brain, could suppress the mightiest mind in a moment, 
and keep it suppressed indefinitely. 

From this it will he easy to understand how a small clot, 
forming in one of the blood-vessels of the brain, may cause 
instant paralysis of the nervous power, or even death. A 
sudden expansion of the blood-vessels from a fit of passion 
also, or any other violent excitement, may lead to the same 
result, and so may a tumor forming within the skull, though 
in a slower manner. 

*> It must be borne in mind, however, that though excess of 
blood in the brain causes paralysis of that organ, yet a de- 
ficiency of it may lead to a similar result. Thus in cases where 
the heart suddenly ceases to act with sufficient energy, and 
where, consequently, blood is not sent to the brain in suf- 
ficient quantity, fainting, or temporary paralysis, naturally 
results. The same effect follows from an actual deficiency 
of blood in the bodjr, as we see when people faint from losij 
of blood. Those who have too little blood, or in whom it U 
poor and thin, are also apt to faint, or swoon away ; and in 
all these cases the cause is the same, namely, a deficiency 
of pure blood in the vessels of the brain. 

The Cerebrum the Organ of Intellect. 

In considering the functions of the cerebrum, we must 
bear in mind, as before stated, that this organ is in no way 
necessary to any of the vital functions. The nervous sys- 
tem is complete without it, as far as it is directly essential 
to the maintenance of our own lives, or even to the con- 
tinuance of the species. Many kinds of animals have no 
trace of a cerebrum, and yet live, and thrive, according to 
their natures ; and human beings even have been born, and 
lived, in the same condition. 

The cerebrum is, in fact, merely the organ which produces 
intellect, or mind, in its highest sense. By far the largest of 
the nervous centres, it is placed above all the rest, and, in- 
deed, crowns the whole organization. 

The impressions it receives from the material world all 
travel upwards to it, from the nervous organs below, through 
which also its reciprocal influence is exerted, downwards, 
upon the rest of the body. The nervous fibres connected 
with the grey matter of the cerebrum all terminate in it, 
while they pass through Jhe grey matter of the other nervous 
centres ; there is, therefore, nothing beyond, no higher organ ; 
and abstract reasoning, the highest of all the nervous func- 
tions, is performed by the cerebrum alone. 

We can perform many of the ordinary bodily movements, 
perfectly, through the agency of the sensory ganglia, as in a 
state of somnambulism ; but such movements involve no 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 189 



reasoning process, nor any choice of ways and means. It is 
only through the cerebrum that we plan, and calculate the 
proper means for effecting a given purpose. 

The cerebrum, therefore, is not a vital organ ; but is the 
source of reason, intellect, or mind. Its special function is to 
receive ideas, through the sensory ganglia, and to evolve 
thought ! From it also originates decision, or loill, and the 
impulse to all voluntary motion. 

The movements originating from the other nervous centres 
are either simply reflex, or consensual, like those from the 
sensory ganglia ; and these, if any, may be called instinctive, 
simply because they are in no way connected with, or in- 
fluenced by, any process of reasoning or reflection. 

Thus an idiot, born without a cerebrum, or a man m 
whom it has been destroyed, will eat food instinctively, when 
it is put into his mouth, but will not go to seek it. The 
acts of chewing and swallowing are simply reflex, or auto- 
matic, and are connected only with the spinal marrow, or 
sensorium ; they can, therefore, be performed without the 
cerebrum. But going to seek food involves plan and pur- 
pose ; or, in other words, reason ; and for this the cerebrum 
is indispensable. 

If we use the term instinctive, therefore, it should refer, as 
above explained, chiefly to those actions which originate in 
the sensorium, and which are not controlled by the cere- 
brum. Thus the actions of insects are mainly instinctive, or 
sensorial, because they have no cerebrum. Nearly all that 
they do, therefore, is done in one way, without essential 
variation. But birds, who also act instinctively, have a 
cerebrum, and their instinctive acts are often varied, and 
they will plan and scheme to carry out that which the in- 
stinct prompts. But still, even in the very lowest animals, 
true acts of reason, or real mind, are often seen, as will be 
shown further on. 

The same thing is seen also in others of the lower animals ; 
those with the smaller cerebrums acting most instinctively, 
while those with the larger cerebrums act more from intel- 
lect or reason. The degree to which an animal can be trained, 
or educated, for certain purposes, depends upon the develop- 
ment of its cerebrum. Eeason, or mental capability, is, in 
short, in all beings, a mere question of brain, or rather of 
cerebrum. 

Size of Brain, as a Measure of Mental Power, 

It may be stated, as a general rule, that the intellect, or 
reason, of any animal is in direct proportion to the develop- 
ment of its cerebrum. And this is true, not only of different 
races of beings, but also of the individual members of each 



190 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 



kind. Thus, foxes have better developed cerebrums than 
wolves, and human beings than apes, while some men have 
better developed cerebrums than other men, in consequence 
of which they are superior to them in intellect. 

It is not, therefore, the whole organ which has to be 
considered, when estimating mental power by the size 
of the brain, but merely one part of it — the cerebrum, which 
alone is concerned in intellectual acts. Nor is it size alone 
which has to be considered, when estimating the power of 
the cerebrum, for a small one may be more powerful than a 
larger one. It is the amount of grey, or vesicular matter in 
the cerebrum which determines its mental power, and not 
its mere total bulk. The way in which the grey matter is 
distributed also has its influence. For the more its surface 
is increased, by the number and depth of the convolutions, 
the more powerful it will be. Possibly, also, the number of 
the vesicles themselves, and the perfection of their develop- 
ment, may exert considerable influence. 

The different parts of the cerebrum are also differently 
developed in different beings, and there is every reason to 
suppose that its power is affected by such differences. 

All we can say positively, therefore, is, that mental power, 
or intellect, depends upon the amount, disposition, and per- 
haps the quality, of the grey, or vesicular matter of the 
cerebrum. 

Very generally the mere size of the whole brain, compared 
with the whole body, is a measure of mental power ; but 
there are many exceptions. Thus, the canary bird has a 
larger proportional brain than a man ; but, when we come 
to compare the truly intellectual part -the cerebrum — the 
proportion is changed. It is the same with men ; one man 
may have a larger whole* brain than another, and yet have 
much less mental power, because he has a less cerebrum. 
But even the cerebrum itself may be larger in one than in 
another, and yet have less intellectual power, from having 
less vesicular matter in its composition, or being not so well 
proportioned, or its parts so well connected. 

While it is true, therefore, that mind, or intellect, depends 
wholly upon the brain, we do not know fully all the condi- 
tions by which its manifestations are influenced. We know, 
for certain, that all mental modifications and differences re- 
sult from modifications, or differences, of brain, and that 
with no brain, we have no mind at all. 

As a rule, therefore, the larger the brain, or rather the 
cerebrum, the greater the amount of mental power, and the 
reverse ; though there are many exceptions, for reasons 
above given. A man with a brain below a certain size, how- 
ever, is necessarily an idiot. 



JUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 191 



It must also be remembered that some brains are natur- 
ally more active than others ; owing, probably, to a more vig- 
orous circulation of the blood ; and thus a large brain, with 
much real power, may do less work than a smaller one that 
is more active. 

Nor must we lose sight of the effects of training, and here- 
ditary descent, which operate not only in increasing the size 
of the brain, but also in improving its quality. The children 
of educated people, if the parents have been properly mated, 
will be born with superior nervous organizations, so that 
they will possess more mental capacity than those born of 
uneducated, or ill-mated parents, though they may not have 
larger brains. In this way, the accumulated knowledge of 
one generation may be transmitted to the next generation, 
in the form of a greater aptitude for acquiring knowledge ; 
so that the children begin, to a certain extent, where the 
parents left off ! 

Some savages have large brains, perhaps as large as those 
of some philosophers ; but they are coarse, so to speak, and 
unaffected by the refining influence of ancestral training and 
development. They inherit nothing but rude force, or pow- 
er, and this is all they exhibit. The possessors of such heads 
are, however, nearly always the chiefs and leaders of the 
tribe, and often exhibit a- remarkable mental capacity. The 
savage who first conceived the idea of fixing a sharp stone in 
stick, to make an axe, or spear, was a great inventor for his 
time ; and perhaps his simple discovery was as important, to 
his tribe, as the discovery of the steam engine has been to 
us. It is easy to see that a tribe armed with such improved 
weapons would have, over another tribe armed only with sim- 
ple sticks, the same advantage that the possessors of modern 
breech-loading guns have over those who . only possess the 
old flint-locks. 

The discoverer of the stone hatchet might have great men- 
tal power, nearly equal perhaps to that of the discoverer of 
the steam engine, but it would be power in a crude, unre- 
fined form, deficient in adaptive aptitude and variety of 
manifestation. The difference between the two is similar to 
that between the brawny blacksmith and the trained artizan. 
They may both have equal muscular power, but the one can 
only strike heavy, crushing blows, while the other can strike 
hard or soft, and can vary the action of his muscles in a hun- 
dred different ways, from the giant's blow to the baby's gen- 
tle touch. 

It must always be borne in mind that the power of the 
brain depends, not alone on its actual bulk, or weight, but 
on the extent of its surface, and that this depends upon the 
number and depth of the convolutions. A very small hand- 



192 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 



kerchief can be made to occupy a large space, if we try to 
keep it smooth and un wrinkled, but we can put quite a large 
one in the same space by compressing it closely and folding 
it. Now, these folds in the* handkerchief are like the con- 
volutions in the brain. The two handkerchiefs may appear 
of the same size ; but, when opened out, the surface of one 
will be found much larger than the surface of the other. In 
the same manner, then, may be two brains occupying skulls 
of the same size, and being of the same weight ; but, if one 
has more convolutions than the other, it will open out a 
much larger surface, and, in consequence of that extra sur- 
face, it will have extra power. 

The amount and kind of work which a big brain performs 
depends on the circumstances in which the individual has 
been placed. Thus, Fisk's brain (the Erie financier), it is 
said, weighed fifty-eight ounces, Daniel Webster's weighed 
fifty-three and a half ounces, Cuvier had sixty-four and u 
half ounces, while Professor Abercrombie possessed sixty- 
three. Kulloff, the murderer, who was executed at Bing- 
ham ton, N. Y. , had 59 ounces of brain. 

The Brain of Man compared with that of the Lower 
Animals., 

It was formerly thought, and taught, that the posterior 
lobe of the brain, and the posterior cornu of the lateral ven- 
tricle, with the hippocampus minor, were peculiar to man, and 
distinguished him from all other animals, especially from 
the man-like apes. Professor Huxley, however, shows — in 
his excellent little work, " Man's Place in Nature" — that 
this is a mistake, and that all the apes' and monkeys possess 
these parts, in the brain, the same as man ; so that, in this 
respect, they belong to the same order as man. In fact, the 
hippocampus is as plainly to be seen in the orang, or chim- 
panzee, as in man. 

Professor Huxley remarks thus : " So far as cerebral struc- 
ture goes, therefore, it is clear that man differs less from the 
chimpanzee or the orang, than these do even from the mon- 
key, and that the difference between the brain of the chim- 
panzee, and of man, is almost insignificant, when compared 
with that between the chimpanzee brain and that of a lemur. 

"It must not be overlooked, however, that there is a very 
striking difference in absolute mass, and weight, between the 
lowest human brain and that of the highest ape, — a differ- 
ence which is all the more remarkable when we recollect 
that a full-grown gorilla is probably pretty nearly twice as 
heavy as a Bosjesman, or as man}' a European woman. It 
may be doubted whether a healthy human adult brain ever 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 193 



•weighed less than thirty-one, or thirty-two ounces, or that 
the heaviest gorilla brain has exceeded twenty onnces. This 
is a very noteworthy circumstance, and doubtless will, one 
day, help to furnish an explanation of the great gulf which 
intervenes between the lowest man, and the highest ape, in 
intellectual power." 

Professor Huxley, however, shows, that it is not to the 
brain alone, neither in size nor quality, that we must look 
for the cause of man's intellectual superiority, but to that in 
conjunction with other functional peculiarities. Articulate 
speech especially assists the brain, both in acquiring and 
conveying knowledge, and thus constantly increasing it. The 
for.m of man's limbs, also, adapted to so many different pur- 
poses, is an important element in his progressive improve- 
ment, since it enables him to carry out the purposes suggested 
by his mental action. 

If a man were born deaf and dumb, with a large and well- 
formed brain, and were confined to the society of deaf and 
dumb people, it would be impossible for him to attain to 
much mental development, because his faculties could not 
have full play, and could not manifest themselves. Still, if 
that man's brain were examined, no difference could be de- 
tected between it and the brain of a highly-cultivated man. 

There may be no apparent difference between two watches, 
and yet one may keep good time, and the other not. A little 
speck of dust, or rust, may make all the difference, and only 
the watchmaker, after careful inspection, is able to detect 
that speck. There may be no difference in the size or stric- 
ture of the two watches, and yet they may differ materially 
in their action, from some little accidental interference. 
Just so it may be with the brain. Undoubtedly the faculty 
of articulate speech is one of the main causes of man's men- 
tal progress and superiority. 

The collections of Dr. J. B. Davis, and Dr. Morton, give 
the following average internal capacity of the cranium in 
different races : Teutonic family (German and Anglo-Sax- 
ons), ninety-four cubic inches ; Esquimaux, ninety-one 
inches ; Negroes, eighty-five inches ; Australians and Tas- 
manians, eighty -two inches ; Bushmen, seventy-seven inches. 

This shows that the actual bulk of the brain is not very 
much less in the savage than in the civilized man, and some- 
times one is found, even among the most barbarous, as large 
*s the largest of the Teutons. Thus, in Dr. Davis' collec- 
tion, while the largest Teutonic skull is only one hundred 
and twelve inches, there is an Araucanian one hundred and 
fifteen, an Esquimaux one hundred and thirteen, a Mar- 
quesan one hundred and ten, and even a Negro one hundred 
and five. 

17 



194 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 



We may even go further than this ; for the few skulls we 
have of pre-historic men, of those who lived in past ages of 
the world, along with the animals now extinct and fossilized, 
are not at all inferior in size to those of men of the present 
daj\ The one called the Engis skull, which, Sir John Lub- 
bock says, belonged to a man who no doubt lived at the same 
time with the mammoths, is a fair average skull — so Profes- 
sor Huxley tells us — and might have belonged to a philoso- s 
pher, or might have contained the thoughtless brains of a 
savage. 

It is, therefore, evident, as before stated, that mental power 
is not dependent alone upon the mere size or structure of 
the brain, but upon these in conjunction with other condi- 
tions. 

Experiments on the Cerebrum. 

Experiments made upon the cerebrum of living animals, 
and observations upon cases of disease, all lead to the same 
result, and appear to prove that this organ is the seat of in- 
telligence, or reason, alone. All the reflex actions essential to 
life ; all the special sensations, and even a certain degree of 
consciousness, can exist without the cerebrum ; but when it 
is absent, or much diseased, there is no manifestation of in- 
telligence at all. 

When one entire half of the cerebrum is removed — which 
has frequently been done — there is usually only a slight and 
temporary disturbance of cerebral action. The sight on the 
opposite side seems to be lost, and there is, for a time, great 
feebleness of the muscles, also on the opposite side ; but 
this soon passes away, and the animal seems little the worse, 
except in its sight. If the upper half of both hemispheres 
of the cerebrum be cut away, instead of removing one whole 
half, the effects are different ; the animal then seems to be 
reduced to the same state as if it had no cerebrum, and this 
state continues for many days, but is gradually recovered 
from, so that sensation and muscular power return almost 
to what they were before the operation. 

The removal of the whole of the cerebrum causes a total 
loss of intelligence, and of will. The animal seems to be in a 
deep sleep, or stupor, in which all the vital functions, and 
those of the sensorium and special senses, are still per- 
formed as usual, but with no intelligent perception of any- 
thing. It is, in fact, mere life, without mind or reason. 

Many of the observed facts seem to show, however, that 
there is still, in this state of mental death, a certain amount 
of consciousness, or conscious perception. Thus the pigeon, 
whose cerebrum had been totally removed, would still turn 
to the light, when it was waved before his eyes, and would < 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 195 



even try to avoid a blow, though in a state of perfect stupor. 
Consciousness would seem therefore to be not seated in the 
cerebrum, or at least not altogether ; and therefore not 
necessarily connected with reason. 

Professor Goltz, of Konigsberg, has made some curious 
experiments upon frogs, which illustrate well many of the 
phenomena of the nervous system. Among others, he care- 
fully removed the cerebrum of one animal, so that little or no 
blood was lost, and as little general injury was done as pos- 
sible. He found that the frog rested in its usual natural 
position, just as it did before, without any sign of distress 
or inconvenience, but without any tendency to move, so long 
as let alone. But on being pinched or pressed, it imme- 
diately turned to one side, or leaped forward, and then re- 
mained as motionless in the new position as before. It 
made no noise, so long as left alone, but on rubbing the back 
with a wet finger, a croak was emitted, as if it were pleased. 

A frog in this state balanced itself perfectly, and when a 
book, on which it had been placed, was tilted up, the ani- 
mal crawled to the upper edge and hung on by its fore feet. 
If the book was then tilted the other way, it would turn 
round and climb up to the other edge, but in no case would 
it leap off, as a perfect frog would be sure to do. 

These experiments tend to show that the voice, and the 
power of balancing, are not dependent upon the cerebrum, 
but probably upon some part of the spinal marrow. 

In an animal so mutilated there can be no intelligent con- 
sciousness, nor conscious feeling, but all the motions are 
merely reflex, consensual, or what is usually called instinc- 
tive. All the vital functions go on as usual, and the being 
lives, but without knowing or feeling anything. 

Voit, of Munich, in repeating similar experiments, on 
pigeons, has found that the whole cerebrum, after having 
been entirely removed, will grow again, and become as per- 
fect as before ! In such cases the brain, and the mind with 
it, are gradually destroyed, bit by bit, and both grow again 
together, bit by bit ! 

Effects of Disease of the Cerebrum. 

A more or less complete destruction of the cerebrum by 
disease, corresponding to the effects of the operations above 
described, is followed by similar results. But it must be 
actual destruction of the organ, not mere alteration, which 
may be quite extensive and yet lead to little cerebral disturb- 
ance. Thus in hydrocephalus, the pressure of the water 
will often stretch the substance of the brain till it is only 
like a thin skin ; but the mental functions are not impaired 



196 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 



in consequence, because the brain is not destroyed, bnt 
merely expanded. 

All alterations however must be gradual, so as to give 
time for the brain to accommodate itself to the change ; for 
if the}' are sudden, serious consequences inevitably result. 
Thus, in the case of hydrocephalus, the pressure comes on 
gradually, with no bad result ; but if, in the ordinary state, 
even a small quantity of blood escapes from one of the blood 
vessels of the brain, the pressure which it exerts suddenly, 
though but slight, causes paralysis, or apoplexy. 

The substance of the brain is sometimes, in disease, re- 
markably changed in character, so as to appear little more 
than a mere pulp, and yet it will perform its functions toler- 
ably well, so that nothing seriously wrong is suspected. 
Ultimately, however, a point is reached where its power is 
totally lost; but in softening of the brain there will fre- 
quently be curious alternations, the patient having inter- 
vals perfectly lucid, and then again being quite idiotic. 
Such a disease may not lead to death, unless it affect the 
whole brain, but only to a loss of reason if it affect but the 
cerebrum. 

The important fact which is here intended to be estab- 
lished is, therefore, that the cerebrum is something in addi- 
tion to all those parts of the nervous system which are 
necessary to life, and that it gives us reason,, in addition to all 
the nervous powers possessed by animals below us. 

This is well shown in many cases, well established, of 
human beings who have lived without cerebrums, or with 
very imperfect ones. Being more or less deficient in intel- 
lect, or real intelligence, their actions have always been 
simply reflex, or consensual, like those of animals naturally 
deficient to a similar extent. A poor idiotic girl in Paris was 
violated, and became pregnant. She was-delivered naturally, 
while alone, and it was found that she had knawed through 
the navel string with her teeth, as many animals do. This 
was an instinctive act, resulting from the sensorium alone. 
To tie, and cut it, would be an intelligent act, and would need 
a cerebrum I 

Some idiots have a tendency, like cats> to scratch a hole 
in the ground, when obeying the calls of nature, and after- 
wards covering it up. Other instinctive acts, peculiar to the 
lower animals, are also common among them, showing that 
when the cerebrum is not active enough to create intelli- 
gence, they are guided by the sensorium. 

Mind is dependent upon the Senses. 
It must be recollected, when speaking of intelligence, or 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM. 197 



mind, as resulting from the action of the cerebrum, that it 
can never be developed but through the medium of the 
senses. Ideas, which constitute the basis of all mental op- 
erations, and of all knowledge, are obtained only through 
the action of the organs of special sense. A man bom 
deaf can have no idea of sound, nor the least knowledge of 
any fact which in any way is based on sound. A man born 
blind can have no idea of color, nor the least knowledge of 
any fact in which color is an essential element. It is the 
same with all the senses, upon which all our ideas are based. 
Any human being bom with every sense imperfect could 
have no ideas and no knowledge of anything, though the cere- 
brum might be perfect. Without the senses, therefore, the 
cerebrum is dormant, and there can be no intelligence, and 
no knowledge of anything, whatever. 

The nerves from the eye, ear, and other organs of special 
sense, convey their peculiar impressions to the cerebrum, 
and create ideas, of which the cerebrum then takes cogni- 
zance, reasons upon, and remembers — in short, acts upon 
them mentally. 

Although the cerebrum, and mind, are, in one sense, 
therefore, above and distinct from, the mere senses, they are 
yet entirely dependent upon them for their manifestations, 
for all intelligence, and all knowledge, are based on sensa- 
tion, and cannot exist without it. 

Through the medium of the nerves of special sensation 
impressions are conveyed to the brain, where they act on 
the cerebrum through their appropriate ganglia, and form 
ideas, which are the foundation of all we knovj. 

These ideas may become more or less permanent, or may 
be reproduced, constituting memory/ So that the mind, 
when it has once become active, can work either with real 
ideas, directly produced by sensation, or with remembered 
ideas, as in dreaming, or in reflection. 

In sleep these stored-up ideas often come crowding to- 
gether in curious disorder, producing strange, confused 
dreams, which often puzzle and alarm people. This odd 
mixing-up is owing to the cerebrum being more or less at 
rest, and consequently there is no intelligence to arrange the 
ideas in proper order. It is the same in mental derange- 
ment, of any kind, the cerebrum is either inactive, or mor- 
bidly active ; and consequently ideas come and go, and mix 
up in wild disorder, because there is no intelligence to ar- 
range and regulate them. 

The higher mental attributes, reason, reflection, com- 
parison, judgment, all depend upon the cerebrum, but in 
what way they are excited we do not know. Whether each 
particular attribute is connected with some particular part 

17* 



198 FUNCTIONS OF THE CEKEBKUM. 



of the cerebrum, or whether they all depend upon the action 
of the whole organ, is, as yet, unknown to us. It is certain, 
however, that without the cerebrum there are no true men- 
tal attributes whatever, high or low, or in other words, 710 
mind. It is equally certain that the peculiar quality or 
kind of mind, which any being may exhibit, depends upon 
the peculiar quality or kind of brain they possess. With 
one kind of brain there will be one kind of mind, and with 
another kind of brain there will be another kind of mind, 
and as long as two brains differ, the two minds resulting from 
them can never become alike. 

Consciousness. 

The seat of intellectual consciousness, or perception of exis- 
tence, is probably in the cerebrum, though there is also 
a kind of sensational consciousness in the sensory ganglia, 
as shown by the pigeon that had its cerebrum removed. In 
fact, there is good reason to suppose that consciousness is 
the fundamental intellectual condition, and that ideas, emo- 
tions, reflection, reason, and all other intellectual attributes, 
are merely states of consciousness I — or, in other words, merely 
different ways in which we perceive, or become conscious 
of whatever exists. In fact the primary element in knowl- 
edge, or that into which it is finally resolved, is merely con- 
sciousness, and nothing more. 

Emotions. 

Mental conditions are immensly influenced by the emotions, 
ov feelings, which, in some people, are, in reality, the most 
powerful of all impulses. Joy, fear, sorrow, anger, love, 
hope, despair, are, in most cases, much more powerful than 
reason, and often lead us quite contrary to what experience 
and reason would dictate. The judgments which most per- 
sons form in regard to other people, and even in regard to 
current events, result more from their emotions, or feelings, 
than from their rational judgment. It is the same with 
opinions, or convictions, especially on theoretical or specu- 
lative matters, they are scarcely eyer the result of rational 
enquiry, or investigation, but spring from emotion, or feel- 
ing. This is especially the case with religious convictions, 
or opinions, the form of which, in nearly all cases, depends 
upon the person's emotional condition. In some people 
hope predominates, in others fear, or even despair, and their 
beliefs are tinged accordingly. It is very seldom that the 
intelligence, or reason, has anything whatever to do with 
such beliefs ; and when it has, the person is apt to be a liberal, 
or, perhaps, a sceptic. 



FUNCTIONS OF THE CEREBRUM.' 199 



It is of great practical importance to bear this in mind, 
and to recognize the fact that the mental condition of all 
persons, in regard to conviction, or belief, on speculative 
matters, depends altogether upon their peculiar cerebral 
constitution. Some few must reason, and investigate facts, 
so as to form an intelligent belief, it is the law of their nature, 
and they cannot do otherwise ! Others again cannot reason 
and investigate, but derive all their convictions from their 
emotions, or feelings, without any reference to facts ; — it is 
the law of their nature. 

If this were generally understood, there would be univer- 
sal charity, and toleration, for every form of belief, or non- 
belief. The reasoners would not ridicule the men of faith, 
for their blind belief, and the men of faith would not ana- 
thematize the reasoners for their skepticism and unbelief, 
because each would see that the other must be what he is, 
and cannot possibly be anything else. 

Emotion is, in short, an essential element in man's mental 
nature, equally with reason. It predominates in children 
universally, and in many adults, especially in females. It is 
neither possible, nor desirable, to dispense with emotion 
altogether, but it is very desirable that it should be subor- 
dinate to reason, and by a proper system of education it 
would soon become so. At present it is generally more 
powerful than reason, and hence people act more from im- 
pulse than from intelligence. 

There seems to be no doubt but that the seat of emotion 
is in the cerebrum, but in what part we do not know. There 
is probably some special ganglionic centre from which emo- 
tion originates, and probably this will* some day be discovered. 

In some cases emotion will act, and cause motion, when 
will cannot. Thus instances have been known, in cases of 
paralysis, where the patient could not move his limbs by any 
exercise of the will, and yet sudden fear, or joy has caused 
most energetic motion. Strong faith, or hope will also do 
the same, as we see in the case of what are called miracles, 
or faith cures. 

In hysterics the emotional element is in full play, and the 
reason feeble ; hence the wild cries, spasmodic actions, weep- 
ing, and incoherent talk which characterize that disease. 
Interesting instances of this peculiar state are often seen at 
what are called religious revivals, the subjects being com- 
pletely under the influence of fear, hope, and other power- 
ful emotions, while the reason is perfectly dormant. 



CHAPTER XYII. 



ON THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF DISEASES CONNECTED WITH 
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

Having now explained the structure, and functions, of the 
different parts of the nervous system, it will next be in order 
to explain the principal diseases to which it is subject. Some 
of these are organic, and others are simply functional. In 
the organic diseases some part of the nervous apparatus is in 
a morbid or injured state, so that its structure is essentially 
deranged. In the functional diseases, on the contrary, the 
structure of the apparatus shows no derangement, nor any 
morbid condition, and yet its function is deranged, so that 
it either acts inefficiently, on in a manner totally different to 
its normal healthy action. 

Thus, in inflammation or in softening of the brain, there are 
certain organic changes, that is, changes in the nervous sub- 
stance, which can be seen, and noted, on examination. 
But in hysteria, epilepsy, and mania, no organic changes, 
or alterations of the nervous substance can be observed at 
all, notwithstanding the functional derangement is so ob- 
vious. • 

All organic diseases lead to functional derangement, and 
probably every functional disease is really dependent upon 
some organic change, though none such may have been de- 
tected. It is very probable that some of the most serious 
diseases, such as mania, epilepsj 7 , or catalepsy, may result 
from very minute changes in the nervous substance, so mi- 
nute, in fact, that we cannot discover them. Practically, 
therefore, a functional disease of the nervous system is 
simpty one not connected with any known organic change, or 
morbid condition. 

Organic derangements of the nervous system, may also 
be called, familiarly, Diseases of the Nerves, while functional 
derangements of the nervous system may be called nervous 
diseases, which, perhaps, to many persons, will better ex- 
plain the difference between them. Both kinds are among 
the least understood of all human afflictions, although they 
(200) 



DISEASES OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 201 

are so common. The great cause of this ignorance, in re- 
gard to functional, or nervous diseases, is the idea still too 
general, that the mind is something distinct from, and inde- 
pendent of the body. This idea, as before remarked, pre- 
vents a true knowledge of mental phenomena from being 
obtained, and it stands in the way of all attempts to cure 
mental disease, or to cause a perfect development of the mind 
by education. 

Mental phenomena, of every kind, result from the func- j 
tional activity of the brain, just as the indications of time, 
in a clock, result from the action of its machinery. Just as 
any derangement of the machinery causes the clock to go 
wrong, or stop, so does disease of the brain make the mind 
go wrong, or stop altogether. And just as a knowledge of 
the machinery is requisite, to enable any one to make the 
clock go right again, so is a knowledge of the structure and 
functions of the brain necessary, to enable one to restore 
the diseased mind to a healthy state. 

Practically, and so far as we know, the mind has no exis- 
tence apart from the body. It commences with the brain, 
grows with it, varies with its varying conditions through 
life, and finally ceases to exist when the brain ceases to act. 
This is what facts show, and we have no knowledge what- 
ever of mind but as a function of the brain. 

This, it should be remembered, has nothing to do with 
any person's convictions, or belief in regard to mind, because 
conviction, or belief, has no necessary connection with fact, 
or knowledge, but results entirely from emotion, or feeling. A 
man's reason, and the facts which he daily comes in contact 
with, may both be utterly opposed to his belief, without 
changing it in any way ; or they may accord with his belief 
without strengthening it in the least. The facts here stated, 
therefore, are intended to increase knowledge, and not to 
change mere belief, or faith, which is totally distinct from 
knowledge, and has no necessary connection with it in any 
way whatever. 



CHAPTER XVIII. 



FUNCTIONAL DISEASES OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM, OR NER- 
VOUS DISEASES. 



Epilepsy, or falling sickness, is generally considered to be 
a nervous disease, though some have thought that it results 
from impurity in the blood. It is possible, however, that 
though, primarily, a blood disease, it may be the nervous 
sj^stem that the impure blood most affects, and thus the 
manifestations at all events are nervous. Very little is 
known, however, of its true nature, its causes, or proper 
treatment ; and, generally speaking, little or nothing can be 
done for its cure, though something is possible, in some 
cases, in the way of prevention and alleviation. 

Epilepsy is peculiarly apt to be hereditary, and it also often 
results from bad habits, especially from excessive sexual in- 
dulgence, and from masturbation. It also frequently fol- 
lows injuries to the head, or disease of the brain ; but yet, 
in many bad cases, on examination after death, not the 
slightest injury or disease could be detected. In some few 
cases epileptics have retained their physical and mental 
powers, and survived to old age, but this is very rare. Some 
very eminent men — Julius Cassar, and Napoleon Bonaparte, 
among the number — have been epileptic to a certain ex- 
tent. 

An epileptic fit shows itself as a frightful convulsion of the 
whole body, accompanied by total loss of consciousness. 
The patient falls, as if struck by a powerful blow, struggles 
violently, foams at the mouth, and clenches the teeth like a 
vice. The lips become livid, the heart beats violently, and 
the breathing is excessively labored and imperfect. Very 
often the bowels and bladder act involuntarily during the fit, 
and blood may escape from the mouth, nose, and ears. The 
fit may last only a few minutes, or several hours, and the 
patient may either recover suddenly, or may fall into a 
deep sleep, on awaking from which he recovers sensation 
and consciousness, as usual. Generally, however, more or 

(202) 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 203 



less exhaustion, with giddiness and headache is felt for 
some time after. 

Some persons are attacked suddenly, with little or no pre- 
paratory warning ; but usually the fit is preceded by a sense 
of weariness, headache, buzzing in the ears, palpitation of 
the heart, and a peculiar creepy feeling over the surface of 
the body. The most general symptom, however, giving 
warning" of a threatened attack, is what is called the epilep- 
tic aura ! This is a peculiar feeling of cold, or sometimes 
warmth, beginning in some part of the body and ascending 
to the head. It may begin in the hands, feet, groins, abdo- 
men, or sexual organs ; but generally makes its way upwards 
to the head, and when it reaches there the fit comes on. It 
has been known to terminate at the stomach, and even in the 
womb. There is evidently an affection of the nerves of sen- 
sation, on the surface of the body, which, being transmitted 
to the brain, affects, by reflex action, the nerves of motion. 

Both sexes seem equally liable to epilepsy, and it may 
occur at all stages of life, from infancy to old age. The fits 
may occur regularly, at certain periods, or irregularly. Two 
or three may take place in a day, or one in a fortnight, or 
month, or perhaps only one or two in a year. Some persons 
have even had but a few attacks during their whole lives, 
and these always after some obviously exciting cause. 

Epilepsy is sometimes mistaken for apoplexy, but may 
always be distinguished by the convulsions and frothing at 
the mouth, and also by the absence of that peculiar heavy, 
snoring, apoplectic breathing. 

It is more apt, in some cases, to be confounded with hys- 
teria, which may resemble almost every other nervous dis- 
ease. In epilepsy, however, there is always complete loss 
of consciousness, but not in hysteria, and the convulsions 
of an epileptic fit are different from hysterical stragglings. 

The great danger from an epileptic attack arises from its 
suddenness, as the patient may fall anywhere, and be fatally 
injured. On this account, therefore, those who are subject 
to this disease should never, if possible, be placed in danger- 
ous situations, nor left alone. During the fit but little can 
be done beyond keeping the patient from injuring himself in 
his struggles, and especially from biting his tongue, by put- 
ting something between the teeth. All collars, corsets, 
tight wristbands, and other obstructions to the circulation, 
should be removed at once, and then patiently wait till the 
attack subsides. 

Leeches are often applied, but with no good reason or re- 
sult ; and sometimes blisters to the neck, or behind the ears, 
but it is doubtful if they are ever of any use. A good plan, 
advised by many practitioners, is to wet a towel in cold wa- 



204 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



ter, and with one corner of it slap the neck and ears quite 
sharply. This often seems to excite action in the sensor 
nerves of the skin; and through them the brain is roused and 
the fit cut short, which is important ; for the longer the fit 
lasts the more tendency it seems to have to return. 

As soon as consciousness and sensation return, the patient 
may be left quietly to sleep, and should not be disturbed. 

A careful inquiry should always be made into the history 
and habits of the patient, and into the state of the vital 
organs. In many cases such an investigation will reveal 
some exciting cause, which may be removed, and the fits 
thus rendered less frequent, if not entirely prevented. Long 
continued constipation, inaction of the skin or kidneys, 
vicious habits of various kinds, or violent emotions, often 
bring on attacks which would otherwise have not been ex- 
perienced. So does overloading the stomach with indigesti- 
ble food, or drinking strong coffee or liquor, and the exces- 
sive use of tobacco. 

The more the general health can be improved, and the 
more calm and equable both body and mind can be kept, 
the less liability there will be to epileptic attacks ; especially 
is it important to avoid violent emotions, for nothing is more 
likely to bring them on. Sudden fright, surprise, rage, joy, 
or grief, often induce a fit, and the sight of another person . 
in one is almost sure to induce an attack in those disposed 
to it. 

Medication may be confined to such as may be necessary 
for regulating the vital functions, or toning up the system^ 
Special remedies are numerous enough for epilepsy, but they 
are mostly useless. The only drug that exerts any real in- 
fluence over it is Bromide of Potassium, which usually arrests 
the disease entirely, while it is used ; and sometimes 'even 
seems to remove it, if the general health be also attended to 
while it is being taken. This salt is the basis of most of the 
patent remedies for epilepsy lately introduced, and it cer- 
tainly has been a great boon to the afflicted. It may be 
taken in doses of from five to fifty grains, three times a day, 
simply dissolved in water, or it may be compounded with 
Quinine, or other tonics. 

The common Mistletoe, which grows on the oak and apple 
tree, is an old remedy for epilepsy, and really appears in 
some cases to be of real service. The berries are the best to 
use, and of these a man may take three or four, three times 
a day. In case the berries cannot be had, the leaves may be 
used, "mashed to a pulp, and a half spoonful may be taken 
three times a day, fresh. 

Nitrate of Silver was formerly much used in epileps} 7 , but 
with no good result. A poor man used once to be about the 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 205 



Btreets of New York, who had taken the nitrate of silver till 
his whole body was stained of a dark lead color. He was 
called the blue man, and was an object of curiosity to all who 
saw him. The stain was irremovable, and he died with it, 
but his thorough saturation with the silver had no influence 
whatever over his disease, for he was constantly falling in 
the streets in epileptic fits. 

We read of epileptics in the remotest times, and very gen- 
erally they were regarded with awe, or even with veneration. 
Sometimes they were said to be possessed by devils, which 
had to be cast out, and at other times they were thought to 
be inspired. Many of the old prophets, and soothsayers, 
were only epileptics, as they are at this day among the Mo- 
hammedans, and other uninformed people. The ancient 
priestesses, at the oracles, were often epileptics, and the fit 
was supposed to be caused by the visitation of superna- 
tural beings, who came to tell them of future events. The 
old religious writings, of all sects, abound with such instan- 
ces, and show how prevalent was the disease, and how dense 
the ignorance about it. 

When epileptic fits occur monthly, as is often the case, they 
are apt to come on a regular day, and can be provided 
against. It is thought by many that they occur oftenest at 
the new or full moon, but I am not aware that this has been 
well established. In women they frequently accompany the 
monthly periods, and some have them only when they are 
pregnant. In both sexes a fit often follows the sexual orgasm, 
in those who are disposed to epilepsy, and many always have 
to provide against it whenever the} 7 indulge in a connection. 

Usually, when attacked, the patient utters a cry, but not 
always ; he also usually runs forward a little, or turns half 
way round ; but sometimes he falls straight down, back- 
wards or forwards, without any cry. All this shows some 
disturbance of that part of the brain concerned in regulating 
motion, and will remind our readers of some of the experi- 
ments made on the cerebellum, and medulla oblongata. Apo- 
plexy and paralysis commonly follow epilepsy, sooner or 
later, and a large portion of those who become insane while 
young have first been epileptic. Indeed, insanity, or idiocy 
usually follows epilepsy if it be long continued or severe. 

Experiments made a long time ago, by Sauvages, shows 
that epilepsy may be caused artificially. He observed that 
the hemispheres of the cerebrum may be cut, or punctured, 
with no bad result, as previously stated ; but if the roots of 
the nerves, or the medulla oblongata be injured, epileptic 
fits are produced. This points to the seat of the disease, and 
makes it probable that pressure on the medulla, or gangli- 
onic centres, is the true cause of epilepsy. 

^8 



206 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



It must be stated, however, that some eminent Physiolo- 
gists consider epilepsy to be connected with, and to proceed 
from the spinal marrow, as well as the brain, and that it may 
be excited externally, through the sensor nerves, as well as 
internally from the cerebro-spinal centres. Some probabil- 
ity is given to this idea by the fact that, in many men, sexual 
manifestations will take place, of a very energetic kind, dur- 
ing the fit, and that some women even will have orgasms 
just when regaining consciousness. This is no doubt from 
reflex irritation. 

Finally, never bleed in epilepsy. It does no good, and often 
brings on apoplexy or paralysis. In mild cases galvanism 
should be tried thoroughly ! 

Hysteria. 

This is perhaps the most variable and mysterious disease 
with which human beings are afflicted. Little or nothing cs 
known as to its true origin or nature, and but little can be 
done, medically, for its cure. It is generally considered lo 
be a nervous disease, and so it probably is ; but in most 
cases those subject to it are deficient in blood, or have it im- 
perfect and poor. This, however, would directly affect the 
nervous system, as before explained. In some few cases, 
persons apparently in good health, and with abundance of 
good blood, suffer from hysteria; and then there is probably 
some derangement of the nervous centres not dependent 
upon the state of the blood. 

Hysterical symptoms, in some form or other, show them- 
selves in connection with numerous other diseases, especially 
in females, with the majority of whom, in fact, Irysteria is 
almost habitual, so that it is considered essentially a female 
complaint. It is, however, sometimes met with in men, but 
only in those of highly nervous temperaments, and whose 
physical systems are weak and delicate. 

Those who are familiar with hysteria recognize it very 
readily, and yet it is difficult to define. In fact, there are 
very few symptoms that are exclusively hysterical ; and very 
few, of any kind, but what may be met with, sometime or 
other, in connection with it. There is no actual bodily de- 
rangement, or disease, on which hysteria seems to depend, 
though it often accompanies various forms of disease ; and 
very often the worst cases are met with in those who have — 
in popular phrase— nothing at all the matter with them. 

The most characteristic manifestations of hysteria are 
connected with the emotions, or feelings, which are often 
brought into play in the most violent manner, without any 
apparent cause or reason whatever. Laughter, tears, mor- 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 207 



bid dislikes, fierce hates, maudlin attachments, or groundless 
fears, succeed each other, or intermingle in the strangest and 
most inconsequent manner. The various bodily functions 
may be exalted, suspended, or perverted, and be totally un- 
influenced by the usual medical agents. 

A refined and delicate female, under the influence of hys- 
teria, will say and do things utterly at variance with her true 
nature, or ordinary habits ; and which those who know her 
best will scarcely deem possible. There is nothing, in short, 
too absurd, unreasonable, or improbable, for a hysterical 
female to do or imagine, from mere moral helplessness. 
Thoughtless or uninformed people usually consider these 
manifestations as mere vagaries, or as wilful moral perver- 
sions ; but to the physician they are symptoms of a real 
disease, as much so as bodily pain or decay. 

Perhaps the one symptom more characteristic of hysteria 
than any other is, the tendency to imitate, or exhibit the symp- 
toms of, other diseases! This is called the simulation of 
disease, and it is often so perfect as to deceive the most 
experienced physicians. The deception may be purposely 
practiced, and the patient may be fully aware that she is 
deceiving those around her, and yet she may not be at all 
responsible for what she does. In the morbid condition in 
which she is, the mental and moral faculties, and the will, 
are totally perverted, a3 much so as in actual mania. This 
remarkable tendency to simulate disease is both bodily and 
mental ; that is, it is found both in a peculiar physical pre- 
disposition and in a mental desire to impose upon others. 
In hysteria the body will present all the signs, and experience 
all the pains, of numerous diseases, none of which really 
exist, so that the most experienced physicians are totally 
deceived. The patient will thus pretend to suffer from diseases, 
and pains, of all kinds, which have no real existence what- 
ever ; and will do it so naturally as to deceive every one. In 
fact, the pretence will sometimes be kept up so long, and so 
perfectly, that a condition of the system becomes estab- 
lished in which, from continued nervous influence, the 
pretended pains and diseases become real. 

This tendency to deceive, and pretend, is a part of the dis- 
ease, or rather, one of the most prominent symptoms to 
which it gives rise. 

Cases are often met with in which there is every symptom 
of scrofula, liver disease, hip disease, rheumatism,"' enlarged 
joints, paralysis, consumption, or other kinds of disease, 
without there being in reality the slightest trace of the dis- 
ease. In many instances the patient, though knowing she 
is deceiving, will go through a long and disagreeable course 
of medication, or even submit to painful operations, rather 



208 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



than give up the pretence. I have known a female exhibit- 
ing every symptom of acute inflammation of the brain, allow 
herself to be blistered, medicated, and even her head shaved, 
while all the time every symptom was pretended. Many 
have gone lame for years with simulated hip disease, and 
others have even remained bed-ridden and helpless, while 
all the time perfectly able to be up and about, if they only 
had the disposition. 

Probably the great motive at the bottom of all this is, a 
morbid desire to excite pity, and sympathy, and to become 
objects of interest and attention. It is a true mania, as 
much so as the disposition shown by others to steal, or to 
commit homicide. 

Very often, by a little management, the patient may be led 
to commit herself, and the deception may be exposed ; but 
there is no good in doing this, for it does not remove the 
disposition to deceive, and the distrust exhibited may so act 
on the nervous system as to induce real disease. Instead 
of this the bodily health should be attended to, so as to re- 
move that morbid state from which this disposition to 
deceive arises. For it must alwaj^s be borne in mind that 
all cases of mental or moral derangement, originate from 
some pre-existing bodily disease, which must be cured first, 
before they can be corrected. 

I once saw a remarkable case of a young lady, who had 
been helpless in bed for over a year, with her knees drawn up 
to her abdomen the whole time, in a rigid spasm. No kind of 
treatment had the slightest effect upon her, while all her 
medical attendants owned themselves puzzled and baffled. 
The old nurse she had was quite experienced in hysteria, 
and made up her mind it was mere pretence ; she according- 
ly watched her at nights. The young lady slept in a room 
by herself, and always insisted upon being locked in, while 
the nurse slept in an adjoining room. One night the nurse 
asked leave to go out for the night, to which the young lady 
willingly assented, providing she had a bell rope placed so 
that she could call another attendant, some distance off, if 
she wished her. This being done, and the patient locked in 
as usual, the old nurse posted herself in the dark of her 
own room to watch, through a hole she had contrived for 
the purpose. The young lady herself always had a light 
kept burning. In a very short time the bed clothes were 
thrown off, the rigid limbs straightened themselves, and the 
poor bed-ridden girl sprang upon the floor like a cat. Then 
commenced the most extraordinary series of gymnastics 
perhaps ever witnessed, which lasted nearly two hours, till 
the girl, quite exhausted, replaced all the things carefully as 
they had been, went back to bed, and was soon fast asleep, 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 209 



with her legs drawn up in the usual position. In the morn- 
ing, on the nurse going in to her, she was still asleep, and 
apparently had never changed her position. ¥his, in fact, 
was the way she was always found ; for, strange as it may 
seem, the strained position of her limbs was always retained 
during sleep. 

The nurse told her mother what she had seen, but she 
would not believe it till actual observation on another night 
put the fact beyond doubt. Unfortunately, instead of keep- 
ing their own" counsel, and consulting with the physician, 
they called in a preacher; and, all paying a visit to the sick 
room together, they commenced a course of moral and relig- 
ious castigation in real earnest. The poor thing was accused 
of lying, deceit, and other dreadful sins ; she was threatened 
with exposure here, and with perdition hereafter, if she did 
not at once confess and repent. The result was an attack 
of real hysterics, followed by fainting, — real enough, — and 
finally by an attack of brain fever. 

The physician, on being told the whole story, ordered her, 
immediately on her recovery from the brain fever, to ha 
sent away, among persons who knew nothing of her past 
condition or history, and where she was placed among en- 
tirely new scenes and surroundings. 

The result was every way satisfactory. As the general 
health improved, the hysteria vanished, and with it all the 
old bodily and mental derangements. Her parents were in- 
formed, however, that it would not be safe to bring her 
again, for some time, among those who had so thoughtlessly 
exposed her, and who, she would fancy, Iwould be apt tb 
make allusions to the past. 

The consequences, in such cases, may easily be death, or 
permanent derangement, for the feelings are peculiarly sen- 
sitive, and -easily outraged. The true policy is not to see the 
deception, and to show a judicious amount of sympathy for 
the simulated sufferings, while proper treatment is being 
pursued. It is as cruel to notice and criticise these vagaries 
of a diseased mind, as it is to notice the bodily contortions 
of a poor wretch while twitching with St. Vitus' s dance. 

The circulation of blood is usually very irregular in hys- 
teria, and also the temperature. The pulse will sometimes 
beat rapidly, as in fever, and then die away till it is scarcely 
perceptible', while hot flashes will dart about the body, from 
one part to another, in the mo3t singular manner. The 
whole body will perhaps bum, as in a fever, and then become 
suddenly cold ; or the feet and hands will be cold, while the 
head and face" will be flushed and hot, and the change from 
heat to cold may be almost instantaneous. 

Dyspepsia is an almost universal accompanient of hysteria, 

1 3* 



210 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



and it is generally attended by flatulence, especially during 
fits of hysterics ! In fact, in these fits flatulence is one of 
the most marked symptoms, both before and during the at- 
tack. 

Palpitation of the heart also is generally met with, and a 
peculiar restlessness, or state of fidgets, usually called ner- 
vous excitability. 

But besides all these general symptoms there is one pe- 
culiar to hysteria, analogous to the aura in epilepsy. This 
is called the hysterical ball, or globus hystericus ! It consists 
in a peculiar sensation, as if there was a large ball in the 
top of the throat, which no efforts can dislodge. This gives 
a peculiar choking feeling, with considerable pain at times, 
and great uneasiness. The patient cannot swallow, nor 
speak plainly on account of it, nor even breathe freely ; but 
gasps, and gurgles as if really choking. 

In many hysterical people the globus will rise from the 
slightest causes affecting the feelings. Joy, sorrow, fright, 
or any exciting emotion, sets them sobbing and choking at 
once. It is apparently a spasm, or cramp, of the muscles, 
probably produced by reflex action — the nervous centre re- 
acting upon the motor nerves going to the top of the throat. 

Sometimes even, from no apparent cause whatever, the 
hysterical person will burst out sobbing, and will choke as 
if struggling for the breath of life, while the tears will flow, 
and the whole system will be in a state of excitement almost 
bordering on delirium. This, however, may soon subside, 
and be succeeded by a fit of deep despondency and letharg}^, 
which nothing can dispel. 

There are many analogies between hysteria and epilepsy, 
in some of their forms, and the correspondence between the 
aura, and the globus, is remarkable. The one, perhaps, may 
be only a modification, or more advanced stage, of the other. 

A fit of hysterics, or hysterical paroxysm, is a curious phe- 
nomenon, and often alarming enough to those not familiar 
with such exhibitions. 

The fit ma} r begin with a sudden burst of either laughing or 
crying, brought on by any little disturbance of the feel- 
ings, or from no obvious cause at all. Then the ball is felt in 
the throat, and choking, gasping, and struggling com- 
mence, with, perhaps, loud shrieks, or convulsive move- 
ments of the limbs, and an apparent inability to control 
either body or mind. This want of control often causes 
great distress, for the patient may be fully conscious of act- 
ing ridiculously, or improperly, and yet cannot help it. 
Sensibility is seldom impaired, and sometimes even exalted. 

In mild attacks these symptoms gradually subside after a 
little time, and the patient becomes quite calm, in fact, 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 211 



more so than before, the fit acting like a thunder-storm in 
clearing the air. It is wonderful to see, in some of these 
attacks, how rapidly the subject will pass from crying to 
laughing, and from the most violent excitement to the mos.t 
perfect calm, a few minutes being often sufficient to termi- 
nate one mood and inaugurate another. 

A severe attack of hysterics is a more serious matter, the 
symptoms being more complicated, and much exaggerated. 
There may be complete loss of consciousness and voluntary 
motion, or suspension of the special senses, with convulsive 
clutchings, gasping for breath, and harsh screaming. The 
screams often become singularly harsh and peculiar ; finally 
subsiding into a kind of crowing ; while the face becomes 
flushed, and the hands grasp at the hair to tear it out, or 
clutch at anything in reach. The breathing will seem some- 
times to almost stop, so that the lips will become quite livid, 
and the patient seem in danger of actual strangulation. In 
many cases, the bystanders will think death inevitable, from 
the violence and duration of the spasm ; but finally it relaxes, 
breathing is resumed, and the lips resume their natural color — 
the danger is then over. 

Generally there appears to be felt some oppression or pain, 
at the pit of the stomach, for the patient will pull and tear 
at the clothing which covers it, as if to get relief. This is 
probably connected with the flatulence which usually accom- 
panies such attacks, and which often shows itself in violent 
eructations. 

In short, a violent hysterical paroxysm is a somewhat 
alarming thing to witness, and often makes bystanders, who 
are unfamiliar with it, anticipate a fatal termination every 
moment. It usually lasts for an hour, or more, and occa- 
sionally even six or eight hours, and it leaves the patients 
much exhausted, with headache, or soreness about the neck 
and chest, as if they had been beaten. There is also, in 
most cases, a copious secretion of urine, pale, and inodorous, 
almost like water. The need for voiding this is sometimes 
urgent, and on this account due privacy and convenience 
should be afforded invariably. 

Hysteria sometimes much resembles epilepsy or apoplexy, 
but may be distinguished from them by attending to the 
symptoms of each. Thus, in hysteria, there is no distortion 
of the features, ^nor frothing at the mouth, such as we 
see in epilepsy ; nor does the patient fall suddenly as if 
struck dead. "There is also no convulsion, coma, or stertor- 
ous breathing, such as accompanies apoplexy. In hysteria 
there is also a peculiar trembling of the eyelids, hi most 
cases, which is not seen in either of the other diseases. In 
true hysteria, also, there is no sensation in the epiglottis or 



212 < NERVOUS DISEASES. 



covering of the top of the throat, like there is in the ordinary 
state, so that, during a fit of hysteria, the finger may be 
pressed on the base of the tongue, and the epiglottis may be 
rubbed with it, even, without causing gagging or choking. 
In fact, the finger produces no effect at all, in true hysteria, 
which may in this way be always detected. 

In the great majority of cases, in females, hysteria is con- 
nected with some derangement of the womb, or some want 
of agreement between the patients' sexual requirements and 
their actual condition. With a very large number marriage 
alone will effect a cure, though there are some with whom 
it is just the reverse, especially when their feelings, and wish- 
es, have not been duly consulted. Ignorance of physiological 
facts, at the time of marriage, on the part of both, often leads to 
moral and physical suffering, which lays the foundation for 
future hysteria in the female ! 

The treatment of hysteria may be summed up in few words. 
The first thing is, to find out what bodily derangement exists, 
from which the hysteria comes, and remove it, if possible. 
Or, in other words, the whole treatment resolves itself into 
care for the general health. Most hysterical people are be- 
low par, in vital energy, with languid circulation, and poor, 
or impure blood. Whatever will correct this unfavorable 
condition of the system, therefore, is the very thing to be 
done. At the same time a thorough investigaiion should be 
made, to see if there be any organic disease. In females 
especially the state of the womb, and ovaries, are very im- 
portant to ascertain, and the course of the catamenia. If 
there be no organic disease, and if the reproductive organs, 
stomach, liver, kidneys and skin are put in good working 
order, there will soon be no hysteria. All special medica- 
tion is useless ; but, at the same time, natural medication, in 
the form of marriage, is often all that is required. Still, it 
must be remembered, as before explained, that sometimes 
marriage is improper and hurtful ; there must therefore be 
great caution used in deciding upon such a step. 

During & jit of hysterics there is absolutely nothing to be 
done, exceptto keep the patient from injuring herself or 
others, and wait till the fit passes off. Sometimes, when it 
continues too long, cold water may be dashed on the face, 
or the neck and ears may be struck with the wet towel, as in 
apoplexy, and smelling salts may be used, and that is about all. 

In many cases of hysteria the digestive organs are very 
much deranged, and the appetite is strangely affected. The 
patient will not only eat, but fancy, the most unusual things, 
such as slate pencils, chalk, cinders, egg shells, candles, 
sealing wax, and many others ; and yet, with all this, there 
may be little or no falling away in flesh. 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 213 



Total loss of voice, inability to swallow, and all the symp- 
toms of croup, are all commonly assumed in hysteria, and 
so is cough, of the most distressing character. This hysteri- 
cal cough is, in fact, often attributed to bronchitis, or con- 
sumption, and the patient treated according^, perhaps for 
years. The windpipe has even been cut, several times in 
succession, to save the patient from choking, in supposed 
croup, while blisters, leeches, and other such remedies, 
without number, have been borne willingly in preference to 
giving up the simulated disease. 

It is not unusual for the breast to become tender, painful, 
and even to swell, giving rise to fears of cancer, and all from no 
organic disease whatever, but simply as a result of hysteria. 

Hiccough is also common in hysteria, and is sometimes 
very obstinate. Vomiting is also not unusual, and some- 
' times blood is thrown up, in considerable quantity. Pains 
in the'hip, knee, and spine, are standing complaints in hys- 
teria, and are always considered to indicate disease of those 
parts. That great surgeon, Sir Ben. Brodie assures us 
that four-fifths of the supposed diseases of the joints, in 
the upper classes, are only hysterical affections. One lady 
had suffered so long with her knee that she insisted he 
should cut off her leg, to relieve her ; and yet it was all hys- 
teria, and she was finally cured. Some patients imagine 
they cannot pass their urine, and they will even allow a sur- 
geon to pass the catheter every day for months, while all the 
time they are quite capable of discharging it in the usual 
way. 

In those cases where great tenderness is complained of, 
as in simulated hip disease, or inflammation of the knee 
joint, it is often easy to find out whether the disease is real 
or not. The hand should be gently laid on the tender part, 
and then the patient's attention be drawn to something else, 
and iiept there, while the pressure is increased. If the dis- 
ease be real, the increased pressure will cause increased pain, 
which will soon be complained of. If, however, it be only- 
hysterical, no notice is taken of the pressure, unless the 
attention return to it, and then it will be felt again in a mo- 
ment worse than before. This, however, should never be 
done to catch and expose the patient, but only to ascertain 
the truth, — the reality of the suffering should not be ques- 
tioned. In fact it is real enough, though it has no apparent 
bodily cause. 

In many cases when patients cannot open their mouths, 
move their limbs, or straighten their joints, they can be 
caused to do so by pouring a continued stream of cold water 
on the affected part. It is quite amusing to hear the dumb 
scream out, and to see the lame get up and walk briskly off, 



214 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



under this treatment. The mere knowledge that it will be 
adopted often wards off attacks. Of course this requires 
judgment, and is not applicable to all cases. Galvanism, 
and electricity, also act equally well with some, and I have 
often known one shock straighten a contracted joint, while 
the fear of another has kept it straight. 

Corsets have much to do with hysteria, by injuring the 
womb, and interfering with the circulation. 

Many persons threatened with hysteria, who have strong 
wills, can ward off attacks by moral effort alone. Among 
other peculiar nervous affections, apparently hysterical, we 
find several connected with motion. Thus in some cases the 
patient cannot move moderately fast, but must either move 
rapidly, or with extreme slowness. Some, again, must 
always do everything quick, almost with a jerk, while others 
are just the contrary, and must always move with painful 
slowness. In some cases their moods will alternate, and the 
patient will be one moment all bustle and quickness, and the 
next moment like a snail. One young lady whom I once 
saw was so troubled, at times, with this tendency to rapid 
movement, that she would speedily exhaust herself with the 
simplest duties. At times, even, she could scarcely take her 
meals, from the rapidity with which she endeavored to fill 
her mouth, and swallow her food. Nor did she seem at all 
conscious of anything unusual in her actions while so doing. 



This is one of those peculiar diseases of which nothing cer- 
tain is known. It is probably nervous, but whether func- 
tional or organic is only a matter of conjecture. 

One of the principal symptoms is a stiffening or rigid fix- 
ing of the muscles, in whatever position the patients may hap- 
pen to be, at the moment when attacked. Stooping, stand- 
ing, sitting, or lying, so they remain, as if they were stone 
statues. 

That this results from some peculiar action of the nerves 
of motion, or some peculiar condition of the nervous centres 
from which they originate, there can be little doubt, but be- 
yond this we know nothing. Anything which violently 
shocks, or strongly agitates the nervous system, may induce 
catalepsj', in those disposed to it. 

It often comes on from fright, from intense emotion, and 
from absorbing attention to any subject which excites pow- 
erfully the feelings. Religious excitement frequently causes 
catalepsy, or a state nearly resembling it, which is usually 
followed by hysteria, and then the subject is said to have got 
religion, or to"have been converted. In some impressionable 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 215 

people, catalepsy can be induced by mesmerism, or animal 
magnetism ; but it is then usually confined to some particular 
muscles, and does not commonly extend to the whole body. 

Trance is a variety of catalepsy, in which the body remains 
fixed and quiet, but the muscles are relaxed instead of rigid. 
The state of quiescence is sometimes so perfect that the sub- 
ject seems really dead, and some have even been buried in 
that state. Sometimes consciousness remains unimpaired, so 
that the patient knows what is going on, though unable to 
move; but at other times the trance is complete, and the 
mindls as totally inactive as the body. 

Ecstasy is another form of catalepsy, in which the patient 
becomes fixed in some impassioned attitude, with the eyes 
wide open, and with the mind apparently completely ab- 
stracted from all surrounding objects. In" such a state the 
patient, in fact, seems mentally struck as it were, and will 
often pour out a flood of talk of the most fervid and excited 
character ; totally unconscious of the persons or things 
around, and with no regard for coherence, or appropriateness, 
the ecstatic person will threaten, denounce, warn, or prophecy 
in the most impassioned manner. Instances of this kind are 
common enough at camp meetings and revivals, where such 
discourses are commonly supposed to be the result of spirit- 
ual promptings, and are regarded with awe and attention. 
They are usually inconsequent enough, and often absurd ; in 
fact, they would scarcely be listened to from a person known 
to be wide awake. The prophets and religious enthusiasts of 
former days were all ecstatics, as may be readily seen when 
reading about them. This state is closely allied to somnam- 
bulism. 

When cataleptic ecstasy is very intense, it becomes closely 
allied to actual mania, and, in fact, passes into it ; but this 
makes no change in the estimation in which such persons are 
held. They may declaim any amount of meaningless doggrel, 
and it will be sure to be considered inspiration, and be listen- 
ed to with wonder and awe. The gift of prophecy, speaking 
in the unknown tongue, and uttering what the spirit prompts, 
are all ecstatic manifestations, or mild forms of mania. The 
Italian improvisatores, who will declaim in the most impas- 
sioned and poetical language, upon any given subject, are 
always in a state of ecstasy, more or less complete, when they 
do so. 

Lethargy is also a modification of catalepsy, in which sen- 
sation and motion are more or less dull and languid, but not 
totally suspended. The patient mav be roused by violent ex- 
ternal excitation, but makes no eflV rt to rouse himself. 

Sleep-talking is a modification of cataleptic ecstasy, in which 
the body is quiet, while the organs of language, and some of 



216 NEBVOUS DISEASES. 



the mental faculties are awake. As in true ecstasy, many of 
these subjects will pour forth torrents of incoherent elo- 
quence, while in this state, and some will even preach regular 
sermons, which are listened to with amazement and admira- 
tion. People with strong emotional tendencies always think 
such discourses inspired; but the physiologist regards' them 
merely as manifestations of disease ; in fact, as the utterances 
of a mild form of mania. Some years ago, a Miss Baker made 
a great sensation in New York, by preaching while in a state 
of sleep. Crowds went to hear her, and she was generally 
thought to be inspired. This gift, however, was simply the 
result of disease, and when her physicians restored her to 
health the gift was gone. It is probable that enthusiasts of 
all kinds, particularly religious, are more or less subjects of 
cataleptic ecstasy — especially female enthusiasts. Patients 
may perfectly recover from all the forms of catalepsy, ar.d 
enjoy good health after. They are not apt to do so, how- 
ever, if the attacks are prolonged and frequent, especially if 
the general health be poor. In such cases the termination is 
often in epilepsy, mania, insanity, or hysteria. Indeed, hys- 
teria often both precedes and follows catalepsy, as if it were 
both cause and effect. 

In catalepsy the patient is always rigidly motionless, arid 
mute ; in fact, a mere living statue, with the look of death. 
But, in ecstasy, though the limbs are motionless, the counte- 
nance is animated and full of expression, and the patient 
sings or declaims with the greatest ardor. The whole ap- 
pearance indicates a complete abstraction from all immediate 
surroundings, and a perfect abandonment to the contempla- 
tion of some all-absorbing subject. This is the time when 
visions are seen, and revelations heard; the patient taking 
the disordered impressions made upon his senses for reali- 
ties, and becoming incapable, from the morbid condition of 
the cerebrum, of properly managing and coordinating hi3 
ideas. Usually this condition is found only in thosowho are 
naturally emotional, and in whom the feelings aremronger 
than the reason. It is very interesting to read of the seers, 
prophets, and inspired teachers of old times ; and to see how 
exactly the description of them, and their doings, corres- 
ponds with the descriptions now given, in medical books, of 
the manifestations of ecstasy, epilepsy, and hysteria. Only 
then such conditions were supposed to result from spiritual 
visitations, and were reverenced ; but now they are regarded 
as diseases, and treated medically. 

Catalepsy and ecstasy are both favorite diseases for simu- 
lation, by hysterical patients, many of whom will deceive the 
most practised observers, by the perfection and persistence 
of their imitations. Many hysterical females have remained 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 217 

• 

rigidly motionless, and speechless, for hours, in all sorts of 
attitudes, to obtain the reputation of being cataleptic. Still 
more have assumed to be ecstatic, and in that state have de- 
claimed poetry, or piety, as the case might be, by the hour 
together, to the awe and wonderment of those around ; and, 
no doubt, much to their own gratification. 

A celebrated surgeon once hit upon a plan for testing a 
pretended cataleptic, which succeeded admirably. He hung 
a weight, by a string, from her outstretched arm, and then 
suddenly cut the string. Immediately the weight fell, up . 
went the arm, showing that the muscles had been purpously 
contracted to bear the burden, and then reacted when sud- 
denly released. Had it been real catalepsy no such result 
would have followed. • 

Trance is also frequently imitated, and in some cases has 
been persisted in up to the point of burial, the patient being 
supposed to be dead. In real trance there may be danger (3 
premature burial, for the patient may seem really dea»\ 
though conscious of all that is going on around. *Xo one 
should therefore be buried till there are unmistakable signs of 
death. As long as no decomposition shows itself, the hoc 7 
may be kept, and when decomposition does show itself, in 
any form, there is no possibility of life. 

The principal causes of catalepsy appear to be, debility, 
impoverished blood, or morbid condition of the nervous sys- 
tem, long continued, or powerful emotion of any kind, and 
intense mental occupation. Prolonged dwelling upon par- 
ticular abstract subjects, especially religion, also disposes 
to catalepsy, and so does ungratined desire, or excessive in- 
dulgence. 

Many bodily derangements, especially of the uterus in 
females, also predispose to catalepsy, and probably par- 
ticular conditions of the brain and nerves. Among imme- 
diate exciting causes fright is, perhaps, the most operative ; 
and, next to that, powerful sexual emotion. 

The whole rationale of the treatment for catalepsy lies in 
restoring the general health, if deranged, and in finding active 
healthy occupation both for body and mind. And especially 
in occupying the mind with realities instead of abstractions, 
while the emotions are held in control. During an attack 
nothing can be done but wait, unless it be very prolonged, 
in which case proceed as directed in Hysteria and Epilepsy. 

It is unquestionably the case that in true catalepsy, and 
ecstacy, bodily sensation is often totally torpid, so that the 
subject feels nothing ; the mental and emotional exaltation 
overpowering all bodily susceptibility. In all probability, 
many of the poor wretches who suffered, in old times, by- 
fire and stake, on account of their religion, were in this state 

19 



218 NERVOUS DISEASES. 

• 

at the time, and thus did not feel the tortures prepared for 
them. Fright might do this in some, and powerful emotion 
in others, while others would be really insane. Those who 
voluntarily torture themselves, like the ascetics of old, 
probably often feel little or nothing, because they are in a 
state of ecstacy, in which emotion overpowers bodily sensa- 
tion. Indeed, we often read of such persons dying the most 
horrid and lingering deaths, not only without signs of suf- 
fering, but even with every indication of intense ecstatic en- 
joyment. 

Chorea, or St. Vitus* Dance, 

This is one of the most curious diseases that afflicts the 
human body, and one whose nature and origin, or proper 
mode of treatment is but little known. It consists in con- 
vulsive movements, of various parts of the body, with no 
loss of consciousness, and even with some little voluntary 
control, at least in some cases. The patient, however, 
seems seized with an irresistible impulse to jerk, or twitch 
some of the voluntary muscles, and continues to do so with 
more or less regularity, like a piece of machinery. A violent 
effort of the will may sometimes arrest, or lessen those 
movements, for a time, but they soon recur again as before, 
and go on as if the patient knew nothing about them. He 
seems, in fact, as if moved by wires, pulled by some one else. 

The motions are sometimes very violent, but at others 
gentle, they are also sometimes quite uniform, and at others 
just as irregular. 

The muscles most frequently attacked are those of the 
face, and next those of the limbs, on one side, but the whole 
body may be affected, and every part of it at the same time, 
so that every muscle may be in constant and violent action 
at once. When the muscles of the face are affected, the 
poor sufferer contorts his features, in the most hideous or 
absurd manner, twisting the mouth, and working the muscles 
of the cheek as if purposely making faces at some one. In- 
deed, ignorant people often imagine this to be the case, and 
many a poor convulsed wretch has been abused, under the 
mistaken idea that he was purposely mocking. When the 
limbs are affected, the patient walks unsteadily, jerking his 
legs in various directions, or throwing his hands around, 
and twitching them as if he were trying to flirt something 
off them* 

When the whole body is affected, the patient cannot stand, 
nor even sit, but lies down. Every part is convulsed in the 
strangest and most fearful manner, causing rolling, jerking, 
and twisting in every direction. The body will sometimes 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 219 



draw itself into a bow, and then bound upwards like a 
rubber ball. In such cases much injury may be done, 
unless the patient be in a padded room, or kept on mat- 
trasses. 

These movements are more or less constant and regular, 
while the patient is awake, but are always suspended during 
sleep. The disease most usually attacks children, from four 
to six years before puberty, but occasionally appears at a 
much later period of life, and is sometimes seen in quite 
old people. An attack may last from two to three weeks to 
several mondhs, but may also recur again and again. The 
common period is from one to tAVO months. 

The immediate cause of chorea is, no doubt, some de- 
rangement of the nervous system ; but what we do not know. 
While it lasts, the nerves of motion are perpetually stimulat- 
ing the muscles, in a spasmodic manner, much the same as 
they do in a sudden fright, which we know may make any 
one start, and tremble, or even spring into the air. Some 
pl^siologists have thought the seat of the trouble to be in 
the cerebellum, others in the sensorium, and Otfiers again in 
the spinal marrow ; but possibly it may be in either or all 
of these. 

In all probability, there is always irritation somewhere in 
the nervous centres, wherever there is St. Vitus' dance, and 
this irritation may be more or less permanent, making the 
disease the same. There are also many immediately ex- 
citing causes, among which may be mentioned the natural 
workings of the sexual organs, previous to puberty, teeth- 
ing, indigestion, worms, suppression of the secretions, cold, 
and general debility. Also, over-mental exertion, or any 
powerful emotion. 

Chorea may accompany epilepsy, or hysteria, but may be 
readily distinguished from either by not affecting the breath- 
ing, nor suspending consciousness, and also by being sus- 
pended by sleep. In those subject to this disease there is al- 
ways more or less debility, and frequently exhaustion, show- 
ing, an undue expenditure of nervous power in some abnormal 
manner. Chorea may be associated with, or may terminate 
in various other diseases, especially rheumatism, epilepsy, 
and dropsy, or convulsions; but generally, with proper at- 
tention, it ends in a restoration to health. 

In all probability, hysteria, epilepsy, and chorea, are but 
modifications of one form of disease, since they all appar- 
ently depend upon similar causes, and co-exist "together, or 
pass into one another. Either of them may become epi- 
demic, and afflict a large number of people at the same time, 
as may be seen by many instances recorded in history ; ' and 
by some of very recent date, as will be shown further on. 



220 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



In order to better understand the nature of St. Vitus' dance, 
in all its varied forms, it will be necessary to refer back 
to the chapters on the brain, especially those treating upon 
the medulla oblongata and cerebrum. It is there "shown 
that by wounding different parts of the brain, or removing 
them, the power of motion in the animal is curiously affected. 
Now, if one part of the brain be injured, the subject begins 
to rapidly turn round to the right, but if another part be in- 
jured, the turning is to the left; and if the injury be made in 
other parts, the subject runs backwards, forwards, or sideways. 
The motion is affected according to the part of me brain that 
is acted upon. Extensive injury to the cerebellum destroys 
the power of co-ordination of motion, so that no action has 
any connection with, or dependence upon another ; or, in 
other words, the different movements do not co-operate for 
any common purpose. 

Now it is obvious how much many forms of chorea re- 
semble the effects of injuries to the brain, and it seems highly 
probable that they result from a similar cause. In all proba- 
bility, when a victim of St. Vitus' dance keeps turning to the 
left, or to the right, or backwards, or sideways, as is often the 
case, there is something wrong in those parts of the brain, 
which are wounded when similar motions are caused 
artificially. In like manner injuries to certain parts of the 
spinal marrow affect the motion of the limbs, just as we see 
them effected in chorea. 

In fact, in many cases of chorea, when the patients have 
died, dissection has shown that there were tumors, abscesses, 
spiculae of bone, or some disease, in exactly those parts of 
the brain where they might have been expected. 

Experiment has made it probable that the will results from 
the action of some part of the cerebrum, while motion may re- 
sult from the spinal marrow alone, either with or without the 
concurrence of the will. And this explains many of the curi- 
ous movements we often see in chorea, some of which are 
quite involuntary, and some more or less voluntary. Thus, 
if the spinal marrow alone be affected, though the motions 
may take place, yet— the cerebrum being sound — the will is 
still active, and may exert a certain influence over them. But 
if the cerebrum be affected as well, then the motions are 
quite involuntary, or uncontrolled, because the will is en- 
feebled. Drunkards often exhibit a remarkable feebleness 
of will, so that no reliance can be placed upon whatever they 
propose to do, or to leave undone ; and in all probability 
this is because the cerebrum is diseased, in that special part 
which originates the will. 

The motions of patients afflicted with this disease are often 
very wonderful to witness. Some will spin round and round, 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 221 



for hours together ; some will stand on their keads, even ; 
and others again will roll incessantly, or draw the body into 
curves and then straighten it out with great force ; while 
still others will jerk the head incessantly, with such violence 
that there seems danger of dislocating the neck, or they will 
do the same with the limbs. All this indicates very plainly 
disease of the nervous centres, analagous to the artificial in- 
juries before explained. It must, however, be borne in mind, 
as before remarked, that manj r of these curious movements 
may be started by something acting powerfully upon the 
mind, or feelings. But very probably, in such cases, the 
patient's nervous system is already diseased, to a certain 
point, so that it requires but little to excite the morbid 
action. In persons with sound nervous systems no such 
effects could result from such causes. 

Music very frequently affects those subject to chorea in a 
powerful manner. In some, particular tunes, or tones, will 
excite irregular movements immediately, while in others such 
movements are immediately arrested by the very same means. 
Music, in fact, is often used in cases of St. Vitus' dance, and 
quite successfully, when employed with judgment. 

Mesmerism, or animal magnetism, may also cause or con- 
trol chorea, in those peculiarly disposed to it, but is so 
uncertain in its action that it is seldom available to cure. 

It is remarkable also that the bite of a certain kind of 
spider, called the tarantula, will produce exactly the same 
symptoms which are observed in some forms of St. Titus 
dance. A few hours after the bite, the patient experiences 
a difficulty in breathing, and feels dull and sad, and eventu- 
ally falls into a peculiar melancholy, from which nothing 
arouses him. He hides away in gloomy, retired places, es- 
pecially church-yards, and sighs, or howls, in the most har- 
rowing manner. Sometimes he rolls upon the ground, runs 
about, or puts himself into ridiculous and indecent attitudes, 
and at other times lies perfectly still, as if dead. In soma 
cases, immediately after the bite, the 'patient falls, as if dead, 
and remains for an hour or more senseless, and motionless, 
but on recovering goes through the symptoms above de- 
scribed. 

The most curious fact about these bitten patients is, that 
they are peculiarly affected by music. Immediately the mu- 
sical sounds are heard they begin to move their hands, and 
feet, and finally the whole body, turning and twisting in the 
most fantastic manner, all the time sighing, and apparently 
breathing with great difficulty. This tarantula dance is a 
very remarkable Thing to witness, and is evidently something 
with which the patient's will has very little to do. The mo- 
tions are usually very rapid, and varied incessantly, being 

19* 



222 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 



sometimes of the most unusual character. They will continue 
for several hours, till the patient, bathed in perspiration, 
falls from exhaustion ; but, after a short rest, commences 
again, and so continues for four, five, or six days, sometimes, 
practicing these violent movements ten hours each day. 

Gradually the motions become less violent, and of shorter 
duration, till they finally cease, and the patient recovers, but 
feels great exhaustion and dulness for some time after. 

The music, in these cases, excites the motions, and they 
seem to work off the poisonous influence of the bite. In 
those not acted upon by music, and who do not dance, the 
melancholy and depression continue, and increase, till the 
patients fall into a permanent state of despondency and vi- 
tal inaction. 

This tendency to dance, or perform fantastic movements, 
is also seen in people subject to chorea ; and often becomes 
epidemic, especially during periods of great religious excite- 
ment. In the middle ages there were many very remarkable 
outbreaks of this kind, during which men and women, by 
hundreds, were all affected as if they had been bitten by the 
tarantula. They would sigh, and groan, roll upon the ground, 
dance in the wildest manner, and throw themselves into the 
most absurd and lascivious attitudes, for hours together. In 
the midst of some church service, or some sermon of an ex- 
citing character, one or two would go off, and then others 
would follow, till finally the whole congregation would be 
yelling and dancing like crazy people, which, in one sense, 
they really were. 

Music had an irresistible and immediate effect on these 
people, starting them in their wild movements immediately, 
and afterwards appearing to guide or regulate them. Some 
of the dancers, we are told, would continue their strange 
movements, in the most rapid manner, for ten or twelve 
hours at a time. The mad fit usually terminated in complete 
exhaustion, and profuse perspiration, which seemed to re- 
store the system to its natural condition. 

These strange effects were then thought to be due to reli- 
gious inspiration, and were regarded with awe and admira- 
tion. It was not then known that they were the result of 
disease. 

Even in our own day something of the kind is seen occa- 
sionally. Thus we have the dancing, shaking, and turning 
shakers, who, as part of their religious service, will perform 
movements as wild and unusual as any that are recorded in 
history. And at camp meetings, and love feasts, plenty of 
similar cases are to be met with. Some wift simply sigh, or 
groan, while others will roll upon the ground, or tremble 
till their teeth shake in their heads. 



NEHVOUS DISEASES. 



223 



In all such persons there is an nndue preponderance of the 
emotional faculty ; or, in other words, the feelings are more 
powerful than the intellect ; and this natural condition, when 
combined with a feeble or diseased brain, makes them pe- 
culiarly subject to unreasoning fits of excitement. The 
efforts of the preachers, and managers, are also specially 
directed to produce such effects, which are looked upon as 
manifestations of religion. The hymn and psalm singing 
also acts just like music, and often both starts and guides 
the movements. 

Now there are cases of chorea, or St. Vitus' dance, caused 
by excited feelings, but they are strictly analogous to simi- 
lar cases caused by disease, or by peculiar blood-poisoning, 
as in the bite of the tarantula. In one sense, however, all 
these forms of chorea are alike the result of disease ; for, in 
the case of the religious enthusiasts, though they are di- 
rectly excited by appeals to their feelings only, still their 
nervous systems are undoubtedly in a morbid condition, so 
that they are readily acted upon. The man or woman with 
sound, healthy nerves, and with intellect and feeling well- 
balanced, — that is to say, the hardened sinner y — is not so 
easily acted upon, and remains unconverted ! 

Some of these patients take singular antipathies to par- 
ticular colors, er objects, the sight of which will put them 
at once into a fit. 

In Scotland, some years ago, there was a peculiar form of 
epidemic chorea, called the~leaping ague! The subjects of 
it complained first of pains in the head, and lower part of 
the spine, which was followed by a singular tendency to leap 
about, run, and climb. They would perform feats beyond 
the power of any one not so affected, and which they, them- 
selves, in their ordinary states, would never attempt. For 
hours, and even days together, this excessive activity would 
continue, till exhaustion and profuse persiration put an end 
to the fit. With many, however, a little thing would make 
it return, and the fits would succeed each other for days or 
weeks at a time. 

Single cases of this kind have often been met with, and, 
in some of them, the patient would be impelled irresistibly 
to run backwards, or forwards, like the pigeons whose cere- 
bellums had been wounded. In one of these cases, in which 
a man continued to run backwards till he fell down ex- 
hausted, it was found on examination, after death, that 
there were several tubercles pressing on the anterior part of 
the cerebrum. 

The most surprising thing about these cases is, the 
amount of violent motion which the patient can practice, 
and yet come out uninjured, and often but little exhausted. 



224 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



Some have been known to spin round like a top, so rapidly, 
that it was scarcely possible to distinguish the features ; 
others to rock backwards and forwards, and others again to 
stand on their heads, and then let themselves fall, as many 
as ten or twelve times a minute, for fifteen hours a day, and 
for four or five weeks at a time. People in ordinary health 
could not stand this for as many days. 

In this country, in the year 1800, in Kentucky and Tennes- 
see, there was a remarkable epidemic of hysterical chorea, 
originating in a sect of religious enthusiasts. The subjects 
would contort their limbs and features, dance, sing, laugh, 
and shout, in the wildest manner, sometimes for hours to- 
gether, till fatigue overcame them. The sight of one per- 
son affected would often set a number of others off in the 
same way ; but, if any one specially wished to be influenced, 
they would shake hands with the affected one, and that 
would communicate the impulse at once. 

At various periods, since then, particularly in the West, 
similar manifestations have been witnessed, and they are 
not uncommon elsewhere, especially among the imaginative 
Negroes. 

Medical treatment amounts to very little in chorea. All 
that can be done is to regulate all the vital functions, if they 
are deranged, and keep up the general healtl* and strength. 
When the- disease depends upon some lesion of the brain, or 
spinal marrow, as it does in a majority of the cases, of 
course nothing effective can be done. And, when it results 
from an over-excited imagination, or highly-excited feel- 
ings, which it does very frequently, medicine is not called 
for, but better mental and moral influences. 

As long as such forms of disease are considered manifes- 
tations of religion, or of spiritual influence, they will contin- 
ually be witnessed, because they are considered to be some- 
thing very desirable and commendable. The desire of 
notoriety, and love of deception, also frequently causes 
them to be simulated, as in hysteria. 

Each case must be studied by itself, and treated upon its 
own merits, for no two are alike, and one will frequently 
be made worse by treatment that has cured another. 

As soon as the bodily functions are properly regulated, 
healthy occupation should be found for the mind, and every 
influence should be removed that can excite the imagination 
or feelings. Sensational preaching causes much of this evil, 
by its unwholesome influence upon the emotions, — by its 
studious avoidance of all appeals to the reason, — and by its 
condemnation of all amusement. 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 225 



Mania, or Madness. 

Mania, insanity, or madness, is perhaps the most terrible 
of all human inflictions, destroying, as it does, man's bright- 
est and most ennobling attributes. 

There are four principal forms of mania, under which all 
the numerous varieties met with may be grouped. 

(1. ) Moral Insanity ! In this form, the feelings, emotions, 
and propensities are deranged, so that the individual's likes 
and dislikes, habits and tendencies, are totally different to 
what they are in the healthy state. 

(2.) Intellectual Insanity. In this form the mental faculties 
are deranged, so that the individual's reason and judgment 
are impaired. He is incapable of connected thought, of 
reflection, or of systematic intellectual work. The different 
faculties may work, but not in harmony, or for any common 
purpose. 

(3.) Imbecility. In this form, the intellectual faculties 
seem totally lost, or sunk so low, that the individual can 
scarcely be said to have a mind at all. There is not a mere 
derangement of the faculties, but a loss of them. 

(4.) Monomania. In this form the mind is half sane, and 
half insane. Some one faculty perhaps is lost, or deranged, 
while all the others remain perfect. Many instances of this 
kind are to be met with, where the patient is perfectly insane 
in regard to one subject, and yet quite sane on all others. 

There is no doubt but that madness, in every form, de- 
pends upon some diseased condition of the brain ; the par- 
ticular kind of madness depending upon which part of the 
brain happens to be affected. 

The notion was formerly held that insanity was a disorder 
of the mind only, and not dependent upon the body. It 
was, therefore, thought, that men could be tempted into 
madness, by the devil, or by evil thoughts, and that they 
could be kept from it, or cured of it, by preaching, or per- 
suasion. This view is, however, now discarded by modern 
physiologists, and the fact recognized that there is no such 
thing as mind known, practically, disconnected from the 
body. As explained before, mind results from the action of 
the brain, just as sight does from the action of the eye ; and 
a man can no more think without a brain than he can see 
without an eye. Furthermore, every change, or modifica- 
tion of the brain, modifies the mind ; and, if the brain be 
deranged, or diseased, the mind is also the same. 

Insanity, or madness in any form, is simply a consequence, 
or symptom of diseased brain, and can be cured only by re- 
storing the brain to a healthy condition. 

It should be remarked, however, that the brain may not be 



226 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



organically diseased, and yet the mind may seriously suffer. 
Impure, or poor blood, as before explained, while circulating 
in the brain, seriously impairs its power, and so deranges 
the mind. This is frequently seen in confirmed dyspepsia, 
and torpid liver, the victims of which are much subject to 
hallucinations, and to all the vagaries of hypochondriasis. 
Such persons will often believe themselves to be made of 
glass, or iron, or to have their heads set on their shoulders 
the wrong way. Some have believed themselves to be wheel- 
barrows, or pumps, and one man thought he was a clock, and 
must stand ticking all day. In short, there is no end to the 
strange fancies which these persons have hud. Nothing is 
too absurd or impossible for them to believe ; and on that 
particular point they may be said to be insane, while all right 
upon every other matter. All this however, arises merely 
from oppression of the brain, by the poisonous state of the 
blood, which, owing to the inactivity of the liver and other 
organs, is not kept properly purified. Immediately digestion 
is properly performed, and the liver, kidneys and other 
associate organs, perform their functions properly, the brain 
is restored to health, and the mind also, as a matter of 
course. 

In this state of melancholy, or hypochondriasis, the patient 
will often see visions, or the appearances of persons or ob- 
jects not really present. On more than one occasion this has 
happened to men of knowledge, and intelligence, who under- 
stood what was the matter with them, and who have left us 
valuable records of their experiences. One gentleman in 
particular, tells us how the images of his friends, and ac- 
quaintances, would appear to him, at various times and pla- 
ces, so distinctly that he could not tell whether they were 
real or not, except by speaking to them. Sometimes be saw 
them sitting in his room, and at other times would meet them 
in the street, and address them, not knowing but they were 
the real persons, till they slowly disappeared. An unin- 
formed, or superstitious person would, no doubt, be much 
alarmed at this, and consider it something supernatural, but 
he knew it was the result of disease, and that it could proba- 
bly be corrected. The result showed he was right, for a 
little judicious medication soon banished all the ghosts. 

In many cases, I have no doubt myself, children often see 
visions this way, from overloaded stomachs ; and they are 
then thought to have been visited by spirits, or to have had 
something revealed to them by way of warning. 

In the course of this work, many instances of this kind 
will be given, some of them of a very singular character. 

Sometimes, it is proper to remark, the term mania is used 
only to denote a state of insane excitement, or violent mad- 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 227 



ness, commonly called raving. It is, however, better to use 
the term to denote simple insanity, or loss of mind generally, 
in any form, whether there he excitement or not. 

As a general rule, mania, with excitement, is most com- 
mon in early life, and imbecility in advanced age. 

Hallucinations and Delusions. 

The insane are always more or less subject to illusions, or 
delusions, and take their own imaginings, or deranged sensa- 
tions, for realities. They hear voices when no one speaks, 
and see objects that are not present. Hearing is perhaps the 
sense most frequently deranged, and next, sight, smell, and 
taste — instances of all of which are given elsewhere. Many 
patients, on recovering, tell us that in their state of hallucina- 
tion they heard, and saw, just as distinctly as when they did 
so in reality. At first they are often able to convince them- 
selves of their own delusions, but when the judgment be- 
comes enfeebled, then they believe every illusion to be a 
reality. 

Mental hallucination, independent of deranged sensation, 
may take many different forms. Some will see cause for 
nothing but despondency and sadness, others for gaiety and 
rejoicing; some will be generous, some avaricious, some 
benevolent, and others destructive. 

While these hallucinations continue, they are perfectly 
real to the poor patient, and all reasoning, or presentation 
of facts in regard to them, are utterly useless. Let a man 
take the notion that he is in deep poverty, and the showing 
him any amount of wealth belonging to him, will not affect 
the hallucination in the least. So long as the brain is dis- 
eased the mind will be deranged. 

Very often patients will have strange delusions as to some- 
thing taking place in certain parts of their bodies, and these 
delusions may depend upon actual disease, or suffering, 
in those parts. Thus, some will imagine they have an ani- 
mal in the chest, or head, which is continually tormenting 
them. Others will contend tbey have no head, no heart, or, 
no stomach ; while others, again, believe the devil has pos- 
session of those parts. In all these cases there is some dis- 
ease, and pain, in those parts, and the deranged mind is 
incapable of forming a rational idea as to what it is. Very 
often the curing of this disease, and consequent removal of 
the suffering, cures the delusion. A similar delusion may 
arise, however, without any actual disease of the part, simply 
by some affection of the nerves connected with it ; the effect 
upon the mind being just the same in the one case as in the 
other. 



228 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



M. Esquirol mentions a patient who complained that the 
devil was always pinching her entrails, and biting her heart, 
and that he had bound a cord, tightly, the whole length of 
the body, which hurt her very much. After death it was 
found that there had been a state of chronic inflammation in 
the abdomen, and chest, the suffering from which no doubt 
created the illusion. 

In another case the patient believed she no longer had any 
body at all — the devil having made away with it. She knew 
this to be the case, she said, because she /e^ nothing ! M. 
Esquirol at once concluded that there could be no sensation 
in the body, and to test it he pushed a pin into the arm, put 
it caused no pain. It was therefore evident that the nerves 
of sensation were paralysed, and the patient, not being able to 
feel in her body, concluded she had none ; and hence the 
delusion. 

In another case, a French soldier, in consequence of a 
wound, lost all sensibility in .his body, and concluded, in 
consequence, that he had not got one. He used to tell every 
one that what they had been looking at was not his body, but 
a kind of machine, made like it, and not well made either. 
Sometimes he would refuse to eat, saying that a machine had 
no belly, and did not want food. He would often fall into a 
kind of trance, lasting for several days together. 

Such delusions are usually harmless, but those connected 
with the special senses ar& frequently more dangerous. Thus, 
an insane person often imagines that he sees something fear- 
ful, or some enemy that he must attack and overcome ; or, 
he may hear a voice commanding him to kill some one, or do 
some other injury, and such a command is usually obeyed. 

Insanity in every form is usually preceded and accompa- 
nied by sleeplessness, or insomnia. In fact, this is one of the 
most invariable premonitory symptoms. Some insane pa- 
tients will pass days, and weeks, without sleep. There is 
also more or less disturbance of the vital functions, especially 
of the digestion, and the bowels are nearly always costive. 
The skin is usually hot, especially on the forehead, and the 
perspiration generally has a very peculiar odor, by which in- 
sanity may be recognized. 

Erotomania, or Love Madness. 

This disease consists in an excessive and morbid love of 
some object, which may be real or imaginary. It arises from 
diseased excitement of the amorous propensity, which be- 
comes so active as to completely overpower the intellect, and 
all other feelings, just as religious ideas do in religious mad- 
ness. 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 229 



The patient thinks of nothing but the beloved object, and 
is all the time imagining in it all kinds of perfections and 
attractions, none of which, perhaps, exist at all. The desire 
to possess, or enjoy this beloved object, becomes the one 
absorbing idea, and the world seems to contain nothing else 
worth living for. Very often the struggles of modesty, and 
the feeling of duty, against this amative impulse, are so 
strong, that both mind and body are worn out, and death, 
suicide, or utter madness, results. In other cases, the im- 
pulse is so overwhelmingly powerful, that duty, modesty, law, 
and all else, is forgotten or defied, and the loved object is 
gained at any and every risk. 

What is called love sickness, or erotic fever, is only a milder 
form of erotomania. This is often found in young people, of 
both sexes, who cannot gain the object of their affections, 
and very frequently leads to great derangement of the gen- 
eral health, to hysteria, and even to hypochondriasis, or 
insanity. 

Erotomania is properly a mental disorder, arising from 
strong and irregular desire, assisted by a vivid imagination. 
The object, as before stated, may be purely an imaginary one, 
and yet the passion for it be just as strong as if it were real. 

This form of mania often makes up a large part of the 
ecstatic fervor of religious enthusiasts, at least among fe- 
males. Any one who will listen to, and observe them, at 
revivals, and love feasts, will have plenty of proof of this. 
They will dwell upon the beauties, and perfections, of then- 
Saviour, and upon the love that exists between them, in the 
most fervid and impassioned manner. Not only in the lan- 
guage is the amative propensity shown, but in the actions 
and manner, and in the expression of the features ! Fre- 
quently they will dwell upon the delights of a mutual em- 
brace, and even extend their arms, as if in the act of embrac- 
ing, while hysterical sighs gush from the breast, and tears 
rain from the eyes. 

There is no grossness in all this, nor do the subjects them- 
selves always know what it is that so moves them. Religious 
impressions, romance, imagination, and love, are all mixed 
up together, with no trace of reason, and the result is called 
religious experience! And so it is, for religion is founded on 
emotion ; and the highest and holiest emotions, after all, are 
those that result from the feeling of love ! 

This religious love madness is often found in those females 
who have been disappointed, or crossed in love, or in those 
who have been neglected by the other sex. Unconsciously 
to themselves, their ungratified amativeness mixes itself up 
with their piety, and adds to it a warmth and fervor it would 
otherwise not possess. 

20 



230 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 



In all probability this impassioned and elevated love, for a 
spiritual subject, believed to be' all perfect, is an immense 
gratification, and consolation, to nuns, and other females de- 
voted to forced celibacy. It gives them an allowable object, 
on which to concentrate their thoughts and feelings, and on 
which they may bestow the ten de-rest or most all-absorbing 
affection of which they are capable. 

Satyriasis and Nymphomania. 

Sexual mania, called satyriasis, in man, and nymphomania, 
in woman, consists in an over-excitement of the sexual appe- 
tite. It depends upon some diseased, or deranged, condition 
of the sexual organs, which acts upon the brain, through the 
nerves and spinal marrow, and originates lascivious thoughts, 
desires, and even actions. Erotomania is simply the feeling 
of lovs carried to excess ; but satyriasis, (or nymphomania), 
is physical desire, much exaggerated ! 

In this disease nothing is thought of but the gratification of 
the sexual passion, and both chastitj r , and decency, are lost 
sight of. The patient will often use the most lascivious lan- 
guage, and act in the most lascivious manner, utterly regard- 
less of who may be present, and disdaining all concealment 
or restraint. 

Disease of the womb, or ovaries, or irritation of the clitoris, 
sometimes causes nymphomania, in females, even in those 
most modest, and who are least disposed, when well, to ama- 
tive demonstrations. 

In men, various affections of the testes, prostate gland, 
and other parts, cause satyriasis, often of the most violent, 
and uncontrollable character. In some cases the sexual pas- 
sion is so exaggerated that it overrides all other impulses, 
and the patient will seek gratification in defiance of all oppo- 
sition or consequences. 

Sometimes this is the case in old men, from disease of the 
prostate gland, or bladder, and they will behave in the most 
disgusting manner, without the least consideration, or shame. 
Many, under such circumstances, have been punished as 
criminals, when they ought to have been simply treated for 
disease and insanity. 

In both sexes, disease of certain parts of the brain, will 
also cause sexual mania, independent of the condition of the 
sexual organs, which will originate lascivious thoughts, and 
express itself in the foulest and most indecent language. 

Most distressing instances of this kind are on record, where 
persons of all ages, and both sexes, who were naturally mod- 
est, and correct, in their behavior, have become so libidinous, 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 231 



and indecent, in speech, and actions, that they have had to 
be secreted and confined. 

Persons unacquainted with the subject have considered 
these to be cases of moral failing, and have tried to cure 
them by preaching, or by coercion, of course with but little ' 
good result. In former times the devil would have been 
thought the cause of such a state of things, and prayers, or 
exorcisms, would have been resorted to ; but now, bodily 
disease is recognized as the true cause, and a cure is sought 
for only by curing that. 

Over-sexual indulgence, it should be here remarked, will 
freqently lead to satyriasis, (or nymphomania), by causing 
a permanent state of chronic irritation of the sexual organs. 

Brink Mania; Dipsomania; or, Ooinomania. 

Monomania d^Ivresse, or uncontrollable passion for intoxi- 
cating drinks. This is unquestionably a true mania, or form 
of insanity, and can be treated properly only by considering 
it to be a disease, as it really is. 

The mania for intoxicating drinks, in my own opinion, 
originates from a peculiar condition of the brain and nerv- 
ous system, which deranges the vital functions, and vitiates 
the taste and appetite. "Sooner or later, if not cured, and if 
not ended by death, it is apt to lead to general insanity, or 
rather, imbecility. 

The treatment of this unfortunate propensity has lately 
been placed on a scientific basis, and asylums for* the victims 
of intoxication are now common, and accomplish much 
good. In time, however, from the experience gathered in 
these institutions, the treatment will, I have no doubt, be 
still more successful than it is at present. 

One thing should be especially borne in mind, -namely : 
that the mania for intoxication, like every other form of 
insanity, is apt to be hereditary ! And even when it does not 
show itself in precisely that form, in the children, it may 
cause a very enfeebled or irritable state of the nervous sys- 
tem. Many observed facts also make it nearly certain that, 
if either of the parents be intoxicated at the time of concep- 
tion, the child resulting from that impregnation will be an. 
idiot, or, of weak mind ! 

This variety of mania is characterized by a persistent ten- 
dency to set Aings on fire, and a love of seeing anything 
burn. Those subject to it often exhibit remarkable cunning, 
and dexterity, in indulging their propensity. In many 
cases, houses, and other buildings, have been set on fire, in 
the most mysterious manner, so as to baffle all attempt at 
detection, till finally it has been observed that the fires 



232 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



always followed one particular person, and then a careful 
watch has disclosed the guilty party. When questioned, 
these culprits have often avowed their guilt, expressing nei- 
ther fear of consequences, nor remorse, but speaking of 
their acts as if they were highly pleased with the recollection 
of them, and making it evident that they would repeat them 
whenever there was a good opportunity. In most lunatic 
asj'lums there are patients of this kind, who have to be 
closely watched. 

It is also not unfrequently the case, that an uncontrollable 
tendency to incendiarism is exhibited in pregnant women, 
and in hysterical young girls ; in fact, this form of insanity 
is chiefly found among females, though occasionally met 
with in men. 

Homicidal Mania. 

The tendency to kill is sometimes developed in the insane 
to a remarkable degree, and becomes a fearful danger to all 
around them. Sometimes the madman will commit hi3 mur- 
ders with the greatest caution, so as to ward off suspicion, 
and avoid detection ; but at other times he kills with fury, 
openly and defiantly. Cases have been known where the 
victims of this form of insanity have gone on committing 
murders for years without detection, and have been found 
out at last only by accident. 

In most cases there is simply an irresistible desire to kill ; 
and when the patient does so secretly, and cunningly, it is 
not from fear of being- punished, if caught ; but merely that 
lie may not be stopped in his career. 

Sometimes, however, the madman is influenced by halluci- 
nations, and fancies he is surrounded by enemies, whom he 
strives to kill ; or he hears voices which command him to 
slay such and such persons, or any one he meets. At other 
times he hears the command to kill himself, and straitway 
commits suicide. 

In all cases it is hurtful and dangerous, to use violence to 
insane people, or to irritate them ; for if there be any homici- 
dal tendency, such treatment is very apt to intensify it. The 
poor wretch naturally thinks he is surrounded by enemies ; 
and, acting only from impulse, uncontrolled by reason, he re- 
taliates by killing. # 

Imitation is also very strong in some insane people ; and 
they will be sure to kill, or try to do so, if the}' see other 
people kill. 

When afflicted by this terrible propensity children will kill 
their parents, husbands their wives, or wives their husbands, 
and even the mother her own children. The mania for horn- 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 233 



icide may be only occasional, or temporary, or it may be con- 
stant. It is also often slight at first, bnt with a tendency to in- 
crease, sometimes at a fearfully rapid rate. Many persons 
have felt this tendency to kill creeping- npon them, and have 
had reason enough left to make their cases known, and beg 
to be taken care of. Mothers have had the temptation to kiS 
their children, and servants their masters, bnt have suc- 
ceeded in overcoming it, and making known the fact to the in- 
tended victim. Some men, on reading accounts of murders, 
have rushed out immediately and done the same, without 
any thought or deliberation, but simply in obedience to that 
terrible impulse to kill, which existed within them, and which 
the description of the deed had called into play. 

I was once told by a man who had travelled overland to 
California, in the pre-railway time, a curious case of homici- 
dal mania. He was traveling with a man whom he had known 
for years, and whom he highly esteemed every way, and 
trusted. The man was not only perfectly sane, but a remark- 
ably keen man of business, and" a good-humored, genial com- 
panion. One night when they were camped on the plains, 
after a hard day's tramp, and when he was sound asleep, 
alongside of his friend, he was suddenly awakened by hear- 
ing his name called loudly, with the addition of, "get up 
quick, for God's sake, get up." It is needless to say he was 
wide awake and up in a moment, and there stood his friend, 
with his hunting-knife in his hand, in a fearful state of ex- 
citement, flinging his arms round, and stamping his feet, 
while he all the time kept muttering, and talking incoher- 
ently to himself. Suddenly he threw down the knife, fell on 
his knees, and began to pray. Then he turned to his com- 
panion, who stoodlostin amazement, and saidtobim, "Thank 
God, you are safe, but neither you nor I shall run such a risk 
again/' Then he told him that for several nights he had felt 
an impulse to kill his friend, while asleep/but had fought 
against it manfully, and thought that it was overcome ; but 
that night it was so powerful he had to get up and take his 
knife, with which in his hand, he was creeping along to make 
sure of his victim, when his better nature asserted itself, and 
made him call out the warning words. It is scarcely ne- 
cessary to say there was no motive for this, and no reason 
whatever why he should feel so. It was simply a sudden 
maniacal impulse, and which he felt only at night! During 
the day he was full of terror at his own condition, and strove 
in vain to account to himself for his horrible propensity. 

They both consulted together, as two sane men should, 
what was to be done. It was plain that it would not do for 
the would-be homicide to be left awake while the other 
slept, for neither could tell when the fearful propensity 

2Q>'' : 



234 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



might become overpowering. They, therefore, arranged that 
every night, on lying down, he should be tied hand and foot 
securely, so that he could not possibly do any mischief; and 
in this way they slept for over two months. During all that 
time this mania to kill his friend came upon him most 
nights ; and he would lie awake for hours, planning how he 
could liberate himself and accomplish it. When they got to 
California ; he at once put himself under the care of a physi- 
cian, who treated him for some time, and finally advised him 
to return east and go to a good lunatic asylum, which he did, 
and in six months was entirely cured. His friend never left 
him till he was well, and took care that he never slept unob- 
served while on their journey. The tendency in this case 
was only to kill that one particular person, and no one else. 

There is no doubt but that many murders have been com- 
mitted in this way, from sudden maniacal excitement^ with- 
out any conscious premeditation, and without any motive 
whatever. 

Some particular states of the system, and some medicines, 
may excite a sudden propensity to homicide. One gentle- 
man told me that whenever he was dyspeptic he always felt 
a propensity to kill, and he lived in constant fear that he 
should do so. Another told me that once, after taking a dose 
of opium, for neuralgia, he awoke in the middle of the night, 
called up his valet, and ordered him instantly to take hi3 
razor, his knife, and a pistol which was in the room, lock 
them up, and keep the key. The servant was amazed at 
such an order, but did so at once, his master all the time 
sitting on the edge of the bed trembling from head to foot. 
In the course of half an hour he became quite calm, laid down 
again, and went sound asleep. The reason of this strange 
proceeding was this : he awoke suddenly with a powerful 
impulse to kill, either himself or some one else, and all the 
different things in the room, with which he could commit 
the act came at once into his mind, and where they were. 
He sat up and began to think which instrument he should 
use, and who upon ; when, fortunately, reason asserted itself 
sufficiently to enable him to call his valet. 

In the morning he was perfectly natural, nor did he ever 
feel such a tendency afterwards ; but nothing could ever in 
duce him to take another dose of opium. 

Alcohol will awaken such propensities, in those who are 
disposed to them, and thus has led to many murders. An- 
other reason, and a very powerful one, why such an agent 
should be used only with the graatest caution and moderation. 

In all cases where there is cither this or any r other unnat- 
ural propensity, thus intensified, so as to override the reason 
more or less completely, there is, beyond doubt, something 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 235 



wrong with the brain. The moral irregularity results from 
Borne bodily disease, and perfect sanity can return only with 
perfect health. 

Kleptomania, or Propensity to Steal. 

The mania for stealing, from no other motive than the mere 
love of stealing, without reference to any benefit from it, is 
one of the most curious among the many vagaries of insani- 
ty. Persons of both sexes, of all ages, and of every condi- 
tion, have been afflicted with kleptomania. Some stealing 
openly, and without concealment ; others doing so with all 
the cunning and dexterity of practised thieves. As a general 
rule, the value of the things stolen is of no account ; the 
merest trifles being taken with the same gusto as the real 
valuables ; but in a few cases the kleptomaniac is more par- 
ticular, and will prefer to take only the most costly articles. 
Indeed, there is often a preference for particular things ; 
thus, some will take only mone} T , some jewelry, some wear- 
ing apparel or books, while others take anything which comes 
handiest. 

There is also a great difference in the way the stolen arti- 
cles are esteemed ; some carefully hiding them, and forming 
a hoard, while others take no care of them after they are ob- 
tained, but seem satisfied with the mere act of stealing. 

Many of these kleptomaniacs have gone on stealing for a 
long time before being detected, causing all kinds of unjust 
suspicions against other people, and being found out at last 
only by accident. 

Husbands have stolen from wives ; parents from their 
children, or the reverse, and some men have even stolen their 
own property. In many cases it has been discovered, at the 
death of some opulent and esteemed citizen, that he had 
been a general plunderer of the community for a large por- 
tion of his life, from no other motive than the mere love of 
stealing. 

A patient of mine once told me of a rich uncle of his who 
was found, when he died, to have been a kleptomaniac. He 
had one room in his house, of which he kept the key, in 
which no one had entered but himself for years, and after his 
death, this room was found filled with articles of all kinds 
which he had stolen from his friends. There was the most 
heterogeneous collection of things that it was possible to 
conceive ; and the wonder was how he had contrived to get 
many of them there undetected ; but he had done it so clev- 
erly that never once had he been found out, nor even sus- 
pected. The returning of these articles to their owners 
caused the greatest astonishment, especially when it was ex- 



236 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 



plained how they had been lost ; and many an unjust suspi- 
cion was thus removed from innocent persons; 

There are plenty of instances of this curious mania, and 
many of them among rich people. Their friends usually ar- 
range the matter so that the propensity is known only to those 
they go amongst, and the stolen articles are either quietly 
returned or paid for. The wife of a rich man in New York 
is a confirmed kleptomaniac, and when she visits a store they 
simply make a list of what she takes, and send in the bill, 
which is always paid. On one occasion, however, going into 
a store where she was not known, she was arrested, and 
came near going to prison. Like all other varieties of ma- 
nia, this one also depends on some abnormal condition of the 
brain, of the nature of which we know nothing. 



Besides those above numerated, there are numerous other 
varieties of mania, which need not be specially referred to. 
Every passion and propensity of human nature may be ex- 
aggerated, or deranged, and become the basis of a peculiar 
form of mania. In all these cases there is something wrong 
in some part of the brain, for there can be no mental or 
moral disease, of any kind, but what results from some pri- 
mary disease in the nervous apparatus. The mental or 
moral disorder is but the symptom, or expression, of the 
bodily disorder. 

Affections of the Memory. 

Memory is one of the most wonderful of the mental facul- 
ties, and one of the most varied. Some persons remember 
all things equally well, others only particular things ; and 
conversely, the memory fails in some persons for every thing 
alike, and in others again only for certain things. Very 
often things will be utterly forgotten for years, and then the 
memory of them will return as vividly as ever. Even in ex- 
treme old age, the memory will often return, with wonderful 
accuracy and clearness, for the scenes and persons known in 
childhood. 

The value of a good memory, in the acquisition of knowl- 
edge, must be apparent to every one ; and many a reputation, 
both in school and after life, is built entirely upon it. But 
still memory does not give judgment, and the most perfect 
recollection of what has been seen, and studied, maj r make a 
person very little the wiser if they have not the judgment to 
make proper use of what they recollect. 

Many instances of wonderful memories are on record, both 
general and particular. Men have been known who would 



NEKYOUS DISEASES. 237 



read a newspaper carefully through, and then repeat the 
whole of it, from beginning "to end, advertisements, leading 
articles and all. One man even would do this feat, and then 
repeat it backwards as well as forwards. The celebrated 
Professor Porson had a most astonishing memory, and as he 
said himself, could not forget anything. He could distinctly 
remember every word of whole volumes which he had read; 
and could even say, right off, how many times certain words 
occurred in the volume. Woodford, the well-known London 
journalist, would sit and listen to a long Parliamentary de- 
bate, for a whole evening, and then go home and write it all 
down with literal exactness. 

Some will remember dates, some figures, and some faces, 
while others remember voices. 

Instances of remarkably deficient memories are more com- 
mon than remarkable good ones. There are people who can 
scarcely recollect, from day to day, the events happening ; 
and there are others who can scarcely call to mind the faces 
or voices of their most intimate friends, unless they see them 
daily ; and yet, these people may be excellent reasoners, and 
possess good judgment upon most things. 

The question then comes, what is memory, and on what 
does it depend ? In answer, it may be said, briefly, that 
memory consists in a steady continuance, or a ready reestab- 
lishment of a certain state of mind which has previously ex- 
isf.ed. For instance, a man studies a certain subject, or no- 
tices a certain object ; and, in doing either, he is, in common 
phrase, in a certain state of mind. While that state of mind 
continues he renumbers the subject or object, and continues 
to do so till some other state of mind becomes established, 
and then he forgets the former. After being forgotten, how- 
ever, the original state may return again, and is then recol- 
lected, or picked up again, as it were. 

Events or things are usually remembered in proportion to 
the vividness of the impression they make on the senses or 
mind. We usually remember a matter in proportion to the 
attention we bestow upon it, and this depends upon the im- 
portance or interest which it seems to possess. 

One of the primest elements in a good memory, therefore, 
is the power of steady attention to the one thing under con- 
sideration. Repetition also fixes things in the memory, as 
every one knows. If we see or hear a thing often, we "may 
remember it well, while if we see or hear it but once, it may 
be immediately forgotten. 

Upon what, then, does this continuance, or ready return of 
a certain state of mind, which we call memory, depend ? To 
answer this, it must be remembered that every state of muid 
results from a certain state of the brain ; and when that state 



238 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



of mind remains, or returns, it is because that particular 
state of the brain remains, or returns. If a certain state of 
mind, connected with any particular event, passes away, and 
that particular state of the brain on which it depended can- 
not be brought back, then there can be no memory of that 
event, or, in other words, it cannot be recalled to mind, in 
6hort, memory, like every other faculty of the mind, depends 
entirely upon certain conditions of the brain, and varies with 
these conditions. In what waj' our thoughts, or senses, act 
upon the brain, and thus leave impressions which are never 
effaced, or which are readily reproduced, we know not ; nor 
do we know by what means these impressions are again 
made to reappear, after years perhaps of apparent oblitera- 
tion. 

The memory may be lost, improved, or varied, like every 
other mental faculty, from changes in the condition of the 
brain, and some of the derangements which it exhibits are 
of a very singular character. Some persons will entirely 
forget names, and others, faces. Some will forget the days 
of the week, or the hours of the day, so as to be unable to 
tell time by a clock ; and others will forget, entirely, the 
roads, or streets along which they have travelled for years. 
In short, there is no end to the vagaries which the memory 
may exhibit, nor to the changes it may undergo. 

As before remarked, the most deficient memory, either 
general or particular, may co-exist with an excellent judg- 
ment, and be no indication at all of mental inferiority, nor of 
disease. But thip, is only when it is natural, and habitual, 
with the individual ; for when there is a serious loss of 
memory, or when it becomes deranged in any remarkable 
manner, it is a sure sign something is wrong with the brain. 
In old age the memory often fails, like all the other mental 
faculties, because the brain is worn out, and become par- 
tially incapable of receiving or retaining impressions any 
longer. During insanity some things will be remembered 
with astonishing distinctness and pertinacity, while others 
will be as totally forgotten as if they had never been. 

It is very remarkable, also, that memory will sometimes 
end at a particular date, abruptly, so that everything can be 
remembered back to that time, perfectly, but nothing be- 
fore then. I knew a gentleman, ibrty-four years old, who 
was afflicted this way, after an attack of brain fever. He 
could remember back to the time when he was twenty-five 
years old, but nothing before then! He could call nothing 
whatever to mind connected with his life before he was 
twenty -five years of age ; neither persons, things, nor events. 
He was, in fact, totally unknown to himself, so far as the 
first twenty-five years of his life went, and was obliged to 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 239 



gain all the information lie needed about himself, for that 
period, from his friends. This state of things continued for 
nearly four years, and then his memory of the early part of 
his life came back as perfect as ever. 

But more singular than this, is the fact, that memory will, 
in some rare cases, pass over some particular period, leaving 
it all a blank, but be quite perfect for everything, both be- 
fore, and after, that period. Thus, I knew a man who lost 
all memory about himself, and everything he had known, 
during two years of his life, from the time he was thirty till 
he was thirty-two. His memory was very good for every- 
thing he had known before thirty, and after thirty-two, but 
was quite blank for everything connected with these two 
years. It was, in fact, as if he had never existed for that 
time, except that it often caused curious confusion in his 
daily experiences. Sometimes people would speak to him 
whom he had seen, and known, only during that lost time, 
and he would know nothing about them. So, also, of things 
which had happened then ; they were all forgotten, and 
could not be recalled. The chain of memory was broken, 
and some links lost, but the two broken ends united again ; 
so that the chain was continuous, but with not the original 
number of links. How this lost period could be skipped, 
and the two dissevered ends united, is a mystery, a 

When I knew this person he was fifty years of age, but 
whether this break in his memory was ever repaired, I can- 
not say. He attributed the derangement to a fall on the ice, 
while skating, which stunned him for a considerable time. 
This was in his thirty-eighth year. 

The strange thing in both these cases, is this : that the loss 
of memory should be about a certain part of their lives, but 
should not occur at that time, nor near it. If the last-named 
gentle man had lost all memory of his life, from thirty to thir- 
t)^-two, near that period, it would not have been so strange, 
but this particular period was loztyears after ! In like man- 
ner, the other did not lose all memory of the first twen- 
ty-five years of his life, at twenty-five, but many years 
after! 

It would almost seem that the mental images of things 
past, which we call memories, are piled up in their proper 
order in the brain, as they occur, and that any of them, at 
any part of the pile, may be slipped out, and lost, as it were, 
at any time. But the most curious fact is, that, after being 
so lost, they are often put back again, or, returned to their 
places ! Or, if we regard the images as pictures, some of 
them get dim, at times, or rubbed out, but may be restored, 
just as faded photographs often are. 

All these singular peculiarities result from mysterious 



240 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



changes in the brain, and other nervous centres, the precise 
nature of which we, as yet, do not know. 

I knew one case of a lady, who, while nursing her baby, 
suddenly lost all memory of its birth, and of the whole period 
of her pregnancy. She could not account for the child being 
there, nor for her then condition, but thought, as she ex- 
pressed it, that she must be in a dream. She remembered 
everything before her conception, well enough, but nothing 
after ; and when told that she had gone her full time, and 
had been safely delivered of the child she was then nursing, 
she was lost in amazement. 

This state of things continued for nearly two weeks after 
her delivery, when her memory returned again perfectly. 

The memory of long-forgotten things will often return in 
dreams, when the senses are sleeping, and the stream of 
thought wanders on uninterruptedly, and unguided. Many 
of these long-forgotten things coming back so, are often re- 
garded as revelations, or, communications from the dead, 
instead of re-aw r akened memories. They have been so long 
past, or so completely forgotten, that the mind cannot at first 
conceive they had ever before been known. 

Thus, persons in trouble have often been told things of 
great importance, during sleep, by people long since dead, 
and have, of course, considered it to be a spiritual communi- 
cation. But the true interpretation is this : the memory of 
something which had really been told them by the dead per- 
son, came back again, in a dream, and was thought to be an 
original communication. A young man from the West told 
me that a brother of his, who had been dead many years, 
came to him one night, in a dream, and told him he had left 
an ox yoke hanging on a tree, in a certain place. And when 
he went, next morning, there it was, rotting, and covered 
with moss. Now, no doubt the brother had so told him, but 
he had quite forgotten the matter, till memory reawakened 
in his sleep, and it all came back again. He, however, firm- 
ly believed he had never known the fact before, and that his 
brother came back purposely to tell him, for the first time, 
about the ox yoke. 

Aphasia. 

One of the most singular affections of the memory is that 
called aphasia. A person afflicted with this derangement 
cannot say what he means, or wishes to say, but always says 
something different. He knows what he wants to say, well 
enough, but when he goes to talk, other words are uttered, 
with totally different meaning, or the words are curiously 
jumbled together, so as to have no meaning at all. In some 



NERVOUS DISEASES. 241 



cases, parts of one word will be joined to part of another, 
so that nothing is uttered hut a confused jargon. 

ThQ ideas are right enough, and*very often the person can 
express them properly in writing, but not in speech ! There 
is some curious failure in memory, connected with the sounds 
of words, but not with their forms, when written. 

Even in this disease, there are also curious varieties ; for, 
about some particular matters the patient can talk, and use 
the proper words, but this is rare, and usually he says one 
thing while meaning to say another. 

Angoraphobia. 

This is a peculiar nervous affection which attacks some people, 
hut only when they are in certain places ! It consists mainly in an 
undefined fear, or dread of something, or a feeling of horror and 
anxiety ; often accompanied by a choking sensation, or by a pain 
in the abdomen and chest, with sudden weakness of the limbs, 
trembling, and tears. This is never experienced except when the 
patients go into certain streets, or houses ; but, when there, it 
comes over them immediately, in spite of all their efforts to prevent 
it. Many will go miles out" of their way, to avoid the dreaded lo- 
calities, and some have been known to declare they should die if 
forced to go there, — as indeed it is quite possible they might. Oc- 
casionally, the affection is not felt when there is company — even 
if it be a dog— but more generally it is felt always, by day or by 
night, in company or alone. The Germans call this Platzangst, or 
dread of places. 

Some people experience exactly the same feelings in any other 
place than their own home, and they, therefore, dare never go out, ; 
or. if they do, they hurry back with the utmost precipitation, feel- 
ing no safety or peace till again in the accustomed rooms. So 
powerful is this, in some persons, that it would be dangerous to 
force them to stay away frpm home against their wishes. 

Sometimes people will go giddy, or faint when in certain places, 
or when viewing objects a certain distance off. This the Germans 
call Platzschivindel, or place-giddiness. 

Both these singular affections probably result from peculiar con- 
ditions of the brain, which is affected, through the senses, by the 
sights and sounds of the particular places ; but why, or how, we 
know not. They are both real diseases, and should be treated med- 
ically —x-ot by scolding, preaching, or argument. 



21 



CHAPTER XIX. 

ITERVOUSNESS, WITH ILLUSTRATIVE CASES. 
General Remarks. 

There is a peculiar condition of the system, showing itself 
in various ways, which appears to depend upon a derange- 
ment of the nervous apparatus, but which we are utterly 
unable to associate with any organic lesion. This is what is 
usually called nervousness, and it is quite distinct from hys- 
teria, or any other of the diseases already described ; in fact, 
it is rather a condition of the organization than a diseare, 
though it may simulate, and show the symptoms of a va4- 
et} r of diseases. 

The causes of nervousness appear to be various, and its 
after-consequences may be either trivial, or serious, but in 
no way proportioned to the severity of the nervous attack. 
Very often a slight nervous attack will be followed by most 
serious results, while a most severe one will pass off and 
leave nothing whatever behind it. 

Nervousness may be either acute, and endure but a short 
time, or it may be chronic, and lasMor years. It is seldom 
seen, however, in children, except when constitutional, and 
still more rarely in old age ; being an affection appertaining 
principally to adults. Females are more often the subjects 
of it than males, and they are more especially liable to it at 
certain periods of their lives, and in certain physical condi- 
tions. Menstruation, pregnane}', nursing, and miscarriage, 
are the conditions with which nervousness is most frequently 
associated in females, though it may exist independently of 
all these. Strong emotions, or over-straining of the mental 
faculties, are also frequently exciting causes, and there are 
few females who cannot be nervously excited, more or less, by 
bringing into play any powerful passion — such as love, ha- 
tred, or jealousy. 

In men the most frequent causes are over-mental strain, 
debauchery of any kind, or want of healthy, bodily occupa- 
tion. 

In both sexes many are born with a nervous temperament, 

(242) 



NERVOUSNESS. 243 



predisposing them to nervous attacks ; and in not a few cases 
this tendency is hereditary, or results from the nervous state 
of the parents at the time of conception. Ail this, how- 
ever, will be best illustrated by giving a few cases, with illus- 
trative remarks, which we will now proceed to do. Hem- 
orrhoids, when long-continued, are a frequent cause of 
chronic nervousness, and so is constitutional syphilis, though 
not generally suspected. 

Acute Nervousness. 

Acute nervousness is rare, but often very severe. The pa- 
tient usually complains of not feeling well generally ; fails 
in appetite, or takes a taste for unusual things ; experiences 
nausea, and sometimes vomits an acrid, watery liquid ; or 
secretes saliva so rapidly as to give the idea of salivation. 
The bowels are usually constipated ; there is fever, with 
much irritability ; and a general failure of all bodily energy, 
so that the patient keeps in bed, often without daring to 
raise the head for fear of fainting. The senses are all apt to 
become preternaturally acute, so that particular sights, 
sounds, or smells, or even a bright light, increase the irrita- 
bility, and often bring on nausea, vomiting, or fits of shud- 
dering. The sleep is usually irregular and uncertain, in al- 
cases or nervousness, and there is a tendency (in most) to 
frightful dreams, and nightmare, from which the patient 
often awakes in a profuse cold perspiration, and with palpi- 
tation of the heart. 

Another peculiar symptom, often met with, is a tendency 
to hoarseness, or feebleness of the voice, giving the idea that 
there is sore throat, or that the lungs are affected. Both 
throat and lungs may, however, be perfectly sound, and yet 
the symptoms be precisely those of confirmed consumption, 
or bronchitis. It is, however, entirely a nervous affection, 
and may disappear, or come on, at any time, merely from 
nervous excitement. Many patients have gone through a 
regular course of treatment for the lungs, or throat, who 
never had anything the matter with either. 

As the disease progresses, these symptoms become more 
exaggerated ; the pulse increases in rapidity ; the tongue 
becomes white ; and there are apt to be attacks of neural- 
gia, with irritation of the brain, accompanied by partial de- 
lirium, or by hallucinations and visions. Still later, pains in 
the limbs are complained of, and the patient frequently 
yawns, sighs deeply, and faints away more or less com- 
pletely. Finally, convulsions may set in, and death may en- 
sue — often within two or three months from the first attack 
— but the most careful examination of the whole body, after 



244 NERVOUSNESS. 



death, generally fails to detect the slightest sign of any 
"bodily disease, in any part. 

During an acute nervous attack, there is always more or 
less fever ; and, in fact, the disease is often called nervous 
fever, and is variously attributed to derangement of the 
stomach, liver, or sexual organs ; although, as already 
stated, there may be no obvious derangement of these or- 
gans at all. 

In many cases, when the spinal marrow is probably in 
fault, one of the most remarkable symptoms is an uncon- 
trollable restlessness, or a perpetual desire for motion ! The 
patient cannot rest quiet, but must either be throwing the 
limbs about, if lying down, or must be continually pacing 
up and down, like a wild beast in a cage. This restlessness 
marks the height of the attack, and it passes off only as the 
nervousness subsides. It should never be interfered with, 
for it is undoubtedly the mode in which the over-nervous 
excitability naturally works off. 

Case 1. A young lady about sixteen, well-developed, and 
previously of good general health, was very badly fright- 
ened, just before her monthly period, which for the first 
time then failed to appear. Nothing special occurred till 
the time for the next period came round, and then she was 
taken with a general sensation of uneasiness, with numb- 
ness of the limbs, and a feeling as if she was being strangled 
by something tight around the throat. The bowels ceased 
to act, the abdomen became bloated, and the genital organs 
tumefied and irritable. Convulsive movements of the body 
and twitchings of the limbs set in, so that it was impossible 
for her to keep still, no matter in what position she might be. 
The pulse was rapid, the skin red, and the whole body cov- 
ered with perspiration. She complained continually of 
thirst, but could not swallow on account of the constriction 
of the throat. 

All the symptoms became gradully worse, especially the 
feeling of strangulation ; she breathed with difficulty, and 
kept constantly pulling at her throat, with her hands, as if 
to relieve the constriction. The heart beat very irregularly ; 
being sometimes strong and rapid, and then again slow and 
weak. 

Nothing that was done seemed to afford any relief ; and, 
on the third day, from the time of her first complaining, she 
died! A thorough post-mortem examination was made, but 
no organic disease of any kind was found ; nor could any- 
thing whatever be discovered, in the state of her body, that 
might have caused her sickness and death. She undoubtedly 
died simply from an acute attack of nervousness, brought on 
by the fright and suppressed menstruation. 



NERVOUSNESS. 245 



Case 2. This was a young lady aged twenty, single, of 
good health generally, and of a robust constitution. She 
had been for some time engaged to a young man, whom she 
expected to marry soon, but was abruptly informed that he 
had robbed his employer and absconded, in company v>ith 
another female. She immediately lost all power of standing 
erect, and was compelled to lie on a couch all the time ; 
though her limbs kept continually moving in the most rest- 
less manner. A peculiar shudder shook her whole body 
every fifteen or twenty minutes, and she breathed at intervals 
by long gasps, as if choking. A dry, hacking cough began 
on the second day, with expectoration of bloody mucus, and 
she complained of a dull, constant pain in the chest and 
throat. The pulse was sometimes strong — beating one hun- 
dred and twenty — and then again quite feeble ; beating at 
sevent3^-five. The skin was quite warm, and covered with 
perspiration, which had a peculiar odor, and was distinctly 
of a pink color, The urine was pale, like warm water, and 
passed every half hour, in large quantities. No appetite, 
and no movement of the bowels for four days. The eyes 
were much congested, and she constantly saw visions, usu- 
ally of a terrifying character. When I saw her, she had 
been two days and nights without sleep. 

The prostration was so complete, and the nervous de- 
rangement so severe, that it was evident there was real dan- 
ger of a fatal termination. The first thing to be done was, 
evidently, to induce sleep! and, for this purpose, she took 
thirty grains of chloral hydrate, at the same time having her 
feet in hot water. In twenty-five minutes the chloral pro- 
duced its usual effect, and she slept soundly for five hours. 
On awaking she was much less restive, and partook of a lit- 
tle light nourishment, but was still unable to rise. She then 
took two grains of quinine, which was also repeated three 
hours after. Efforts were also made to act upon her mor- 
ally, by rousing her pride and indignation, so as to turn the 
Current of her thoughts in a new direction. This partly suc- 
ceeded, but at the expense of too much excitement of the 
brain. Twelve hours after waking, she was again put to 
sleep by twenty grains of chloral hydrate, and this time slept 
seven hours ; awaking still more improved. The quinine 
was then given every six hours (two grains), and she took 
nourishment freely ; principally beef tea. The bowels moved 
naturally after the second dose of the chloral, and after that 
she sat up. On the third day after my first seeing her, she 
could stand erect, and walk about the room, all the symp- 
toms gradually improving ; but she had to take fifteen 
grains "of chloral every bed-time for twelve days after, to en- 
sure quiet sleep. 

21* 



246 NERVOUSNESS. 



Recovery was complete, except that her eyesight failed 
from that time, so that she had to use spectacles. 

It had been proposed to bleed her, when she was first at- 
tacked, and to put a blister on the spine ; — had this been 
done, or had a strong purgative been given, or opium, — both 
of which were proposed,— she would probabty not have re- 
covered. 

Case 3. This was a gentleman aged forty-five, by pro- 
fession a banker, of a delicate frame, and a martyr to 
dyspepsia. With but little physical stamina, he was easily 
thrown into a state of nervous excitement, and at such times 
would tremble all over as if he had the ague. At such times 
it was his habit to use stimulants, and by their aid recovered 
a certain amount of steadiness of nerve, but always with a 
fit of depression afterwards, which was terribly prostrating. 

One day, on reaching his place of business, he learnt, with- 
out any previous warning, that nearly all his fortune was in 
imminent danger of being swept away. Immediately he 
was attacked with one of his trembling fits, from which 
stimulants failed to rouse him, though he took more than 
usual. Then intense restlessness set in, he could not keep still, 
but continually wandered about from one place to anothei, 
with no particular object, but from mere inability to keep 
still. This restlessness lasted for a day and a night, during 
which time he had neither rest nor sleep, nor any kind of 
nutriment, but smoked incessantly. Suddenly he laid down, 
and found he could not rise again, although his limbs kept 
beating about incessantly. His head rolled from side to side, 
and seemed, as he expressed it, too heavy to be lifted up. 
His pulse was very irregular, skin hot, and moist, bowels 
constipated, and urine scanty and high colored. His physi- 
cian bled him, but with no relief, and then gave him a 
violent purgative, which seemed to make him worse. When 
I saw him he had been in this state two nights and three 
days, with scarcely any sleep. 

The first thing done was to put him in a warm bath, and 
give him a bowl of beef tea while in it, as warm as he could 
take it ; then he was transferred to bed, and took thirty grains 
of chloral hydrate which in half an hour put him sound 
asleep. He slept only three hours, and woke much less rest- 
less, but otherwise the same, except that his head did not 
roll about. A soft-boiled egg was now given to him, 
with a small portion of tender beefsteak and a little 
bread. In six hours another warm bath was taken, 
and twenty grains of chloral hydrate after, from which he 
slept soundly for six hours, and woke much better. His 
fever now left him, the bowels moved naturally, and the 
appetite returned for food, but still he could not rise, nor 



NERVOUSNESS. 247 



did he do so till two months had passed from the first attack. 
Frequent warm baths were given him, and fifteen or twenty 
grains of chloral hydrate whenever he did not sleep Well. 

Finally he recovered perfectly from the acute attack, and 
was even less nervously excitable than before, but his left 
arm remained partially paralysed ; this, however, was the 
result, in my own opinion, of the bleeding, and might not 
have followed from the nervous attack. 

In another very similar case the man died on the fourth 
day, his death being attributed to heart disease, though with- 
out any reason whatever. It is true there was considerable 
palpitation of the heart, but not more than is often found in 
acute nervous attacks, and there were no signs whatever of 
organic heart disease. In fact, the man died from an acute 
attack of nervous fever, brought on by intense mental work, 
at which he had been incessantly applying himself, night 
and day, for several weeks. 

Case 4. This subject was the wife of a portrait painter of 
considerable repute, whose studio was always occupied by 
some lady sitter, for he was noted for his female portraits. 
She was a perfectly healthy person, every way, and remarka- 
bly cheerful and good humored, till some meddling busy- 
body suggested to her that it was dangerous, if not imprudent, 
for her husband to be constantly in confidential intercourse 
with other ladies. This awakened within her the demon 
of jealousy, and one day, having heard that her husband was 
then painting a lady wiiora he had formerly admired, she was 
seized suddenly with an acute nervous attack. She began 
by a restless and impatient pacing up and down the room, 
and twisting her hands, which she kept up for two hours, all 
the time gasping and half sobbing, as if being choked. Then 
suddenly this ceased, and she threw herself down on the 
bed and became rigidly motionless, except the head, which 
rolled incessantty from side to side, on the pillow. She lay 
in this state about six hours, and then was attacked every 
half hour or so with fits of trembling, followed by showers of 
tears, and hysterical laughter ; and" thus continued, passing 
from one kind of paroxysm to another for two days and 
nights. During all this time she neither ate, drank, nor 
slept. 

On the third day she fell into a deep lethargy, from which 
nothing could rouse her, and which lasted nine hours. 
There was no sign of pulse, or of breathing, except by very 
close tests, and the skin was as white as marble, so that an}' 
one would have pronounced her dead. On recovering from 
this lethargy she could not rise from the bed, but kept con- 
tinually moving her limbs and head, and moaning as if in 
pain. There was no movement of the bowels, and but a 



248 NERVOUSNESS. 



scanty discharge of urine, all this time. This was before the 
discovery of chloral hydrate ; and, as it was thought necessary 
she should sleep, a dose of opium was given her, which 
brought on stupefaction, if not sleep, and she dosed away 
for ten hours, when she was awaked and compelled to take 
some nourishment. Purgatives were also given, and stimu- 
lants, but no good result followed. The more violent 
manifestations ceased, she ate just enough to keep her alive, 
and so lay in bed for six weeks, all the time groaning and 
complaining of pain in all parts of the body. She was then 
suddenly attacked with convulsions, and died in two hoars 
after. 

The case was so remarkable that a thorough post-mortem 
examination was made of the body ; but not the least sign 
of disease or derangement could be found anywhere. All 
the organs were remarkably healthy, and apparently per- 
fectly capable of performing their functions. She had evi- 
dently died from an acute attack of nervousness, brought on 
by jealousy. 

If chloral hydrate, with warm baths, could have been 
given, she might have been saved, though perhaps there 
would always have remained a tendency to mental distur- 
bance, or paralysis. 

While she lay thus, her monthly period passed off perfectly 
regular, and with no particular symptoms, except that the 
special nerves of the eye and ear were much affected. She 
kept constantly seeing friends and acquaintances coming 
into her room, and could hear them talk. So perfectly did 
she see, and hear them, in fact, that she would sometimes 
reply to what she had heard, being quite unable to tell the 
visions from real people. This was not from disorder of the 
mind, but of the nerve of the eye, as she herself was aware ; 
for she once told her nurse that the people she thus saw 
gradually faded away, and their voices became fainter and 
fainter till she conld hear them no more. She was not at all 
terrified by these visitations, nor did she regard them in any 
way as mysterious or supernatural, but always referred them 
to the eye and ear herself. It was, however, the vision of 
her supposed rival, probably, whicff caused the final convul- 
sion, for she shrieked out her name just before the attack, 
and seemed to be following her with her eyes round the 
room. 

Chronic Nervousness. 

The symptoms and effects of chronic nervousness are 
much the same, generally, as those of acute nervousness, 
only they are usually less severe, and slower in their develop- 
ment. The patient may suffer for years, sometimes severely, 



NERVOUSNESS. 249 



and even die at last, from the continued wear of the disease, 
and yet the most careful inspection of the body, after death, 
will not show a sign of anything wrong in any part. 

In Chronic Nervousness there is usually great irritability, 
with marked singularity of conduct and feeling. The senti- 
ments are often much perverted, and the intelligence unduly 
exalted, but liable to great uncertainty in its manifestations ; 
the patient may be sad and gloomy, or foolishly and unrea- 
sonably gay and excited, or both by turns. In nearly all 
cases the sleep is fitful and unrefreshing, broken by painful 
dreams, or night-mares. There is a constant complaint of 
not feeling well and of being too hot or too cold ; the head 
is heavy and dull, and the least worry or attempt at study 
causes headache or neuralgia. Giddiness, faintness, and 
sudden failure of strength, are constantly experienced, even 
to the point of swooning away. Sight, hearing, smell, and 
taste, may all become deranged in the most singular man- 
ner, and the whole body often feels as if the flesh was creep- 
ing off the bones. Utter prostration of strength is often ex- 
perienced, so that the patient seems incapable of the most 
ordinary exertion ; and yet, all at once, if anything rouses 
the nervous energy, a prodigious strength may be ex- 
hibited for a short time. The digestive functions are nearly 
always badly performed, so that there is pain in the stomach, 
with nausea, or vomiting, flatulence, and constipation. The 
appetite is either morbidly ravenous, intermittent, or almost 
absent. Breathing is usually slow, and there is often a 
peculiar nervous cough, and a feeling as if breath enough 
could not be drawn into the lungs. The circulation of the 
blood is languid and irregular, owing to feeble action of the 
heart, and finally the blood itself becomes thin and poor, 
and not unfrequently deficient in quantity. Very often there 
is palpitation of the heart, and the arteries of the head and 
neck will beat with violence on the slightest exertion or 
emotion. 

Many subjects gradually fall into a state of general feeble- 
ness and waste away, till they finally die from mere inani- 
tion. This is called nervous toasting, or slow nervous fever. 

But in all cases, as before stated, the most careful examina- 
tion, after death, shows no organic disease, nor gives any 
clue as to the cause of the patient's suffering and death — the 
whole trouble has evidently been nervous, and nothing more. 

Case 5. This was a young man of twenty -two, studying 
law, of good general health, and correct habits. Ambitious of 
distinction in his profession he pursued his studies at nights, 
depriving himself of sleep, and keeping up his flagging 
energies by the use of strong green tea ! This, added to want 
of fresh air, and exercise, soon began to tell upon him ; he 



250 NERVOUSNESS. 



lost appetite, became habitually costive, could not sleep, 
and complained constantly of pain in his head and eyes. 
His character changed completely, so that he became irrit- 
able, easily offended, and offensively dogmatic and dictat- 
torial in his manner. His friends all observed these un- 
amiable traits, and some expostulated with him, but that 
only made matters worse, for he now could not stand con- 
tradiction, and took offence so readily that none liked to 
talk with him. In fact his conduct was so different to what 
it had been, that people began to think he was going insane, 
while he all the time insisted that everybody else was 
changed. 

He was constantly troubled with a dry, hacking cough, 
lost flesh, and was so weak that he gave up walking almost 
altogether. He was afflicted with frequent and severe pal- 
pitation of the heart, and for nights together scarcely slept 
at all. Everyone thought he was consumptive, and very far 
gone with the disease. Indeed, one physician that he was 
induced to consult told him so, after auscultating his lungs, 
and advised him to use the hypophosphites, and cod-liver 
oil. He however did nothing, and struggled on for two 
years, sometimes rallying a little, and then falling back, till 
finally an event occurred which changed his whole life, and 
cured him. His uncle, upon whom he entirely depended 
for the means of studying and living, died suddenly, and 
left him entirely without resources, As he had always been 
totally unused to provide for himself, and had no one to 
fall back upon for help, or advice, he found himself com- 
pelled to look his situation square in the face, and decide at 
once what he should do. To his own surprise, as well as to 
that of others, he found, when obliged to exert himself, 
that he could do more, both bodily and mentally, than he 
had ever thought possible ; his weakness, both bodily and 
mental, seemed to leave him all at once, and he determined 
to set out and walk all the way to Illinois (from New York), 
to visit another uncle there, whom he had not seen, nor 
heard from, since he was a bo}'. The long journey was 
made, not without weary limbs and blistered feet, but with 
the best results ; for he arrived at his uncle's free from nig 
cough, with no headache, feeling strong, and able to eat a 
good meal, and take a good night's sleep. In fact he was 
cured, and in a short time became a sturdy, cheerful farmer. 
In a }• ear after, he resumed his legal studies again, but more 
judiciously, varying them with good wholesome out-door oc- 
cupation, and never continuing them after he began to feel 
fatigued. Finally, he became quite a distinguished lawyer 
in Illinois, but he also remained a farmer ; and, as he re- 
marked once to me, one pursuit was always made by him a 



NERVOUSNESS. 2^1 

relief to the other, so that he became truly possessed of 
that greatest of all blessings, a sound mind in a sound 
body. 

In all probability, had he remained at his studies ex 
clusively, or entered upon practice, in the state he was be- 
fore his uncle's death, he would soon have died. Medical 
aid might have propped him up for a time, by tonics, and 
stimulants, but it could not have been for long. The for- 
tunate change which was forced upon him was his salvation, 
and his case shows what is really needed in nearly all such 
cases. Medicine can do but little, unless both mind and 
body can be differently occupied, and the conditions of life 
changed. The hard-worked faculties, and the over strained 
emotions, must be allowed total rest, and others brought 
into play instead. The past, as far as possible, must be 
shut down upon, and a new life commenced. If such a 
change can be made, medicine may help forward the restora- 
tion, but it can do but little without the change. 

Case 6. This subject was a young lady, aged 19, rather 
small, and of spare habit, but with tolerable good health, 
though not robust. A disappointment in love had such an 
effect upon her that she lost all power to rise from her bed, 
for three days, during which time she took neither food nor 
drink, but continued the whole time to throw her limbs 
about in the most violent manner, so that the attendants 
could scarcely keep her covered. At the end of the third 
day she suddenly fell into convulsions, and from them 
passed into a trance, which lasted ten hours, when she 
awoke, took some nourishment, rose up, and dressed her- 
self. iTrom that time onward she was utterly changed in 
character, liking what she had previously detested, and dis- 
liking what had previously given her pleasure. Many per- 
sons of whom she had formerly been very fond, and whose 
society she constantly sought, she could not now bear to 
see ; while others whom she had before shunned, and who 
had been excessively repugnant to her, she now eagerly 
sought, and delighted in their company. Her irritability, 
and quickness to take offence, were so remarkable that 
every one dreaded to come in contract with her, though she 
had formerly been noted for her amiability. All her senses 
seemed to be perverted, and she acted in an abnormal man- 
ner. She would eat and drink the most unusual things, even 
some that were really disgusting, and declared she liked the 
taste of them. Smell she seemed to have lost entirely, for 
nothing offended her nose ; while her sight, and hearing be- 
came strangely deranged. She constantly heard people talk- 
ing around her, and would reply to them, not knowing but 
that the words proceeded from real persons. She also saw 



252 NERVOUS DISEASES. 



heads all about the room, some of which were like those of 
persons whom she knew, while others were those of 
strangers ; they all seemed to be cut off level with the 
top of the shoulders, and they were located in various 
places, some being on shelves, or bookcases, and some on 
chairs, while others seemed suspended in the air. So real 
were these, that they hid real objects which were behind 
them, and what was very remarkable they all had one ex- 
pression, that of grave and sad resignation. 

During this time her appetite was variable, being some- 
times voracious, when there was anything which pleased 
her peculiar tastes, and at other times it was so poor that 
she declined food for days together. The bowels were 
habitually costive, and her monthly periods were totally 
suspended. 

Strange to say her bodily strength did not seem much im- 
paired, and she would, at times, walk up and down for 
hours together, at the most rapid rate. Sometimes slie 
would sleep for ten or twelve hours soundly, and then she 
would go for several nights with no sleep at all. Her speech 
was rapid and confused, the words being jumbled together, 
as if she was in too much of a hurry to get them out in proper 
order. She took no special interest in anything, except a 
few household duties, which she daily performed in the 
most undeviating routine, doing all in a certain order, and 
each exactly at a certain hour and minute. 

Suddenly, after being in this way nearly two years, she 
was attacked with convulsions again, which passed off with 
a profuse perspiration, which was distinctly bloody ! Not 
merely red — from some accidental cause, but unmistakably 
mixed with blood, which seemed to exude from the pores of 
the skin, and was in sufficient quantity to stain the body 
linen. A similar discharge occurred three different times, 
within two weeks, during which period she remained in bed, 
sometimes in a species of trance, and at other times beating 
the bed with her hands incessantly. She took very little 
nourishment, but drank water all the time, sometimes a pint 
at a draught. 

At the end of the two weeks she rose, and resumed her 
previous course of life in every particular, but was evidently 
much fallen away in flesh, and suffered from palpitation of 
the heart. The true nature of the disease was not suspected, 
and she was supposed to be going insane. The family 
physician bled her several times, and applied blisters, and 
cups, to the spine, besides giving her blue pill and iron, but 
all with no effect. Her parents, when told that the trouble 
was only a chronic nervous affection, could scarcely conceive 
It possible, more especialty as she had a most distressing 



NEKVOUSNESS. 253 



cough, and seemed deep in consumption. However, they 
gladly consented to the proposed treatment, which was com- 
menced immediately. 

For a time, as an anti-periodic, quinine was given, with 
wine, three times a day, and in the evening a warm bath, fol- 
lowed by a bowl of beef t^a, made from Liebig's extract of 
meat, and a small dose of chloral hydrate on going to bed. 

The good effect of this was soon seen in a better appetite, 
regular sleep, and a more equable disposition. In a week 
she was quite a new being, and more like her former self 
than she had been since her first attack. She was then 
taken to the sea side, where she had warm salt water baths, 
and was kept out in the open air nearly the whole day, rid- 
ing about, the same general treatment being still continued, 
except that she now had some of the bromide of potash. 
Coffee and tea were both forbidden, and in place of them she 
took claret wine, with seltzer water. 

In three weeks she was so far recovered that few could 
have believed her to be the same person. She slept well, 
without the chloral, had a good appetite, with perfect diges- 
tion, and was regular in her monthly periods. In three 
months time she returned home perfectly cured, and with all 
her old amiability of character. 

To those who have not studied the relations, direct and 
sympathetic, between the nervous system and the rest of 
the organization, such a case will seem singular and inex- 
plicable, but to those who have read and studied this book, 
it will be clear enough. The emotional shock, caused by the 
sudden discovery of her lover's faithlessness, completely 
deranged her nervous system, making its action fitful, and 
irregular, so that none of the organs were regularly and pro- 
perly supplied with nervous power, and consequently they 
could not properly perform their functions. As soon as the 
nervous system became calmed, and regular in its action, all 
the organs began to resume their functions, and health re- 
turned. Till this was done, it was of no use to try to force 
an appetite, to give tonics to restore strength, or to" endeavor 
to re-establish the monthly flow. All the means for such 
purposes necessarily failed, while the bleeding, blistering, 
and cupping, only made matters worse. 



This case is very remarkable from the variety of symptoms 
which accompany it, some of which are seldon seen. The 
bloody sweat is rarely met with, especially in chronic cases, 
but I have seen it three different times, in three very differ- 
ent subjects. In extreme angnish of mind, or severe torture 
of the body, it happens more frequently, as might be ex- 

22 



254r NEKVOTJSNESS. 



pected. Often, however, the bleeding is local, being con- 
fined to the eye-lids, arm -pits, groins, and thighs ; but in bad 
cases the blood exudes from the whole surface of the body. 
Spectral appearances before the eyes, and false sounds in 
the ears, are more common, and so is the extreme restless- 
ness, and throwing the limbs about. 

In females a nervous attack is often the cause of a bad 
leucorrhcea, and sometimes is followed by an attack of 
nymphomania ! When this is the case the cold bath should 
be used, till the excitement is calmed down, then a dose of 
chloral hydrate given and the patient put to bed, and 
watched. Some of these cases are very distressing, for 
while so affected the most modest and virtuous females will 
make advances to, and even solicit, any men they may fall 
in with, totally unconscious, morally, of what they are do- 
ing- loung females with any such tendency should be 
watched very closely, especially when they may be in danger 
of brutal abuse. 

In some cases chronic nervousness ends in nervous par- 
alysis^ which may be as complete, for the time being, as if it 
arose from real injury to the spine. It passes away, how- 
ever, with the attack, and may leave not a trace behind. 

Vertigo and spasms are common in chronic nervousness ; 
and somnambulism, and trance, are not unfrequently met 
with. 

Faintness, with spasms, headache, and restlessness, with 
confusion of ideas, and a tendency to see visions, or to see 
things double, are common among females while pregnant, 
or nursing. 

Among young females a very large portion of their sup- 
posed diseases are simply attacks of nervousness, and they 
should never be subject to severe medication till this has 
been ascertained. Especially it should be known if they are 
suffering from any disappointment, from unrequited affec- 
tion, or from any other cause which ma) 7 " act strongly upon 
the emotional part of their nature. It is perhaps quite with- 
in bounds to say, that nine-tenths of their diseases are really 
nervous, and connected, for the most part, with the affec- 
tions ! Not that they are any the less real on that account, 
as the cases just given will show ; but a knowledge of the 
fact must influence materially the treatment to which they 
may be subject. For the most part, the real cause and 
nature of the disease is not found out and removed, but they 
are merely treated for some of its effects, with of course no 
beneficial result. Very often the skill of the physician is 
baffled, all his treatment is useless, so that the patient is 
given up, and yet, to the amazement of all, will recover, 
quite suddenly, and show no trace of sickness whatever. 



NERVOUSNESS. 255 



This is often seen in what is called love sickness, which may 
kill as certain as the plague, and defy all medical skill, but be 
cured in a moment by the possession of the loved one. A 
celebrated French physician, noted for his treatment of 
nervous young ladies, was of opinion that all such cases 
were connected with love ; and when a young person was 
brought to him, perhaps apparently dying, of nervous fever, 
he would instantly demand : " Well ! Who is Tie? What is 
his name?" Without going so far as this, it is nevertheless 
true that the influence of the affections, in all such cases, 
can scarcely be overrated, and should always be suspected. 



N. B. — The medication advised, in these nervous cases, is 
perhaps the best, of the ordinary kind, and is that which 
would be adopted by the most eminent allopathic physicians. 
It is here given because, in most cases, it would be the read- 
iest to obtain, and because it would do no harm. There is a 
kind of medicine, however, the Neuropathic, which is much 
better, especially in nervous cases, than the best of the allo- 
pathic, and which I should always advise instead, when ob- 
tainable. It will be explained further on. 



CHAPTEE XX. 



SOME CURIOUS CASES FROM MY OWN PRACTICE. 

Case 1.— The following is the statement made me by the 
patient himself, in his own words. I give it just as received, 
making my own coniments as occasion requires : 

"Statement of My Case. 

" I am one of the conductors of a daily paper, and my duty 
is to attend late at night, to receive the last news, and to 
make comments upon it if needed. I am usually kept till 
the small hours of the morning, and sometimes till 3 or 4 
o'clock, and with plenty to think of and to do. It is my cus- 
tom to leave my segar-case open before me, and to keep 
smoking all the time. As soon as one segar is done I light 
another, and so on till the work is done. How many I may 
average I cannot say, but I know that sometimes I empty the 
case, and that holds 6. Perhaps 1 average twice as many 
more during the day, but I never kept count. This course 
I have been pursuing for three years, but for the last twelve 
months with increasing difficulty and distress. My first 
symptoms were a troublesome buzMng in the ears, which 
always began with the writing, and continued more or less 
till I had finished. Sonletimes I would even feel a little deaf 
with it, and then I also felt a severe throbbing in the back 
of the head, with more or less pain there. All this used to 
disappear when the work was over, and on going to sleep it 
all left me, and I woke up all right. 

u Finally, all these troubles got more permanent, and would 
not disappear on stopping work, nor could I go to sleep as 
I used to do. Many times have I risen from my desk wearied 
to death, almost deaf, and with a distracting pain in my 
head, but it was no use lying down, sleep would not come. 
In this state I used sometimes to start out for a walk, and 
after getting well tired, and taking a cup of coffee, could 
sleep a little, but it was not thoroughly refreshing, and at 
nights I was but little fit for my usual task. Sometimes a 
good stiff glass of grog, when I had done, would put me all 

(256; 



CUBIOUS CASES OF NEEVOUS DEKANGKEMENT. 257 



right, and I conld sleep well, but at other times it made me 
worse. On the whole, it was evident my condition was get- 
ting worse, but still I thought I could keep on till summer, 
and then take a holiday and get all right again. About three 
months ago, however, a new symptom appeared, worse than 
all the others, and which causes me the greatest misery and 
alarm. It is for this, in fact, that I consult you. It first 
commenced in this way : One night when there was little to 
do I was trying to slumber a little on the sofa, in the office, 
and had succeeded in falling into a half doze, when im- 
mediately before me, on the opposite side of the room, lying 
on another sofa that was there, I saw the figure of a man. 
At first it was shadowy and indistinct, and I rubbed my eyes, 
yawned, and roused myself, thinking to make it disappear. 
All of no use, gradually, but steadily it got plainer to view, 
and to my astonishment took my form exactly. There it lay, 
my very counterpart in features, but not dressed as I was 
then, mine being a winter suit, and the figure having on light 
summer clothes. But most horrible of all, the figure had its 
throat cut, from ear to ear ! The neck tie was removed and 
the collar thrown back, so that the hideous wound gaped 
wide open, and for a time I could look at nothing else. By 
degrees, however, my eyes took in other particulars, and 
then in the left hand I saw a razor. Now, I am left-handed, 
and this circumstance seemed to strike me more than any- 
thing else! You cannot conceive how completely this ap- 
pearance overcame me. I was on my side, my face turned 
towards the figure, and gazed with such intensity that it 
seemed as if life stopped within me. With a long sigh, how- 
ever, my full consciousness came back and I sprang up, 
feeling sure the figure would disappear if I moved towards 
it. But it did not. Even when close to the sofa there it 
still lay, looking up to the ceiling with its glassy eyes, and 
that hideous wound still gaping as wide as ever." Fully de- 
termined to see the thing through I threw myself forward 
on to the sofa, right on top of the figure, which seemed to 
sink under me, till both settled into utter darkness, and I 
Decame insensible. My faint lasted some twenty minutes, 
and was ended by the devil coming in with some copy. 
Thinking me only asleep he called me, as he had been 
directed, but could not rouse me, and ran for help. By 
dashing cold water on my face, rubbing my hands, and put- 
ting some brandy in my mouth, the night hands at last 
aroused me, and consciousness returned. At first my con- 
fusion was so great that past events were all muddled to- 
gether, but the first glance at that sofa brought all back 
again, and my eyes closed Involuntarily, for fear the terrible 
figure should be still there. When fully restored it was broad . 

22* 



2j8 cueious cases of nervous derangement. 



daylight, and I felt much relieved. Sending out for an 
opium pill, which I swallowed, and taking a light breakfast, 
I went home to bed, fell fast asleep, and awoke five hours 
after, feeling pretty well, in fact better than for a long time, 
but still rather weak and dreamy. After this, a stroll seemed 
to improve me still more, but I felt still less like work than 
before. As no one else, however, could take my place I had 
to go, and by ill luck this was a very hard night for work. 
Still I went at it, and puffing my segar, with my back to that 
sofa, the pen went rattling over the paper briskly. For 
awhile the figure was forgotten ; but finishing an article, and 
having nothing more on hand, for the moment, the thought 
struck me to look. With trepidation and fear I turned, and 
there was the sofa wwccupied ! You cannot conceive the re- 
lief it was to me. I fairly jumped up for joy, and strode 
across the room, and to clinch the matter resolved to sit down, 
there ! Scarcely was the resolve made, and before it could 
be put into execution, there was the figure again, just as if it 
had never disappeared. Staggering back I fell into my 
chair, and sat staring at it, speechless with terror. It never 
changed in the slightest manner, and all the details of dress 
and look fixed themselves more and more firmly on my 
mind. How long this entrancement would have continued 
I know not, but my old friend the devil again relieved me. 
Coming in, he laid down the proofs he had brought, and 
asked me for copy. With a great effort I recovered myself, 
and asked him to look on that sofa for my pencil. He went 
at once, and looked, but saw nothing ! Still I could see all 
the time ! The boy's body seemed not to shut out the view 
of the figure at all, for in some incomprehensible manner that 
was always visible between me and him. Utterly unable to 
stay any longer then, I went down into the press room, 
where the men were working off the First Edition, and there 
again, on the press, passing with the paper under the rollers, 
backward and forward, lay my enemy. The printers stared 
at me as much as I stared at the figure, wondering what 
ailed me. At last the foreman said ' What is the matter, sir ; 
do you see anything wrong with the press V No ! said I, but 

I am not well, ask Mr„ T to fill my place for the rest 

of the night, and call a coach ; I am too unwell to stay longer, 
and must go home. 

u Arrived at my lodgings, I resortedto my old remedy, and 
took a tumbler of hot punch. This revived me, and finally 
made me drowsy, but on lying down on the bed sleep would 
not come ; I could only doze, and my feelings were wretched. 
Do what I would, the idea of that figure would not be driven 
out of my mind ; and, at last, the conviction came irresist- 
ibly upon me that it was somewhere in the room. This made 



CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 259 



me afraid to look around, till at last the agony of suspense 
became so great I could no longer endure it, and sprang up ; 
sure enough there it was, in one corner, on the floor, just the 
same in every particular. Rushing out of the room, and 
down the stairs I reached the street, and then walked up and 
down till daylight. Strange to say, my appetite was good ; 
and, after a fair breakfast, I went to a very celebrated med- 
ical man whom I knew, and described to him the principal 
symptoms under which I labored — but said nothing of the 
figure. He at once told me I had simply overworked myself, 
and smoked too much. 'Rest,' said he, 'is necessary, and 
less tobacco ; also, take a blue pill at bed-time, with a seid- 
litz powder next morning. ' 

"Well, I managed to get a friend to take my place for a 
week ; took only three cigars the next day ; and, as the doc- 
tor had also advised a change, I went to the theatre in the 
evening. The performance pleased me much ; and the nov- 
elty of having no work to do for the day or night made me 
feel quite gay. Going home from the theatre I took one 
cigar, and a single glass of wine, swallowed my pill, and 
then went to bed, as the clock struck one. My courage was 
so great, that I actually looked into the corner where the 
figure laid the previous evening, but saw nothing ; and, feel- 
ing confidence in my physician, went fast asleep. 

"My sleep lasted till five o'clock, when I awoke suddenly, 
it was quite dark ; but, in that comer, there lay the figure as 
before, lighted up with a pale, yellow light, which seemed 
to surround it like a cloud. The light showed nothing else 
distinctly, but seemed to belong to the figure alone. Well ! 
there I laid, staring at it, till* my heart seemed to sink within 
me, and the thought came to mind that I should die. It was 
impossible for me to get up, nor could I turn my eyes 
away ; but lay and stared at the figure till daylight began to 
show. 

"Immediately the footsteps of our porter sounded on the 
stairs, as he began his round of fire-lighting, I forced myself 
round and rang the bell. He came to the door, which fortu- 
nately was not locked, and came in. 'Jim,' said I, 'is 
there anything in that corner, I thought something sparkled 
there ? ' Jim looked, but reported nothing ; and, after 
lighting my fire, and opening the blinds, left the room. It 
was now daylight, and the figure. had disappeared. With a 
strange feeling in my head, and downhearted, I got up, took 
my seidlitz powder, and went to breakfast. The medicine 
operated well, and during the morning I felt better, so much 
60, that my spirits came back, and I began to hope my vis- 
itor would not return. During the day, I tried to tire my- 
self, took only three cigars, and went to bed early. Slept 



260 CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



soundly till three o'clock, waked up all at once and looked 
round ; there it was again, in the old place. Hiding nry face 
in the bedclothes, I lay there till morning, not daring to look 
out again. The day passed much as the one before, and in 
full daylight my spirits came back. My appetite also kept 
up, and I took but two cigars, with no liquor. When night 
came I went again to the theatre, and afterwards to a sa- 
loon ; and, on coming home, turned the gas on full height, 
left it burning, took my pill again, went to bed and slept, 
awoke again at five, and there was the figure just the same ! 
Well, I need not tire you with daily details. All this holiday 
week, not a single night passed without my fearful visitor. 
I took my medicine, smoked little, drank scarcely anything, 
and did no work ; yet still there it was. At the end of the 
week, it was necessary for me to return to my post ; and 
there, as before, in the same spot, invariably appeared my 
counterpart. 

" Gradually becoming accustomed to it, I lost much of tl e 
fright which I had felt at first, but still it weighed on me hor- 
ribly, and continues to do so. I see it .now ; not only by 
night, but also of late in the, day! A week ago in crossing 
the street I saw it lying there, and all the people walking 
over it ; but still not hiding it from my sight. I stood theie 
staring at it till a policeman took my arm and asked me 
what was the matter. Even to-day, before coming to see 
you, the thing appeared to me in the restaurant, where I 
went for breakfast." 

" Now, sir," said he,- " tell me at once : can this thing be 
driven away, or must I make up my mind to die ? — forlive 
with it I cannot ! " 

" Yes," said I, " beyond a doubt it can be driven away, and 
you can be cured ; providing you can, and will do just as I 
tell you. First, however, let me ask you a few questions, 
and remind you of a few things you have not yet told me, 
but of which I am aware from your symptoms. 

"Your digestion and appetite, you say, are very good, 
which is ve3*y important, — and you do not complain of any 
steady or acute pain in the head, or spine. When you do 
sleep, you sieep soundly, and nothing appears to you in your 
dreams. Your bodily strength also is not impaired ; and, 
during a portion of the day, you feel sometimes nearly in 
your natural state. All this shows that the derangement 
from which this appearance results, is not yet very serious, 
nor confirmed. You also are not a superstitious man, and 
can, therefore, allow me to assure you that what you see is 
unreal, and results from something wrong in your bodily 
condition. When this wrong condition is put right, you will 
see it no more ; and, as I said before, if you can, and will do 



CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 261 



as I direct, it certainly can be put right — of that yon need 
have no doubt!" 

" Oh, sir ! " said he, "I do trust you are right, and can do 
all you say, but excuse me if I feel doubtful. I see it now! 
There, on that sofa!" — pointing to one at the other side of 
the room. 

"Exactly," said I ; " the very look of your eyes, and the 
swelling of the veins on your temples, showed me before 
you spoke, that you saw it. Of course it is invisible to me, 
but I know it is real enough to you. We can, however, banish 
it for the present, and finish "our consultation." Fetching 
out my Electro-Magnetic Machine, I at once subjected him 
to a pretty strong current, enough to shake him up well. 

All the time he kept gazing on the figure with the most de- 
spairing look I ever saw on a human face. In about ten 
minutes, however, he burst out into a profuse perspiration, 
and immediately exclaimed, " Thank God, it is gone ! Oh, 
Doctor, you have banished it. And I now begin to think you 
can cure me. Tell me at once what I must do ?" 

In the first place, said I, you must abandon your present 
occupation. That is indispensable, and if you cannot, or 
will not, it is useless to advise any further. You must leave 
it at once, and do something requiring but little mental effort, 
and that will take you out well in the open air, if in a new 
plate so much the better. It shall be done, said he. In 
that case, the rest is easy. You must neither smoke, nor 
drink, nor take coffee no/ tea, and use such diet as I shall 
prescribe. Medicine you need but little, and that of a pe- 
culiar kind, such as I must prepare for you myself. But first 
let me remind you of something you have forgotten, or did 
not like to mention, but which is the most important of all. 
You have been, at no distant time, too attentive to some lady 
friend ! That is true, said he, I must admit. And further, 
said I, your attentions were only partial ; you constantly com- 
mitted a fraud on nature! He started up at this and ex- 
pressed the utmost astonishment. It is quite true, said he, 
but I never thought that of any account, and how you found 
it out I cannot guess. It is my business, said I, to find out 
such matters, and I knew it from the first. The practice I 
referred to, has been the chief cause of your trouble, and 
your over-work, and excessive smoking, have been only aux- 
iliaries. From all these causes combined, there is at present 
an unhealthy condition of the brain, and that organ secretes 
unwholesome thoughts and images, in consequence ; the same 
as your stomach, when you have dyspepsia, secretes impure 
gastric juice. When such a state" lasts too long, and the 
subject is feeble, an organic change takes place in the brain, 
of a permanent character, and a cure becomes impossible. 



262 CUBIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



But, in your case, as I have said before, the matter has not 
gone too far. 

Further inquiry showed, as I had suspected, that he had, for 
a long time, indulged to excess with a young lady friend ; and 
that, to avoid the usual consequences of such intercourse, had 
habitually practiced a fraud on nature. The indulgence alone, 
though in excess, might never have led to any such results, 
but the imperfection of the act did the mischief, as I nearly 
always find it do. 

In accordance with nry advice he gave up his editorship, 
and took a situation as travelling agent, abandoning also 
his tobacco and liquor entirely. Of course his female friend 
was also given up, and I prepared for him a remedy, speci- 
ally adapted to soothe the irritable brain, and equalize the 
distribution of nervous power. He was told distinctly that 
the figure would not disappear all at once, but by degrees, 
and so he found, for it was six months before he saw the 
last of it. According to the account he gave me, it con- 
tinued to<*appear more or less regularly for a week or two, 
then only occasionally, and fainter, so that at last it was 
only a shadow, and finally only a faint light, which faded 
quickly awaj T . 

As a concluding part of the treatment, I prescribed mar- 
riage, and to put no restraint on nature. This completed 
the cure, and he is now a well, strong man, with a family 
around him. 

This case shows forcibly the evil effect of the practice re- 
ferred to, which ruins thousands of both sexes, and which 
is yet seldom inquired about by medical men. In this in- 
stance the man's profession, and his habits other ways, 
made the results worse than we usually find them. It also 
shows how utterly inapplicable the ordinary medical treat- 
ment is to such cases. The man might have been purged, 
and bled (as one doctor advised), or used tonics or nervines, 
to any extent, but instead of their doing him good, they 
would have made him worse. The end would have been 
insanity, and probably suicide ! When I saw him, the idea 
was already beginning to enter his mind, that this was a 
vision of something to come ! And, had he found himself at 
any time a little worse than usual, and dressed like the fig- 
ure, he would have certainly cut his throat. Had he done 
so, and left an account of his experience behind him, most 
people would have thought that this was a clear case of 
preparatory warning, or foreshadowing of what was to come. 

In all probability he had been thinking much of himself ; 
and, feeling very miserable, thoughts of suicide would not 
be unlikely to occur. In the then weak state of his brain, 
images would arise involuntarily, nor could he prevent nor 



CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 263 



banish them. Fortunately, he neither took much medicine, 
nor sought spiritual advice ; had he done either, he would 
soon have become past help. It was a clear case of impove- 
rishment of the brain, resulting from over-excitement, sexual 
and mental, and undue expenditure of the seminal fluid. He 
was constantly losing this fluid in the urine, as well as by 
the imperfect connections, at the same time that the brain 
was being overworked, and poisoned by the excess of 
tobacco. As he well expressed it, he was literally burning 
the candle at both ends ! He is now quite fat, and jolly, and 
lately sent me his photograph, to show me how little he was 
like a ghost ! 

Case 2. " Dear Sir : — In accordance with your request, I 
will give a detailed history and description of my case, as far 
as my disordered condition, and my repugnance for the 
task will allow. I am a clergyman of the Church of Eng- 
land, thirty-five years old, married ten years, and have two 
children. My living is situated in one of the pteasantest 
counties of the south of England, and is, in every respect, 
delightful ; being healthy and' picturesque, with abundance 
of good society, and within easy reach of several large towns. 
Loving my profession, and situated so pleasantly, it would 
seem that, in my case, all the conditions of happiness were 
found associated ; and so I thought, and felt when I first 
went to my vicarage. Naturally studious, and intimately 
connected with many old companions at the University, who 
thought of nothing but scholastic sub tel ties, and investiga- 
tions, I became a thorough bookworm. All my time was 
spent in studying old Greek and Latin authors, and in ex- 
changing views with other bookworms similarly occupied. 
Even my family, dear as it was to me, could not wean me 
from my studies ; and my dear wife, proud of her husband's 
learning, encouraged me in my course, feeling sure that I 
should become one of the most famous men of the day. 

"It happened, some five years ago, that one of the Fellows 
of my old college, and one of my regular correspondents, 
originated a new and startling hypothesis, concerning a dis- 
puted passage in one of the old Greek authors. Among the 
learned and curious this new hypothesis created great ex- 
citement ; and all set to work to study it, some to oppose and 
some to maintain. Like many others, I threw myself into 
the controversy with all the energy I possessed. Several 
nights in succession were passed without sleep, poring 
over dusty old volumes, and during whole days I scarcely 
took notice of anything in the world around me. Those who 
have never gone through such work, can form no idea how 
utterly absorbing it is. I forgot to eat, till food was almost 



264 CUBIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



forced upon me, and in my walks nothing attracted my atten- 
tion. The most intimate friends would be passed un- 
noticed ; and often I have wandered, in fits of abstraction, to 
utterly unknown places, and have had difficulty in finding 
my wajr back. 

" The consequences, both to mind and body, you can 
easily conceive. I became thin and feeble, and my mind 
so wandering that it was impossible for me, at last, to go far 
from home, or to attend to my ministerial duties. From 
compulsion, not inclination, my books were laid aside — for 
a time only, I hoped— and a friend offered to fill my pulpit 
for a few weeks. I took a journey to the sea side, to try and 
recover. My family went with me, and I tried to devote 
myself more to them, and to the world around me, than I 
had yet done, but with little success. My thoughts would, 
in spite of me, go back to my books, and to the disputed 
point on which I had been engaged. 

u You are aware that many of the old classic authors are 
exceedingly licentious, and obscene, to a degree beyond 
anything we know of in these days. The vilest cf our 
corrupt literature, such as is addressed to the lowest and 
most corrupt tastes, is far excelled in vileness, and even 
bestiality, by much of what is called classical literature. How 
it is that our youth should have such corruption put in their 
way, as a part of their education, and should spend years 
in studying it, is now, to me, a mystery and wonderment. 

" Well ! In the course of my investigations on this contro- 
verted hypothesis, I had occasion to refer to one of the worst 
of these old authors, and to read several pages of his foulest 
compositions. After doing so, I found, to my vexation, that 
I could not forget the filthy stuff. At all times, and under 
all circumstances, it would keep coming again into my 
mind. In vain I tried to busy myself with other writings, - 
and to direct my thoughts into other channels— nothing 
availed to any degree. My trip did me but little good ; and, 
after my return, it seemed as if the hated passages were too 
deeply engraved on my brain ever to be obliterated. 
Even when preaching, or reading the holy Book itself, they 
were ever present, and I even found myself repeating them, 
without being fulty aware at first what I was doing. Several 
times, before I could stop myself, I have recited passages 
of this kind in the midst of my sermon. Fortunately none 
of my hearers knew a word of the dead languages, so that 
they passed merely for learned quotations, and no doubt 
gained me much undeserved credit. But my fears were so 
great that some one might hear me who understood them, 
that I dared preach no longer ; but, under the plea of illness, 
engaged a permanent curate. 



CUBIOUS CASES OF NEKVOUS DERANGEMENT. 265 



" It is impossible for any one who has never had a similar 
experience to imagine my chagrin and despair. I dared no 
longer read my Bible ; for, if I did, those hated passages 
would appear, and cover up the words of the holy Book. 
Neither dare I converse with any of my learned friends, for 
fear of betraying myself. 

u The idea came into my mind that I was delivered over to 
the evil one, as a punishment for so devoting myself to the 
profane and wicked works of mere pagans. In vain I tried 
to pray, for even in my prayers I would involuntarily mut- 
ter the foulest obscenity. Shame, and the fear of being 
thought mad, prevented me speaking to any one of my con- 
dition. Besides, I felt no confidence in any one understand- 
ing it, and so hugged my misery to myself, living alone as 
much as possible, and never speaking before any one, if I 
could avoid it. 

" Within the last few months the symptoms have become 
much worse, for I now find myself picturing the images the 
old Greek so plainly describes,— that is, I imagine the scenes, — 
and they become so vividly portrayed before my mind's eye, 
as to shut out the realities around me. My own virtuous 
domestic circle seems obscured by the vision of a beastly 
Saturnalia ; and even my wife, whom I love and reverence so 
dearly, merges, while I look at her, into a drunken, howling 
Bacchante. 

" It is needless to say that I have struggled, with all my 
might, and do so still, against this enthralment ; but I fear 
there is no escape for me without other help than I have 
yet found. Physicians I have consulted, and told them of 
my insane devotion to study, and of its evil results. I have 
even told them that I was haunted by visions, though with- 
out stating their nature. But none of the advice, or treatment, 
I have received has been of the least benefit. The general 
impression among my medical advisers, I could plainly see, 
was this, that I was simply dyspeptic, and hipped, and a 
little queer. Some advised the old blue pill, and some bleed- 
ing, others tonics, change of air, and sea-bathing. At the 
earnest suggestions of one I spent six months at a water-cure, 
but all to no purpose ; and here I am, still in the same awful 
state. 

4 'A friend one day put into my hands one of your books, 
and spoke of you in such a way as made me wish to consult 
you ; and as you make it a condition for me to tell you every- 
thing, I have here endeavored to do so. My narrative is far 
from complete, I am aware, and is probably incoherent ; but 
it is the best I can do, and may be enough to enable you to 
tell me whether you can hold out any hopes of relief or not. 
If you cannot, I know not what will become of me. Suicide I 

23 



266 CUEIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



caimot commit; but I fear I may disgrace my name, my 
family, and my holy calling. To avoid this, I have resolved 
to settle up my affairs, and go away privately to some remote 
part of the world, under an assumed name. There, whatever 
I may become, or undergo, it will be only myself who will 
suffer, and I may die and be forgotten. 

" Please write me as soon as you can, and let me know 
your opinion." A 

It was absolutely necessary for me to see this patient ; and 
he came a long journey specially to pay me a visit. When I 
saw him, his condition was pitiable indeed. Pale and thin,' 
with a look of terror in his eyes, he presented the true pic- 
ture of a man who is haunted by an ever-present fear ! The 
impression made on my mind, on reading his letter, was, that 
he suffered from some disease of the sexual organs, which 
gave the impure character to his thoughts and mental pic- 
tures. His intense application to these scholastic studies 
had probably exhausted his nervous energy, and weakened 
the brain, so that there was no power of will, and what- 
ever tendency was strongest showed itself involuntarily. In 
such a state, a diseased stomach would cause strange ideas 
and habits in regard to food, and diseased sexual organs 
would lead to just such mental conditions as he described. 

On seeing him, and making the necessary personal ex- 
amination, I found my supposition to be correct. He had 
an enlarged prostate gland, and suffered from spasmodic 
stricture. His urine was also scant, and exceedingly acrid 
and irritating. Here, then, was the explanation of the 
whole matter. 

He was naturally a man of much amative power, but had 
kept himself remarkably continent, partly from mistaken 
notions of morality, and partly because he did not wish to 
let anything draw him away from his studies. The reading 
of these obscene passages had, in spite of himself, caused 
increased seminal secretion, and determined an influx of 
blood to these parts. Not having been relieved, as they 
should have been, by sexual indulgence, they of course re- 
mained in a state of congestion or fever, and so became 
diseased as I found them. These diseased organs reacted 
upon the brain, and kept constantly impressed upon that 
organ the ideas which naturally accorded with their state. 

The case was plain enough, and I told him without hesi- 
tation he could be cured. 

The first step was to throw his musty old classics into the 
fire ; and the next to live with his wife as a husband should. 
The diseased prostate was then successfully treated, and the 
urine brought into a proper condition, at the same time 



CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 267 



that every attention was paid to his general health. Tobacco, 
and wine, he avoided from scruples, but I advised both, and 
they benefited him. I also insisted upon his engaging in 
some out-door pursuit, and luckily he had a decided fond- 
ness for botany. This was most fortunate, for it was the 
pursuit of all others most favorable to him. In a short 
time he became quite absorbed in the collection and drying 
of plants, and in studying their classification and qualities. 
He also took out his wife and children with him, into the 
fields, and taught them the names and habits of the plants, 
so that they all had a common interest and occupation. 

In a very short time the dreaded obscenities presented 
themselves no more to his mind, nor could he ever create an 
interest in them. In their place he was now thinking and 
talking of flowers, roots, and leaves, and he soon became 
quite an enthusiast in his new pursuit. He is now strong 
and sound, both in body and mind ; and, when I last heard 
from him, was studying mineralogy as well as botany. 
" Now," said he, in his last letter, " I find there is more that 
is worth studying in the very stones I tread on than I had 
ever imagined." u And," said he, further on, "I deeply 
regret, every day of my life now, that so much of my time 
has been wasted ! Wasted on mere words, while the won- 
drous world around has been a sealed book to me. 



Case 3. " Dear Sir : — My profession is that of a criminal 
lawyer, and 1 have been much occupied with very desperate 
cases. There are few professions more exhausting, and a suc- 
cessful man pays dearly for his success. Many and many 
time have I spent sleepless days, and nights, in succession, 
and for weeks together have never known an hour's real rest. 

"Of course, this in time told upon my health, and com- 
pelled me to relax. But a man with a professional reputation 
must exert himself, or retire altogether ; he cannot rest when 
he will, but must respond to urgent calls. 

"One of those cases occurred which stir the whole com- 
munity, and excite universal attention and speculation. A case 
of murder, with a most remarkable chain of circumstantial 
evidence, but no direct proof. I was appealed to, to defend 
the accused, and urged by professional pride, and real inter- 
est in the case, I consented to do so, though not at all in a 
properly capable condition. The task turned out much 
more difficult than had been anticipated, and it was soon 
evident that my client could be saved only by the most stren- 
uous and unremitting exertions. My professional reputation 
was at stake, and the life of a man in peril whoni I knew to 
be innocent, and in whom I felt a deep personal interest. 
With all the energy I possessed, therefore, I threw myself 






268 CUEIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



into the case, and resolved that I would triumph this time, 
and then take a long rest. For two months my labors were 
never ending, and toward the end I neither eat nor slept, 
sometimes for days and nights in succession. My suste- 
nance consisted of enormous quantities of green tea, made as 
strong as possible. By the aid of this stimulant, the amount 
of labor I performed was prodigious, and but little exhaus- 
tion seemed to result from it at the time. Suffice it to say 
my client was acquitted, declared innocent, and the applause 
awarded me was unbounded. It was truly a triumph, and 
raised me immensely in general estimation. At first my 
elation, and real pleasure at the safe delivery of my client, 
prevented me feeling the effects of what I had gone through ; 
but only for a short time. 

44 The first night after the trial was over, and all safe, my 
calculation was to take a thorough good rest, such as I had 
not had for a long time. There was nothing to prevent it 
now ; no work to do on the morrow, nothing to be anxious 
about or to think of, but on the contrary merely pleasant re- 
trospection of a task well ended. It was all in vain, how- 
ever, I could not sleep, expept by fitful snatches, and in the 
morning was anything but refreshed. Neither could I eat to 
any extent, but was obliged to recur again to my green tea. 
This state of things soon made itself felt and seen. My 
friends insisted on my seeing a physician, which I did, and 
told him all. As a first step he gave me opiates, and so 
forced sleep, and by the use of tonics and fresh mountain air, 
and exercise, my appetite partly returned. Still my amend- 
ment was but partial, and nothing seemed to help me further. 
It was necessary for me to use opiates more or less all the time, 
and to take stimulating tonics ; without them I fell back 
again. I even took a sea voyage, and travelled' for six 
months, but remained at the same point. During all this 
time green tea was my chief dependence, and I felt sure 
that without it I should sink right down. 

44 On my return home, some twelve months ago, a new 
symptom showed itself, worse than any I had yet suffered 
from, and different from any I had ever heard of. Sitting 
one day in my study, trying to read a work of fiction, I was 
startled to hear some one speak, close to me, as it seemed. 
The words did not impress themselves upon me, but they 
were distinctly heard, and no one was near but myself! At first 
the thought occurred that I must have been partially asleep, 
and dreaming, but even while thus thinking, and endeavor- 
ing to so persuade myself, I heard again, quite distinctly, a 
whole sentence, plainly uttered. It was the voice of one of 
the witnesses on the trial, and the words were part of the 
evidence he had given, for I remembered them well. 



CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 269 



Scarcely were these words uttered, when others sounded, 
just as plainly, — part of the judge's charge, and, after that, 
part of my own speech, in my own voice I Had I been then de- 
livering my speech, it could not have sounded more plainly 
and distinctly, and in each set of words, thus listened to, was 
an exact reproduction, tone for tone, of what I had spoken 
before. 

* ' At first, this remarkable visitation caused only a vague 
feeling of astonishment, with lively curiosity and wonder- 
ment. There was nothing, as far as I could judge, in my 
bodily or mental state, in any way different from what was 
then usual with me, and I could form no kind of concep- 
tion, or explanation of such an occurrence. All the rest of 
the day was passed in pondering and speculating on the mat- 
ter, but with no return of the voices. In the evening, how- 
ever, as I sat at my desk, trying again to read, I heard quite 
distinctly, another part of my own speech, and then pas- 
sages from the testimony of various witnesses, that had been 
examined. They were never confused together, but each 
one was delivered clearly by itself, and always with some in- 
terval between them. The tones were never too low, nor too 
high, but exactly such as had belonged to the original utter- 
ances. In fact each was an exact reproduction of what had 
been spoken before. Well, this continued for fifteen or 
twenty minutes and ended abruptly, the last speech consisting 
of only a few words. Every day almost, and usually in the 
evening, was I thus talked to, till at last it became so regular 
a custom I got quite used to it I cannot say, however, that 
I got reconciled to it, for my reason told me there must be 
something very wrong for such a thing to occur. Not being 
at all superstitious, no idea of its being a visitation ever en- 
tered my head. That it resulted from my deranged health I 
felt no doubt ; and the fact that the talking was always a 
reproduction of something said at that time showed me the 
immediate cause. Beyond doubt I had then, while in a feeble 
state, over- worked myself ; and, in some mysterious way, my 
brain was so affected, that sounds once heard were repro- 
duced, the same as we commonly see over again what we 
have once looked upon. 

" Still, not having either read or heard of such an occurrence 
before, I was afraid to speak of it for fear of being thought 
even worse deranged than I was. On one occasion, however, 
I did allude to the matter, to a physician, as something hap- 
pening to a friend of mine. He merely repeated the usual 
common-place remarks, ' over-worked, sir, over-worked. 
Imagination active. People in such a state can fancy any- 
thing. ' B at with me it was not fancy, in the sense he meant ; • 
the sounds were to me actual sounds, as much so as those 

23* 



270 CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



made by people really speaking to me. Indeed it has often 
happened, lately, that while a person was talking with me, 
one of these impromptu, reproduced speeches would* even 
overpower the real speech that was being addressed to 
me. 

"It was useless to try to shut out, or not notice the false 
speech, and attend only to the real one ; for both demanded 
equal attention. It was, in fact, exactly the same as two 
persons talking to me at once. Often I know have I been 
harshly judged on such occasions, and thought rude and 
inattentive, or at all events indifferent. But the fact is, I 
was too confused, and my attention too much divided for me 
to take in clearly what was being said to me. 

" During all this time the voices never came to me in my 
sleep, nor did I dream about the trial, except at first. Lat- 
terly also my sleep has been better than formerly, though 
otherwise my state is not improved. In fact I begin now to 
feel drowsy, very often, especially after hearing the voices, 
and thinking or talking becomes more difficult. 

" Here, then, Doctor, you see my actual condition. I am a 
man haunted by the ghosts of dead speeches, to which I am 
compelled to listen. They are worse than actual speeches, 
for I cannot run away from them ; nor is it any use to stop 
up my ears. Strange as it may seem, the voices are just as 
distinct when the ears are close stopped, as they are at 
other times, so that there is no escape for me. 

" On the whole the voices come more frequently and last 
longer than at first, and the terrible thought occurs to me 
that they may end by becoming constant ; in which case I 
should soon cease to hear them at all. 

"I try, Doctor, to write about this as lightly as I can, but 
it is a serious matter to me, as no doubt 3^ou can well con- 
ceive. It is in fact the great question, l To be, or not to 
be ' — for with this my existence cannot endure long, and I 
wish to know, as near as possible, what is the prospect for 
my release. 

" For some time past all medicine has been abandoned, for 
it is of no use at all now, and my sole reliance is still upon 
my green tea, which I take often, abundantly and strong. It 
is meat, drink and medicine to me ; in fact ifis life itself.' ' 

This case presents some peculiar .features, and others 
which are common enough with men whose minds are over- 
worked. The exhaustion of body and mind, and general 
ill health, are such as are often met with among striving men 
of business, and in the professions. The peculiar feature of 
the case is the localization of the nervous derangement in the 
organ of hearing. Cases are common enough in which men 
see things over again ; bnt it is rare to find sounds thus per- 



CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 271 



petuated. Still there seems no reason to be surprised at 
their being so. It is merely memory localized in the ear, as 
it is in other cases in the eye. The vividness of the repro- 
duction in this case was no doubt owing to incipient disease 
of the brain, in that part more immediately connected with 
the ear. 

When this man presented himself to me, I saw a thin, 
cadaverous-looking creature, with sunken eyes, and a weary 
hunted look, as if he were all the time conscious of being 
pursued, and could not escape. His digestion was wretched ; 
his muscles flabby and weak, and his skin dry and harsh, 
with bile-colored blotches here and there. His hair was also 
falling off; and his eyes were dim and glassy. His hear- 
ing, however, was remarkably acute, and sudden or harsh 
sounds irritated him very much. On the whole he slept 
better than formerly, but still not well ; and he was often 
very drowsy and dull. 

The whole symptoms pointed to threatened softening of 
the brain, and the case seemed by no means promising. 
One thing, however, gave me some hopes. I felt sure that 
one cause, and perhaps a principal one, of his peculiar con- 
dition, was the abuse of the green tea I From this cause I 
have frequently seen quite as bad effects as from the abuse 
of alcohol. In certain cases and conditions delirium tremens, 
or something very much like it, may come from the tea pot 
as well as from the wine flask ; and many a man's brain has 
been irretreviably injured by the abuse of a stimulant which 
he had thought always innocent. 

The tea, I felt sure, must be at once abandoned; but 
something must be substituted in its place. For this 
purpose I gave him a preparation of the coco leaves to 
counteract the exhaustion consequent on withdrawing the 
customary stimulant. At the same time he cook a prepara- 
tion of phosphorus, both as a tonic, and to strengthen the 
brain and nervous system. 

For a long time he suffered dreadfully for the want of his 
tea. But as soon as the system was fully weaned from it, 
his digestion began to improve, his strength returned, and 
his mind became more collected, the voices also began to 
sound fainter, and he heard them for a shorter time. 
Eventually they came less frequently, and at last he would 
be for days and not hear them at all. This so encouraged 
him that he began to feel confident himself of his cure, 
and this frame of mind helped very much of itself. Light 
reading, gay company, no head work, with wine and to- 
bacco in moderation, soon made him feel sure he was doing 
well, and a voyage across the Atlantic finally cured him. 
The voices at last would come occasionally, especially if 



272 CURIOUS OASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



lie had "been thinking more than usual, or had been excited ; 
but at last they ceased. He became tolerably hearty and 
strong ; but, in accordance with my advice, he never resumed 
his profession, as I felt doubtful whether his brain would 
ever again be fit for any great or continuous effort. 

Some of the most remarkable cases of nervous affections 
are found among those in whom the nerves of physical sen- 
sation, or touch, are affected. It is well known that in 
hysteria, which is a nervous disease, there is often, before 
an attack of hysterics, a peculiar feeling, a sensation, called 
the Aura, This varies much in different persons, sometimes 
being a feeling as if a strong draft of cold air suddenly 
passed over the body ; at others being a kind of creeping of 
the skin ; and in others again it seems like a constriction of 
some part, as if some one were powerfully grasping it ; this 
is often felt in the throat, with such force that a kind of ball 
or crampy knot will form there, and the patient will nearly 
strangle with it. 

It is not so generally known, however, that the nerves of 
touch, or feeling, are affected in other cases than purely 
hysterical ones. 

I have known many instances of this kind, very peculiar, 
indeed, and such as few other persons perhaps have ever 
come in contact with. For most persons so afflicted keep 
their sufferings to themselves, unless they are very ignorant 
people, in which case they are told only to those of their own 
class, who usually regard them from a superstitious point of 
view. 

Many of the instances of supernatural appearances, and 
strange voices which, are constantly being given, and more 
or less believed in, are due to peculiar nervous conditions. 
So also are many other kinds of supernatural visitations, as 
some of the following cases will show : 

In the summer of 1856 there called upon me a gentleman 
from Virginia, who begged me to give him a strictly private 
interview, and one in which he could speak at his leisure, 
and as long as he might wish. 

u Doctor," said he, u I am going to tell you what I have 
never yet told to any one, and which I never thought I should 
tell, for I fear being thought either insane or untruthful. 
Had I not read some of your books, I should not have come 
even to 5*011 ; but should have carried my secret and my 
misery to the grave with me. Well, Doctor, here it is : 
Three years ago I had a fall from my horse, and suffered 
from a concussion of the brain. For two weeks it was doubt- 
ful if I should get over it, and my doctor told me afterwards 
that he never expected my mind would be right again. How- 



CT7KI0US CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 273 



ever, I did pull round, and get quite strong and well, with 
no other inconvenience than occasional severe headaches, 
with heavy, drowsy feelings after. About two months after 
one of these attacks I felt more drowsy than ever, and at last 
fell into a sleep that lasted twelve hours ! On awaking I 
found nryself quite deaf, and so continued for two days ; then 
my hearing returned suddenty, with a loud ringing sound, 
and a discharge of mucus from the nose, as if I had a bad 
cold. This discharge continued for nearly a week, and when 
it ceased I first became aware of a peculiar odor, or rather 
I should say I could smell nothing else ! everything mutt the 
same ; and the odor was the most loathsome you can con- 
ceive. It was exactly that of a decaying body ! — I forgot to 
tell you, by the hj, that when the accident occurred I was on 
my waj' back from the funeral of a friend, at which I had 
been one of the bearers. Owing to the body having been 
kept too long, it was in a state of decomposition, and the 
smell from it was overpoweringly repulsive ! It was exactly 
this smell that was reproduced. I knew it in a moment, 
and the horror it caused in me cannot be conceived. I 
thought at first that it was a real odor, from some present 
cause ; but was too soon convinced that no one smelt it but 
me, and that it was not to be avoided. No matter what was 
presented to my nose, all smelt the same ; there was no es- 
cape but in not smelling at all, when it could be helped. 

14 My worst trouble was with my meals. All the food smelt 
the same, and it was impossible for me to touch it, owing to 
the nausea which the smell of it caused. My only resource 
was to eat alone, and while I was doing so to firmly close my 
nostrils ; then I could eat and drink, but not without. As 
you may suppose, this peculiarity was soon remarked upon, 
and people began to consider me queer, and no wonder. On 
no account could I eat or drink with other people, nor dare 
I tell them why, for fear they should think still worse of me 
than they were doing. Well, Doctor, not to make the tale 
too long, this is my state now. For some time I have not 
been living with those who know me, nor dare I do so. 
There are relations of mine who would gladly declare me 
insane, and certainly my behavior would go far to justify 
them in doing so ; and any explanation, if given, would per- 
haps make matters still worse for me. Now, Doctor, j^ou 
know, and so do I, thanks to your books, that my strange 
state is due to something connected with my bodily state, 
and I want to know if it can be put right ? If it cannot, I 
shall soon be a corpse myself ; for life, in this state, is simply 
unendurable. Even now, at this very moment, I am suffering 
in the way I have described to you ; and, smell at what I will, 
that sickening odor is all I can perceive." 



274 CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



Well, here was a case different from any that had ever 
yet come before me. And it was requisite to first know 
whether my patient was all right or not. Careful examina- 
tion and questioning, however, showed me that he was a 
perfectly sane man, with nothing wrong about him but the 
nose, or nerve of smell. I tried him with chlorine, iodine, 
and even bromine, and strong ammonia, but it was always 
the same ; he still smelt the corpse. Even Ozone, in excess, 
made no change. 

My explanation of the case was this. — At the time of his 
fall his nerves of smell were in an excited state, from being 
compelled to endure the bad odor of the corpse at the funeral. 
The concussion therefore affected them more than any of 
the other nerves, and left them with a remembrance — if it 
may so be called — of what they had experienced. 

In other words, a permanent sense of that particular odor 
was established, and remained constantly powerful enough 
to overcome all the actual odors he came in contact with. Or 
perhaps his organs were incapable of recognizing any other 
odor. 

This is strictly analogous to what happens when the nerves 
of the eye are affected, and some particular thing is con- 
stantly seen ; or when those of the ear are affected, and par- 
ticular sounds are constantly heard, as in many of the cases 
described in this book. 

Then came the grand question, if this condition was rem- 
ediable or not ? I arther inquiry informed me that when he 
fell he struck his face on a stone, and flattened his nose, 
making it bleed freely. No obvious injury, however was 
done to it, nor was any pain felt after his recovery, except 
occasionally a sharp jerk, as he expressed it. A careful ex- 
amination up both nostrils, however, showed that some dam- 
age had been done. Some of the bones had been shattered, 
and part of the vomer was driven in, till it was buried in the 
parts below. In fact the small bones lying at the base of 
the nostrils were all mixed up as it were. In such a state 
of things it was evident that the nerves of the parts were 
very likely to be injured, so that their functions could not 
be properly performed. A proper examination at the time 
of the accident would have made this mischief apparent, 
and it might then have been corrected ; but now the parts 
were all fixed, and grown firmly in their false position, so that 
it was doubtful if much could be done towards restoring 
them. About the middle of the left nostril, however, there 
showed quite a deep depression, at the bottom of which was 
a firm substance about as large as a grain of wheat, loosely 
imbedded in the flesh. This'it was determined to remove, 
on the chance that some change might result. The opera- 



CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 275 



tion was f ollowed, a few days after, by great irritation of the 
nostril, and a discharge of mucus, as if from catarrh, like what 
he had immediately after the accident. This lasted f our days, 
and when it was fully gone there was a change experienced, 
and of a most decided character. The patient, no w, could not 
smell at all ! Nothing had any odor, neither pleasant nor dis- 
agreeable, but all were alike scentless to him ! Even this, 
however, he considered an immense relief ; and he expressed 
himself quite content, though he should always remain so, 
providing his old state never returned. 

I was not, however, content to leave him in this imperfect 
condition, and felt sure that a proper natural condition of 
the nerves of smell could be restored. 

The particular steps taken to accomplish this need not be 
detailed ; but suffice it to say, that by local stimulation with 
electricity, and the use of proper nerve medicines, his sense 
of smell gradually came back as perfect as before. 

The man's gratitude and joy knew no bounds. "Now," 
said he, " I will go back and prove to my friends I am not 
insane, by accepting all the invitations to dinner they may 
choose to give me, and enjoying the best they can set before 
me." 

It is well known that the sense of smell, like all other 
senses, is sometimes remarkably acute. There are many per- 
sons who can detect and distinguish odors that other people 
cannot smell at all. Sometimes this power is so remarkable 
as to seem magical or supernatural. I once knew a blind 
man, who had the sense of smell so acute that he could dis- 
tinguish one person from another, merely by putting his nose 
near to their hands. 

This, however, is only a more perfect development than 
ordinary of the natural faculty ; but, in some cases of nervous 
disease, the sense of smell seems to acquire an almost pre- 
ternatural power, that borders on the miraculous. 

There is no doubt but that the bodies of all animals, 
human beings included, emit different odors under different 
states of emotion, though the sense of smell ordinarily can- 
not detect them. The state of the fluids when a person is 
in a violent passion^ are very different from what they are in 
a state of peace. So, also, great joy, fear, or erotic excite- 
ment, all produce a peculiar aura or odor, though but one 
person in a thousand is conscious of it. 

Those who have ever attended many death-beds will 
know that the breath of the dying person usually has a pecu- 
liar odor, resembling ozone. This arises from the gradual 
change in the character of the fluids of the body. Now, it 
is said that dogs will often seem to know when any one is 
dying, though not in the house with them ; and that they 



276 CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



will show their sense of the impending dissolution by dis- 
tressed howlings. This is a universal belief , and it is quite 
possible it may have some foundation in fact. We all know 
how acute the dog's sense of smell is, and possibly he may 
thus detect the change coming on before human beings can 
have any knowledge of it. 

It is not at all unreasonable to suppose that those peculiar 
subtle odors, arising from our emotions, may mutually affect 
us, in our intercourse with each other, more than we are 
aware of. For myself I have no doubt on this point, and I 
feel sure that many of our unaccountable likes and dislikes 
to each other originate in this way. The aura emitted from 
one person is grateful, or soothing to our nerves ; and that 
from another the reverse, and in this way men are unconsci- 
ously attracted or repelled. This, I have long felt convinced, 
is peculiarly the case between those of opposite sexes, and 
is really the chief cause of what are considered unexplain- 
able attachments. We know how often a man, or woman, is 
enamoured of some one in defiance of all reason as it would 
seem. There is nothing attractive to either the eye or the 
mind, nor can they even pretend that there is ; but still that 
particular one draws them away from all others, no matter 
how much more lovable the} 7 may every waj 7 seem. The ex- 
planation of this apparent anomaly is to be found, I think, 
in the cause 1 have named. 

The dog detects some subtle difference between different 
people by means of his nose. On coming in contact with 
strangers he immediately smells them, and makes friends 
with some, while he avoids others, all through what he dis 
covers in this way. 

Some human beings possess a similar faculty, and are 
gaided by it in their selection of associates, often more than 
they are themselves aware of. But in cases of nervous dis- 
ease, this faculty becomes perverted, and hence arises ap- 
parently capricious likes, and dislikes, without cause or 
reason. 

How often do we see patients of this kind suddenly mis- 
trust and avoid their best friends, without being able to say 
why ? Nay, they will even just as unreasonably hate those 
they have loved best. 

We call these sudden changes whims, or fancies, and usu- 
ally attribute them to mere .caprice. I feel sure, however, 
that they arise, at least in many cases, from diseased sensa- 
tion, and especially from these subtle perversions and exag- 
gerations of the sense of smell. 

One instance I especially remember of a young lady who 
was liable to these sudden freaks, as her friends called them. 
She would suddenly, without any apparent cause, act in the 



CUKIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 277 



rudest manner to her most intimate friends, avoiding them, 
and even repelling them, in the most offensive manner. At 
the same time she would exhibit the strongest likings for 
most unworthy people, and for those that at other times she 
herself strongly objected to. 

By careful inquiry I ascertained from her, during one of 
her rational periods, that she was liable to attacks of severe 
headache, accompanied by a peculiar heat and dryness in the 
nose, which, as she expressed it, entirely changed the odor 
of everything, and caused her to perceive smells which no 
one else perceived, nor herself either at other times. 

Here, I feel convinced, was the true origin of the freaks. 
She admitted that the only reason for her dislike to certain 
people, at those particular times, arose from something offen- 
sive about them, though she could not say what. Similarly, 
her strange likings to others arose from something pleasing 
about them, but she knew not what it was, nor was it al- 
ways present in them. 

A proper course of treatment, resulting in a regular and 
healthy performance of all the natural functions, soon re- 
moved this anomalous condition, and her friends had no 
longer to complain of her whims and fancies in regard to 
them. 

Such a condition is most apt to occur in females, especi- 
ally in tho^se who are irregular, and in those who remain 
unmarried. 

The sense of touch or feeling, like all the other senses, is 
liable to become deranged, and when it is so there is no end 
to the apparent vagaries it will play. Most people are apt to 
think that the sense of touch resides only in the ends of the 
fingers, because it is there so powerfully manifested, and most 
commonly exercised. This, however, is a mistake. We 
touch or feel with all parts of the body, though in different 
degrees, and it is possible for this sense to become unnatur- 
ally acute in any part, from disease. 

A shudder is only a spasmodic action of the sense of touch 
over the whole surface of the body ; and the peculiarly sen- 
sative state called hair sore is only another manifestation of 
over-acute touch or feeling. It is often the case that per- 
sons will, during extreme excitement of the sense of touch, 
feel things of which others have not the slightest perception, 
and which they themselves could not notice in their ordinary 
state. 

To me it seems certain that we can, during a state of over- 
excitation, be literally touched by things that commonly have 
no influence whatever upon us. 

When people say they feel a creeping come over them, in 



24 



278 CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



the presence of certain persons they dislike or mistrust, it is 
probable they really do feel so physically. In other words, 
something really emanates from these persons, and affects the 
sense of touch, in the same way that thesense of smell is often 
affected, as previously explained. 

Some persons have the sense of touch, naturally, remark- 
ably acute, and in others it becomes much developed by cul- 
tivation, as wewsometimes see in blind people. But the most 
remarkable of such cases bear no comparison to what we 
sometimes see in disease, or in those who have naturally a 
morbid condition of this sense. 

People who are readily affected by changes in the weather, 
are so through the sense of touch ; the whole surface of the 
body feeling the difference in the atmospheric condition. 
Animals often seem to know of the approach of storms, 
earthquakes, and other natural convulsions ; doubtless, in 
the same way, the new atmospheric conditions touch them 
differently, and they feel the change approaching. 

We often read accounts, in ghost stories, of people who 
felt some person or thing pass by them, or even touch them, 
though nothing could be seen. Many of these stories have 
doubtless had a real foundation, and are, in fact, quite sim- 
ple and natural when understood. Any person with a dis- 
eased or over-excited sense of touch, on going into a strange 
place, is very apt to feel the new conditions. Anft if, while 
, so influenced, the mind is also impressed by a legend about 
an uneasy spirit, the new sensation is at once referred to the 
ghost. 

It must also be borne in mind that touches, or peculiar 
experiences in feeling, may be remembered, and experienced 
over again, the same as certain sights, or sounds,. 

A very intelligent lady once told me that her own expe- 
rience confirmed this in a striking manner. She had the 
sense of touch naturally, morbidly acute, and impressions 
made upon it often remained, or reappeared, in the most ob- 
stinate manner. 

On one occasion, while groping in the dark in a cupboard, 
she put her hand on a mouse, and experienced from it a nerv- 
ous shock that gave her a month's sickness. But, singular 
to relate, she would often touch that mouse again, as plainly 
as if it were actually there— that is, the old sensation was 
reproduced, or remembered, and more than once the very 
same sickness followed as at first. 

This lady had, however, a still more disagreeable expe- 
perience of this kind, and one which she was very desirous 
of removing. While walking along the street one day she 
became entangled in a crowd, and, on enquiry, learnt that it 
was caused by a poor man being just picked up, who had 



CUBIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 279 



fallen from a roof. He was then being carried to the hos- 
pital, and, in spite of her efforts to get out of the way, the 
poor fellow was brought close by her, so near, in fact, that 
his hand, which he was convulsively moving, touched her 
hand. That touch she could not get rid of ! Whenever her 
health was a little out of order she would feel that touch 
again, palpably feel it, as at first, and experience the same 
horrors that she did then. When I saw this lady she was 
over forty-five years of age, and had thus had this disagree- 
able experience for five years. I told her it was possible 
that, if the change of life took place with her naturally, she 
might experience a change in other ways, and so she found 
it. By the time she was forty-seven the change was fully 
established, her health was improved, and she became quite 
fat, though previously the reverse. What was more impor- 
tant, however, was the removal of that unusual condition 
of the sense of touch. It was still acute, but not morUd, and 
she no longer felt either the mouse or the poor man's hand. 

My advice was once asked in the case of a young lady who 
firmly believed herself haunted, or persecuted, by a ghost. 
And in this instance the actual occurrences seemed to con- 
firm her belief. She was both chlorotic and hysterical, and 
highly romantic besides, with her head full of ghost stories, 
in which she firmly believed. 

The account she gave of her own special visitation was 
this : She was one night lying wide awake in bed, and, it 
being warm, had her right arm, uncovered, thrown outside 
the bedclothes. While lying thus, she distinctly felt a hand 
laid upon her's, and passed up to the middle of the arm, 
which it grasped with great force. Her fright was so great 
she was speechless, and remained thus, as she supposed, for 
ten minutes or more, when the grasp relaxed and she was 
relieved. A loud scream then soon brought her mother from 
the next room, but it was a long time before she could tell 
what had happened. Her terror was such that her mother 
really feared for her reason, and sent immediately for a phy- 
sician. An examination of the room showed that no living 
being could possibly have been there but herself, but this 
only made matters worse, for she was now fully convinced 
it was a ghost. Reasoning with her was of course useless, 
and besides there was proof positive of the truth of her story, 
for on her arm was a distinct red mark, with some swelling, 
just such as a strong grip might make ! Nothing could 
therefore be plainer ; the ghost had pinched her ! 

After this she could never sleep alone, nor in the dark, for 
fear of another visitation. But in spite of such precautions 
it came, and this time it was in broad daylight, too! She was 
lying on the sofa, talking with a couple of young lady friends, 



280 CURIOUS CASES OF NERVOUS DERANGEMENT. 



much like herself, to whom she had often related that nighVs 
wonderful experience, when suddenly she screamed out, and 
they of course did the same. Help coming in, she was grad- 
ually quieted, enough to tell them that the ghost had grasped 
her arm again, as it hung over the back of the sofa. On ex- 
amining it, sure enough there was the same mark as before, 
and it remained sore and tender all day after. After this 
several other such attacks were experienced, and she be- 
came so affected by them that both her life and her reason 
were in danger. The fact that her ghostly assailant was 
invisible made matters worse, because it made the thing 
more mysterious, and left more to be imagined. Unfortu- 
nately a clergyman was called in, and his ministrations, 
though well intended, only left matters worse. Like most 
of his class, unable or afraid to refer to material causes for 
moral or mental conditions, he could only treat the matter 
spiritually, and in this way confirmed the impression already 
made. 

When the case was brought under my notice, this condition 
of things had lasted ^some eighteen months, and in that time 
she had had twenty-two visitations, occurring mostly at 
night, but sometimes in the day time. 

On enquiry I found that her periodical functions had en- 
tirely ceased, that she had no appetite, and was so feeble 
that she could walk but a very little distance, and seldom 
went out of the house. Her bowels were obstinately costive, 
not moving sometimes for a week or ten days, and her feet 
and hands were constantly cold. Her sleep was short and 
broken by dreams, usually of a terrifying nature. In short, 
there were all the usual conditions of a confirmed case of 
hysterical chlorosis. 

She stated further that she had noticed, though not till 
lately, that before one of the ghostly attacks there was al- 
ways a peculiar tendency to sigh, and a feeling as if she would 
choice. This would sometimes be felt for a day or two, and 
sometimes was accompanied by bursts of weeping, so violent 
that, as her mother said, it seemed as if her very heart would 
burst. 

The elements of the case were here plain enough to be seen. 
The girl was chlorotic and hysterical. The ghostly grip was 
nothing but a muscular cramp, caused by a morbid excitement 
of the nerves of touch or feeling. It was in fact the hyster- 
ical ball, or globe, in the arm instead of the throat, where we 
usually see it. 

A voyage to Europe, and the use of the Homburg waters, 
soon improved her condition, so that her strength returned, 
the natural functions were restored, and the ghost came no 
more. - 



PART IV. 



MISCELLANEOUS FACTS AND INFORMATION CON- 
CERNING THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 



CHAPTER XXI. 



Subjective and Objective Mental Perceptions. 

When a man mentally knows about anything external to 
himself, or mentally perceives it, for the first time, he does so 
through the medium of his senses, as already explained. 

For instance, a footstep falls close by him, and the sound 
it makes, acting on the nerve of hearing, causes it to convey 
a certain impression to his brain, which awakens in it a per- 
ception, or knowledge, of the fact that some one is approach- 
ing. Wishing to know further who it is, he turns and looks 
at the person ; his eyes receive the image and convey another 
impression to the brain, through the nerve of sight, which 
, causes a perception, or knowledge, of what person it is, from 
* his appearance. 

And so it is with our perceptions, or knowledge, of all ex- 
ternal or material things ; the senses alone a?e the means by 
which such knowledge is first gained. A human being de- 
prived of every sense can acquire no knowledge of anything, 
for no idea can be formed about anything which has neither 
been seen, heard, smelt, tasted or felt ! 

These mental perceptions, thus acquired, through the di- 
rect action of real objects on the nerves of sense, are called 
Objective perceptions, because they are directly derived 
from the impressions made by the objects themselves. Such 
perceptions constitute our only real and positive knowledge 
of the external world. 

The impressions which the brain acquires, through the 
senses, can be stored up, as it were, called back again, or 
remembered, and combined together in endless variety. Some- 
times the ideas which thus reawaken, in the mind, seem so 
strange and new to us, that we fancy they are original, and 
that the mind has formed them at the moment, without pre- 
vious knowledge of them. A litttle reflection, however, will 
show that the oddest waking thoughts, or the strangest aud 
most confused dreams, are merely "reproductions, or remem- 
brances, of things we have known before, through the senses; 
only the ideas are disconnected and jumbled together. 

The evidence of the senses, as to the existence and prop- 

(283) 






284 SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE STATES. 



erties of things around us, is not only the sole evidence we 
have in regard to them at all, but it is usually considered 
conclusive. Thus, in the case above referred to, the man 
would say, " I knew some one was coming, because I heard 
him walking, and when I looked I knew it was A., because I 
saw him ! " 

People in this way depend upon their senses for knowing 
about everything outside of themselves, and rely fully upon 
them. Thus, every one will say, 4l If I hear footsteps I 
know that some one is walking ; and if I see a man before 
me I know there is a man there !" This, however, is not neces- 
sarily true, strange as it may sound, except with a person in 
perfect health ; for we may hear footsteps when there really 
are none, or see men, or other objects, when none are really 
present ! Not imagine that we do so, be it remembered ; but 
really hear and see I7iem l — when subject to certain bodily de- 
rangements. 

To understand how this is, attention must be called to what 
has been stated before, as to the connection of the senses with 
the brain. We hear a sound because it makes a certain im- 
pression on the nerve of hearing ; and we see any object be- 
cause it makes a certain impression on the eye, and optic 
nerve, and similarly with all the other senses. 

These are called objective impressions or perceptions, be- 
cause they are caused directly by the objects themselves 
which we see sftid hear ; but exactly such impressions may 
be made on the senses, and be followed by exactly similar 
perceptions without the objects themselves, at the time, 
acting upon the senses at all ! 

Every mental state depends upon a certain condition of 
the nervous system, and if a similar condition can be brought 
back at any time, then a similar mental state is brought 
back. This is the case when we recollect things, — the mind 
gets again into its former state, simply because the brain re- 
turns to its former state. The same is true in regard to the 
senses, for there is memory of sensation as well as of percep- 
tion. Thus, when we see a person we know the brain takes 
cognizance of a certain impression made on the nerve of 
sight, through the eye, and if that impression can be brought 
back, no matter by what means, the image of that person is 
seen, in his absence, just the same as though he were there. 
It is the same with hearing, and with all the other senses, 
the impressions we have once derived from them may re- 
turn, long after the original causes of these impressions have 
disappeared. A particular sound, such as the voice of one 
much beloved, will often be heard distinctly, though that 
person may be far away. This arises from the fact that the 
nerve of hearing, from some unexplained cause, assumes 



SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE STATES. 285 



the same condition in which it was when that voice was 
really heard. 

The ganglionic centres of the special senses may be acted 
upon in two ways, externally and internally. Ordinarily 
they are acted upon only externally, as when we see any 
object, for instance, and th^ optic ganglion is acted upon by 
the impression made through the eye. But besides this, in 
certain states, the brain may react, in a direct manner, upon 
the optic apparatus, and recall the impression, formerly 
made by a real object, with such distinctness that the real 
object seems to be before the eye again. In other words, 
reversing the usual process, a similar menial state to what 
once existed brings back a similar sensual state to what once 
existed. The mind remembers, and, by direct action, causes 
the eye to remember. And in this way we see objects, or 
hear sounds, over again long after they have really vanished. 

These impressions of things backwards as it were, by the 
mind reacting upon the senses, are called — 

Subjective Impressions, because they result from the action 
of the mind when dwelling upon subjects of thought, and not 
from the influence of real objects. 

Objective impressions on the senses, and the perceptions 
they give rise to in the mind, are caused therefore by real 
objects, or things, while subjective impressions are caused 
by the idea or thought, reacting, in a direct manner, on the 
organs of sense. 

The thought, or mental impression, may be so powerful as 
to affect the organ of sense as strongly as the real object 
itself could do, so that the subjective, or ideal impression, 
may be as vivid as the objective or real one. 

Thus there are some persons, as before stated, who habit- 
ually see people before them who are not there, and so dis- 
tinctly that the false appearances cannot be distinguished 
from the real. A person whom I knew very well was af- 
fected in this way, and very often, wl^en meeting an ac- 
quaintance, he would astonish him by*saying, "Are you 
really there or not, for I cannot tell ! " Many times no reply 
would be given, and then he would perceive that the person 
was really not present, but that it was a subjective instead 
of an objective impression. Such occurrences are more 
common than is supposed, and have often given rise to tales 
of supernatural visitations, warnings, and so forth. In like 
manner sounds may be heard when there really is no sound. 

In all these cases, however, there is a certain morbid state 
of the nervous system, and consequently of the mind. In 
perfect health there is nothing of the kind. Persons strong- 
ly emotional are especially liable to receive subjective im- 



286 SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE STATES. 



pressions for objective ones, and to take the mere products 
of their over-excited brains for objective realities.. 

These subjective visions are commonly called ghosts or 
spirits! They may easily be distinguished from real objects 
in the following manner : 

If the side of the eye be pressed with the finger, with 
moderate force, any real object loosed at will be seen double, 
but any mere subjective vision will not be doubled. We may 
therefore test, in this way, any unusual vision ; and, if it be 
doubled, we may be sure it is a real material object we are 
seeing, but if it remain single we may be sure it is only a 
subjective impression, caused by some unusual condition of 
the brain or optic nerve. Ghosts and spectral illusions of all 
kinds may be tested in this way. 

If the eye be pressed while closed, very peculiar combina- 
tions of light and color are produced, sometimes of strange 
form, and this often happens in various forms of disease, 
where there is pressure on the optic nerve. Some persons, 
on merely looking vacantly into space, see crowds of various- 
ly-formed objects floating around, all of which are simply 
subjective, and not real objects. Hundreds of ghosts and 
spectres have been thus produced, especially in individuals 
predisposed to see them. 

An excellent illustration of this is found in the immortal 
Shakespeare's Macbeth! Macbeth sees the dagger, and Lady 
Macbeth sees the spot on her hand, in both cases because 
such things were the subjects of their thoughts. 

A person well informed as to the action of the nervous 
system, and the way in which impressions upon the senses 
are produced, will know how to distinguish the false from 
the true ; but one who is not so informed will be apt to ac- 
cept all that he sees, or hears, as objectively real, or as some- 
thing supernatural. 

The religious enthusiasts, of all times, but more especially 
of long-past periods, have been mostly people of this kind ; 
with little knowledge, and with imaginations wrought up to 
the highest pitch, tnej^ were constantly seeing and hearing 
things which had no actual existence, though real enough 
to them. 

There is a state of mind, not unfrequently met with, in 
which the imagination of one person can be so readily acted 
upon by another, or by surrounding circumstances, that the}' 
can be led to sec, or hear, anything which is suggested to 
them. Indeed numbers of persons can be so acted upon, at 
the same time, and made to see things, and honestly testify 
to them, which really never took place. 

An excellent instance of this, as I have somewhere seen 
related, occurred during the Spanish conquest of Mexico. 



SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE 'STATES. 287 



At one time the Spaniards, a mere handful, were sur- 
rounded by such a countless host of enemies that their de- 
struction seemed certain, and no escape possible. The 
priests, however, assured them that if they would boldly be- 
gin the attack, though the enemy were hundreds to their 
one, yet they would "certainly be victorious, because Saint 
Jago, so it had been revealed to them, would be seen to de- 
scend from heaven on a white horse, and fight at their head. 
Accordingly so it happened, at the moment of the attack 
every man saw plainly the saint on his white horse, leading 
them on, and, as they firmly believed he could not be de- 
feated, they felt no fear, but charged the enemy, routed 
them, ana gained a complete victory. The whole army tes- 
tified to the fact that the saint did so appear and fight, and 
no doubt every man did so see him ; nor is it so very wonder- 
ful when all the circumstances are considered. 

These were a body of ignorant, pious men, full of enthu- 
siasm, in imminent danger, with a firm belief in whatever 
the priests told them, and with the idea fixed upon their 
minds that the saint certainly would come, as was promised. 
There was no room for doubt, and the mental prepossession 
was so strong that it reacted upon the optic apparatus, and 
caused the eye to see subjectively, just as clearly as if the real 
object bad actually been there. 

This process of leading the mind, as it were, and causing 
persons to see objects and people not really present, and to 
witness actions not really performed, or to hear sounds 
which do not exist, is often exemplified in what are called 
mesmeric, and spiritual phenomena. People with a cer- 
tain constitution of mind, or in a certain morbid condition of 
the nervous system, can readily be so impressed that they 
cannot distinguish false, subjective impressions, from real ob- 
jective ones, but believe all things which they perceive to be 
real alike. 

Thus, a short time ago, I saw a statement, from several 
well-knowu and estimable people, to the efiect that a cele- 
brated spiritualist medium had, in their presence, laid his 
face down upon a brightly-burning fire, and then put some 
of the red-hot coals upon his head, and yet was not in the least 
burned, nor even inconvenienced. This, it was said, he did 
repeatedly, and even brought the burning coals in his hand 
to show them. Now that these persons saw this wonderful 
thing I can readily believe, but that it really took place I 
must regard as impossible. Human flesh tcill burn, with a 
certain heat, and anything which does not burn at tkat heat 
is not human flesh, because it lacks one of its qualities. But, 
as I said before, the people who so testified might easily 
have seen the phenomenon, though it did not take place. 



288 



SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE STATES. 



With them it was a subjective perception, caused by their pe- 
culiar mental condition at the time, and was to all intents 
and purposes as real, to them, as if it had really taken place. 
It must be borne in mind that all such wondrous phenomena 
as these, occur in peculiar circumstances ;— there are usually 
few but believers present, the room is closed, and probably 
darkened, while all are kept on the tenter-hooks of anxious 
expectation for the wonders which are to come. It is seldom 
that anything of this kind is attempted in the light of open 
day, with no mystery or previous preparation, and before a 
promiscuous audience. In the case above referred to, the 
impossibility of the thing strikes every one who is unpreju- 
diced, but still they cannot account for really honest and 
worthy people testifying to its truth, and saying that they 
saw it ! The explanation here given, however, will show 
how this might easily occur, and will further show also that 
though seeing may be helieving, as is commonly said, still it 
may not be at all a -conclusive proof! In fact there are few 
things less to be relied upon, in certain circumstances, than 
what people see or hear. And further, there are but few 
people who can describe, truthfully and intelligently, what 
really passes before their eyes, as may be readily tested by 
getting a number of eye-witnesses to testify, independently, 
to some event, witnessed by all alike. 

In all probability if the medium above referred to were to 
say, before a promiscuous audience, — I am now going to put 
my hand in the fire,— and make any pretence of doing so; 
there would, if believers were present, be many who would 
see him do just what he said he would do, and who would 
honestly testify to the fact afterwards. The fact that 
others did not see it, and testified afterwards just the oppo- 
site, would not shake their belief in the least, because they 
really saw the thing done. In fact I remember just such an 
occurrence, when a medium announced that he would lift 
himself up in the air, without any support, and many present 
saw him do it, though myself and several others, also present, 
could not see anything of the kind ! The believers saw him 
subjectively, in the air, where he told them he would be, 
while the unbelievers saw him objectively on the ground, 
where he really was. 

Now this is real honest misconception, which is more 
common than many suspect ; and when to this is added all 
the trickery, and deception, practised in such matters — and 
there is plenty of it — we need not be surprised at the won- 
derful talcs we hear about spiritual, mesmeric, and other 
phenomena, in which all the known laws of nature seem set 
at defiance. 

Let a man appear before a large promiscuous audience, in 



SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE STATES. 289 



some public hall, with a pan of red-hot coals, and then and 
there, without any trickery, place his hand upon it a suffi- 
cient time, and afterwards go round among the audience and 
show he is not burnt. This would be a fair test, and it is 
such a one as unbelievers have a right to expect. Or, as 
some one suggested, if a man can make himself specifically 
light, so as to float in the air, let him, before such an au- 
dience, fasten a rope round his neck, tie it round a beam, 
&n& float off! If he can really float in the air, as many have 
asserted they can, there will be no danger of his hanging. 

Both these things might be done, in the usual manner, be- 
fore believers, or be said to be done, and many would really 
see them, and believe them to be real. In fact there is no limit 
to what may be seen, subjectively, when once a certain 
frame of mind is attained. Nothing is impossible, for all the * 
known laws of nature are set aside without any difficulty. 
Fire will not bum, heavy bodies will not fall to the ground 
when unsupported, and the most ponderous objects can be 
moved by merely pointing at them. Indeed improbability, 
or even impossibility, only increases wonder, with true be- 
lievers, and never raises doubt, as I once saw well exempli- 
fied myself. A very powerful medium, as he was called, 
professed to lift from a table, up into the air, a large pail, full 
of water, and keep it suspended there for two or three min- 
utes, by merely touching it with his finger. Being curions 
to see this, I managed to be present at one of the seances 
where this feat was to be performed, and watched the pro- 
ceedings as closely as circumstances allowed. In the first 
place, however, the room was darkened, so that the outlines 
of objects were but dimly visible, and in the next place no 
one was allowed to approach too near, nor ask too many 
questions, as the medium was absorbed communing with 
the spirits. After waiting some time it was announced that 
the performance was going to take place, the medium 
touched the pail, some one called out — there, thei-e, see, see, 
oh! how wonderful: well /could see nothing move, nor could 
a friend who- was with me, though we watched till the me- 
dium, with a heavy sigh, took his finger away, as if weary 
with the labor, and sank back in a seat. Many of these 
present, however, asserted that they distinctly saw the pail 
move up into the air, and hang there, and I have no doubt 
they did see it, though at the same time I am certain it never 
stirred from the table. Without expressing any dissent, 
however, another seance was arranged for, in which the 
same thing was to be done, but on this occasion one of the 
unbelievers, who had access to the room, prepared matters 
by screwing the pail fast to tlie table! Well, the performance 
passed off just as successfully as before, and the same be- 

25 



290 



SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE STATES. 



lievers saw the pail lifted up, and poised in the air, clear 
away from the table ! Nothing was said at the time about 
what had been done, but when the medium and his friends 
were gone, the master of the house, a very staunch believer, 
was shown how the pail had been all the time screwed fast ! 
But did this undeceive him, or shake his belief? Not a bit 
of it ; — why, said he, that makes it more wonderful still ! So far 
from any doubt being excited, his faith was made all the 
stronger, for he had seen the thing done, and seeing tvas be- 
lieving/ Now that he did see it I have no doubt — in the way 
before explained — but his belief and testimony, or that of 
any number of eye-witnesses, can never establish it as a 
fact. 

In all these cases a subjective impression, caused by a 
morbid state of the nervous system, is taken for an objec- 
tive one, and the person sees what is not, in reality, before 
him. 

It is the same with hearing. A person may hear a voice, 
distinctly, when there is really nothing of the kind, but 
merely a peculiar condition of the auditory nerve, and brain, 
which gives the same impression, subjectively, as if a voice 
were really sounding objectively. People of strong religious 
convictions, when of an emotional temperament, are pecu- 
liarly apt to be affected in this way. Thus we often read of 
them saying : u I heard a voice from heaven" or " the angel of 
the Lord called to me" and so forth. Now, in all these cases, 
the words are first in the person's own mind, and their im- 
pression of them is so strong, subjectively, that it reacts 
upon the auditory apparatus, and produces the same effect 
as a real voice. The person hears beyond doubt, thongh no 
one really calls. 

The same phenomenon figures in many visions, and ghost 
stories, in which things are often both seen, and heard, be- 
yond doubt, though there is really nothing either to see or 
hear, except subjectively, from the peculiar condition of the 
individual's nervous system. 

The other senses may also be similarly affected, and peo- 
ple may taste, smell, and feel, what has really no existence, 
instances of which have already been. 

Many of those who honestly believe they have spiritual 
communications, really take their own subjective impressions, 
of sights and sound, for real objective impressions caused 
by external agency. They make communications to them- 
selves, without being aware of it. 

In a state of complete subjective existence, a person is, in 
fact, out of contact, as it were, with the external world. 
Their subjective impressions are so strong that they over- 
power all objective impressions, so that what is really going 



SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE STATES. 291 



on around is not seen, or heard, at all. A person in this 
state, in fact, can see and hear only what is reflected from 
his own mind, and may he perfectly unconscious of things 
about him, which other people see readily enough. Thus 
he may have the impression that a person is floating in the 
air, who is nevertheless all the time standing on the floor, as 
all those can see who are in a normal state of mind. 

It is therefore no proof, in all cases, that a thing is really 
present because a person sees it; no matter how real it may 
appear to be. And there are people who are peculiarly dis- 
posed to see what is really not present, or what they are 
merely told to see. 

In an assembly of strongly-excited people, as in a negro 
prayer-meeting, for instance, if it were stated that, at a certain 
time, an angel would call out certain words, numbers would 
distinctly hear them at that time, and be willing to testify 
that the}' did so. In fact there is no more reliance to be 
placed upon what people hear, in certain circumstances, than 
upon what they see, for both sight and hearing may be af- 
fected as strongly from their own mental condition as from 
real sounds or objects. 



CHAPTER XXII. 

ANAESTHESIA AND HYPNOTISM. 



When chloroform or any other anaesthetic is given, it is 
well known that the individual loses all consciousness, and 
sensation, while the influence of the agent lasts. It would 
be a mistake, however, to suppose that this influence extends 
to the whole nervous system, except when an overdose is 
is given. 

When a person is put to sleep, by chloroform for instance, 
it is simply the Drain that is acted upon, and chiefly that part 
of the cerebrum which is the seat of consciousness. The 
spinal and sympathetic systems are unaffected, so that all the 
functions which depend on nervous influence from those 
parts go on as usual. The subject knows and feels nothing, 
but the heart continues to beat, and the lungs to act, as usual. 
In short, involuntary nervous action is not interrupted, but 
only consciousness and voluntary movement. That is, when 
proper and safe doses of the anaesthetic are given ; but when 
an overdose is administered, then the other parts of the 
nervous system are acted upon, and the involuntary motions 
are suspended, so that the heart and lungs cease to act, and 
death ensues. 

Dr. Richardson illustrated this matter very well in the fol- 
lowing manner. He administered ether to a pigeon, till it was 
fully put to sleep, and apparently without consciousness or 
sensation. Then he passed a current of electricity through 
its body, from head to foot, and immediately the pigeon rose 
up, opened its eyes, and expanded its wings, as if about 
to fly. The current of electricity was then stopped, and 
instantly the bird became as sound asleep as before. 

Now, this experiment showed that the muscular power 
was there, all perfect, but there was no will to set it to work, 
because the brain was asleep ; but the electricity took the 
place of the brain, and excited the muscles to act just as the 
will wo aid have done if the brain had been awake. 
(292) 



ANESTHESIA AND HYPNOTISM. 293 



Another pigeon was put to sleep by freezing the "brain till 
it was apparently lifeless ; but on passing the electric cur- 
rent through its body it arose and flew about the room. On 
stopping the electric current it instantly became lifeless as 
before. 

The precise way in which anaesthetics act is not known ; 
but there seems good reason to suppose that they destroy the 
power of conduction in the nerves, so that the nervous cur- 
rent cannot pass through them. 

Hypnotism. 

A curious instance of the way in which one part of the 
nervous system, under peculiar conditions, may affect the 
whole, is afforded by the phenomena of what is called hyp- 
notism. 

Mr. Braid was the first who called attention to this subject, 
and who gave a public exposition of it. He showed that 
when the eye, and the attention at the same time, are fixed 
steadily upon some object, a sense of heaviness is felt sooner 
or later, which finally causes the eyes to close and sleep to 
set in. 

The attention and eye must be fixed on that one object 
alone, and nothing else noticed in any way. The effect is 
almost certain in every case, if the gaze and the attention be 
steady enough ; but it maybe much hastened by placing the 
object at such a distance as to strain the eye as much as pos- 
sible, in looking at it. 

In some of his lectures Mr. Braid put dozens of people to 
sleep in this way, in the public hall, by simply directing them 
to look steadily at some bright object which he hung up, and 
to thiiik about it intently. 

He remarks, in his book on JSFeurypnology, that the pupils 
of the eyes become, at first, contracted, but shortly after ex- 
panded with a kind of wavy notion, till finally they close, 
generally with some quivering or vibration. The subject is 
then soon sound asleep, and in ten or fifteen minutes is even 
partially cataleptic, the limbs retaining exactly the same posi- 
tion in which they happened to be. When not so fully 
affected as this the patient may be softly spoken to, and wiil 
place the limbs in any desired position, and they then soon 
become more or less rigidly fixed, the pulse at the same time 
becoming much quickened. 

All the special senses, except sight, become more acute, and 
some of the mental faculties even become much exalted, as 
if the subject had been taking wine, or opium. This excite- 
ment, however, passes off, and is followed by a state of de- 
pression, or torpor, deeper than the soundest natural sleep 

2r> "if 



394 



HYPNOTISM. 



from which, if left alone, the subject gradually recovers, and 
resumes his natural state. 

It is, however, a remarkable circumstance that, while in 
this state of torpor, any muscle, or organ, may be instantly 
awaked, and brought into a state of intense action, by 
simply directing a current of air upon it, so that one part of 
the body may be in a state of intense activity, while the rest 
is in a condition of perfect torpor. 

The explanation of these curious facts is, that the eye, and 
that part of the brain acting with it, become wearied and 
tired out, so that they fall asleep, and thus entirely upset the 
balance of the sensual and mental action, till the whole nerv- 
ous system becomes deranged and wearied, and finally falls 
into a state of torpor. The action of the current of air, in 
awaking and exciting any organ or muscle, is owing to its 
action upon the nerves of sensation, ramified in the skin, 
which convey the sensation to the nervous centre and cause 
a reflex action. 

Here again we have our explanation of many recorded 
cases of religious devotees, and others, going into trances, 
and having visions while praying, and seeing sacred objects. 
Suppose one of these persons to fix the eyes, and the atten- 
tion, steadily upon the cross, or an idol, as they often do 
very intently, hypnotism would be very apt to ensue. The 
person would go into a trance, perhaps become cataleptic, 
see virions, and hear voices, all of which would be con- 
sidered supernatural. 

Steady reading, when the brain is tired, soon sends people 
to sleep, in exactly the same way ; the eye and the attention 
both are directed to the book, and a state of hypnotism 
naturally ensues, 



CHAPTEE XXIII. 

THE NERVOUS AND SEXUAL SYSTEMS. 

Connexion between the Brain and the Sexual Organs. 

The brain is connected with every part of the organization, 
either directly by its own special nerves, or indirectly through 
the other nervous centres. In consequence of this connec- 
tion, it is influenced by the peculiar condition of every part, 
and returns back to every part a peculiar influence in return. 

There are, however, certain organs between which, and 
the brain, this mutual sympathy is more strongly manifested 
than between any other parts of the system. 

The sexual organs, in both sexes, from infancy upwards, 
influence both the development and functional action of 
every portion of the body. But they particularly influence 
the nervous system, and especially the brain, and are strongly 
influenced by it in return. The net-work of nerves con- 
nected with the genital organs is both extensive and com- 
plicated, more so perhaps than we find in connection with 
any other organs. This large mass of nervous matter is not 
only directly connected with the spinal marrow, but also, 
through numerous branches, with the nerves of every other 
organin the body, and therefore influences, and is influenced 
by them all, as will be seen by reference to the plates pre- 
viously given. 

This large mass of sexual nervous matter is placed at one 
extremity of the body, and the brain at the other, and they 
are connected by the spinal marrow, along which a nervous 
current is perpetually passing from one to the other. Some- 
times the brain preponderates over the sexual system, and at 
other times the sexual system preponderates over the brain ; 
but always there is a mutual influence exerted, more or less, 
by each upon the other. 

We see this fully exemplified in youth ; for if the sexual 
organs be then destroyed, the development of the whole sys- 
tem is changed, and the character of the individual becomes 
abnormal. 

In mature life, also, the loss or serious impairment of the 

(,295) 



296 



THE ERVOUS AND SEXUAL SYSTEMS. 



sexual organs exerts a baneful influence upon ever}' other 
part of the system. In fact, at every period, up to old age, 
the same thing is shown, in some form or other, There are, 
however, many ways in which this mutual sympatic, be- 
tween the brain and sexual organs, is manifested, which are 
not generally recognized, except by physicians and physi- 
ologists. 

A large number of nervous diseases, especially in females, 
are caused by the spinal marrow and brain being irritated, 
sympathetically, by the peculiar condition of the sexual or- 
gans. The monthly action of the ovaries and womb, even 
in health, makes the female, periodically, a changed being, 
different, bodily and mentally, to what she is at other times. 
But when the womb or ovaries become diseased, their in- 
fluence becomes still more strongly manifested, and some- 
times in very peculiar ways. 

In fact the female may be said to be, for most of her life, 
completely under the domination of the sexual system. Her 
thoughts, her feelings, and the peculiar bent of her mental 
faculties, are all influenced by it, though unconsciously to 
herself. Most of her diseases also, are either directly con- 
nected with the sexual system, or materially influenced by it, 
especially those of a nervous character. 
j : In fact, the workings of the nervous system in the female 
are, for the most part, merely a reflex of the working of the 
sexual system. So much so is this the case that, in treating 
female nervous diseases, the condition of the' sexual organs 
must always be ascertained first, because there may be the 
cause of the whole trouble. 

It is not, however, the physical condition of the sexual 
organs alone that must be considered, but the moral state of 
the patient as influenced by them. The passion of love, ac- 
cording as it is gratified or not, exerts a preponderating in- 
fluence over the female character, and, by nervous influence, 
over the bodily condition also. This powerful passion — the 
ruling one in females — may either destroy or restore health, 
cause various forms of mania and insanity, or lead to the 
sublimest acts of heroism and devotion. 

It is, therefore, absolutely necessary in young females, 
especially when there is no obvious physical sign of disease, 
to ascertain her condition morally, in reference- to this pas- 
sion. For want of doing so medical science, and medical 
men, have often been put to shame, and compelled to own 
that there was an influence operating more powerful than 
any that medicine could exert. 

It is the same, though to a less degree, with the other sex, 
especially in early life, and the cause of many mysterious 
derangements, both bodily and mental, must often be sought 



THE NERVOUS AND SEXUAL SYSTEMS. 297 



in the sexual system, and the passions therewith con- 
nected. 

Influence of the Nervous Condition of the Parents, at the 
Moment of Conception, Over the Nervous System of the 
Child. 

The general doctrine of hereditary influence has been al- 
ready stated ; hut there is one way in which it is often shown, 
which must be more specially mentioned ; and that is the 
peculiar influence which is exerted, oyer the future child, 
by the nervous condition of the parents at the moment of 
conception ! That such an influence is exerted, at that time, 
seems well established, nor is it anything but what might be 
expected. 

At that supreme moment, when the first rudiments of the 
new being have their commencement, when the foundations 
of its future constitution are laid, the conditions of the 
parental organizations, from which it springs, must be of the 
first importance. In the father there is the vital fluid itself, 
the semen, with its mysterious living animalcules ; and in the 
female, the ovum, or egg, which, by its union with the semen, 
originates the embryo. If either of these be in any way im- 
perfect, the resulting new being must be imperfect also ; and 
nothing is more likely to make them imperfect than a dis- 
eased, or disordered, state of the nervous system. 

For instance, several cases are on record in which women 
have conceived while in a state of intoxication, and th.9 
children have been idiots! Similar results have also fol- 
lowed from the father being intoxicated at the same time ; 
and those who have read my u Marriage Guide " will readily 
understand why this should be. It is there shown that the 
seminal animalcule is indispensable to impregnation, and that 
it probably forms the basis of the nervous system in the future 
child. 

Experiment has also shown that these animalcules, like 
human beings, are affected by many kinds of drugs, in very 
peculiar ways. Alcohol, for instance, will intoxicate them, 
and leave them afterwards weak and powerless, The in- 
toxication of the father therefore, probably, affects the 
animalcule which impregnates the egg, making it feeble ; so 
that the resulting child starts from a bad foundation, and 
never becomes perfectly developed. 

So also if the woman be intoxicated, at the moment of im- 
pregnation, the ovum, or egg, will be correspondingly im- 
perfect ; and then, though the semen may be healthy, still, 
from not having a perfect ovum to develop in, the animal- 
cule cannot originate a perfect organization. 



298 



THE NERVOUS AND SEXUAL SYSTEMS. 



In either case, the future child starts under unfavorable 
conditions, and in all its after-life can never escape the con- 
sequences, bodily and mental, which have been entailed 
upon it by the condition of its parents at the moment when 
it was conceived. 

It is not only such extreme conditions as intoxication, 
however, that operate at this time, but any unhealthy or 
disordered state of the mind, or feelings, no matter from what 
cause. Many observant parents have assured me, as the re- 
sult of their own observations, that they could distinctly 
trace some peculiarity in their children, mental or moral, to 
something connected with themselves at the time when those 
children were conceived ; and I have no doubt but that 
similar observations would be made oftener, if the attention of 
parents were directed to the subject. 

None but healthy men and women ought to become 
parents at all; and when mankind become more fully en- 
lightened on such matters, none others will. But particular 
attention should be paid to the condition of the parents at 
the time of conception, and especially to the condition of 
the nervous system. In this way, disease can be avoided, 
and a complete, healthy development secured of all the 
faculties, both bodily and mental. 

At the present time insane people, epileptics, drunkards, 
cancerous, scrofulous, and all other kinds of diseased people, 
propagate and perpetuate their imperfections, without a word 
being said against it. No one dares to hint that such people 
should not become parents ; and yet, in the interest of man- 
kind at large, they never ought to be so. Proper control 
over this master would prevent, in one generation, more 
disease and suffering than all our medical skill will ever 
be able to cure, and would ensure more mental develop- 
ment immediately than education alone can effect in a 
century. 

In the mean time, parents themselves may bear this fact 
in mind, and remember that the mental, as well as the bodily 
constitutions of their children depend, in a great measure, 
upon them ; and may be, to a great extent, just what they 
choose. 

In times of great public terror and anxiety, as in wars, re- 
volutions, and persecutions, numbers of children are bom 
imperfect, either bodily or mentally ; and more would be so, 
only the same causes lead to frequent miscarriage, and thus 
the number of living births is diminished. 

I once knew a very energetic, clear-headed, successful 
business man, who had two sons just like himself, and 
another with a feeble, nervous organisation, weak in pur- 
pose, irresolute, and incapable of any continued mental effort 



THE NERVOUS AND SEXUAL SYSTEMS. 299 



whatever. The contrast was remarkable, and was a matter 
of common observation among all who knew the family. 

When talking with the father one day he alluded to the 
matter himself, and said, "I will tell you, Doctor, what is 
the cause of the singular difference between my son S. and 
the others. Tour explanations of what occurs at the mo- 
ment of conception have made it plain to me, and the ex- 
planation will, I know, be interesting to you. 

11 Well, the facts are just these : In the summer of 18 — I 
failed, owing to my rogue of a partner running off with all 
our money. No man, perhaps, ever felt such a misfortune 
more keenly than I did, and it seemed to me I should never 

fet over the shock. I was completely unmanned, and feared 
should go crazy. Well, during this state of things my 
wife conceived, and there is the result !' Poor S ! He inherits 
just the state of mind I was then in." 

This was a very interesting confirmatory case, and I have 
met with many similar ones ; the influencing condition being 
sometimes in one parent, and sometimes in the other ; though 
mentally, I believe, the father's influence is much more fre- 
quently seen. 

The actual influence of the sexual system over the nervous 
system, and over the whole body, in fact, especially when 
there is sexual disease, or derangement, is fully shown in 
my other books, u The Marriage Guide," and "The Male 
Generative Organs." 



CHAPTER XXIV. 



INFLUENCE OP MIND UPON MIND. 

Every one is well aware that one mind does affect another 
by association or suggestion, or by that singular influence 
which the mentally powerful exert over the mentalty feeble. 

In all such cases, however, the minds come into actual 
conscious contact, either from personal association or from 
ideal suggestions, and each one knows when and how he is 
influenced by the other. 

It has been stated, however, that one person, by an act of 
his own will, can affect another person's mind without any 
contact, or tangible communication, and without that per- 
son's knowledge. In other words, it is said that the will of 
one person can be controlled by the will of another person, 
without any intercourse taking place between them, and 
without the person so influenced knowing anything about it. 

Persons who are said to possess this remarkable power, in 
an unusual degree, are called mediums, and those who are 
most readily affected by it are called subjects t 

The power exerted by a medium over a subject is said to 
be, in some cases, almost absolute, so that the subject really 
has no will at all of his own, but is moved entirely by the 
will of the medium. Thus, a man in New York may, ac- 
cording to this theory, make a man in Boston, or anywhere 
else, do just as he wills him to do, without the one so in- 
fluenced being at all aware that he is so acted upon. 

The explanation given of this assumed influence is, that 
the nervous power acts just like magnetism, without actual 
contact. Thus, a powerful magnet will cause a needle to 
move a long way off, and even if there be solid objects be- 
tween. In the same way, it is said, a powerful will, which 
is only one form of nervous power, may affect another will, 
even at a considerable distance, and just as the magnet acts 
upon some bodies, and not upon others, so does the nervous 
power act upon some minds and not upon others ! 

It is assumed, that there is, all the time, emanating from 
every active brain a certain amount of nervous power, which 

(300) 



INFLUENCE OF MIND UPON MIND. 301 



is sometimes called the brain wave; and that this affects 
every other mind within its influence. Of course there 
must be a mutual action, and reaction, but the stronger 
wave masters the weaker one. 

How far these brain waves are capable of acting, or at 
what distance, and in what circumstance one mind can in- 
fluence another, is not known. In fact, the whole thing is, 
as far as I can ascertain, a mere theory, unsupported by any 
solid facts whatever. No one, perhaps, would be justified 
in saying that there was no such mutual brain influence ; 
but certainly the evidences of it, so far, have been very 
scant, if there have been auy at all. 

Sometimes one person will think about another suddenly, 
and find afterwards that the other one had been, at the same 
time, thinking about them ; or, there will be vivid thoughts, 
or even subjective visions, of some one at a distance to 
whom something happened at that precise moment, and all 
such cases are regarded as proof that there must have been 
some mysterious connection between the two minds. 

All such incidents may, however, arise from simple co- 
incidence ; and when we take into account the crowd of 
thoughts that pass through every one's mind, every day, it 
can hardly be surprising that similar ones should be in dif- 
ferent minds at the same time. Nor is it at all wonderful 
that one man should think about something happening to 
another, a distance off, at the very time when just such a 
thing does happen to him. 

We imagine thousands of things which do not happen, 
and think nothing of them ; but if by chance one does hap- 
pen as we imagined, we think it something supernatural. 
The only wonder is that our thoughts, and actual events, 
do not correspond oftener than they do. 

What are called presentiments are also attributed, by many, 
to some influence outside of our own minds. Thus, when a 
man imagines that a certain event is going to happen, and it 
does so, it is thought that some spiritual or mental influence 
has given him a warning. But, in many of these cases at 
least, it is merely the unconscious workings of the man's 
own mind, following out a regular train of ideas, which 
leads naturally to the so-called presentiment. It is really 
the result of study and investigation, going on unknown to 
him — unco-nscious cerebration, in fact. 

But, besides this, thinking as we do, all the time, about 
so man} 7 different things, it must happen, sometimes, that 
our thoughts correspond with something that takes place 
afterwards. It would be strange, indeed, if they did not, 
and, as remarked before, the wonder rather is that they 
do not do so much oftener. People overlook the fact that 

26 



302 PSCYCHIC FOKCE. 



we imagine, and have presentiments, about thing's that do 
not happen, all the time ; and for one instance where the 
presentiment is fulfilled there are thousands where it is fal- 
sified. Bnt if there were only one case fulfilled, and a mil- 
lion falsified, people would fix their attention on the one, 
and refuse to consider the million. At least most emotional 
people would do so. 

It is contended that some persons are affected by others, $ 
w r hen near them, without actually knowing of their prox- 
imity. It is said that they experience a peculiar feeling, 
or kind of nervous impression, caused afterwards by 
some influence emanating from the other person, and 
which affects their nerves. But all this is too vague, and, 
being unsupported by any obvious facts, cannot be tested. 

On the whole, there is no positive evidence whatever, as 
far as I can ascertain, that one mind can influence another 
in any way other than the usual way ; that is, by the com- 
munication of ideas, or the exciting of emotions, of the 
source of which the mind so acted upon is always con- 
scious. 

That one person does often affect another in a peculiar 
waj 7 , merely by their presence or close proximity, is, I be- 
lieve, well authenticated ; but this arises, probably, from 
peculiar gaseous, or electrical, emanations, and not from 
mental influences, as is shown in another part of this work. 

Pscychic Force. 

Besides the assumed action of mind upon mind, in the 
manner above explained, it is also said, by some, that mind 
can act upon matter, and overcome what are called the nat- 
ural forces. Thus it is stated that heavy objects can be de- 
prived of all weight, so as to float in the air, and be so 
changed in nature as not to burn when put in the fire. Men 
are said to have floated in the air, and to have put their 
hands and faces in the fire without being burnt ; and all by 
the influence of what is called pscychic, or mind power. 

It is sufficient to say, about these alleged phenomena, that 
they take place in such equivocal circumstances, and so 
capriciously as to time and place, that it is impossible to 
properly test them. When we wish to test any alleged dis- 
covery in magnetism, electricity, or pneumatics, we can al- 
ways do so with a certainty as to the result. We know that 
certain things act in certain ways, in certain circumstances, 
and that they always do so ; the magnet does not refuse to 
act because certain people are present, or certain others ab- 
sent, nor does it require a darkened room, or any special 
contrivances ; it is always the same, and so likewise with all 



PSCYCHIC FORCE. 303 



the other natural powers. But when we come to pscychie 
force, or mind force, we are told that it did certain wonderful 
things, for Mr. So and So, in certain circumstances ; but 
when somebody else tries the same thing, in exactly the 
same circumstances, nothing takes place. Nay, even the 
same person, when asked to repeat the phenomena, cannot 
do so — the force has all left him, or the baneful influence of 
unbelievers present prevents its being manifested. 

In short, no reliance whatever can be placed on this as- 
sumed pscychie force. We can never find it when we want 
it, and therefore can never test it, as we do other natural 
forces. It is too capricious, and tricky, and too much dis- 
posed to exhibit itself only to a chosen few, and in the semi- 
darkness. 

Having tried to fix this assumed force, and cause it to 
show itself clearly, in open daylight, but without success, I 
have determined in the future to let it alone, till it can be 
shown, and experimented with, like the other natural 
forces. 

My own impression is that most of the pscychie phenom- 
ena we are told about, when there is no deception, are sim- 
ply subjective mental pfcenomena, such as ha^e already been 
explained. 



CHAPTEE XXV. 

UNCONSCIOUS BRAIN WORK. 

Unconscious Cerebration. 

Usually, when our intellect is at work we know that it is 
working : or, in other words, we are conscious of the fact, and 
few persons think it possible that the brain can work with- 
out our knowledge. There are, however, some facts, well 
known, which seem to disprove this, and favor the idea that 
the brain can go on with a train of thought, or pursue a 
subject of investigation, without our being aware of it, till 
the mental process comes to an end. 

Thus, for instance, something will strike us as being 
strange, and we will try to make it out, but without success, 
till at last we drop it altogether, and think of something 
else. Then, after the matter has been forgotten, and seem- 
ingly passed from our minds entirely, perhaps for a long 
time, it will suddenly return, and we will see through it 
clearly all at once ! Or, we may endeavor to call something 
to mind we have forgotten, and try hard to bring it back, 
without success, till at last we tire of the matter and go to 
something else. Then, hours after, while we are busy 
thinking of other matters, up comes' the thing we had been 
trying to remember, and we call out, u ThaVs it; thafs what 
I was trying to recollect! " 

Every one must have had this experience often, and yet 
few perhaps have thought how it is to be explained. 
Here is something we cannot remember, when we try to do 
so ; and yet, after we have given up thinking about it, and are 
busy with other things, up it comes without any notice, just 
as if some one came into the room suddenly and announced 
it to us. 

Again, in another way, we often see this unconscious brain- 
work exhibited. A person will be thinking of nothing at 
all, as we commonly say, just lazily day-dreaming, perhaps 
half asleep, when, suddenly a brilliant idea comes into his 
(304) 



UNCONSCIOUS BBATN WOBK. 305 



mmd, fully developed, about something lie has paid no at- 
tention to for a long time. 

Sometimes even, the subject will be something quite new 
to us, and about which we have never previously occupied 
ourselves, or but slightly. Now in such cases it seems al- 
most obvious that the brain has been at work, though we 
were not aware of it, till the work was successfully ended. 

If this be so, then consciousness is a distinct faculty, which 
may not always be in action ; so that we may often be men- 
tally at work* without knowing anything about it ; and, in- 
deed, onr daily experience makes this extremely probable. 

Many physiologists explain it thus. They say that, when 
the mind sets to work in this way, to make something out, 
certain parts of the brain are concerned in the process, and 
continue to work at it, even after our direct attention is 
withdrawn from it, or even turned to something else. Or, 
in other words, after we are tired of trying to make out this 
particular thing, and are busy with other matters, these 
parts of the brain still keep working at it, though we are 
unconscious of the fact, and finally they work it out, by 
themselves, as it were, and then announce to us the result ! 
This is called unconscious cerebration, or the brain working 
without our knowledge. 

Whether this is the true explanation of the phenomenon 
or not, it seems very plausible, and it certainly appears to be 
the best theory yet given. 

Mathematicians will often puzzle over a problem for a 
long time, and then, after forgetting all about it, and while 
busy with something else, the solution will come to their 
minds all in a moment. So, also, with inventors ; they will 
often try in vain to discover something they want, and at 
last give it up in despair ; but eventually, perhaps long af- 
ter, the very thing will come into their minds in an instant. 

Now it certainly does seem as if the brain had been at 
work in these cases, unconsciously, or without our knowl- 
edge, trying, as it were, to make matters out, and announc- 
ing to us the conclusion, *when arrived at. 

Another fact similarly explained also is this, that we can 
go on with several different trains of thought, or can be do- 
ing one thing and attending to another, at the same time ! 

Thus some persons will play a complicated piece of mu- 
sic ; and, while they are playing, will keep up a conversation 
with those around, without letting the music and the con- 
versation interfere with one another. 

Now, in these cases, it would seem as if different parts of 
the brain were employed, one with the music, and one with 
the subject of conversation, and this is what many think is 
really the case. In some cases, the player will be so inter- 

26-- 



306 UNCONSCIOUS BRAIN WORK. 



ested in the conversation as to forget all about the music, 
and yet keep on playing it correctly! 

This would seem almost to prove that part of the brain 
was at work unconsciously, while another was at work con- 
sciously ! Sometimes even more than two subjects will be 
thus considered at the same time, and yet all will be duly 
attended to. 

Lord Brougham had a wonderful faculty of attending to 
many things at once ; he would write a letter, listen to a 
speech, and talk to those around him, all at the same time, 
and do each thing well, neglecting nothing, and letting noth- 
ing escape him. In such a case it almost seems as & each 
part of the brain acted independently ; and that there were, in 
fact, as many separate minds as there were portions of the 
brain at work. 

This, however, is sometimes explained in another way. 
It is supposed that, in all these cases, there is really no un- 
consciousness, but that all that is going on is known, only 
the attention bestowed upon some things is so slight, com- 
pared with others, that it escapes our notice. The con- 
scious attention, in fact, is supposed to be divided amongst 
all the things which are done ; but some things receive so 
much more attention than others, or we are so much more 
full;/ conscious of them, that the others seem to have no at- 
tention at all. Thought is supposed to be quick enough to 
fly, as it were, instantly from one thing to another, back- 
wards and forwards, and so to be directed to a number of 
things at the same time apparently. It is contended, how- 
ever, that this is only apparently ; and that, in fact, the mind 
never attends to but one thing at a time, and that there is 
always an interval, however short, between the doing of one 
thing and the doing of another. 

Such are the different views entertained upon this matter ; 
but I believe the majority of physiologists, at the present 
day, believe in the process of unconscious cerebration ; or, in 
other words, in the brain working upon trains of thought, 
and pursuing investigations, without our being necessarily 
conscious of what it is doing, and even while we are doing 
and thinking of something else. 

It is very probable that there are great individual differ- 
ences, and that some persons habitually reason, and inves- 
tigate, unconsciously, while others do so only occasionally, 
or not at all. 

It has been suggested also, in connection with this sub- 
ject, that perhaps the double nature of the brain may have 
something to do with this phenomenon. The two halves of 
the brain, as already shown, though connected, are still per- 
fect, each one by itself. In fact each half is a real brain, 



INTROSPECTION. 307 



independent of the other half, and possessing every part 
requisite for the full performance of all its functions. One 
half may be much injured, or even completely paralysed, 
and yet the other may remain unimpaired, and capable of 
perfect action, in every way. It is thought, therefore, that 
possibly one brain may attend to one thing, and the. other to 
another, at the same time, though ordinarily they both work 
together at the same thing. 

The real use, or reason for, this double state of the brain 
is unknown, nor do we know how far the two halves are 
really connected functionally, or are independent. 

The whole nervous system, it must be remembered, is 
equally double, in every part, the two halves being exactly 
alike, — with the exception of the sympathetic nerves, which 
are single. The doubleness extends to every part connected 
with the animal life, but not to the parts connected with the 
mere nutritive, or vegetative life. 

Perhaps the two brains act in concert, like the two eyes, 
and enable us to understand a thing better, from the double 
attention, just as we see a thing more perfectly from the 
double vision. It has also been suggested that possibly 
they may act alternately, one resting while the other is 
working ; but the fact is, we know nothing about it, and can 
give no reason why the brain is in two equal and similar 
parts, instead of in one uniform mass. 

Introspection. 

The facts above given show that, in many cases, at least, 
the process of reasoning, studying, or thinking out any matter 
which we wish to understand, may go on unconsciously, that 
is, without our knowing that it is going on ; just as the process 
of digestion can go on without our being aware of it. Prob- 
ably because reasoning results from the action of one part of 
the brain, and knowing, or mere consciousness, from another 
part, and the two may not always act together ! 

Ordinarily, it is true, we know when we are studying, or 
reasoning upon any matter, and we can even watch and 
guide the process more or less ; but every one's experience 
shows that this is not always the case. Very often, for in- 
stance, we ponder upon, and study at some subject with all 
our might, without making anything out about it, till -finally 
we give it up, and forget all about it. And yet, perhaps a 
long time after, the whole matter immediately strikes us all 
at once, perfectly plain and clear. In such a case, it is evident, 
that the reasoning part of the brain continued working away 
at the subject, by itself, after the knowing, or conscious, part 
of the brain had lost sight of it. Such experiences are of 



308 



INTROSPECTION. 



constant occurrence with every one, though their true signi- 
cance has only lately been understood. When we have for- 
gotten anything, or when we cannot make it out, we com- 
monly say, " Oh ! it will come to my mind by-and-by;" 
and so it usually does, sooner or later ! The attention is 
taken away from the matter, we are no longer conscious of 
it, and the reasoning faculty silently makes it out by itself, 
better perhaps than if we had been all the time watching the 
process. 

We can, therefore, reason either knowingly, or unknow- 
ingly, and some persons habitually do more unconscious 
reasoning than they are aware of. 

The sudden making out, or seeing into things, which have 
puzzled us — when we are thinking perhaps of something 
quite different— which so frequently surprises us all, is ar- 
rived at in this way, by the unconscious working of the 
reasoning powers. 

It has been well said, by a celebrated physiologist, that 
consciousness, and will, bear the same relation to the intellect 
that the rider does to the horse ! As a rule, the rider directs, 
and the horse obeys ; but the rider may be abstracted, may 
forget altogether he is in the saddle, and yet the horse will 
go steadily on his journey, if well trained, just as well with- 
out his master's guidance as with it, or sometimes even better. 
The man may sudden] y wake up from a deep reverie, and find 
himself at home, the horse having taken him there While he 
was unconscious ; just as the intellect often takes us through 
all the steps of some difficult problem, till we arrive at the 
solution, without our having been at all aware what was 
going on. 

It may even be the case that the rider may be lost, and not 
know which way to go ; and his best way then may be to let 
the horse go by himself, trusting to his instinct to find the 
right path. Many a lost traveler has thus been brought home 
safely by his steed, who would never have arrived there if he 
had insisted on guiding the animal. 

In the same manner we should often act wisely, when lost 
about any matter we have been studying, to leave the intel- 
lect alone, and let it work itself, while we turn our attention 
to other things. 

In fact, the very best reasoning we do, in many cases, is done 
in this unconscious way, and paradoxical, as it may seem, 
we often see clearer into a matter by not looking at it ! That 
is, by not fixing the attention upon it, and trying to force the 
intellect to consider it in a certain way. The more we do 
this, and pore at it, the less clear it becomes to us ; but after 
we have let it alone for some time, and forgotten all about 
it, the intellect suddenly presents it to our view clear and 



INTROSPECTION. 309 



plain. The reason, like the horse, often finds the way best 
when left to itself. 

As a rule, the best way to thoroughly understand any diffi- 
cult subject, which requires much close reasoning, is to first 
fill our minds with all the information about it that we can 
get, and then turn the attention entirely away from it to 
something else. When this is done, the intellect will usually, 
unconsciously to us, arrange the facts that have been accu- 
mulated, go through a course of systematic induction, work 
out the conclusion, and suddenly present it to us all com- 
plete ! 

Such a process is very similar to the ordinary process of 
digestion, in which we first fill the stomach with food, and 
then leave it to gradually concoct, and finally digest into per- 
fect nutriment. We need be in no way conscious of what is 
going on, and in fact had better not be, but we know when 
the result is finally attained. 

The facts with which we fill the mind, when studying any 
subject, may be considered as mental food, which we leave 
the intellect to digest at leisure, without it being necessary 
for us to be conscious that the process is going on, and which 
in fact, usually goes on better when we pay no attention 
to it. 

If a man, after a meal, be all the time watching his 
stomach, and trying to make out how it is going on, notic- 
ing every motion, and wondering if all is going on right, he 
is pretty sure to hinder digestion and make himself dys- 
peptic. 

In like manner, if a man, after a mental meal of facts, 
will persist in constantly watching the course of intellectual 
digestion, and arbitrarily interfering with it, he is pretty sure 
to spoil the process, and make himself mentally dyspeptic. 

In fact this is the way, often, that men become only the 
more muddled about any subject the more they study it. If 
they would forget all about it, and turn the attention to 
something else, Ihe unembarrassed intellect would gradually 
make all clear to them,unexpectedly. 

In such a case, to refer to our former simile, the rider is 
conf used, and has lost his way, and the best thing he can 
do is to give his horse the reins, and let him find the right 
track, without interference. 

Children are often worried about their lessons, and forced 
to attend to them, as it is called, till they come to know noth- 
ing about them, from mere confusion of mind. If left alone, 
and not forced to attend, or be conscious, they frequently 
understand them much better. And this explains why child- 
ren who do not attend to to their lessons, often learn them 
better than those who do. 



310 INTROSPECTION. 



Teachers and parents are not always aware that there may 
be too much conscious attention, and that a lesson maybe often 
better understood if it be forgotten for awhile. 

The Diagnosis of Disease. 

This principle of unconscious cerebration may be advan- 
tageously applied to the diagnosis of disease ; — that is, to the 
tracing out what the disease is, or what organs are affected, 
and how ! In fact it is the only true way to study an ob- 
scure disease, and the only one which will enable us to fully 
understand, and properly treat it. The physician should 
first ascertain all he possibly can about the patient, gather 
all the facts as to his bodity and mental condition, and make 
a thorough examination of him, mentally and bodily, as far 
as possible and necessary. Having done this, he should then 
let his intellect work upon the case, taking its own way, and 
its own time, uninterfered with by the will, or by any set 
rules. Very possibly he may become, for a time, quite un- 
conscious of the patient's existence, and may forget all 
about the case ; but sooner or later its true nature will be- 
come apparent, and he will see clearly what is the matter, 
and what to do. 

This method is very different to the ordinary medical pro- 
cess of going by set rules, or guessing hap hazard, of which 
we see so much ; but unfortunately there are but few per- 
sons who can practice it. 

In fact, this power of unconscious reasoning, or mental 
digestion, if it might be so termed, is an attribute only of a 
certain order of mind, at least in its more perfect form. 
Every one, it is true, does more or less unconscious cerebra- 
tion, but some people do it habitually, and systematically ; and 
can at any time apply their intellectual powers in this way, 
to any subject that interests them. It is a peculiar gift, and 
one that has been possessed by all men who have made 
themselves intellectually great; 

A very proper name for this remarkable mental process is 
Introspection, or the power of looking within. 

The rapidity with which the intellect, in some people, 
when left alone, will run over all the facts of a case, string 
them together, and draw from them the proper deduction, 
is astonishing ; and all may be done without the person 
knowing or being conscious of it till the end is reached. 
This is really what is called genius, and in former times pro- 
phecy. It is also the foundation of what there is real in clair- 
voyance, animal magnetism, mesmerism, and psychology. 

The majority of those who profess to deal with these sub- 
jects, both professionally and as amateurs, are mere pre- 



INTROSPECTION. 311 



tenders, who practice upon the credulity of those who 
consult them. By using indefinite language, and by deal- 
ing in vague generalties, suitable to all cases, they man- 
age to impress upon the patient that they are describing his 
particular case, psychologically, and he wonders how they 
could possibly find ont so much. Generally, also, they man- 
age to obtain all the information they really need from the 
patient himself, without his seeing how they do it. Some well- 
arranged leading questions elicit replies that tell much, to a 
shrewd mind ; and these, with a few vague utterances, which 
maybe taken either as questions or statements, draw out all 
that the Professor really requires to know. It is, in short, 
for the most part, a victory of cunning over credulity ; and 
the patient is simply astonished to receive back, in a mesmeric 
revelation, the very information he has just been unwittingly 
giving himself. Besides this, the patient, if a believer, is in 
such a state of mind that he cannot distinguish between 
what is objective, and what is subjective, as will be readily un- 
derstood by referring to the foregoing chapter on objective 
and subjective impressions. 

When a firm believer, or a man who is naturally credul- 
ous, goes away from one of these mesmeric consultations, 
there is, in his mind, a strange jumble of what he has heard 
from the Professor, what he has said himself, what he has 
imagined, what he has previously known, and what has 
been suggested to him ! He cannot separate one from the 
other, nor give a clear and intelligible account of what has 
taken place. 

With the man who has had a proper scientific training, 
and who has the scientific habit of thought and examination, 
the case is very different. Such a man always requires the 
examination to be conducted in such a way, and with such 
tests, as he would require in the study of any alleged physical 
fact, and to this the professor usually demurs. 

Some of these professors have, however, the power of in- 
trospection, more or less, and can really make out much 
that is obscure to ordinary means of investigation. But 
when this is the case, they are apt, too frequently, to mix up 
what is real, in their practice, with much that is fanciful or 
even deceptive. Many of them soon discover, from experi- 
ence, that it is much more easy to impose upon those who 
consult them, than to really enlighten them ; and that it is 
not worth while to introspect, when mere ordinary unmeaning 
generalities give perfect satisfaction. 

It must not be forgotten that, in certain mental conditions, 
a man can easily be made to believe that he has seen, or 
heard, anything whatever that those who have impressed 
him wish him to believe. 



312 



INTBOSPECTION. 



A mesmeric, or clairvoyant examination, is a very instruc- 
tive and amusing experience, to a scientific student of the 
human mind, and shows clearly how mere subjective im- 
pressions create conviction of objective realities. 

All the professors, of these different so-called sciences, 
profess to give information* without being told anything. 
But, in fact, they do no such thing. 

As already explained, they obtain information in an in- 
direct way, and then give it back again. When they are 
told nothing they can say nothing, except what would apply 
to anjr one of a dozen different cases. With introspection, 
or unconscious cerebration, it is quite different. 

In the introspective process the practitioner commences 
by gaining, first, all the information he can, of every kind, 
about the patient, and the case ; and, from the knowledge 
thus acquired, proceeds to gain more. From what is known 
he proceeds to make out what is unknown, and the more 
knowledge he starts with the more he arrives at. He must 
also be a thoroughly educated man, well versed in a knowl- 
edge of the human body, and of its different diseases, and 
the various modes of treatment. If he be not a man of this 
kind, the knowledge he gains of the patient's condition must 
be very limited, nor can he make any good use of it. 

Many of the mesmeric and other professors are quite igno- 
rant upon such matters, nor do they profess to be otherwise, 
but pretend that their wonderful second sight enables them 
to dispense with such knowledge. This, however, is a fal- 
lacy, and a mere pretence to cover up their ignorance. Some 
of their explanations of the human interior, and of the con- 
dition of its different parts, are most amusing, and fully 
prove what they say, that they do not gain their knowledge by 
dissection ! I have heard one of these men, after professing 
to have been examining the inside of an absent patient, and 
stating the condition of the different parts, ask very gravely 
if it was a man or a tooman? And yet the person who was 
asking for the information could not see the absurdity of 
the question. Let any one imagine, however, the professor 
asking the sex of a human being, wljose inside he had been 
roaming about at his leisure, for ten minutes or more ! If a 
man can examine the inside, as they express it, of an absent 
patient, or even the outside, they do not need to be told if it 
be male or female ; and the very fact of their first asking the 
sex should show any one that they cannot make any such 
examination. 

There is, then, a fundamental difference between intro- 
spection and mesmerism, or any- of the kindred sciences so- 
called ; all of which profess to give information without re- 
ceiving any. Introspection, on the contrary, commences 



INTROSPECTION. 313 



with first gathering* all the information that can be got at 
about the case, and from this preliminary information, by a 
strictly inductive, though unconscious process, obtaining 
still further information, such as could never be arrived at 
oy any ordinary mode of investigation. 

All the changes, or phenomena, that occur in nature, both 
mental and physical, are linked together in a regular order, 
or sequence, called cause and eifect. One change, or phe- 
nomenon, follows another, like the links of a chain, so that 
all are connected ; and no one can take place by itself, but 
must depend upon something which has preceded it, and 
connect with something which follows. 

In order, therefore, to arrive at a knowledge of any change 
or event unknown to us, we must begin with those links of 
the chain that we really hold in hand, as it were ; and from 
them pick up, link by link, till we arrive at the one we want. 
The great point is to keep to the chain, and not miss a link ; 
for if one be missed the chain is broken, and we never can 
be sure, afterwards, that any part we may take up again is 
connected with the part we started with. 

So long as we can see the links, or otherwise recognize 
them by our senses, all is easy enough ; and this is as far as 
ordinary investigation usually goes. The difficulty begins 
when we can no longer do this ; and when this point is 
reached, with most people, any link is laid hold of that 
comes handiest, and assumed to be the right one. In ordi- 
nary investigation, when certainty ends conjecture begins, 
and that which is only imagined is at once attached to what 
is really known, and considered of equal value. 

A truly inductive mind, however, can, in favorable condi- 
tions, arrive with certainty at much that is unknown, by 
working with what is known. And no mode of mental ac- 
tion is so favorable, for this purpose, as that of unconscious 
cerebration, or introspection. 

A thoroughly-educated and experienced physician, for in- 
stance, after studying a patient, and informing himself of 
everything relating to his case, so far as he can, is in a con- 
dition, if he have an inductive mind, and the introspective 
habit, to learn much more. He can then turn his mind 
within, as it were, and, by introspection, study the case as 
if it were his own, till his knowledge of the patient's true 
state becomes as perfect as if he had his body dissected be- 
fore him. 



27 



CHAPTER XXVI. 



INFLUENCE OF THE MIND UPON THE BODY. 



The explanations already given have shown how all the 
organs of the body are dependent, for their power to act, 
both voluntarily and involuntarily, upon the influence they 
receive from the great nervous centres. But, besides the 
ordinary necessary nervous influence which they exert upon 
them, it is also certain that the proper and especial functions 
of the brain itself, that is thought and emotion, can influence, 
to an almost unlimited extent, the whole organization. 

Not only does the general condition of the body affect the 
mind, by the influence it exerts upon the brain, but the 
mind, in return, reacts upon the general bodily condition, 
by the influence it exerts upon the different organs. 

And this influence of mind over body, has now to be care- 
fully studied, and its consequences and importance pointed 
out. Mental influence is often more powerful, over the 
bodily condition, than any other influence, and may com- 
pletely counteract the effect of medicines, or act fully and 
efficiently in their stead. The old proverb is literally true, 
that conceit can kill, or conceit can cure, and proofs of it 
are constantly seen. We all know the almost magical influ- 
ence of hope, and confidence, in promoting a cure, or of de- 
spair and doubt in preventing it. It is a common remark 
that faith is all that is needed, in medication, and every phy- 
sician's experience must have convinced him of this. It is 
but little matter what a sick person takes, if he has con- 
fidence in its power to cure, while without this confidence, 
it is nearly always useless. 

I well remember one remarkable instance of this. A pa- 
tient afflicted with fits, for many years, had some pills given 
him which arrested them at once, though nothing else he had 
tried ever had the least effect upon them. He was, of 
course, delighted at his deliverance, and was anxious to 
make sure of always having a supply of the pills on hand. 
His physician, however, had no recollection what the pills 
(314) 



INFLUENCE OF THE MIND UPON THE BODY. 315 



were, having given him some old ones, that he knew were 
harmless, merely to give him something, and to satisfy him 
at the time. Not liking to tell him this, he gave him some 
more, perfectly simple, being only sugar and gum, telling 
him they were the same, and they were just as effective ! For 
ten years he continued taking these pills regularly, having 
no fits while he used them, but sure to have an attack if he 
neglected them. 

Now in this case it was undoubtedly the confidence, or 
faith, that operated on the nervous system and warded off 
the attack, and it was- therefore just as effective as the med- 
icine had been at first. 

It is highly important, however, to understand how this 
is so, and to see the reason for it. Most people, though ac- 
knowledging the fact, attribute it all to fancy, or imagina- 
tion, and are not aware that there is a real physical, or or- 
ganic action, in these cases of faith cure, the same as there 
is when drugs are used. The same influence works in both 
cases, but in a different way, as will be shown further on. 

To explain this we must refer again to reflex and direct 
nervous action, upon which the explanation depends. 

The simple action of moving a man's hand, for instance, 
may be brought about in two different ways. In the first 
place he may merely think of moving it, and then a current 
is sent from the brain along the nerves of motion, which 
sets in action the proper muscles, and the hand is moved. 

The action here begins in the brain, and the nervous influ- 
ence operates directly on the moving muscles. 

In the second place, we may suppose the hand to be too 
close to the flre. Then the nerves of sensation, which are 
distributed on the hand, immediately inform the brain that 
the hand is burning, and the brain sets the muscles in ac- 
tion, through the nerves of motion, to take it away, the 
same as before. 

Now in this case it will be seen that the action begins in 
the nerves of feeling in the hand, and that the brain is ex- 
cited from without to act upon the muscles to take the hand 
away. In both cases the moving power emanates from the 
brain, but in the one case the action begins there, and in the 
other it begins on the surface of the hand. In the one case 
the thought, in the brain, is the first step, and in the other it 
is the feeling on the hand. 

Now this is exactly what may occur in an} r part of the body. 
Take the eye, for instance, and we shall see how teal's may 
come from it in both ways. Suppose some dust blows in, 
the nerves of feeling at once inform the brain, and the order 
comes back to the lachrymal gland to pour out tears, to 
wash the dust away. This is indirect, or reflex action. But 



316 INFLUENCE OF THE MIND UPON THE BODY 



a sudden emotion, like pity, or some distressing thought 
may do the same thing, by direct action from the brain. 

So in the stomach, if we swallow some nauseous sub- 
stance, as an emetic, for instance, the nerves of sensation 
inform the brain, and the order comes back to throw out 
the offending substance by vomiting. The action com- 
mences here in the nerves of sensation of the stomach, and 
is excited by the emetic. But we also know that nausea 
may be excited directly, without anything being taken into 
the stomach at all. The mere sight, or thought, of some dis- 
gusting object often causes vomiting, and the mere idea of 
an emetic will act as well, with some persons, as if they 
swallowed one. Now in these cases the action begins in the 
brain, and is excited by the simple idea, or thought ; which 
shows how an idea, or, as we often say, the imagination, can 
cause the same action as a powerful drug ! Here, then, is an 
explanation of the way in which conceit cures, or kills ; and 
we see why the gum and sugar pills acted as well as those 
made of real drugs. 

In all cases the cause of action, in any part of the body, is 
the nervous influence, and this may be excited either from 
without, or from within; either indirectly, by a sensation 
coming from the part, or directly by a mere thought. 
Whether we employ medicines or imagination, therefore, 
the moving power is the same, only it is set going in a dif- 
ferent way. And this explains the whole mystery of faith 
cures, conceit, and imagination. 

It also shows why some kinds of nervous disease are so 
catching, that is, so easily propagated from one to another. 
It is simply because many minds are influenced in the same 
way, at the same time. If one person in a company has an 
epileptic fit, all those who are disposed to epilepsy are near- 
ly sure to follow suit. And so it is with most other nervous 
attacks. All those similarly disposed are liable to be simi- 
larly affected from the same influences. Numerous in- 
stances of this are seen in what are called religious revivals, 
where hysteria passes current for devotion. One subject 
going off, a dozen others will follow, with the same cries 
and convulsions. In all these cases the thoughts and feel- 
ings emanating from over-excited brains, act on the nerves 
of motion the same as doses of strychnine would. 

We read in history that, in former times, when people 
were more ignorant than they are now, whole communities 
would be attacked with some wild form of craziness. A 
single subject would begin to sing, or dance, in a maniacal 
manner, and straight way hundreds did the same. In some 
instances these fanatics scourged themselves, till the blood 
streamed from their bodies, and in others they even drowned, 



INFLUENCE OE THE MIND UPON THE BODY 317 



or burnt themselves. Of course all this was considered 
simply pious devotion, and the poor maniacs were objects 
of envy and admiration. They were, however, simply dis- 
eased, crazy, in fact, from an over-excited and deranged 
condition of the nervous system, which caused the same 
effect as poisoning with drugs. 

Such people see visions, hear angelic voices, and are the 
subjects of miracles. Medical men know well that there 
are numerous cases of lameness, and loss of power in particu- 
lar parte of the body, which are purely nervous, as before 
explained. I have myself seen most distressing and obsti- 
nate cases of hip disease, which were of this kind. In all 
such cases a powerful nervous influence may cure in a mo- 
ment. Simple faith will do it, if strong enough, and the pa- 
tient only needs to be touclied, or commanded to rise and 
walk, and straightway is able to do so. Fright will often 
succeed just as well, and has frequently caused the crippled 
and bed-ridden to leap up and run, as if nothing were the 
matter with them. Joy or anger may do the same, or, in- 
deed, any powerful emotion. Conversely the very same in- 
fluences may cause disease, and loss of power, as numerous 
instances show. Fear can, literally, strike a person dumb, 
or powerless ; and even great joy will do the same, while 
violent anger has often caused death. 

Females are especially under the influence of the emotions, 
and often suffer from incontinence of urine, diarrhoea, or 
leucorrhoea, after a fright, or from a few moments of anxiety. 

In all these cases, the irregular bodily action results di- 
rectly from derangement of the nervous system. 

It has thus been fully shown that every organic action, 
healthy or diseased, is due solely to a nervous current sent 
from one of the great nervous centres ; and it has further 
been shown, how this current may be set in motion in 
two ways, either indirectly, by reflex action, or directly, 
by thought, or feeling. And, though the fact is generally 
acknowledged, that the mind and feelings have much influ- 
ence over the body, yet few know how that influence oper- 
ates, or to what extent. And this is the reason I have 
dwelt upon this matter so much, because it should be fully 
understood. 

This influence is, in fact, within certain limits, unbounded. 
Every organic function can be hastened, delayed, or totally 
suspended ; and life itself even can be destroyed, by a 
thought, or an emotion, as certainly as by a powerful drug ! 
Mind alone, can, beyond doubt, in numerous cases, kill or 
cure, as surely as medicine. 



27* 



CHAPTER XXVII. 

CONNECTION BETWEEN THE NERVOUS POWER AND 
LIGHT, HEAT, MOTION, AND ELECTRICITY. 



To understand more clearly this mutual relation between 
mind and matter, and the way in which they act, and re-act 
upon each other, reference must be made here to what are 
called the imponderable agents of Nature, namely: Light, 
Heat, Electricity, and Motion! These all -pervading agents are 
concerned in every change of matter that takes place ; tbey 
exist ever3 r where ; and are mutually transformable one into the 
other I In other words, they are but modifications of the 
same agent, or different forms only, which may, and do, pass 
into each other. 

The influence which these agents, especially electricity, 
have over matter generally is analogous to the influence 
which the nervous power exerts over the body. And, in fact, 
the nervous power itself — there is good reason to suppose — 
is but a further modification of the same, all-pervading, 
agencjr. 

Light, heat, electricity, motion, and nervous power are, in fact, 
mutually interchangeable, one into the other, and are prob- 
ably only various exhibitions of one general all-pervading 
Jorce, power, influence, or agency, — just as we choose to term 
it. 

It is this power (to use a convenient name) which origi- 
nates form, organization, life, thought, sensation, and emotion! 
It is, in fact, the active force of matter, the living principle, or 
what the ancients called the soul of the world ! 

Whenever chemical change takes place, either electricity, 
heat, light, or motion, are produced invariably, singly or 
combined, and sometimes all at once. And, when either 
electricity, heat, light, or motion, act upon matter, they pro- 
duce in it a chemical change. 

In like manner, the various transformations constantly 
occurring in the living being all originate heat, motion, elec- 
tricity, and nervous power. And conversely, either heat, 

(318) 



THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAE FORCES. 319 



motion, light, electricity, or nervous power, all cause changes, 
or transformations in the bodily material. 

The bread that a man eats, the water he drinks, the air he 
breathes, or that even touches his skin, the light of the sun, 
the temperature and electrical conditions of everything 
around him, — all act upon the substance of his body, and 
modify it more or less. In other words, they cause chemical 
change — which, in its turn, re-acts and causes heat, motion, 
electricity, or nervous power. Either, or all of these agents 
are being continually produced in the human body ; and, in 
conjunction with light, are continually acting upon it. 

That peculiar modification of the universal force, which 
we call nervous power, is originated by the organic action of 
the nerve matter, especially the brain. The nervous apparatus, 
composed of two different substances, the white and the gray, 
is a true galvanic battery; and the chemical actions occurring 
therein, originate the nerve force, and cause thought, feel- 
ing, and emotion. In other words, these chemical trans- 
formations of the nervous substance cause, and maintain, the 
activity, or life, of both body and mind. 

Here then, we begin to see, how mind and body act and 
re-act on each other. The chemical" changes occurring in the 
body, from whatever cause, produce nervous power, and 
nervous power in return re-acts upon the bodily substance, 
and causes in it chemical change. Thought, feeling, and 
emotion, are only exhibitions of nervous power, and, of 
course, act upon the bodily substance and cause changes in 
it, just the same as the current from a galvanic battery might 
do. 

The influence of the mind over the body* and over all its 
organic functions is, therefore, as natural, and as necessary, 
as that of the body over the mind ; and quite as easy to un- 
derstand, providing we study the matter by the light of fact, 
and observation. 

The action of light upon certain parts of the body pro- 
duces thought, or feeling — just the same as it produces mere 
chemical changes when it acts upon other parts. For in- 
stance, when a person looks upon an object, a picture of that 
object is photographed, as it were, on to the retina of the eye. 
In other words, the rays of light from the object are pro- 
jected upon the eyeball, the same as they would be on to a 
lens, and there form an image of it. But the eye is con- 
nected with the brain, by the optic nerve, and the rays of light 
thus thrown into the eye act on that nerve, which transmits 
the impression to the brain, where it is converted into per- 
ception, or thought, as exhibited in a consciousness, or knowl- 
edge, of the object looked at. Thus light is converted into 
thought, or mind ; and so can heat be, or motion, or electri- 



320 THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAL FORCES. 



city, because they are all convertible into nervous force, 
which, going to the brain, exhibits itself as thought. 

The exhilarating effect of sunlight, after a dark and 
gloomy spell, is familiar to every one. The light, acting on 
the body, is converted into nervous force, and then into 
thought, or emotion. On such occasions, the whole being 
will seem to be suddenly changed ; dulness and low spirits 
being succeeded by joyous emotion, and the most vivid 
imagination. The light has, in fact, been changed into a 
new supply of nervous force, or mind, and emotional sensa- 
tion. 

Similar effects may follow warmth after cold, or may result 
from a brisk walk, and thus motion and heat are converted 
into nervous force, or mind and emotion! 

The electrical changes of the atmosphere also act in the 
same way ; sometimes making people sluggish and dull, and 
at others brisk and livety. 

The oxygen and ozone of the air we breathe, by the chem- 
ical changes they cause, also influence the amount of 
nervous fluid produced, and consequently, the amount of 
mind exhibited. Every one must have felt this, who has 
noticed the depressing effect of breathing a close, dull at- 
mosphere, and the sudden change on passing into the fresh, 
pure air. 

In these cases, the oxygen and ozone of the air, acting on 
the bodily fluids and gases, cause chemical changes, which 
originates electricity ; and this, transmitted to the brain, is 
then changed into thought and emotion, or mind. 

Many curious speculations might be made upon this fact ; 
and, if I make'one here, it is only for the purpose of better 
illustrating the subject. 

Thus it can be shown, strange as it may seem, that a man's 
mind— that is, his thoughts and emotions — at a given time, 
may be merely the sunlight of millions of years ago, repro- 
duced in the form of nervous force. 

Suppose, for instance, that a gas-jet suddenly shines upon 
a man who has been long in the dark — what follows ? Why, 
he then sees objects wfrich he did not before, and conse- 
quently, has thought and emotion excited about them ; or, in 
other words, mind is produced by the light, as before ex- 
plained. But the gas which gives the light is produced by 
distilling coal, and coal is the product of vegetation which 
existed perhaps millions of years ago. Now, the growth of 
plants results directly from the action of sunlight, which 
decomposes the carbonic acid of the air, in the cells of the 
plant, and deposits the carbon in the solid form, as wood. 
Every vegetable growth, from the smallest moss to the 
mightiest tree, is produced in this way. 



THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAL FORCES. 321 



The sunlight is tranformed into chemical force, which is 
stored up in the form of solid wood, and this is afterwards 
converted into coal. When the gas produced from that coal 
is burnt, we have the light of the sun, which shone perhaps 
a million years ago, reproduced, in another form. But the 
light, as we have shown, may produce thought and emotion, 
or mind, ( and thus the sunlight of past ages m^y be changed 
into mind in this ! 

The heat, electricity, or motion, produced by the combus- 
tion of that coal, and the chemical changes it gives rise to, 
may also produce similar effects ; and thus it will be seen 
how light, heat, motion, electricity, and nervous influence, 
are continually changed into, and connected with each 
other, every moment, everywhere, from the remotest periods 
down to the present day, and in all future days. 

It will, therefore, be seen, that thought, feeling, emotion, or 
mind, as we term it comprehensively, is not something dis- 
tinct from, and independent of matter, but is intimately con- 
nected with, and dependent upon it ; the same as electricity, 
light, or heat. It is, in fact, merely one form of that univer- 
sal agent which pervades all nature, and which is ordinarily 
exhibited to us as light, heat, electricity, or motion ; but, 
when exhibited through the medium of nerve matter, shows 
itself as thought and feeling, or mind I 

This explanation is necessary, before it can be understood 
how mind originates from the action of matter, and how it 
may act, in return, as a positive medical agent, the same as any 
material substance. 

We all know how the mind will sustain the body, and how 
high resolve, and firm determination, will give more power, 
and endurance, to the feeble and delicate, than is possessed 
by the strong and robust. In numerous instances of ship- 
wreck, and other accidents, where men have been exposed to 
terrible hardships, this fact has been strikingly shown. Very 
often a weak, tenderly reared, perhaps sick and feeble of- 
ficer, has been known to endure more, and last longer than, 
the strong, rough men. In many such cases, he has even 
had to encourage them, to set an example of energy, and 
determination to struggle to the last, and never to despair. 
This is the result of education, which, by judicious and sys- 
tematic training, strengthens the mind, by developing the 
brain. In such cases, the officer has that wonderful galvanic 
battery, the brain, well-developed ; and, from that, his system 
could draw supplies of nervous force, enough to keep it go- 
ing for a long time without food. 

The immense importance of mind, in carrying a person 
safely through disease, and suffering, is also well known. 
Confidence, and a firm determination, or will, are more effec- 



322 THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAL FORCES. 



tive than any medication, in sustaining a sick person through 
a crisis ; while fear, or despair, will make him inevitably fail 
in spite of all that can he done. In the one case, there is 
plenty of nervous influence, or mind, and in the other, it is 
deficient. 

A sudden powerful emotion, or vivid thought, may give an 
instantaneous impulse to the system, like. that from a violent 
electric shock, causing the most astonishing results. A 
Spanish gentleman once told me a remarkable case of this 
kind. A friend of his, an Englishman, who lived with him 
in Peru, had the utmost terror of earthquakes, which were 
very frequent and violent there. This man was attacked by 
inflammatory rheumatism, and was made by it completely 
helpless. His joints were swelled, and so painful, that mo- 
tion was torture to him- He could not rise, and had laid 
bedridden for ten months, with no prospect of getting bet- 
ter. One day, without a moment's notice, there came a vio- 
lent shock of earthquake, accompanied by a loud, rumbling 
noise. The house heaved up so much, that the bed on which 
the Englishman lay, was overturned, but not with him in it ; 
for the moment the motion was felt, up he sprang, rushed 
out of doors, and ran for near half a mile in his shirt ! He 
recovered the use of his limbs from that moment, and never 
felt a trace of the rheumatism afterwards. Now this was 
simply the result of the powerful nervous shock, from the 
brain, produced by his fright. His mental battery was pow- 
erfully excited, and sufficient nervous fluid was sent forth to 
work a cure at once. 

Numerous similar instances are on record, where many, 
who have been cripples for years, have thrown away their 
crutches while under the influence of powerful emotion, and 
have run, or leaped, as if nothing had ever been the matter 
with them. 

One instance was related to me, in Scotland, of a mother, 
who had been two years a cripple from hip disease. She 
could just drag herself round by the aid of her crutches, 
and one summer day, to enjoy the sun, had managed to 
reach a seat in the garden, overlooking the river, which ran 
through a meadow, close to the garden hedge. While sit- 
ting there she saw her little grandson, about seven years old, 
who was playing by the bank of the river, suddenly fall in, 
and with a loud scream sink under the water. 

In an instant she sprang up, ran to the h3dge, got over 
some how, and leaped into the water, which was up to her 
chin. As he came up again she seized him, dragged him 
out, and carried him into the house ! As she said herself, 
she could not tell, nor imagine, how she did it ; and if any one 
had told her, before, that it was possible, she could not have 



THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAL FORCES. 323 



believed them. She never used the crutches again, nor suf- 
fered from anything more than a little stiffness in the hip. 
No inconvenience whatever followed her wetting. 

Now, if this lady had been simply wet through, by a 
shower, or had even got her feet damp, in the ordinary way, 
her disease would have been made much worse ; as it often 
had been by such causes. But here she was wet through, 
and remained for nearly half an hour with her wet clothes 
on, caring for the child, and no bad effects whatever fol- 
lowed ! 

The reason was simply this : her menial excitement was so 
great, that the brain emitted nervous power enough to 
Maintain every function in full action through it all, and 
surplus enough to cure her into the bargain. 

Exposure to wet and cold seldom hurt, unless the person 
is exhausted or low spirited. With plenty of energy, and a 
joyful mind, such things can be suffered with impunity. 

Persons who thoroughly enjoy themselves, and whose 
minds are active, are seldom injured by being wet, or cold, 
at pic-nics or other merry makings. But those of the party 
who are low-spirited, and take no interest in it, are sure to 
suffer, because their minds do not act to sustain their bodies. 

Depression of mind is one of the chief causes of liability to 
disease, because it checks the production of nervous fluid 
by paralyzing the brain. And this explains why drunken 
men, and crazy people, will go unhurt through what would 
be almost sure death to others. Idiots, it is well known, 
never natch cold, nor suffer from atmospheric or other 
changes, like sane people. 

In these cases the brain produces enough nervous influ- 
ence for ordinary use, and there is no mental depression to 
paralyze it. 

Hypochondriacs, on the contrary, are preternaturally sen- 
sitive to all hurtful influences. Their mental depression makes 
the brain torpid, and it secretes too little nervous fluid. A 
powerful mental shock will often cure such people at once. 

Persons who pass dull, monotonous lives, without change, 
unless they are of sluggish temperaments, are peculiarly- 
liable to a variety of complaints. Not only are they apt to 
become nervous, and be subject to various mental and moral 
peculiarities, but digestion, and other functions, may also 
become seriously impaired. 

The explanation of this is simple. In such cases the 
nervous current is nearly exclusively directed in certain 
channels, or to certain organs, till they become wearied, 
while others are left deficient, till they become impaired for 
want of sufficient use. 

The proper remedy, in such cases, is change, new scenery, 






324 THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAL FORCES. 

new occupation, new thought and emotion. Something to 
stimulate the brain, and to send the nervous current more 
forcibly into the unused channels. In other words, we 
must act through the mind ! And it is, in fact, principally 
in this way that travelling, or change of any kind, does 
"benefit. 

The change of air alone is often beneficial, beyond doubt ; 
but in a vast number of instances it will do but little good 
if the patient is not interested; that is, if the mind is 
not brought into play. Very often, indeed, where no in- 
terest is excited, the patient is only wearied, and made 
worse. 

Fresh thoughts, and emotions are, therefore, the most pow- 
erful medical agents we possess, in a vast number of cases ; 
and it is indispensible to ascertain the state of mind, and 
feeling, of a patient before administering medicine. If the 
patient suffers from continued cares and anxieties, from ap- 
prehension, ungratified longing, or any emotion too long 
continued, both mind and body are certain to become derang- 
ed ; and so continue -till the cause is removed. 

Mere dulness even, from want of suitable occupation and 
pursuits, will cause serious disease, both mental and bodily, 
and much of the prevailing ill health, among certain classes, 
is due to this cause alone. 

Many women are chafed, and worried, by stupid conven- 
tional restraints, which either force them to be idle, or to 
busy themselves only with what they despise. These per- 
sons often fret themselves to death. 

Others, whose minds are of small calibre, and whose 
education has been of the common, frivolous kind, fall into 
a spiritless, listless state, simply because they are incapable 
of taking an interest in anything. They know nothing, and 
have never had the desire to know awakened in them. 

Such persons are perpetually wretched themselves, and a 
constant cause of misery and discomfort to all around them. 
They always need entertaining, but can never be entertained ; 
and they are always regular patients, from whom all the dif- 
ferent practitioners take fees in their turn. 

No good can ever be done, in such cases, unless there be 
brain enough, in a healthy state, to produce active thought 
and exertion, and something can be done to bring it into 
play ! It is inert mind here that makes the invalid, and active 
mind only can effect a cure. 

Man}^ such women have been cured by becoming mothers, 
and thus having natural feelings and cares aroused. Others 
have been saved by a sudden reverse of fortune, compelling 
thought and exertion of a new order. But if there be not 
healthy brain enough to produce sufficient nerve power, or 



THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAL FORCES. 325 



mind, there is nothing to operate upon, and the patient can- 
not be benefited. 

An idiot is much more fortunate, because he has not mind 
enough to worry with, while these women have just suffi- 
cient to fidget with, and to feel discontent, but not enough 
to cause exertion. 

The frivolous votaries of fashion, from being continually 
subject to periods of feverish excitement, alternating with 
others of listless idleness, while violating all the laws of 
physical health, are subject to a peculiar class of complaints. 
Such women suffer from a continual neurosis, and exhibit a 
peculiar idiosyncracy, which points them out to the experi- 
enced physician at once. Their condition is shown, by cer- 
tain well marked signs, as clearly as that of a person suf- 
fering from any other well-known diseased condition. 

The physician knows at once what is the matter with them, 
and he knows what special derangements to look for. He 
knows also, full well, that he can do no. good, unless the vic- 
tim is capable of, and disposed to, a complete change of life. 
Such patients are troublesome, and therefore they must pay 
well, and they are always on hand! 

During the American war, I was once troubled with a 
patient, a man, who was on the point of committing suicide, 
from simple listlessness, and want of something in which to 
take an interest. 

He was not without natural capacity, and had a good 
physique, but had never been brought up to do anything ; 
and so, having neither occupation, nor hobby, and, unfortun- 
ately, a sufficient income to live on in idleness, he was liter- 
ally bored to death !. 

He had, in imagination, every complaint under the sun ; 
and of course nothing I could do for him, or say to him, did 
him the slightest good. One day he told me seriously, that 
he certainly should blow his brains out! 

Being thoroughly tired of the man, and knowing that it 
was only through the mind, he could be cured, if at all, I 
said to him, quite coolly, that it seemed the only thing to be 
done! "But," said I further, "why trouble to shoot your- 
self? Your country now needs men to fight her battles, and 
you might just as well go and let one of the enemy shoot you ; 
your death then would be of some service perhaps, if it was 
only in saving a better man ! V 

Well ! that touched him a little, and he went at once and 
enlisted ; and I saw him march off, a few days after, for the 
field of battle. 

Other cases drove him completely out of my head, when 
some two years after, a bronzed, hearty-looking fellow, with 
his arm in a sling, walked into my office, and in a loud, 



326 THE NERVOUS POWER AND THE NATURAE FORCES. 



cheerful voice called out, "Halloa, Doctor; how do you 
do ? Do you know me ? " 

At first I did not know him, he was so changed ; but it 
really was my old patient, who had been so set on suicide. 
He was evidently completely changed ; and I felt curious to 
hear his history since we had last met, and he related it. 

" When I left you, doctor," said he, " my only wish was 
to get into a fight as soon as possible, and have the thing 
over. Just at that time, you remember, matters were pretty 
well hurried, we were short of men, and therefore but little 
time was spent in drill . Myself and.a few others being incor- 
porated with an old regiment, pretty well thinned, we were 
soon at work. In three weeks after you last saw me, we 
were drawn up in front of the enemy, and I found myself 
where I had so long wanted to be. 

" After firing for awhile we were ordered to charge, and 
at it we went. As yet I was unhurt, and had felt but little 
excitement from the shooting. The idea came across my 
mind that nothing would happen to me, and that I should 
have all the trouble and bother for nothing ; but just then 
one of the enemy dashed at me with his bayonet." 

"And you stood still, to let him drive it through you," 
said I. 

" Not a bit of it," said he. " Directly I saw the cold steel, 
driving straight at my breast, I jumped aside, and brought 
down the butt of my own gun on his head ! He fell like a 
log ; but at the same instant another fellow gave me a sharp 
prod, right through the thigh. Oh I how it hurt, especially 
when he pulled it out again ! Didn't I feel mad, though ? 

" I never remember having my dander up so before ; and 
the way Tie went down, too, was a caution. My blood was 
up now, and you better believe I laid about me to some pur- 
pose. I felt a darned sight more like killing than being 
killed, and my comrades told me afterwards that I shouted 
and fought like a madman ! 

" That wound laid me up for some time ; but no thoughts 
of suicide ever came across my mind after that affair, nor 
have they since. In fact," said he, "I have found something 
to do, and am a new man altogether. At present my arm is 
broken ; but when well, I am going back again to see the 
war through, unless used up first. Afterwards, if spared, it 
is my intention to make one in some settlement out west, 
where there will be plenty to do, with a fair chance of being 
scalped." 

The man was perfectly cured. All he needed was some- 
thing to rouse him, to bring mind and feeling into vivid action ; 
and he found it. He might have killed himself ; but when it 
came to letting himself be quietly hurt, and perhaps killed. 



THE PHILOSOPHY OF HOBBIES. 327 



by another; it was a different thing. As he said Mmself : 
Not a bit of it! that was another affair altogether. 

Intense mental excitement will overcome hunger, thirst, 
fatigue, and even torture. In all probability many unfortu- 
nate victims of cruelty, in bygone ages, have in this way 
been enabled to sustain the awful trials to which they were 
subject. 

A sudden and powerful emotion, or mental shock, has 
been known to sober a drunken man, at once ; and, on the 
other hand, men have taken enormous quantities of liquor, 
and even opium, with impunity, while under strong emo- 
tional influence, or mental excitement. * 

A sudden impression on the mind has often changed a per- 
son's whole bodily and mental condition, sometimes for the 
better, and sometimes for the worse. In many instances 
bad news, frights, joy, and rage, have suddenly caused fits, 
paralysis, insanity, and even lameness, blindness, and deaf- 
ness. At other times those suffering from these afflictions 
have been just as suddenly cured, by the same causes. 

The beneficial effects of laughter, and & joyous mind, upon 
digestion, and the peristaltic motion, are well known. I 
once knew a confirmed dyspeptic, in New York, completely 
cured by going almost daily to see the celebrated Fox, in his 
comic pantomimes ! 

"The very first time I went," said he to me, "I came 
away hungry, and enjoyed a good meal, which was followed 
by the only natural action of the bowels I had had a long 
time! And now, whenever I suffer from constipation, a 
dose of Fox always relieves me. I consider him the best 
physician in the city ! " 

This effect of laughter, in stimulating the action of the 
bowels, the kidneys, and the skin, has often been observed, 
and it is easily explained. Joyous laughter is a state of ex- 
hilaration, in which the brain is charged to its fullest capa- 
city almost, and the mind literally overflows ; there is nervous 
fluid enough for all purposes, and to spare. 

But contrast this with care, anxiety, or dissatisfaction — 
then you have the very reverse ! 

The Philosophy of Robbies. 

In the preservation of health, or the cure of disease, 
through the influence of the mind, especial notice should be 
taken of the benefit to be derived from Hobbies ; the impor- 
tance of which can scarcely be exaggerated. 

No matter how much a man is overworked mentally, or 
how he may be harassed and worried, if he can only betake 
bimselt often enough, with a relish, to some hobby pursuit, 



328 



THE PHILOSOPHY OF HOBBIES. 



he is all safe. No matter what it is, hut it is "better some- 
thing to do with the hands, something to make, over which 
he can whistle, or sing! One of England's greatest states- 
men recuperates himself at carpentering, and works at it 
with the greatest zest. With his shirt-sleeves turned up, 
and a paper cap on his head, humming some merry tune, 
while he plies his saw and plane, he fully recovers the tone 
of his mind, and prepares himself for new efforts. 

Some of these men are jewellers, and make little articles 
of bijouterie to give to their friends. Some make clocks, 
or machinery, while others are gardeners or sportsmen. 
Every man should have something of the kind— some hobby 
to ride — which will take him away from his usual business, 
or avocation, and make him forget his cares and his worries. 
But it must be something in which he takes a real interest, 
and into which he can throw himself heart and soul, for the 
time being. If he can do this, he unbends the bow, the wearied 
faculties recover their power ; and the troubles that had 
seemed too heavy to bear he soon makes light of. 

As I said before, it is not much matter what a man does ; 
but something for the hands to be busy with is best, even if 
it be carving cherry stones, or making toys for the children. 

If a person's usual business is sedentar} r , an active, even 
hard-working hobby may be best ; but it must always be 
ridden with pleasure, and must thoroughly engage the attention, 
so that nothing else can be thought of. * 

English business men, in this respect, act much more ra- 
tionally than Americans, as a general rule. They occupy 
themselves less time with business, and leave it more com- 
pletely when they do leave it. Most of them have their 
hobbies, or they retire to their houses, or their clubs, forget 
business entirely, and enjoy themselves. 

The American business man, on the contrary, as a general 
rule, scarcely ever has a hobby, outside his business. He 
remains at his business perpetually ; never leaves it if he 
can help it, and never ceases thinking about it. He has 
little quiet home enjoyment, because his mind is never calm 
enough for it ; and if he takes any amusement it must 
be something exciting, and probably aided by exciting 
drink. 

The consequences of such a life are, a feverish state of the 
nervous system, a feeble and imperfect action of all the or- 
ganic functions, constant dyspepsia, and early death ; often 
preceded by insanity, and effected by suicide. 

Any one familiar with the condition of business men, in 
the great cities of America, \vill say that this picture is not 
exaggerated, so far as the great mass of them are concerned. 
There arc some pleasing exceptions, it is true, but they arc 



THE PHILOSOPHY OF HOBBIES. 329 



very few ; and they are generally regarded, by their fast-liv- 
ing compatriots, as slow, or perhaps even a little cracked. 

The thorough-going, driving, business man, simply uses 
his mind to burn up his body, and he often works for this 
end with such energy, that he wears out both long before 
their natural time. The Englishman of leisure, on the aver- 
age, lasts much longer, and enjoys himself more, than the 
American man of business, simply because he has less of one 
thing, and relieves the strain on his mind by change. This is 
a matter on which I can speak from considerable experience ; 
and I must here tell all the feverish, nervous, dyspeptic, im- 
potent victims of fagging, that medical treatment is of no 
earthly use to them. They must first treat the mind ration- 
ally, give it rest and change, and create for themselves an in- 
terest in something outside of the eternal business. How 
many of these men I have seen, feeble in body, sick, but ex- 
citable, rushing round, sustaining themselves by whiskey 
and tobacco, and tottering on the very verge of insanity. 
They come to me for tonics, — to be strengthened, — and are 
anxious to take any amount of elixirs and renovators, or to 
do anything except resting ! this they cannot do. As I said 
to these gentlemen before, so I say now, — it is through the 
mind you have been made as you are, and you can be cured 
only through the mind. 

I knew one gentleman, a money-broker, in New York, who 
was quite a clever fancy joiner. He made most beautiful 
little caskets and boxes, in his leisure time, and he made lei- 
sure also for it. He had a partner just the contrary ; a man 
who had no idea about anything but stocks and commis- 
sions. In the first great business troubles, consequent on 
war, they became seriously involved, and were in daily danger 
of bankruptcy, but managed to struggle through. The 
partner, however, literally worried himself insane, and was 
for six months in an asylum. He recovered, and came back 
to his work, but a mere wreck of what he had been. Imme- 
diately after his return, he spoke with my friend about his 
past trouble, and asked him how he had escaped. 

"S -," said he, "I can't understand it; you worked 

harder than I did, I believe, and had much more at stake ; 
and yet you used to come every morning to the office quite 
fresh and ready for any amount of labor, while I was fit for 
nothing. And now, here you are just as, jolly as if there had 
been no trouble at all. I don't believe you even lost a night's 
sleep through all the crisis, while I often did not sleep for 

three or four nights together. What's the secret, S ? What 

do you take or do ?" 

" Well," said my friend, u you must come home with me 
to-day, after business is over, and I will tell you." 

28* 



330 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HOBBIES. 

He went with him away off into the country, to a plain, 
comfortable residence, with a good garden, chickens, three 
dogs, a serviceable pony, a neat, tidy, cheerful wife — well- 
dressed — but not too fashionable, and four hearty, laughing, 
romping children. They were received with a chorus of 
childish welcomes, and dog-barkings, which made the place 
ring again. The lady gave a hearty welcome, and promised 
them an early dinner, for which their ride had made them 
fully ready. 

u And now," said my friend, " for the secret ! Sere is part 
of it! There is plenty here to engage a man's attention, — if 
he will only interest himself in it,— and make him forget Wall 
street ! The only stock I bother myself with here is my stock 
of chickens, and my only commissions are those which my 
wife gets me to fill for her in the city. When I get here, on 
an afternoon, I shut right down on the office, and refuse to 
even think about business in any way. But this is not all. 
I have something special — a private recipe of my own, which 
I will now show you." 

He then took him into a large, pleasant room, fitted up as a 
carpenters shop, with a proper bench, and all kinds of tools 
nicely arranged on the walls. 

A number of beautiful little boxes and other articles were 
about, in various stages of progress, and some nicely fin- 
ished. 

"This," said he, u is my grand recipe ! There are the tools 
with which I kill blue devils, and drive away care. Nothing 
makes me so happy as to come here, turn up my shirt- 
sleeves, put on an apron, and go to work. You will scarcely 
believe it ; but, while so engaged, I can sing like a blackbird 
and whistle like a ploughboy. It will all seem very absurd 
perhaps, and you will think it a strange way for a business 
man to pass his time. But, I tell you what it is, old fellow, 
nothing but this saved me, during the crisis, from following you 
to the asylum ! During the worst of it I still took nry old 
course, left business behind me when 1 left Wall street, and 
came here to make boxes by the dozen, feed chickens, and 
have runs with the dogs and the children. While engaged 
here, I could thoroughly forget our difficulties, could sleep 
well after, and go fresh to the office next morning, ready for 
another hard day. This is what carried me through, and 
what makes me so jolly as you call it now." 

u And now, just tell me how you spent the time out of the 
office, while we were being so hard driven." 

u Me ? Oh ! that is soon told. I used to go home, take a 
"bottle of whiskey, some strong cigars, and sit down to calcu- 
late, and go all over the day's business again. Sometimes I 
used to go to Delmonico's, meet other brokers, and do a lit- 



THE PHILOSOPHY OF HOBBIES. 331 



tie business, or discuss matters. It was no use going to bed, 
for I could not sleep ! Often I have sat down at three or four 
o'clock in the morning, dozed a little in the chair, got up 
again, took a drink, and then went at the calculations again, 
till it was time to go to the office. You know what a state I 
used to come in, and you know how it ended. If you had 
been the same, the whole concern would have gone to the 
devil, and us with it." 

"Exactly," said my friend. "Well, here is the whole 
secret. My hobby saved me, and you had no hobby ! A busi- 
ness man must have a change ; something to draw him away 
from his business in his leisure hours, and allow him to re- 
cuperate." 

" Ah, S ! " said he, "I see it all plainly enough now ; 

but here is my misfortune. I was never allowed any hobby 
when young — in fact, never saw one — and am now too old 
for it. My father, as you know, killed himself by business ; 
. and I don't see that I can do anything else, but I'll try. One 
thing I am determined upon ; I shall get away from Thirty- 
second street into the country, if only for the sake of my 
boy. He shall have a hobby, if I had none ; and I am sick 
* and tired of this eternal party-giving fuss, and operatic howl- 
ing. It's all very well now and then, but as a constant thing, 
its an awful wearying bore. I shall delight Harry to-morrow, 
by telling him he is going into the country to have a dog, 
rabbits, pigeons, carpenter's shop, anything he likes, if he 
will only make a hobby of it, and I'll try to help him." 

Such an experience as this tells the whole tale. One man 
wore out his brain, and with it his whole, body also. The other 
used his brain in such a way as to keep it in health, and thus 
give him constant mental capability and bodily health at the 
same time. 

A gentleman from America, connected with one of the pub- 
lishing houses, had an invitation to visit a celebrated literary 
man at his own home, in the suburbs of London, and went 
expecting to find him, as he expressed it, hard at it ! And 
so he did ; but not in the way he had imagined. On his arri- 
val, and giving his card, the servant said: "Oh, yes sir; 

Mr. is expecting you, and said that when you came to 

please join him in the garden ;" at the same time opening 
the garden-gate, and pointing down one of the paths. The 
gentleman followed the indication g ; ven and soon found his 
literary friend hard at it, indeed ! With his coat off, his shirt- 
sleeves turned up, and a straw hat on his head, he was dig- 
ging away, with a" vigor that showed his muscles could be 
active as well as his brain ! It was a surprise, and also a les- 
son — "for," said he, "I found out by that visit how such 
men retain their health and vigor. Gardening was his hobby> 



332 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HOBBIES. 

and the pride with which he pointed out his well-trained 
fruit trees, and his vegetables, showed what a thorough in- 
terest he took in them. Instead of being a pale, sicMy stu- 
dent, the man was hearty and strong, and fully capable of * 
work, both with body and mind. 

A celebrated poet takes his relaxation with an axe, chop- 
ping wood, and often — as he expresses it — strikes out an 
idea with every chip ! 

Some men, for hobbies, take up with scientific pursuits, 
such as botany, mineralogy, or chemistry ; and, in England, 
many such men have become really eminent, in that which 
they pursued merely for amusement. 

If a man can take a thorough interest in a beetle, or a stone, or 
any other natural object, he is safe from nervous disease, or 
insanity, from over-application to business. 

This subject of hobbies has been dwelt upon at some 
length, because of its real importance. Hobbies are, in fact, 
of the greatest value, in the treatment of nervous and men- 
tal disease, and may be truly called called the best of mental 
tonics. 

Women, unfortunately, have fewer hobbies of a really, 
healthy kind than men. Many things which they would like 
to do, they must not do, for fear of Mrs. Grundy. And 
even when they are allowed to act, it is with so many re- 
straints, and impediments, as to make what they do of little 
value. 

Most of their amusements are indoors, sedentary, and too 
much like their usual pursuits. They are, therefore, ^iot 
exhilarating, and bring no new faculties into play. This is 
one reason why nervous disorders are more difficult to cure, 
in women, than in men. Their imperfect education has 
given them no intelligent interest, in any natural objects, 
or scientific investigations ; and the frivolities with which 
they do busy themselves, either as duties or amusements, 
soon weary them, from their very insipidity. 

If a woman cannot pleasantly occupy herself, in duties 
suitable to her nature, and is incapable of taking rational in- 
terest in other matters, interesting to the whole race, she is 
sure to be nervous and unhappy. Such women are fidget}', 
full of whims, and always sick. They can seldom be bene- 
fited, because, from the imperfect development of their 
brains, there is not mind enough to bring into play. Medi- 
cine is of no use, and nothing can be done but to let them 
fidget their lives away as quietly as possible. 

English ladies, as a rule are more active, and occupy 
themselves more out of doors than American ladies. They 
garden more and walk more, and many of them are enthu- 
siastic naturalists. This makes them, as a rule, stronger, 



PHILOSOPHY OF REST. 333 



more healthy, and longer lived ; they also conserve their 
youthful appearance much longer. 

The climate is, of course, more unfavorable to American 
ladies, and makes out-door pursuits, for much of the year, 
too unpleasant. But custom is a worse enemy, to most of 
them, than climate. Absurd notions of gentility and respect- 
ability prevent them from doing much which they could do ; 
and, generally, they prefer to be sickly, feeble, and nervous, 
and so please Mrs. Grundy, rather than be strong and healthy 
at the risk of offending her. 

But women, everywhere, sadly need pursuits out of the 
line of their usual duties. They need hobbies, in fact ; and it 
is for want of them that female nervous disorders are so 
generally incurable. Educate them better, develop their 
brains in a more healthy manner, and they will be less liable 
to nervous disorders. By having more mind to act upon, 
they can also be treated more beneficially when treatment is 
necessary. 

Philosophy of Best, 

JRest is another matter of great importance, in the treat- 
ment of nervous derangements. Many people have a wrong 
idea as to what rest is. They fancy that complete rest is the 
same thing as complete idleness, or doing nothing ; which is 
often one of the most tiresome things a man can have to en- 
dure. This is why many men, who retire, as they call it, 
from business, and indulge in perfect idleness, find it so 
terribly wearisome that they rush back to business again, as 
a relief. 

True rest can be found, in most cases, only in change of oc- 
cupation! not in idleness. And the change must be to some- 
thing different, entirely different, to that which has caused 
the weariness, or fatigue. 

A man thoroughly tired with bodily work rests by being 
still, and can enjoy quiet reading, talking, or even simply 
musing. But the man who is wearied with study, with 
mental work, wants to use his muscles, to walk, run, or be 
active in some way. Bodily exertion is rest to him. 

This is the philosophy of the hobby again. Riding one is 
the best rest, because it is a change, and brings a fresh set of 
faculties into play. 

A good deal of injustice is done, in legislation, and by the 
pressure of social custom, from people thinking of rest only 
from their own point of view, or from their own experience. 
Thus, business men, who have been worried and harassed 
all the week, and hard-working men, who are thoroughly 
tired with six days' labor, like to spend the Sunday in per- 



334 PHILOSOPHY OF BEST. 



feet quiet, and doing nothing. This is rest to them, and 
they enjoy it. But they often forget that there are others, 
following dull sedentary occupations, perhaps under 
most unhealthy and depressing conditions, to whom a day 
of forced idleness, and perfect quiet, is no rest at all ! On 
the contrary, such a day as a thorough Puritan Sunday may 
be, to such people, more wearisome to get through than all 
the previous six. 

These people want, on their day of rest, to run about, to 
go off on their country trips, to enjoy the society of their 
friends in pleasant gardens, and to visit museums, and 
places of amusement, as they do in Europe. It is simple 
tyranny to compel them to pass their day of rest in a way 
that gives them no rest. 

I have often heard poor workmen, closely confined all the 
week to sedentary occupations, complain bitterly about this. 
"Call it a day of rest," said one once to me; "why lam 
tired to death of it, long before it is over, and would often 
prefer to be at the shop." 

This is a matter that really concerns the public health, 
and it should be considered merely in reference to that. 

All should be allowed to rest in the way they need to, un- 
der proper regulations ; and surely all could do so without 
interfering with one another. I have often noticed on a 
Sunday, in Germany, all the churches open, and also the 
concert-rooms, gardens, gymnasiums, and theatres. Each 
one went to which he preferred, and some went to all of 
them. In other words, each person rested, and took his re- 
laxation in the way that suited him best. There was no con- 
fusion, no disturbance, but real heart} 7 -, healthy enjoyment 
all round. 

Country rambling, especially when there is some taste for 
botany, or other branch of natural history, is one of the very 
best kinds of rest, and enjoyment, to a vast number of people, 
and every encouragement and facility should be given to it, 
by cheap steamboats, and railroad trains. 

I remember an old farmer once telling me, in the greatest 
astonishment, of the doings of a party of poor tailors one 
Sunday, on his farm. They had strolled away from the 
town, delighted to have a chance to stretch their legs, and 
breathe fresh air, and run and jump about. In the course 
of their perambulations they came to a place where the old 
farmer had hauled a lot of stones, and begun to build them 
up into a stone wall, round his field. Well, it struck the 
poor fellows that it must be great fun, to lift and haul stones, 
and build them up into a wall ; and at it they went, each 
one trying to build more and better than the other ! " Would 
you believe it, sir," said the old farmer, " they toiled away 



PHILOSOPHY OF BEST. 335 



there for hours, and were laughing, shouting, and singing 
all the time like crazy fellows ? " 

The farmer never thought that the tailors were resting, but 
they were. After six days' sitting cross-legged on a board, 
ia a stifling atmosphere ; four or five hours' active exertion, 
in the bright sun, and pure air, was real rest and thorough 
enjoyment ! 

But the farmer, who had had six days at the stone wall, 
took his rest on Sunday by smoking his pipe, and dozing in 
his arm-chair, or at church. 

Now in such cases it is a gi'oss wrong, and a great evil, to 
force all to observe one rule in regard to rest. People have 
different requirements in this respect, according to their 
natures and their occupations, and all have the same rights 
in the matter. 



i 



CHAPTER XXVIII. 



REMARKS ON THE NtJTRITION OF THE BODY, AND 
ON THE SOURCE OF THE SECRETIONS. 

It is well known by all who have even a slight knowledge 
of physiology, that the whole organization is perpetually 
changing ; every part constantly wastes away, and is, dur- 
ing health, as constantly renewed. Certain vessels ealled 
the absorbents take up the old matter and convey it away, 
while from other sources new matter takes its place. No 
part, except portions of the teeth, escape this constant 
change, so that during an ordinary life the whole body will 
have been, as it were, made over again many times. 

The Blood not the only Source of New Material. 

It was formerly thought that all the parts of the body, 
and all the secretions, normal or abnormal, were formed 
directly from the blood. This fluid was said to contain all 
the elements, of every kind, needed to repair the waste, or 
support the existence, of every organ, and to form all the 
secretions. Disease was thought to arise almost solely from 
imperfect, or impure blood, by which the various parts were 
either imperfectly nourished or poisoned. Hence arose all 
that class of medicines used for purifying the blood, and for 
making it richer in quality, or greater in quantity. 

The blood, it was thought, produced everything ; not only 
all the solids and fluids which form the body itself, but also 
all its secretions as well. The urine, the saliva, the bile, the 
pancreatic juice, the fat, the perspiration, and in fact every- 
thing else, was supposed to be directly derived only from 
the blood. 

Latterly, however, many physiologists, from a more care- 
ful study of the human economy, have disputed this, and 
with good reason. 

In fact, the more the matter is considered, the more impos- 
sible it seems, that the great variety of secretions formed in 
the body can all come from the blood. There are so many 

(336) 



NUTRITION, AND THE S7JCEETI0NS. 337 



of them, and their collective amount is so great, that the 
blood could neither form them all, nor maintain them. Be- 
sides, many of them contain matters not found in the blood, 
and occasionally they are formed in such immense quantities, 
suddenly, that the blood, if they came from it, would be en- 
tirely changed in a short time. No such entire change, how- 
ever, ever does take place in the blood, which is very rarely 
much different one time from another. 

Take the instance of a sudden and profuse perspiration, 
or copious and continued flow of urine, and it will be seen 
how impossible it is for them to be derived directly from 
the blood. Such an immense amount of mere water is often 
thus discharged, by the skin, or kidneys, that, if it came 
from the blood, that fluid would be left too thick to flow ; 
whereas it is scarcely changed at all, in fluidity, by such 
discharges, however copious they may be. But it is not 
only water that is removed by the urine and perspiration, 
since these fluids contain various kinds of salts, and much 
organic matter ! So much, in fact, of both, that if it all came 
from the blood the composition of that fluid would be entire- 
ly changed, by the loss. Such, however, is never the case, 
for the composition of the blood is almost identical, at all 
times, even after the most abundant and varied secretions 
have been formed. 

The amount of uncombined, oily, and watery fluids, and of 
gases, contained in the body, is enormous, far too great, in 
fact, to come from the blood. Between all the muscular 
fibres, as well as between the muscles themselves — between 
all the joints, and filling all the spaces not occupied by the 
organs themselves, we find these fluids and gases. It is by 
them that the viscera are kept asunder, and enabled to move 
freely about without pressing on each other. They consti- 
tute, in fact, the cushions, rollers, and springs, which cause 
all the various parts to work smoothly, and without friction, 
or jar. 

The blood is not taxed to produce these uncombined fluids 
and gases, nor to form fat, which is simply stored up mate- 
rial, which nature decomposes, when needed, and re com- 
poses into various substances. 

The Secretions not all derived directly from the Blood. 

It seems most probable that the blood forms the substance 
of the secreting organs themselves, as it does of the body 
generally, but not the secretions which these organs pro- 
duce. 

Thus fat is formed, by a peculiar membrane called the 
adipose tissue, from the uncombined fluids and gases of the 



29 



338 NUTKXTION. AND THE SECRETIONS. 



body ; but the membrane itself, which does the work, is 
formed from the blood. And such is the case, probably 
with many, if not all, of the other secretions, and their 
organs. 

But then comes the question, from whence is the material 
of these secretions derived, if not from the blood ? Whence 
comes all the water, for instance, in perspiration and urine, 
and whence comes all the oily and other fluids used in lubri- 
cating the body ? To answer these questions we must explain 
the nature of these substances, and the chemical changes 
involved in their production. 

All these secretions, both fatty, oily, and watery, as well 
as most of the solids of the body, are composed of the same 
elements, nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen and carbon; and are 
all readily changed from one into the other. The greater 
part are formed of the three gases oxygen, hydrogen and 
carbon only, and many of them only of hydrogen and car- 
bon ; these are chiefly oily, or fatty substances. The watery 
fluids are composed of hydrogen and oxygen only. 

Nitrogen, though peculiarly an animal element, exists in 
smaller quantity in the body, and is, apparently, not so es- 
sential to the composition of the secretions. 

The three most essential elements are the gases, oxygen, 
hydrogen, and carbon, which exist in the body under various 
conditions, and are available in almost any required amount 
for the formation of the secretions, without the blood being 
taxed for that purpose. 

They can permeate the whole of the body in all directions. 
In every cavity and vessel they fill all the space not other- 
wise occupied ; but as no part is impervious to them, they 
pass through all the membranes and tissues, and meet and 
mix together everywhere. 

The particular manner in which they combine, in any part, 
depends upon the structure of the organ in which they meet. 
Thus the adipose tissue, or fat-f orming membrane, takes the 
Irydrogen, carbon, and sometimes oxygen, in such propor- 
tions as will form fat, while another organ, in the joints, 
takes the same elements, in other proportions, and forms oil 
from them. The perspiratory glands, on the contrary, select 
principally hydrogen and oxygen, and form a watery fluid 
from them. 

These three elements, oxygen, hydrogen and carbon, are 
the elements of air and water, and of all vegetables. There 
is, therefore, at all times, and in all circumstances, an 
abundance of them in and around our bodies, independent 
of the food we take. 

They no doubt enter through the skin from the external 
atmosphere ; we take them in with every breath, and with 



NUTRITION, AND THE SECRETIONS. 339 



every drop of water — which is only oxygen and hydrogen 
combined— and they are abundantly liberated by the de- 
composition of the vegetable and animal substances we eat. 

In short, the body is, in all parts, filled with these gaseous 
elements, as a sponge is filled with water, and from them 
every secretion can be formed, without anything being taken 
from the blood. 

This, however, is not all, for there is good reason to sup- 
pose that from these three gases, combined with other 
substances, also in the gaseous form, some of the most im- 
portant parts of the body are produced, and not from the 
blood ! 

My own opinion is that the more subtle portions of the 
brain, and of the nervous substance generally, are formed 
in this way, and only the grosser portion from the blood. 

Modern organic chemistry has done much for medicine, 
by showing how different substances act and react upon 
each other ; and how, by proper combination, we can mu- 
tually decompose them into the gases we want. 

Those who have not made such matters subjects of special 
attention, can scarcely imagine how subtle gaseous elements 
are, in their nature, and what minute portions of them can 
influence the matter they come in contact with. The very 
same gases, in slightly different proportions, form sub- 
stances totally different. 

Thus starch, sugar, and mere woody fibre, are composed of 
the same elements, oxygen, hydrogen and carbon, and are 
easily converted one into the other. Nitric acid (aquafortis) 
is composed of oxygen and nitrogen, the same elements as 
the air we breathe, only in different proportions. 

There is absolutely nothing in pure atmospheric air, but 
what is in pure aquafortis ; and by taking away a little 
oxygen, or adding a little nitrogen, the one is changed into 
the other. In the same way a little addition of any of these 
three gases may completely change the composition of the 
substance of the brain, spinal marrow, or nerves ; and any 
such change in substance changes entirely their action, and 
as their action changes so does that of all the organs on 
which they act. 

Thus we see that a small portion of a gas, such as we con- 
stantly breathe, drink, and eat, may reach the nervous 
centre, and through that affect the whole body. 

If we take away the bones, which merely serve us as a 
framework to support the soft parts, the great bulk of the 
body is composed only of the three gases oxygen, hydrogen, 
and carbon, and the nervous substance is almost entirely so. 
We therefore see what an important part these three ele- 
ments play. 



340 NUTRITION, AND THE SECRETIONS. 



It is remarkable also that some of the most powerful 
medical agents, and poisons, are composed of nothing but 
the same three ever-present gaseous elements. Some of 
these are so powerful, that a small portion of a single grain 
will cause instant death ! And yet there is nothing in them 
but what is naturally a part of the body itself. 

In short, the matter of which our bodies are made, the 
food that nourishes it, the medicines that cure it when dis- 
eased, and the poisons that kill it, are all composed of the 
same few gases, merely differently mixed, and each may be 
readily changed into the other. Thus food may become 
either medicine or poison; and drugs may either act as 
remedial agents, in curing disease of the body, or as poisons 
in destroying it. 

It should also be here remarked, that any portion of the 
substance of our bodies is not, necessarily, always either solid, 
fluid, or gaseous ; but may change from the one state to 
the other. In fact, these changes are constantly occurring, 
and often take place in the most rapid manner. The two 
gases, oxygen and hydrogen, meeting, in the proper propor- 
tions, in any part of the body, may, in a moment, combine 
and form water; or carbon and hydrogen may meet and 
form one of the oily fluids, which exist in all parts of the 
organization. 

Very little further change may form these fluids into solids, 
and these again may as readily decompose back again into 
fluids and gases. And it is these changes in chemical com- 
bination, it must be remembered, that cause all mental, 
moral, and bodily changes ; the whole being depends upon 
them. 

In its composition, and in the manner in which its ele- 
ments are combined, the brain, and nervous substance gener- 
ally, is different from any other part of the body. The bulk 
of it is a soft, semi-fluid mass, apparently loosely held to- 
gether, and therefore readily susceptible of change both in 
form and chemical composition. It also contains a large 
amount of uncombined gases, of various kinds, which no 
doubt assist materially in causing these changes, and thus 
nave an important influence over its action. 

My own conviction is, that these gases, permeating the 
substance of the great nervous centres, and filling the spaces 
between the convolutions of the brain, are the most im- 
portant agents we have to deal with, when we study the 
functions and diseases of this important organ. I believe 
that it is really from these gases that the nervous system de- 
rives much of its peculiar nutriment, perhaps as much 
as from the blood. I also think that those substances 
Which act most energetically upon the brain, in any way, do 



LIFE RESULTS FROM CHEMICAL CHANGE. 341 



80 only when they are in the gaseous state, and that those which 
cannofrbe made to assume the gaseous state, in the body, 
can have no direct effect upon the brain at all. Alcohol, 
for instance, decomposes in the body very rapidly, or be- 
comes gaseous, and mounts at once to the brain. The pecu- 
liar alkaloids of tea, and coffee, do the same ; and so in 
short do all those substances which act as stimulants, or 
narcotics. All those drugs, on the contrary, which do not 
decompose when taken, and become gaseous, have no direct 
effect at all on the brain and nerves. 

This is highly important to bear in mind, because upon 
this fact is based the whole theory of what is called Neuro- 
pathy, or the treatment and cure of disease by acting di- 
rectly through, and upon, the brain and nerves. 

The brain is the organ which elaborates thought, and from 
its action result all of what we call mental and moral mani- 
festations. This is the peculiar and special function of the 
brain ; and, as before remarked, there can no more be 
thought, or mind, without a brain, than seeing without an 
eye, or digestion without a stomach. 

Chemical O/iange the True Cause of Life — both Bodily and 
Mental. 

It has hitherto been supposed, unfortunately, that the va- 
rious functions carried on in a living body, such as digestion, 
nutrition, feeling, thinking, and so" forth, were due to a pe- 
culiar force, called the vital power, distinct from the ordinary 
natural forces that operate on what is called dead matter. 
This notion, which has led both physiologists and physicians 
astray, is now being abandoned by the most advanced inves- 
tigators. It is beginning to be perceived that every function 
of the living body— or, in other words — every vital process, is 
due only to chemical changes in the substance of the body, 
exactly like those which take place in what is called dead or 
inorganic matter. 

Digestion, nutrition, muscular action, thought, feeling, and 
all the other wondrous phenomena we call life, are simply 
the results of chemical transformations, exactly like those 
that the chemist effects in his laboratory. In fact, the living 
body is a laboratory, in which the various complicated chem- 
ical changes take place, resulting in what is called organic 
action, or life. 

The term, vital power, was invented merely as a cover for 
our ignorance ; and, like other similar inventions, it satisfied 
the mind till the real truth appeared. It has, however, been 
hurtful, by leading men astray, and making them satisfied . 
with attributing all vital phenomena to the mysterious action 



342 HEALTH, WHAT IS IT? 



of this unknown power, instead of trying to understand 
them as simple natural processes. Every new discovery de- 
creases the need of referring to this imaginary vital power, 
and points inevitably to the time when it will no longer be 
appealed to. 

In the treatment for the cure of disease, this vital power 
has always stood in the way ; especially in nervous and men- 
tal diseases. Men have been so afraid of a bugbear called 
materialism., that they dare not even think of life— especially 
sensational, and mental life — as being in any way connected 
with, or dependent upon, ordinary natural* agencies. And 
yet, this is what we must come to, if those things are ever to 
be understood, and rationally considered. We must not 
allow ourselves to be frightened at mere names, nor at the 
prospect of having to abandon old theories. Veneration 
should not stand in the way or investigation, nor belief blind 
us to facts, however opposed they may be to that belief. 

Health— What Is It? 

What we call health, both of body and mind, is merely a 
certain condition of the material substance of the body. 
Change that condition, in a certain way, and we have disease. 
Both states result from the action and re-action of the mat- 
ter of the body, and not from any mysterious power, or vital 
force, belonging only to living beings. And this is true, both 
of the body and the mind. To put this important point more 
plainly and forcibly, it may be well to compare the living 
body with an electric telegraph, the same as has been done in 
other chapters. When the telegraph does not work well, we 
know that something is wrong, either with the battery or 
the apparatus, and we do not expect it to work well again 
till everything is put right. It is not thought for a moment 
that the imperfect working, or disease of the telegraph, can 
possibly be caused, or cured, in any other way than through 
the apparatus itself. It is just so in regard to all the organs 
and functions of the human body. As regards their 6tate, 
whether of health or disease, a man is just as much a mere 
combination of chemical and mechanical forces, acting con- 
jointly, as is the electric telegraph. And this is as true of 
feeling, and thinking, as it is of digestion or locomotion. 
If you change a man's brain, by adding to it, or taking away 
from it, certain of the elements which enter into its compo- 
sition, you change that man morally and mentally. 

The way in which a man shall think, the way in which he 
shall feel, and the way in which he shall will, at any particu- 
lar moment, or on any given occasion, depends on the com- 
position and condition of his brain at that moment ; or, in 



HEALTH, WHAT IS IT? 343 



other words, a little more, or a little less phosphorus, or of 
one of the gases — oxygen, hydrogen, or carbon — in the sub- 
stance of his brain, decides for the moment his character as a 
mental and moral being. 

All the various forms of nervousness, hypochondria, ma- 
nia, and insanity result in this way from chemical changes in 
the substance of the brain ; and, if we could only know just 
what change had occurred, and could rectify it, the diseased 
condition would be remedied at once. Unfortunately, the 
subject has been too recently looked at in this light, and has 
been too little studied, for much to be known practically 
about the matter ; but every day is adding to our stock of 
facts, and giving us the results of new experiences, so that 
the future is full of promise. And if we only get rid of the 
idea that moral means only are proper, or efficacious, in many 
mental disorders, we shall soon arrive at better modes of 
treatment. It will some day be seen that hypochondria, 
eccentricity of character, perverted propensities, and much 
of what we call vice and crime, must be cured by the bodily 
physician, and not by the mere preacher or moralist. If a 
man has a morbid propensity to drink, or to licentiousness, 
it is useless to think of curing him by reason or persuasion 
alone. We might just as well expect to cure him of dyspep- 
sia by the same means, when his stomach is diseased. 

But, still mental, moral, and sensational influences, c?o oper- 
ate both upon mind and body, and forcibly too — as many of 
the illustrations already given have shown — but it is only 
through the medium of the chemical changes which they 
cause. 

The physician, or physiologist, cannot consider life, mind, 
or feeling, as something distinct from the body, or as having 
an independent existence. He can know nothing of life, 
or of mental, or moral being, separate from the bodily one. 
With him, life, mind, and feeling, intellect, or moral impulse, 
result from the action of certain organs, the same as do di- 
gestion, or locomotion, and he can study them only through 
the medium of those organs. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 

COMPOSITION OF THE HUMAN* BODY AND THE 
CHANGES IT UNDERGOES. 

People not familiar with these subjects, scientifically, are apt 
to suppose that the human body is made, at least in a great 
measure, of something very different from the ordinary dead 
matter around them. They think also that, as a general rule, 
solids remain solids ; fluids, fluids ; and gases, gases, always. 
But it is well known that there is nothing in the human body 
but what is found in other bodies, and in all the common ob- 
jects around us. The substance of all its different parts also, 
like matter everywhere, is continually changing ; — the solids 
becoming fluids, and the fluids gases, and back again inces- 
santly. In fact, these changes are necessary to its vital ex- 
istence, and it is upon them that all action depends, as al- 
ready shown. 

The parts most energetically active, and that perform the 
most subtle and essential functions, are so formed as to be 
extremely liable to change ; while the parts of secondary 
importance are more stable in the composition, and change 
less easily and rapidly. Thus the bones change very slowly, 
and the muscles more rapidly. 

The nervous substance, and especially the brain, changes 
the readiest. The firmest portion, as before remarked, is 
semi-fluid ; and it is permeated by fluids and gases, all of 
which are ready, under slight influences, to enter into new 
combinations, and thus change the character of the brain 
and mind. Every such change, no matter how slight, exerts 
an influence over the whole system ; because the action of 
every part, as before explained, depends upon the influence 
which it receives from the nervous centres, and the character 
of that influence depends upon the constitution of the nerv- 
ous substance. 

Bearing this jn mind, it will be no longer a mystery how a 
man can be instantly made sick, or killed, by a smell, or by 
breathing a poisonous vapor. He simply takes into his sys- 

(344) 



THE HUMAN BODY AND ITS CHANGES. 345 



tern a gas, which has the power to decompose — instantly — 
the fluids, or gases, of the brain ; and thus so changes the 
very substance of that organ, that it can no longer secrete, 
and transmit, the proper nervous influence. In this way, ty- 
phus, and yellow fever, and many other diseases, are con- 
veyed from one to another. ^But it is not only material 
agents that affect the nervous substance, and entirely change 
it in a moment. Changes of temperature will do it ; though 
more slowly ; and so "will electricity, much more rapidly. 
Many people are much affected by the electrical condition bf 
the atmosphere, or of their own bodies ; and, in many cases, 
electricity can take the place of the nervous current, and be 
the best curative agent we can use. 

But, besides all these influences, there are others not usu- 
ally taken account of, which are capable of changing the 
composition of the nervous substance, and paralyzing all 
brain-action in an instant, equally with the most deadly poi- 
sons. 

The mental and emotional influences are as real as physi- 
cal ones, and often quite as powerful. Long- continued 
grief, or apprehension, will destroy health and life as surely 
as slow poison, and a sudden fright, or fit of rage, may kill 
in an instant, as surely as a drop of prussic acid. 

These mental and emotional influences act just like elec- 
tric shocks, and cause real chemical changes in the substance 
of the brain. Just as an electric spark makes the two gases, 
oxygen and hydrogen, unite in a moment, and form water, 
so can such a shock as sudden fright, or rage, cause the 
gases and fluids of the brain to decompose, and enter into 
new combinations. And it is quite as possible that a poison- 
ous combination may take place, as any other, which explains 
why such violent passions are aften followed by insanity, 
paralysis, or death. 

In some persons the substance of the brain, and nerves, is 
less firm than in others, and more disposed to change ; such 
persons are very liable to contract certain diseases, and to 
suffer from violent emotions, or peculiar mental conditions. 
Other persons, on the contrary, are but little affected by 
such things, and always— as the proverb goes— take things 
easy! It is simply because their brains are differently con- 
stituted, and can resist influences to which others cannot 
help giving way. Many bad habits — the abuse of ardent 
spirits, for instance — often so change the composition of the 
brain, that the person becomes irritable, or dull, or even 
imbecile ; and, it must be remembered, that, if we only 
know what is proper to be cfcme, it is as possible to improve 
the brain, by proper medication, as it is to injure it by such 
habits. 



346 IMPEOVEMENT OF THE BEAD*. 



This is an important fact, and one which will be new to 
most people. Nevertheless, it is certain that the brain can 
be nourished, and improved, as surely as the muscles can be ; 
and it must be remembered that, when we improve the brain, 
and the nervous substance generally, we improve the whole 
S3'stem, since the perfect action of every part depends upon 
its receiving proper nervous influence. 

Nourishment and Improvement of the Brain. 

The fact that perfect action, of every part, depends upon 
perfect action in the nervous organs, and that we can nourish 
and improve the nervous organs, or act upon them medically, 
the same as we can other parts, is one of the main points in 
Neuropathic practice. 

Avast number of diseases, especially. chronic ones, and 
those usually called nervous, result simply from a feeble 
condition of the brain and spinal marrow. There is simply 
not nervous power enough secreted to keep all the organs 
going ; and either the whole system is debilitated, or some 
particular organs act feebly. Now, in such cases, if we can 
strengthen and improve the nervous system, we improve all 
the rest ; and if we cannot do this, we can do no good at all. 

If, for instance, a man has been thinking too much, or 
has been harassed by care, till his nervous system is enfee- 
bled, he will either be run down, as we commonly say, that 
is, generally weak, or some particular function will be im- 
perfectly performed. Most usually such a man becomes 
dyspeptic ; and he is commonly given tonics, to improve his 
appetite and digestion, from the idea that the stomach is 
diseased or weak. But the fault is in the feeble state of the 
brain and nerves ; and till these are strengthened and im- 
proved, no tonics in the world can do his stomach any good. 
Give such a man no strengthening medicines, as they are 
called, but send him away from his mental work, or his 
cause of care ; let him travel, and mix with agreeable com- 
pany, under new influences, and he will soon recover, if the 
nervous exhaustion has not gone too far ; or let him ride 
some pleasant hobby, as already advised. 

It is only in extreme cases, where the brain is too much 
enfeebled, and its composition radically changed, that medi- 
cines are needed, and then they should be neuropathic ones, 
such as readily assume the gaseous state, and which are 
calculated to nourish and improve the nervous substance ; the 
ordinary tonics and alteratives, in such cases, often make 
matters much worse. # 

Feeble organic action, of any kind, is seldom a local dis- 
ease ; that is, it does not depend upon anything wrong in 



IMPROVEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 347 



the organ itself, but it results merely from deranged nervous 
influence, as before explained. The organ gets either too 
much, or too little, nervous power, and therefore acts imper- 
fectly ; there is something wrong with the nervous centre, or 
with the nervous cord ; and till that, is put right, no local 
treatment can do any real good. The proper course, there- 
fore, is to find out what is wrong in the nervous system, and 
correct that. 

But all such corrections can be effected only by neuro- 
pathic treatment, and neuropathic remedies, which act di- 
rectly upon the nervous system itself. 

Here, then, is the whole theory of what is called neuro- 
pathy ! It acts through the medium of the nervous system 
only, on which the action of every part depends ; the reme- 
dial agents are all such as act directly on the nervous cen- 
tres, and are either mental or moral, electrical, or medici- 
nal ; the medicines being such as are capable of becoming 
gaseous, and in that form being absorbed and assimilated 
with the nervous substance. 

The particular agents to be used, in any case, must, of 
course, be determined by judgment, and experience, though 
there are some which are applicable to nearly all cases of 
simple, enfeebled nervous action, or a weak and impoverished 
state of the brain. 

These principles apply especially to all derangements of 
the proper functions of the brain itself, to all mental dis- 
orders, moral perversions, and nervous irritability. These 
all result from something being wrong in the brain itself, In 
its composition, or structure. 

Man's thoughts and emotions result from the action of his 
brain, the same as his bodily strength results from the 
action of his muscles ; and he can no more be strong, or 
healthy, mentally and morally, with a feeble brain, than he 
can be bodily strong with weak muscles. 

This fact, that the mental and moral character results from 
certain physical conditions, equally with the bodily charac- 
ter, is a fact that should never be lost sight of. The mental 
and moral man is entirely dependent upon the bodily man. 

A man inhales a small quantity of oxygen, or some other 
gas, which mounts to his brain, unites with the gases there, 
changes the combinations, and instantly the whole action of 
the brain changes, and the man becomes mentally and mor- 
ally different. 

The gases engendered in the body act in the same way. 
A man with a clear, powerful mind may sit down to a de- 
bauch, in eating or drinking, and rise from it dull and stu- 
pid, with his mental power totally obscured. His digestive 
organs cannot use, in a proper manner, the material he has 



3i8 IMPROVEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 



taken, and it decomposes, forming baneful gases, which 
mount to the brain, and temporarily poison it. 

If this be continued too long, the character of the brain 
becomes different, and the man is totally changed, mentally 
and morally, because he necessarily thinks, and feels in a 
different way. He is not, strictly speaking, the same man. 
In many extreme cases the substance of the brain com- 
pletely changes, and becomes almost fluid. This is the dis- 
ease called softening of the brain. 

When a man has softened brain he can no more think 
clearly, or vigorously, than he can work vigorously with 
softened muscles. And if this softening becomes perma- 
nent it causes a state of permanent idiocy. The organs ne- 
cessary for the support of his bodily life may, however, still 
continue to act, providing the spinal marrow is not diseased 
also. And this explains why bodily health often remains 
after the mind is completely gone. 

En all cases where the mind becomes feeble, or unnatu- 
rally active, or in which the feelings are perverted, and also 
in simple nervousness, of any kind, there is something wrong 
with the substance of the brain! There is either something 
co?nbined with its elements that should not be, or they are 
deficient in something necessary to their healthy action. 

In such cases the most excellent results follow from neu- 
ropathic remedies. The brain becomes firm again, and con- 
sequently the mind regains its power, the feelings become 
natural, and the morbid nervous condition is changed to a 
state of well-balanced calmness. 

Sometimes these results can be obtained by a change in 
the electric conditions, and sometimes by mere mental, or 
emotional influences ; but in most confirmed cases we must 
use proper medical agents capable of becoming gaseous. 

A great number of valuable remedies of this kind have 
been discovered recently. Modern chemistry is also contin- 
ually adding to their number, and by separating the really 
active matters from the useless, as in the case of the veget- 
able alkaloids, enables us to use minute quantities, and with 
certainty as to their action. It is time that the old practice 
of dosing, with immense quantities of powerful drugs, to 
cause a powerful action, was done with ; it has probably 
killed more than disease itself. 



CHAPTER XXX. 

MEDICINE, MEDICATION — ITS NATURE AND OB- 
JECTS, ETC. 

Medicines in General. 

In all cases of disease, nature herself continually strives to 
bring back a state of health, and the object of medical treat- 
ment is, to assist this natural effort. If the medicine acts 
one way, while nature is acting another way, it not only does 
no good, but possibly much harm. And this has really been 
the case with much of the past medication. Nature would 
be trying to bring matters right by thowing out an eruption, 
by a diarrhoea, or a profuse perspiration, and the doctor 
would immediately step in, with his medicines, to stop all 
these operations, which he mistook for the disease itself. 
The consequence was that nature's efforts were all counter- 
acted, and she had the effects of the medicines to fight 
against, in addition to the disease. No doubt many thus 
died, from being doctored, who would have lived had they 
been let alone. 

When the medication assists, or regulates, the proper nat- 
ural effort, it may do much good ; and this, therefore, is the 
important point to aim at. 

Different Kinds of Medicines. 

Anything which acts as an assistant, in the restoration of 
health, is a medicine, whether it be a material substance or 
merely a nervous or electrical influence. 

Medicines, therefore, are of different kinds, and act in 
different ways, according to their nature, and to the circum- 
stances in which they are given. 

Chemical Medicines. 
In some cases medicines are given to effect direct chem- 
30 (349) 



350 MEDICATION. ITS NATURE AND OBJECT. 



ical changes, as when we give alkalies in sour stomach, or 
acids when there is too much alkali in the blood. But much 
of the chemical medication is a great mistake, founded on 
ignorance of the actual chemical state of the bodily fluids, 
and of the changes which the medicines undergo after they 
are taken. 

Thus, very often when nitric acid is given, as an acid, it 
really acts as an alkali, or totally opposite. The change oc- 
curs in this way : The nitric acid is composed of nitrogen 
and oxygen, and in the stomach these may separate, the ni- 
trogen combining with a portion of the hydrogen, which is 
always present there, and forming ammonia, while the oxy- 
gen combines with another portion to form water. The 
effect is the same, therefore, as if a solution of ammonia, or 
sal volatile, had been given. 

Vegetable acids often decompose still more readily, and 
the gases that compose them enter into new combinations. 
Many of these acids are composed, in a large measure, of 
carbon, which being liberated, may act much like charcoal. 
These vegetable acids may, therefore, be the very best things 
to counteract acidity, and are, in fact, often used for that 
purpose ; one acid neutralizing another. 

It is but seldom that medicines can be given, with any 
certainty, to cause direct chemical changes in the living 
body, and much and serious evil is being done constantly in 
the attempt. 

Nutritive Medicines. 

In other cases medicines are given to supply some ele- 
ment, in which the body is deficient. Thus, in some im- 
poverished states of the blood, we find it is deficient in iron; 
and if that metal be then given, in a proper manner, it soon 
causes an improvement. In other cases lime is needed, or 
phosphorus, and the proper administration of these sub- 
stances is then beneficial. 

In this case the medication is a species of nutrition ; and, 
if we know what really is needed, and can give it in a proper 
form — that is, in a form that the organs can make use of — we 
can effect much good. 

Sometimes it is not very obvious what element the body 
does need, though it is obvious something is deficient ; and 
this is one fruitful source of mistake and wrong treatment. 
Very frequently, also, the element is given in a wrong form, 
and the system can derive no benefit from it. Many of the 
metallic compounds, given as nutritive medicines, are thrown 
out of the body in the same state they were taken. Others 
are decomposed, combine anew, and act totally different 






MEDICATION, ITS NATURE AND OBJECT. 351 



from what they were intended to do. It is only in certain 
states, or chemical conditions, that such matters can be ab- 
sorbed, and carried into the circulation, a fact which is often 
lost sight of. 

Neuropathic, or Nerve Medicines. 

The greater part of the medicines taken are intended to 
act neither chemically, nor as nutritives, but simply as regu- 
lators of the organic functions. And this regulation they 
effect by acting on the nervous centres, either directly or in- 
directly, in such a manner as to increase or decrease the 
force of the nervous current, according as may be needed. 

Thus, such medicines as diuretics, and purgatives, for in- 
stance, irritate the kidneys, or intestines ; and this irritation, 
being conveyed to the nervous centre, excites a reflex ner- 
vous~aetion,"which. causes those organs to act more energeti- 
cally. In all cases where any organ is excited, by medicines, 
to increased action, it is only in this way. The medicine 
does not directly cause the increased action, but it irritates 
the sensor nerves of the organ ; and these, by conveying the 
impression to the nervous centre, cause a reflex action, and 
the transmission of a more powerful nervous current to the 
seat of irritation. , 

Most people suppose that it is the medicine itself which 
acts directly on the part, but this is a mistake. It is the 
nervous influence only that acts, and the medicine merely 
sets it indirectly in motion. If the nerves connecting the 
stomach with the nervous centres were cut through, no 
emetic, no matter how powerful, could excite vomiting. 
But with these nerves perfect, a mere thought, or emotion, 
will do it, as has been before shown. 

Medicines can also be given to act directly on the nervous 
centres themselves, to either increase or decrease their or- 
ganic action, according as they are torpid or over active. 
Such stimulants as alcohol, tea, and coffee, and all the va- 
rious narcotics, are remedies of this kind. These constitute, 
in fact, the most important class of medicines, the proper 
use of which is comprised in the practice of neuropathy. 

Excepting when used chemically, therefore, or as nutri- 
tives, all kinds of medicines act through the nerves ; only in 
ordinary medication they do so indirectly, by reflex action ; 
and in the neuropathic practice they may act directly as 
well, by operating at once on the substance of the nervous 
system, which they are enabled to do owing to their gaseous 
form. 



CHAPTEE XXXI. 

THE NERVOUS INFLUENCE IN MEDICATION. 

Neuropathy. 

The important fact that all diseased, as well as all healthy- 
action is due entirely to nervous influence, though well 
known, as a general rule, has not, till lately, been practically 
acted upon in medicine. In consequence of this, much of the 
medical practice has hitherto been, and is now even, not only 
useless, but positively hurtful — so much so, in fact, that 
many an eminent practitioner, at the end of his life, has ex- 
pressed doubts whether he had done most good or most 
harm. Some of them have even experimented, unknown to 
their patients, by giving mere inert substances, such as bread 
pills and colored water, and have found their cures just as 
frequent as when they used real medicines, while the harm 
done was certainly much less. 

The ruling idea in medication, hitherto, seems to have 
been that the human system, when diseased, must be well 
shaken up, or strongly acted upon. Hence, the most power- 
ful remedies were thought the best, and they were general- 
ly used to the full extent the system would bear. The 
amount of purging, vomiting, sweating, bleeding, saliva- 
tion and other violent actions, to which the human body has 
been subjected, is frightful to contemplate. The disease 
itself has often been a mild affair compared with the treat- 
ment. 

And all this has been without any rational justification or 
foundation. We now know that most of the results, if 
not all, sought to be obtained by these murderous means, 
can be obtained more certainly hy other means, as mild and 
harmless as they were violent and hurtful, as will be shown 
further on. 

If the nerve force is sufficiently powerful, and if each or- 
gan receives its due share, all the functions of the body go 
on in a healthy manner ; but if any organ does not receive 
enough, it cannot act well, and becomes, in consequence, 
feeble or diseased. 

Unequal distribution of the nerve force causes unequal 
action in the different organs, some getting too much, and 

(352) 



NEUROPATHY. 353 



some too little. From this arises excitement, irritation, or 
inflammation, in some parts, and torpidity, or feeble 
action, in others. In perfect health each organ gets exactly 
its proper share, and there is enough for all. 

This explains why men injure themselves by over use, or 
abuse, of any of their organs. If the student exhausts too 
much of his" nervous power in thinking, there will not be 
enough for other purposes, and some organ will act ineffi- 
ciently. Most usually he becomes dyspeptic, simply be- 
cause the stomach cannot get nervous force enough to en- 
able it to digest. The libertine, on the contrary, uses up too 
much nervous power in sexual indulgence, and becomes, in 
consequence, feeble in body, and imbecile in mind. 

Since all organic action therefore, whether healthy or un- 
healthy, is caused solely by the stimulus of the nervous cur- 
rent, it is evident that, in one sense, all diseases, except such 
as arise from direct violence, can be tracked back to deranged 
nervous action, and their cure can be effected only by making 
this action healthy again. Or, to use a mechanical v illustra- 
tion : If one portion of the machinery works too fast, we 
must lessen the amount of steam it receives,* and if an- 
other goes too slowly we must increase the amount, till all 
receive exactly the right amount. Just so we must act 
with disease ; the organic action must be increased or 
decreased, in the diseased parts, as needed, by regulating 
the supply of the nervous current. All diseases therefore, 
organic or functional, must be treated through the 
nerves. 

It is however convenient, and proper, to divide all diseases 
into two classes, which for convenience may be here called 
the bodily, or organic, and the nervous or functional. 

The different nature of these two classes of diseases may 
be partially illustrated, by comparing the human body 
again with an electric telegraph. In this there may be wires 
or other parts, broken, and machinery deranged, so that it will 
not work, such accidents corresponding to'the ordinary or- 
ganic diseases in the human body. There may, however, be 
no parts broken, nor any out of order, and yet it may work 
irregularly, or not at all, from want of the electric current, 
owing to some fault in the chemical battery. Such derange- 
ments are analagous to functional or nervous diseases, 
which result from some fault in the brain or nerves. 

Now when the machinery or apparatus is broken, or de- 
ranged, the machinist is sent for, and he puts all right 
again with his tools and soldering irons. But when the bat- 
tery is in fault, and there is simply no electric current, the 
chemist must step in, with his acids and other elements, to 
cause the necessary reactions. 

30* 



354 NEUKOPATHY. 



The machinist's work will not correct the fault in the bat- 
tery, nor will the chemist's proceedings mend the broken 
machinery. The two processes are entirely different things, 
and calculated to effect totally different purposes. 

This is precisely analogous to what is needed in treating 
the two different kinds of disease. The purgatives, emetics, 
and irritants that are used in the bodily or organic . diseases, 
are altogether inappropriate, and unsuited to the merely- 
nervous or functional diseases. In most of them it would 
be as absurd to expect any good result from such treatment, 
as it would to expect an electric current from piling the 
machinist's tools in the battery pot. Strictly speaking, 
therefore, nervous diseases are those arising from derange- 
ment of the nervous apparatus itself, and affecting its func- 
tions only. But in one sense all diseases are nervous, and 
can be acted upon only through nervous influence. 

Mental, Emotional, and Electric Medication. 

But there is another class of medical agents, not usually 
considered' as such, but which are, in many cases, more 
proper to use, and more effective than any drugs whatever. 
These are mental and emotional influences, and electrical con- 
ditions. That the mind and feelings do exert a real positive 
influence over the body, has already been shown in previous 
chapters, and it has also been stated that the extent of that 
influence is but little appreciated. 

Electricity also, in many ways, can supersede drugs, and 
is a true neuropathic agent. If not indentical with the ner- 
vous power itself, it can often take its place, and either 
cause true organic action, or chemical change, in the sub- 
stance of the body, the same as violent emotion or powerful 
drugs, a fact which will be further illustrated subsequent- 
ly. 

In ordinary medication drugs are given for the express 
purpose of causing an artificial local disturbance, of some 
kind, which, being transmitted to the brain, through the 
nerves of sensation, causes that organ to send a reflex ner- 
vous current to the disturbed part. That is, the drug causes 
a reflex action from the nervous centre, and, so long as there 
is a plain indication to be fulfilled, it may be a iDroper plan 
of proceeding, providing the drug can effect the desired re- 
action. Emetics, purgatives, and diuretics are good illus- 
trations of this principle, because their action is prompt and 
unmistakable. But a large number of diseases are so ob- 
scure, as to their real nature and origin, that we know not 
what indications require to be fulfilled to cure them. When 
the stomach, bowels, or kidneys are simply inactive, it is 



NEUROPATHY. 355 



easy enough to decide what is needed to be done. But 
when a person is sick without any of these obvious derang- 
ments, especially in chronic cases, there are no obvious in- 
dications to be fulfilled, and drugs are given merely experi- 
mentally. In such cases there are almost as many different 
modes of practice as there are physicians, which, as 6ome 
one wittily remarks, makes medicine a most accommodating 
science ; for if you don't like your doctor, or his treatment, 
you can easily find another, who will tell you he is an igno- 
ramus, and who -will treat you on an exactly opposite sys- 
tem. And the very fact that all the different, and utterly 
opposite, modes of practice, on the whole, equally succeed 
or fail, as the case maybe, proves that none of^them are 
founded upon actual knowledge, but simply on routine or ex- 
periment. 

A celebrated physician once put the case thus : 

" A sick man," said he, " is like a man struggling with an 
enemy in a dark room. The doctor comes in with a club 
(his medicine), and begins to strike all around him in the dark. 
If he hits the enemy (that is the disease) — all right ; but if 
he hits the man, why he makes matters worse for him ; and 
Tie is just as likely to hit one as the other — in the dark." 

In all disease there is some deranged or irregular nervous 
action, which requires to be put right, and this can be done 
only through the nervous centres. But the old plan of de- 
pending only on reflex nervous action, excited by drugs, is 
too uncertain, too violent, and too dangerous. 

It is, in fact, an open question, whether drugs have not 
caused more disease than they have ever cured ; or, in other 
words, whether the doctor has not hit tJie patient often er 
than he has hit the disease ? 

Now, if the nervous centres can be acted upon directly, 
and if the nervous power, emanating from them, can be 
properly equalized and distributed, without the ordinary 
powerful drugs, then they can be dispensed with. And this 
is precisely what Neuropathy professes to do. 

The great bulk of all the medicine used is given empri- 
cally ! That is either from mere custom, or at a venture. No 
one knows exactly what it is intended to do, nor the special 
way in which it is expected to act. The bulk of it, however, 
is meant to act either as a stimulant, or sedative ; that is, either 
to increase some organic action, or to decrease it ; or, in other 
words, to make a change. 

An indefinite idea of thus making a change, with the chance 
of its being for the better, is the ruling idea in nine-tenths of 
our medication. It is also a rational idea, although the nature 
of the change sought, and the true way to obtain it, is sel- 
dom understood. 



356 NEUEOPATHY. 



Since every organ acts only from nervous influence, it is 
evident that if we wish to either increase its action or de- 
crease it, we must do so by increasing or decreasing the 
amount of nervous influence it receives. All change, there- 
fore, or alteration, must be effected through the nerves ; and 
only those medicines are really effective which act upon the 
great nervous centres. Further, bearing in mind what has 
been before stated, that the nervous substance is nourished, 
excited, or calmed, mainly by matters in a gaseous form, it 
is evident why only those medicines are effective which can 
become gaseous when taken into the body. 

The great point, therefore, in medication, is to know 
what medicines will decompose into gases, when taken, and 
how those gases will act, whether chemically or as simple 
restoratives, or as stimulants, or sedatives, to the nervous 
substance. 

When medicines are taken in a gross solid form, and 
are not changed, they act only upon the bodily sub- 
stance they come in contact with ; in many instances only 
chemically, or as mere irritants. To produce a legitimate 
medical effect they must become fluid, or be dissolved, so 
as to be absorbed into the fluids of the body. When most 
effective, they pass from the fluids even into the gaseous 
state, as before explained ; and in disease of the nervous sys- 
tem this is especially necessary. 

Therefore, the more perfectly soluble a medicine is made, the 
more readily it is taken up and disseminated ; which ex- 
plains wiry a small dose, properly prepared, may be much 
more efficacious than a large dose given in a crude form. 

Many medical reformers have recognized this fact, and 
acted upon it to the benefit of their patients. 

The continued trituration, and extreme dilution, of homoeo- 
pathic medicines are intended to make them more soluble, 
and better adapted to be absorbed. 

Still, for those medicines intended specially for the ner- 
vous system, mere fluidity is not enough ; they must be 
gaseous ! or at least they must be capable of becoming so, 
when taken into the body. 

Neuropathic medicines are all capable of becoming gase- 
ous, and in that form reach the brain and spinal marrow, 
where they combine with other gaseous elements there ex- 
isting. 

Every combination of this kind changes, more or less, the 
composition, or structure, of the nerve substance, and con- 
sequently changes its action. No medicine can act, neuro- 
pathically, that cannot, when taken, assume the gaseous 
form ; but all the most active remedies readily and naturally 
assume that form. 



NEUEOPATHY. 357 



The chapter, previously given, on the gases of the body, 
and on the chemical transformations that continually occur 
among them, will make t^is important point readily under- 
stood, and they should be read in connection with this. 

In regard to remedies of this kind, it must also be borne 
in mind that, in order to act on the nervous centres, it is 
not necessary they should be taken in the ordinary way, by 
the stomach. They may be breathed, or smelt, and in either 
case are absorbed at once, as gases. They may even be 
taken into the system by the pores of the skin, and be fully 
effective. 

A familiar instance of this is seen in the case of chlwo- 
form. This needs only to be breathed ; and it mounts at 
once, in the state of gas, to the brain, and makes it torpid, so 
that all feeling is lost. 

The ordinary effects of alcohol also farther illustrate the 
same fact. It is not the fluid substance alcohol that mounts 
to the brain, but the stimulating gases, which are let loose 
by its decomposition in the stomach. 

The gas called sulphuretted hydrogen, a compound of sul- 
phur and hydrogen, is one of the most active chemical agents, 
and causes immediate and great changes in all the chemical 
combinations it comes in contact with. 

A dog can be killed by being made to breathe an atmos- 
phere containing only one- eight-hundredth part of this gas. 
In fact, it need not be breathed at all, nor even smelt, for it 
can be absorbed through the skin, in any part of thebod\, 
and will cause death. And yet this same gas is the curative 
agent, in many of the mos tcelebrated mineral waters, and is 
constantly engendered in the body by the natural healthy 
action of its organs. 

The wonderful power of such an agent results from its 
property of effecting sudden chemical change, among the 
substances with which it mixes. Whether those changes 
shall be beneficial, or injurious, depends on the state of 
the parts it comes in contact with, and upon the nature of 
the new combinations it gives rise to. 

Sulphuretted hydrogen is largely given off from foul 
sewers, and neglected water-closets, and is often the source 
of serious disease. 

In many cases of feeble health, the substance of the brain 
is in a soft, lax condition, just ready to break up, or change, 
if certain agents come in contact with it. 

Suppose a man in this state encounters the odor from a 
foul sewer ; he need only take one whiff, the gas mounts to 
his brain, and he feels faint, or shivers, is taken sick and dies. 
The gaseous elements in his nervous substance, acted upon 
by this powerful chemical agent, change their combinations 



358 NEUKOPATHY. 



in a moment, and the brain is decomposed, or destroyed, as 
surely as if broken up by force. 

And yet this same agent, given at the right time, and in 
the right way, may just as easily effect changes of the most 
beneficial character, or even save life. 

The mere smell of prussic acid, even when largely diluted 
with air, causes headache and fainting, and in its pure state, 
even instant death. There are numerous other agents 
known equally powerful, all acting in a gaseous form, and in 
the minutest quantities. Some act when taken into the 
stomach ; some when breathed ; some when smelt ; and 
others only need to touch the skin, from which they are in- 
stantly absorbed. 



CHAPTEE XXXII. 



WONDERFUL POWER OF SOME AGENTS AND RA- 
PIDITY OF THEIR ACTION. 

To those not familiar with chemical transformations, it is 
astonishing what minute quantities, of some matters, are 
needed to effect the most wonderful changes, and with what 
rapidity they act. The smallest atom of some particular 
substance will, in many cases, change a large mass of matter 
from a solid to a fluid", or to a gas, in an instant, and often 
with the greatest violence. Exactly analogous changes occur 
in the body, from the absorption of various powerful poi- 
sons, or remedies. 

Many fluid substances are decomposed in an instant, into 
gases, with explosion. Nitro-Glycerine, for instance, is a 
fluid thicker than water, and apparently more stable in its 
composition ; but, add a single drop of certain chemical mat- 
ters to any amount of it, and — in an instant — it explodes 
with fearful power, and nothing is left but a number of 
gases. 

Now these gases, while combined in the form of the fluid, 
nitro-glycerine, are held together very loosely, as it were, 
and are easily caused to separate and enter into new combi- 
nations, instantly, and with fearful violence. 

There are many similar substances, known to chemists, 
which have the appearance of oils, or simple fluids, but 
which are so easily decomposed, and with such an exhibition 
of force, that it is dangerous to experiment with them, except 
in the smallest quantities. Chloride of nitrogen, for in- 
stance, is one of these. It is an oily-looking fluid, so liable 
to change, and with such violence, that a single drop of it is 
very dangerous, and few chemists dare to make even enough 
to look at. So loosely are its component gases, chlorine and 
nitrogen, held together, that a mere touch of any oily body, 
will explode, or separate them, with tremendous violence ; 
and then neither has any explosive power whatever by itself. 

It may be necessary to remind the unscientific reader that, 

(359) 



360 



PECULIAR GASES OF THE BODY. 



in all these cases, nothing is destroyed, and nothing new pro- 
duced ; the elements which compose these substances merely 
separate, and pass suddenly, and violently, from the fluid, 
into the expanded gaseous form. 

As a general rule, fluids are more liable to this sudden and 
violent change than solids, but still there are some solids al- 
most as dangerous. It is the sudden conversion, for instance, 
of some of the solid elements of gunpowder into gases, that 
causes its violent explosion when fired. But the chemist 
can form solid substances which are so liable to explode that 
it is difficult to keep them. The mere jar of shutting a door, 
or of moving a chair, or the slightest touch will set them off. 

All these substances, whether fluid or solid, are composed 
of elements that have a great tendency to assume the gase- 
ous form, suddenly and violently, owing to their being but 
slightly held together. The same elements, it must be re- 
membered, can form either solids, fluids, or gases, of the 
most opposite characters and properties, according to the 
proportions and ways in which they are combined. 

But, striking and wonderful as are the changes just men- 
tioned, in fluids and solids, those which take places in gase- 
ous compounds are still more so. The addition, or subtrac- 
tion, of a minute portion of some particular gas to or from one 
of these compounds, a degree more or less of heat, or an elec- 
tric spark, may separate it in an instant ; and its various ele- 
ments then enter at once into new combinations, producing 
the most astounding and unexpected results. 

Thus, we may have a mixture of two gases, oxygen and 
hydrogen, in a glass vessel, and nothing is visible —the glass 
appearing perfectly empty — but, pass an electric spark 
through them, and, in an instant, they combine and form 
water 7 The same water can again, by electrichty, be decom- 
posed into the same gases from which it was formed. 

From their nature, gases mix, or separate, more readily than 
either solids or fluids ; and, as they are everywhere present, 
and pass through almost every substance, their combinations 
and recombinations are perpetually taking place. They are, 
in fact, the great causes of transmutation and change. 



Peculiar Gases of the Body. 

The human body, as before explained, is everywhere per- 
meated, saturated, with gases. They are all the time being 
taken into the body by the food and drink, by the breath, and 
through the skin, and the changes which occur in the body 
itself also keep forming them, incessantly. 

Many of the gases thus formed in the body, by the decom- 
position of its substance, are of the most poisonous charac- 



PECULIAR GASES OF THE BODY. 361 



ter, and would cause death if they were not decomposed or 
neutralized. In a state of health, however, one gas counter- 
acts another, and thus even the most hurtful are made harm- 
less, or even useful. Immense quantities of the deadly sul- 
phuretted hydrogen are formed in the intestines, and dissem- 
inated from thence all over the body, but ordinarily no harm 
results from it. In fact, it is no doubt necessary in many 
ways, to effect changes in other combinations. 

In a state of debility and weakness all this may be changed, 
and man may be literally poisoned with the gases engendered 
by his own body. In numerous instances, to a great extent, 
this is beyond doubt the case. 

It is quite common to observe, in unhealthy persons, most 
unpleasant odors from the body, sometimes of a very pecu- 
liar character. All these are poisonous gases, and nature is 
trying to get rid of them. It is well known that most luna- 
tics have a peculiar smell, so marked in fact, that an experi- 
enced person can generally distinguish a lunatic at once, by 
the odor. An acute and practised nose can detect many dis- 
eases in the same way, and even particular kinds of mental 
derangements. 

These unusual odors show that the gases, in the body, ai-e 
undergoing decomposition, and that they do not recombine 
in the normal waj'. This, of course, indicates that the 
chemical constitution of the body is different from what It 
should be, and that constitutes a state of disease. 

The various nervous conditions peculiar to women, espe- 
cially hysteria, erotomania, and many others, are often very 
distinctly marked by the odors of the body, a fact which 
they frequently notice themselves. 

In short, the action and reaction of the gases, both within 
and without the body, is of the highest importance, though 
not generally acknowledged or understood, even by many 
medical men. 

It should also be remarked, as a further explanation of 
how rapidly change can take place in the body, that the fluids 
and gases are not confined entirely to the particular cavities, 
sacs, or tubes in which we find them. Both fluids and gases 
pass readily through the walls of any of these receptacles, 
and meet and mix with one another in all parts of the body. 

The whole substance of the body is porous, so that a fluid, 
or gas, may pass from the inside to the outside, or be ab- 
sorbed from the outside to the interior. And when this is 
known, and it is further borne in mind how readily chemi- 
cal combi nations change, it will be no longer a mystery how 
a man may be poisoned by breathing, or smelling, some par- 
ticular gas, or by its coming in contact with his skin only. 

It must be borne in mind, in regard to chemical changes 



31 



362 CHANGES IN THE HUMAN BODY. 



that the new body produced may be formed entirely of the 
elements of the old one ! No fresh matter may be needed, 
but only a different arrangement, or combination, of that 
which formed the old body. Thus we might have a mixture of 
the three gases, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, and there 
would be no more to be seen than in an equal bulk of com- 
mon air, nor need it be in any way more active. But an 
electric spark, or the mere presence of some other element, 
may in an instant cause a wonderful transformation. 

A portion of the oxygen may unite with a certain propor- 
tion of the nitrogen, and form nitric acid, while another 
portion of the nitrogen, uniting with the hydrogen, may 
form ammonia ! Thus there would be produced from this 
invisible gaseous compound, a most deadly, corrosive acid, 
and a pungent alkaline gas. 

Then, again, these two might unite and form nitrate of am- 
monia, a crystaline solid. 

The process might also be reversed, and from this solid 
nitrate of ammonia we might again get the acid, the alkali, 
and, finally, the inert gaseous mixture. 

All these wondrous changes, from one substance to another, 
be it remembered, require only a different arrangement, or 
combination, of three simple elements. And this change 
from one form to another, the work of a single instant, may- 
result from mere contact only with some other body, or even 
from its mere presence ! For it is a fact that substances in a 
certain state of motion, or change, themselves, may excite 
in other substances the very same motion, or change, by 
being merely in their neighborhood. Chemists see instances 
of this constantly, both in fluids and gases. 

In fact, all compound bodies, except dense solids, are liable 
to these sudden breakings up and recombinations, from the 
smallest apparent causes. 

Similar Change* occur in the Human Body. 

But it is not only in artificial chemical compounds that this 
takes place, or in nature at large, but also in the human body I 
The gaseous and fluid substances that compose such a large 
part of its bulk, are every moment decomposing, and re- 
forming into other substances, perhaps totally different. 
All such changes of course affect the health, or condition of 
being, and they may be either hurtful or beneficial. Life 
itself, in fact, in all its aspects, is but the expression of these 
changes, and it is by chemical transformation that we live! 

Every portion of food or drink that we take, every breath 
that we draw, or odor that we smell, all act as modifying 
agents in this way. 



CHANGES IN THE HUMAN BODY. 363 



In snort, the various component substances of our bodies, 
and those surrounding us, are perpetually acting and re- 
acting on each other, and every change thus produced makes 
more or less change in us, both bodily and mental. 

To effect changes of this kind, in the living body as well 
as ou% we often require only a minute portion, or even the 
presence merely, of some disturbing element, or a slight exhi- 
bition of electric force. But ^thought only, or emotion, may act 
in the same way, and bring about most momentous chemical 
changes. 

When medicines are administered, in disease, it is, of 
course, with the object of effecting some needed transforma- 
tions *, and if the medical agent be of the right kind, and in 
the right form, it may do so, and thus bring back a state of 
health. But, as will be seen from the explanations given, 
it is not mere quantity, or exceptional activity, that may make 
such an agent useful, but its power of inducing change, or 
effecting chemical transformations. And very often this 
power may reside in a minute portion, of a very simple sub- 
stance, that has no especial activity of its own on the system 
at alL 

The very smallest quantities of matter that we can deal 
with, in the ordinary way, by measuring, or weighing, even 
with the most delicate apparatus, are large and ponderous, * 
compared with the extrexe minuteness of division effected 
by chemical means. We can measure to ten or twenty 
thousandths of an inch, or even much less, and weigh to as 
many thousandths of a grain, but when this infinitesimal 
part of a grain is obtained, we can, by chemical means, di- 
vide it millions of times more. In fact the division can be 
carried so far that figures ean scarely state the extent. And 
yet even in this attenuated state, when the amount of any 
particular substance, in any given body, is so extremely min- 
ute that it seems totally lost, it may still exert the most sur- 
prising effects. One of these millionths of the millionth of 
a grain, or less, may originate changes and transformations 
in large masses of matter, which will split their component 
parts asunder, and reeombine them, in new and totally dif- 
ferent combinations. 

And yet, surprising as all this may seem, spectrum analy- 
sis makes us acquainted with quantities of matter still smaller. 
So minute in fact, that by no chemical tests whatever can we 
know of their presence. And yet the spectrum shows in- 
fallibly that they are there, and we know that, inconceivably 
minute though they be, they still may cause changes, in vast 
masses of matter with which they come in contact, of the 
most stupendous character. 

All this shows that the power of a chemical agent, or of a 



364 KEMEDIES MUST BE FLUID OR GASEOUS. 



medicine, is not to be estimated by its own immediate effect, 
but by the changes and transformations, the actions and 
reactions, 'to which it gives rise, among the matters with 
which it comes in contact. 

All Substances act, Chemically, either in the Fluid or Gaseous 
States only. 

No substance can act chemically, unless it be fluid, or 
gaseous, or capable of becoming so when in the presence of 
other substances. The more perfectly fluid, or gaseous, it 
is, the quicker, and more perfect is its chemical action. 
It is the same with medicines. If they remain solid they 
are useless, and their activity is in direct proportion with 
their power of becoming fluid or gaseous. 

Perfect solubility therefore, is one of the most essential 
qualities of a medicine, because without that it cannot be so 
minutely divided as to be readily absorbed, and assimilated. 
A substance may be ground and pulverised to the utmost 
possible extent, but it still remains solid ; and each particle, 
no matter how small, is just the same as the whole mass 
was at first. It is only when dissolved that it can be said to be 
thoroughly subdivided. 

Perfect solution, and proper dilution, put the particles of 
' the medicine in such a state that they can be absorbed, and 
reach the parts where they are wanted. Before they can get 
to some parts in fact, as before stated, they must even be- 
c/>mes gaseous, because only gases can reach those parts. 
B at changes of this kind, from solids to fluids, and from fluids 
V> gases, take place very readily, under proper influences, 
and are occurring all the time, both externally and within 
the body. 

All bodies can exist in either of these three states, solid, 
fluid, or gaseous, and they pass insensibty from one state 
to the other. There is, in fact, no real separation between 
solids, and fluids, and gases, and they are therefore only 
relative terms, the solid becoming gradually softer, then 
semi-fluid, and finally fluid, but we cannot say where solidity 
ends and fluidity begins. In the same way, there is no ac- 
tual separation between fluids and gases. The fluid becomes 
gradually lighter, and more volatile, till finally it passes into 
the state of vapor, or gas, but we cannot indicate the exact 
point where one state ends and the other begins. 

From the solid state up to the gaseous state, therefore, 
there is only a continuous change, and not separate states, 
or conditions, each distinct from the other. The change con- 
sists in a giving way, or weakening, of the power, whatever 
it may be, that holds the particles of the substance together; 



HEAT Am) ELECTRICITY. 365 



—the agent that usually effects this change is heat. The 
action is well shown in the familiar case of water! This 
body, at any degree of heatbekrtv 32° Fahrenheit, is a solid, 
which we call ice! But let it be heated above 32° and it 
becomes fluid, or water. Heat it still further, up to 212°, 
and it rises into vapor, or steam, which is water in the 
gaseous form. All bodies change in the same way, only 
they require different degrees of heat, some being always 
solid, some always fluid, and others again always gaseous, at 
the average temperature of the atmosphere. But there is a 
certain degree of heat in which every body can exist {neither of 
the three states. The more a body is heated, as a general rule, 
the more it expands, or the further apart its particles separate. 
Fluids expand more than solids, and gases still more than 
fluids, but in all of them, any change in temperature changes 
their bulk. Even the changes of temperature in the body, 
arising from organic action, and from the varying conditions 
of health, expand and contract every part. The increased 
heat engendered by exercise, by a fever, or by a warm bath, 
changes solids into fluids, and fluids into gases, just the 
same as the heat of the sun effects such changes on the 
earth. A sudden persjriration from exercise, is a good illus- 
tration of this. The fluid perspiration does not exist as 
such, ready formed, and prepared at any time to gush out, 
but it results from the actual liquefaction of some of the 
solids, by the increased heat, engendered by the exercise, 
or by chemical or electrical changes. Some of the fluid 
even passes into the state of vapor, or gas, as may be readily 
seen by holding a cold glass over the heated body, when the 
vapor will condense upon it in drops. A sudden chill, or 
cold, reverses this process, converting the gases into fluids, 
and the fluids into solids, thus causing congestions, and 
obstructions of various kinds in the different circulating 
vessels. Hence the popular treatment for a cold, — causing a 
perspiration,— which again liquifies the solids and removes the 
obstruction. Nature herself does the same thing by inflam- 
mation, and fever, which always terminate in some dis- 
charge or liquefaction. 

Chemical Changes cause Changes of Temperature, and of 
Electrical Condition, 

Chemical combination and change always gives rise to 
change of temperature, sometimes to an extreme degree. 
Some substances may be mixed together that produce intense 
cold, and others again, though cold when mixed, produce, 
by their union, sudden and intense heat. And in this way 
our food and drink, the air we breathe, and the medicines 

31* 



36fe 



HOMEOPATHY. 



we take, may, "by mere chemical action on the substances 
they come in contact with, cause great changes in the 
temperature of the body, ^.ndthe increased heat, or cold, 
thus caused acts in its turn, and induces other changes. 
Every chemical change also causes a change in the electrical 
conditions of the body, as well as in its temperature ; and 
these electrical changes, in their turn, react and cause other 
changes ; so that action and reaction, decomposition and re- 
composition, are perpetually taking place. 

The influence of a medicine, therefore, is not limited to its 
immediate effect, for it may be only the starting point, for 
an infinite series of changes, many of which may not have 
been anticipated or desired. 

Homoeopathy. 

Many medical reformers have perceived the fact, though 
but partially, that all medicines must be capable of the 
most perfect fluidity, or extremely minute division, before 
they can be properly absorbed and appropriated. Among 
others, Hahnemann appears to have caught the idea, and his 
system is really founded upon it. The numerous and syste- 
matic triturations which he prescribes for drugs, and their 
extreme dilution, are for the purpose of making them more 
proper for absorption, and appropriation. So far, in fact, 
homoeopathy has the same foundation as neuropathy. But 
in Hahnemann's day chemical physiology was not so well 
understood as now, especially not in regard to the gaseous 
elements, which are in reality, so far as disease and its 
treatment is concerned, the most important among the bodi- 
ly constituents. 

Jus.t as the fluids are more mobile than the solids, and 
therefore easier transformed, so are the gases yet more 
mobile than the fluids, and still more readily decomposed, 
and recomposed. This is why neuropathic treatment is so 
prompt and effective, because it operates, by means of 
medicines capable of becoming gaseous, upon the gaseous 
elements of the body. And, as already explained, the ner- 
vous substance itself is, in a great measure fluid and gas- 
eous, so that by this treatment we operate directly upon the 
seat and origin of nervous power itself. 

Homoeopathy was, in fact, the commencement of a real 
reform in the mode of using medical agents. And the prin- 
ciples laid down in this book are an extension of that re- 
form. Neuropathy, in short, is perfected homoeopathy, or ra- 
tional allopathy, according to which way it may be considered. 



PART V. 



ORGANIC DISEASES OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 



CHAPTER XXXni. 



Inflammation and Congestion of the Brain. 

From the delieate structure of the brain, from its great 
activity, and from the unyielding nature of its bony en- 
closure, it is peculiarly liable to suffer from pressure ; and 
the consequences are also likely to be more serious than in 
other parts of the body, for the same reasons. A small 
piece of bone, either forced in upon the brain, or growing 
within the skull, may cause convulsions, fainting, and even 
death ; and so may a little clot, or tumor, or a small quan- 
tity of blood, from a ruptured blood-vessel. 

In other parts of the body such accidents, though causing 
temporary distress, may not result seriously, because the 
offending bodies can either be thrown off by inflammatory 
action, or the parts gradually accommodate themselves to 
their presence. 

But in the brain it is different, because inflammation there 
is a very dangerous thing, even if by its action the irritating 
body could be got rid of; and there is no room in the skull 
for anything besides the brain itself, and the parts necessary 
for its support and nutrition. 

A morbid condition of the brain may arise in four differ- 
ent ways. First, from the blood which nourishes it being of 
bad quality ; secondly, from the blood circulating too rapidly 
or too feebly ; thirdly, from pressure, arising either mechan- 
ically or from effused blood, or fluid ; and, fourthly, from 
disease, changing the structure of the brain matter. 

These conditions affect the brain organically, and directly ; 
but it may also be functionally deranged from many remote 
causes, only partially known, and also from sympathy with 
morbid conditions of other parts of the body. 

Congestion from Bad Quality of Blood. 

Impure, or imperfect, blood affects the whole body, more 
or less ; but its bad effects are more marked in the brain than 

(369) 



370 CONGESTION OF THE BRAIN. 



elsewhere. Other parts of the body may withstand starva- 
tion, or poisoning, to a great extent, and recover, but the 
brain suffers from them immediately, and recovers with more 
difficulty. 

When the blood is thin, or poor, the brain is imperfectly 
nutrified, and suffers in the same way that it does from de- 
ficient quantity of blood, as will be explained further on. It 
is not bad in quality in such cases, but there is not enough 
nutritious matter in it to support the brain. 

The quality of the blood becomes bad mainly from imper- 
fect action of the lungs, kidneys, or liver. 

These organs, when in vigorous action, remove from the 
system certain hurtful matters, which become real poisons 
if they remain. Thus the lungs remove carbonic acid in the 
expelled breath, the liver removes the elements of bile, and 
the kidneys remove urea, and various salts. The healthy 
normal action of these organs is sufficient to remove all 
these hurtful matters ; but if their action is suspended, or 
becomes sluggish, of course more or less of these matters 
will be left behind, forming a poisonous element in the 
blood. 

Such matters in the blood act exactly the same as poison- 
ous drugs, and if in too great quantitj r , may cause disease, 
or even death. Usually the immediate symptoms they give 
rise to are headache, sleeplessness, or drowsiness, delirium, 
or fainting ; and if they are not removed, more serious and 
permanent derangements ensue, with finally confirmed or- 
ganic disease. 

The brain feels the presence of these poisonous matters 
in the blood immediately, and the mind suffers in conse- 
quence. It is a matter of common remark how dull, melan- 
choly, and miserable, a man becomes when his liver is out 
of order. 

His whole nature is changed, so that, from being perhaps 
the most inerry and best-tempered of men, he becomes the 
most sad and irritable. The man is simply poisoned ! He 
has nob taken poison into the system, but the inaction of his 
liver has prevented poison from going out of it, which 
amounts to the same thing. 

All the secretions which are separated from the blood by 
such organs as the liver, kidneys, and lungs, are simply the 
refuse and hurtful matter which the system cannot use, and 
which are therefore got rid of in this way. If they are not 
separated from the blood, but circulate with it, they act as 
poisons, just the same as if they had been taken into the 
stomach, or injected into the blood vessels. 

Bad temper is often only the result of a torpid liver ; and 
a dull, wandering mind is frequently caused by inactive 






FAINTING. 371 



kidneys. The "brain cannot act properly, and evolve good 
mind, unless it receives plenty of pure, healthy blood , and 
no amount of mental influence, or effort, can ever do much 
good to the mind that is deranged, or weakened from the 
blood being poisoned. 

No one would* expect a man to be in his right senses, or 
to act rationally, who had taken too much opium, or aconite, 
or even alcohol ; and he whose blood contains too much bile, 
or urea, or carbonic acid, from inactive lungs, liver, or kid- 
neys, is just in the same condition. 

In all cases where the brain is suspected of suffering from 
the bad quality of the blood — and there are plenty such— the 
nature of the secretions should be attended to, so as to dis- 
cover what organs are in fault, and restore them to healthy 
action. 

Many a wandering mind has thus been steadied ; many a 
gloomy or violent disposition corrected, and many cases of 
insanity cured, by simply restoring the lungs, liver, or kid- 
neys, to proper action, and thus bringing the blood again 
to a healthy state. 

The modern physician depends upon health of the tody 
for restoring health of mind, and not upon mere scolding or 
preaching. In other words, he tries to get healthy action 
of the brain, without which there can be no healthy mind. 

Impure blood not only causes temporary, irregular, and 
imperfect action of the brain, but may even cause in it 
serious and fatal disease, if allowed to circulate in it too long. 
Softening of the brain, or fatty degeneration, or dropsy, may 
no doubt be thus caused, as ^ell as other derangements. 

Bilious poisoning of the ftood, from disordered liver, 
usually makes itself apparent by obvious indications, in the 
skin and eyes, and by the imperfect action of the bowels. 

When the poison comes from inactive kidneys it can be 
detected by examining the urine ; and when the lungs are 
in fault it is usually shown by blueness of the lips. 

In all "forms of nervous disease, and in all cases of im- 
perfect mental action, arising in those previously sound in 
mind, the action of the liver, skin, kidneys, and lungs, should 
be carefully studied, because it is possible the trouble may 
arise from them alone. 

If they do not act with sufficient energy, the blood is 
poisoned by the matter which they should have removed, 
and this poisoned blood, circulating in the brain, is certain to 
cause diseased mind, or morbid nervous conditions. 

Congestion of the Brain arising from Want of Blood. 
It has already been shown that a full supply of healthy 



372 FAINTING. 



blood must constantly circulate in the brain to maintain it in 
healthy action. Cut off this supply, and the brain and mind 
become torpid at once . Ordinarily, when the brain is de- 
prived of its due supply of blood, we have syncope, or faint- 
ing, which always arises from this cause, except in actual 
disease of the brain. When the supply is not cut completely 
off, but only limited, we have languor, dulness, and indispo- 
sition for thought or action, with a feeling of faintness. 

Anything which suspends the circulation of the blood will 
cause fainting ! Most usually this arises from inaction of 
the heart, especially when there is too little blood in the 
body, or when it is too thin, and poor in quality. 

Sometimes fainting is preceded by a feeling of languor, 
singing in the ears, and coldness of the extremities, with 
uneasiness of mind ; but, in many cases, it comes on quite 
suddenly, without any warning. The immediate symptoms 
are paleness of the lips and skin, apparent stoppage of tho 
pulse, and breathing; cold perspiration on the forehead, and 
loss of power, so that the patient falls down. 

A fainting fit may be over in a few minutes, or it may last 
for hours ; but, in all cases, recovery from it occurs only 
when the blood begins to circulate again in the brain. 
Usually the pulse, and breathing, may be detected, though 
faintly ; but, in long-continued syncope, both frequently 
seem totally suspended. This, however, is not the case, as 
there is always some circulation, and breathing, though it 
may be so slight as to escape detection. 

Any causes which impoverish the blood, or decrease its 
amount, may cause faintness, 0d finally fainting. Poor food, 
bad digestion, loss of blood, or excessive discharges from 
the kidneys or bowels, are very frequent causes. The abuse 
of purgative and diuretic medicines, often leads to fainting, 
because a too great discharge, from either kidneys or bowels, 
is equivalent to a loss of blood. In the old purging days, 
patients were often made to faint at stool, from the violent ac- 
tion of the medicine they had taken ; and this was thought 
rather desirable than otherwise, — and they were fortunate 
also if they escaped bleeding as well ! 

But, in addition to these physical causes, the heart may be 
affected by emotional, or mental conditions, so that its ac- 
tion may become imperfect, or even totally suspended. Thus, 
some persons will faint from terror, some from joy, and some 
from surprise. Seeing blood, or any disgusting object, will 
always bring on fainting with some people ; while others are 
similarly affected by the sight of any one suffering, or in 
danger. 

In such cases, the fainting is caused by stoppage of the 
heart's action, and consequent non-circulation of blood in 



FAINTING. 373 



the brain ; the emotion acts upon the heart, through the 
nerves, and paralyzes it, much the same as if the nerves con- 
necting that organ with the ganglionic centres were cut 
through. 

The heart may be affected in this way, so as to cause great 
languor, or even fainting, through either of the senses. Thus, 
some are affected by particular sights, some by smells, some 
by sounds, and some by touching or tasting certain things. 

In short, anything which suspends the action of the heart 
stops the flow of blood to the brain, and so may cause fainting. 

Sometimes the fainting is very prolonged, and is then called 
a trance ! Such cases often resemble death so closely, that 
persons have been buried while in trance, and afterwards re- 
covered. Generally, true death can be known by the appear- 
ance of the eyeball, which sinks and looks rumpled when a 
person is dead. In no case, however, should burial take 
place till there are obvious signs of decomposition, which 
leaves no doubt. One of the first and surest signs of death, 
is the appearance of a green color on the abdomen, which is 
never seen during life. 

In trance there is of course some breathing, and some cir- 
culation of the blood, though slight ; and, with close atten- 
tion, one or both may be detected. There is also a different 
feel of the body, and a different condition of the muscles. 

Trance may be either complete or partial. Some are to- 
tally dead, mentally, for the time, while others retain con- 
sciousness, more or less, and know what is taking place 
around them. When this is the case, there must be circula- 
tion of blood enough, in the cerebrum, to cause mental oper- 
ations ; though, for some reason, the other nervous centres 
fail to receive a due supply. 

Fainting is often mistaken for apoplexy, but it may always 
be distinguished by attending to the pulse. It is, of course, 
only complete syncope, or fainting, which could be so mis- 
taken ; and, in complete syncope, the pulse cannot be felt, 
while in apoplexy it can be, and the breathing is also gener- 
ally perceptible. 

Fainting, in all cases, results from deficient circulation of 
blood in the brain, — no matter from what cause ; — so also 
does languor, debility of mind, and some forms of headache. 
Serious disease of the brain, and insanity, may also happen 
from the brain being thus starved too often, or for too long a 
period. Many cases of softening of the brain, and insanity, 
have been caused by bleeding. 

During a fainting fit there is not much to be done, 
and care must be taken not to do to much. In the 
first place, the patient should be laid flat down on 
the floor, with the head on a level with the body ; and, if 



32 



374 FAINTING. 



cold water be at hand, the face and neck should be gently 
sprinkled with it. In the absence of cold water, fan the pa- 
tient, and, at the same time, chafe the hands, and lift the 
arms now and then above the head, and then bring them 
down again. In bad cases, it is good sometimes to dash cold 
water in the face with some force ; but, as a rule, it is best 
to avoid wetting the patient unnecessarily. At the same time 
that this is done, the clothing should be everywhere * 
loosened, so that no impediment be left to the circulation. If 
a knife be handy, never wait to undo corset-laces ; cut them 
at once, and all other laces that can be readily got at. Cor- 
sets cause more fainting than perhaps anything else, and lay 
the foundation for many cases of brain and heart disease. 

Smelling-salts, held to the nose, are good helps ; but 
the} r should not be given too persistently, nor too strong, or 
they may arrest the process of breathing. Especially should 
care be taken with any liquids, like hartshorn, or cologne, 
which are apt to be spilled into the mouth, and very easily 
cause suffocation. 

Keep every one away but those who are really needed, so 
that the air and space around may be clear. 

The object in view in keeping the head low, is to make it 
easier for the feeble heart to drive the blood to it ; and cold 
water on the face excites the terminations of the sensory 
nerves, causing reflex action along the motor nerves, which 
influence the muscles of the heart and lungs. 

As soon as the patient can swallow, a little stimulant may 
be given. A teaspoonful of sal-volatile is very good, in a 
wine-glassful of water, or a little weak brand) 7 and water, 
hot. The compound spirits of lavender are also excellent ; 
or, in short, any stimulant that comes handiest. Care should 
be. taken, however, not to use stimulants too strong, nor to 
continue them too long. As soon as the heart begins to act 
well, they are no longer needed. ^ 

It is often useful to roll the body gently from side to side, 
and raise the arms up and, down, just as is done with a 
drowned person, to bring the lungs into play, and thus rouse 
the circulation. As soon as the fit is over, the patient should 
remain quiet for some time ; and, if a female, be left with 
her own sex, because the fit is usually followed by a tendency 
to activity of the kidneys, which should not be restrained. 

Those who are subject to such fits, and who have sufficient 
strength of mind, may often work them off by active exer- 
tion, mental and bodily, when they feel the premonitory 
symptoms. In this way, there is ho question, patients can 
do much for themselves, just as they may also encourage 
and exaggerate the fits by needless giving way to the ten- 
dency to them. 



APOPLEXY. 375 



As this disease, when established, results from debility, 
everything possible should be done to strengthen the system, 
in order to prevent, or finally cure it. Everthing exhausting 
should be avoided — both physical, mental, and emotional — 
and every means should be taken to improve the tone of the 
vital organs. Good food, fresh air, judicious exercise, and 
regular hours, with absence of all worry and excitement, are 
the most essential things. The skin should also be kept in 
brisk action, by bathing, and friction, and strict attention 
paid to the excretory functions, especially in young females. 
Strong tea, or coffee, are often exciting causes of fainting, 
and should always be avoided. 

Active, even boisterous amusement, if not too prolonged, 
is an excellent preservative against this trouble, and should 
be encouraged. Gloom, dulness, fear, and anxiety, dispose 
to it. In our young girls, it is often brought on from insuf- 
ficient fresh air and exercise, too little food, too much book- 
study, and corsets 1 Take half the school-books away, re- 
move the corsets, and let them romp and play, and feed them 
well, and most of them would get over the tendency to faint. 

Apoplexy, 

Apoplexy, or stroke, as it is sometimes called, is manifested 
by a sudden loss of all mental and muscular power, and sen- 
sation. The patient falls, as in an ordinary swod, or faint- 
iDg fit, and, indeed, the two diseases are often confounded. 
There is, however, an important difference, by which they 
may always be distinguished ; and it should be well under- 
stood, because the treatment useful in the one disease is 
hurtful in the other. In ordinary fainting, as before ex- 
plained, the blood leaves the head, owing to some defect in 
the circulation, and the brain is paralyzed, simply because it 
is deprived of its full supply of that vital fluid. The face 
is pale, and the extremities cold, while the breath, and pulse, 
can scarcety, if at all, be distinguished. 

In apoplexy, on the contrary, the circulation, and breath- 
ing, are not suspended, nor even perhaps diminished. In 
fact, in some cases, both are accelerated. A feeble, irregular 
pulse, is always a bad sign, as it shows the brain much af- 
fected. Ordinarily, the breathing is slower than usual, but 
at other times it is heavy, or labored, and accompanied by a 
peculiar snoring sound, and puffing out of the lips. This is 
called stertorous breathing, and, once heard, it can never be 
forgotten— it is observed only in severe cases. 

The face is usually flushed, while the blood-vessels in the 
neck, and on the temples, are seen to be swollen, and the 
eyes appear congested. 



376 APOPLEXY. 



Sometimes the' attack is instantaneous ; the patient falling 
as if dead, with little or no preparatory warning. More usu- 
ally, however, he complains of pain in the head, and be- 
comes insensible gradually. Perhaps in all cases there is 
some preparatory warning, but it may be slight and unno- 
ticed. The most usual indications of an approaching at- 
tack of apoplexy are, pain in the head, or feeling of fulness, 
drowsiness, and perhaps loss of hearing, or sight. 

In severe cases there is complete loss of consciousness, 
and motion, and it is utterly impossible to rouse the pa- 
tient ; but in slighter cases some degree of consciousness 
and sensation may still be left, so that he can be stimulated 
to make slight efforts at Voluntary motion. 

One side of the body may be completely without sensa- 
tion, or motion, and the other only partially so, or it may 
even be convulsed. The power of speech is lost, but the pa- 
tient usually retains the power of swallowing, at least for 
some t;me, except in fatal cases, in which that power is lost 
from the first, or very soon after the attack. 

Sometimes an attack of apoplexy lasts but a short time, 
and gradually passes off. At other times it lasts for weeks, 
and jet the patient may recover from it ; but in bad cases it 
may be fatal in a few hours, or even minutes. 

In most cases an apoplectic fit leaves behind it paralysis, 
or loss of^ower, in some of the muscles, which is rarely re- 
covered from. The paralysis frequently affects only the 
half of the body, leaving the other half in its ordinary state. 
When the paralysis is all on one side, the body being divided 
down the middle, it is called perpendicular paralysis, or 
hemiplegia ; but when it is only in the lower half, the body 
being divided across the middle, it is called horizontal par- 
alysis, or paraplegia. 

Paraplegia results from pressure upon, or disease of, some 
part of the spinal cord, hemiplegia only being connected 
with the brain. 

Apoplexy always has a tendency to return, and those who 
have once had an attack may expect to die from it. There 
may be many slight attacks before the final one, extending 
over a length of time, but usually the second, or at most the 
third one is fatal. It is rare in youth, more frequent in 
adults, and most frequent in old age ; in fact a large propor- 
tion of deaths over sixty are from this cause. 

The predisposing structural causes of apoplexy are, prob- 
ably, defects in the conformation of the brain, or of its 
blood-vessels, which may be fatally exaggerated by intem- 
perance in eating, or drinking, or by over-exertion, or vio- 
lent and long-continued emotion. A short neck, large head, 
and general full habit, is popularly thought to predispose to 



APOPLEXY. 377 



apoplexy, but with no good reason. In fact, these external 
peculiarities are of small account, compared with internal 
conditions, and have less influence than habit. A long- 
necked, small-headed man, of spare habit, who is intempe- 
rate, may run more risk of apoplexy than the most full- 
blooded, bull-necked man who is temperate. 

In using the term temperance I mean it to apply to all 
things which influence a man's health, and not to eating and 
drinking alone. 

Amative pleasures, in excess, very much dispose to apo- 
plexy, and so does indulgence in passion, or excessive men- 
tal work. In fact, this is the main cause of death from 
apoplexy among our business men, and journalists. 

The immediate cause of apoplexy is compression of the 
brain, which may result in two ways, namely, from blood 
escaping from a ruptured vessel, when it is called sanguine- 
ous apoplexy ; or from a fluid secreted from the vessels, 
when it is called serous apoplexy. 

When the blood escapes in consequence of an injury, as 
in a blow, or fall, it is called extravasation. In such a case 
the vessel is ruptured by violence ; but in ordinary sanguine- 
ous apoplexy it gives way from disease, or over- distension. 

The serum, or fluid which causes serous apoplexy, is the 
same which causes, in children, hydrocephalus, or water on 
the brain. It may result either from chronic IRisease, or 
from inflammation, following a fracture, or other injury of 
the skulL 

The symptoms are much the same, let the apoplexy arise 
how it may ; and we have no means of knowing, during life, 
whether it is sanguineous or serous, or whether it arises from 
disease in the membranes, or in the substance of the brain. 
The most frequent cause is effusion of blood from a rup- 
tured vessel, and this may take place either on the surface 
of the brain, or in its substance. 

The blood forms a clot, the pressure of which, on the brain 
matter, causes the apoplex} 7 . A very small clot is sufficient, 
especially in some portions of the brain, to cause instant 
death ! In other parts, however, a much larger clot may do 
less mischief, and may be recovered from. 

In examining brains after death, old clots are sometimes 
met with, half absorbed, showing that recovery is possible 
in favorable circumstances. 

In other cases where death has taken place, with all the 
usual symptoms of apoplexy, no clot, nor smy other cause 
of the disease could be discovered. 

In these cases, it is probable, the circulation was suspended 
in the brain from some sudden, spasmodic constriction of 
the blood-vessels. 



378 APOPLEXY. 



The treatment to be adopted, in case of an apoplectic fit, 
may be described generally as the opposite to that for faint- 
ing, because in fainting we want to drive blood to the head, 
and in apoplexy we want to draw it away ! The head should, 
therefore, be kept raised, and cold, by lotions or ice, while 
the lower parts of the body are made as hot as possible, and 
irritated by mustard plasters, or hard rubbing with course 
towels, or a flesh brush. 

• If the patient can swallow, stimulants should be given, in 
small quantities at a time, till the pulse begins to rise, and 
Hi en they must be stopped. The object of the stimulation 
is not to excite, but to keep up the circulation, and prevent 
sinking. 

For it must be borne in mind that, though there is too 
much blood in the head, yet there is too little in the other 
parts of the body, and the object is to equalize the circula- 
tion. 

Care must be taken, from the first, to remove all obstruc- 
tions to breathing, and the circulation, such as neckerchief, 
and collar, and to keep the patient still. 

This is pretty much all that can be done, at first, and the 
result must be waited for. 

It is customary, as soon as the patient rallies a little, or 
even if haloes not rally at all, to bleed from the arm. But 
many excellent physicians totally condemn the practice; 
and I think with reason. It is a question if a single life was 
ever saved by bleeding, in apoplexy, while it has unquestion- 
ably done much mischief. 

The fact must be borne in mind, as before stated, that 
there is not too much blood in the body, in apoplexy, but 
only too much of it in one place, — the head. It is not evenly 
distributed, and what is wanted is to cause an equal dis- 
tribution. 

And this shows the reason for the treatment adopted ; for 
the cold to the head drives the blood away from there, while 
the heat to the lower limbs draws it to them, and thus the 
brain becomes relieved. 

Now, when we bleed, it does not follow that the blood is 
especially abstractad from the head at all, but rather from 
the whole body equally, leaving the unequal distribution 
still the same. 

The #reat evil of bleeding, however, is in the after effect. 

Suppose the patient recovers from the fit ; then, as soon 
as the brain is relieved, it requires its full supply of blood, 
as before, and cannot get it ; the consequence of which is * 
that it is starved, and the patient becomes languid and feeble, 
with a tendency to faint. 

The final result of this is disease of the brain, giving 



APOPLEXY. 379 



a disposition to further attacks of apoplexy, or to in- 
sanity ! 

Bleeding has confirmed the tendency to apoplexy, in many 
of those it seemed to relieve, and it has made numbers 
maniacs for life, who might have perfectly recovered with- 
out it. 

In all cases the patient has a better chance of preserving 
life, and reason, without bleeding, than with it. 

After the first urgent symptoms are over, there is not 
much more to be done ; the patient must be kept very still, 
with the head and neck cool, and the extremities and sur- 
face of the body generally warm; Nourishing but unstimu- 
lating food should be given, in small quantities at a time, 
and stimulants moderately, if the circulation seems lan- 
guid. 

If the bowels are constipated, as they frequently are, 
there should be no hurry in forcing them, and especially 
there should be no resort to active purgation ; there are the 
same objections to purging as to bleeding, and it often 
causes similar mischief. Castor oil, or an injection, may be 
used if there seem any distress, or if the bowels remain too 
long constipated. If the bladder should be paralysed, as it 
sometimes is, care must be taken to draw off the urine with 
a catheter. 

The most important thing is, for persons to recognize 
when they are threatened with apoplexy, and how to ward 
it off, for but little can be done for it when it comes. The 
fact is, that a large proportion of our business, and pro- 
fessional men, cultivate a tendency to apoplexy, as assiduously 
and steadily as if it were a thing they desired. This may 
seem a strange statement, but it is nevertheless true, as will 
be evident on observing carefully their habits. It is true 
they do not wish apoplexy, but they could scarcely go bet- 
ter ways to work to get it than they do, if they did wish 
it; as a little explanation will show. Anything which 
causes a too active circulation of blood in the brain, too 
frequently, may lay the foundation of apoplexy, and other 
diseases. Whenever a man habitually uses his brain unduly, 
and neglects proper exercise of his body, he keeps constantly 
a larger supply of blood in the brain than there should 
be. The result of this, at first, is headache, languor, failure 
of mental power, and drowsiness.— After a while memory, 
or the power of attention fails, and sleeplessness sets in, 
with an utter weariness and disgust of all kinds of mental 
labor. Very often this terminates in softening of the brain, 
insanity, suicide, or death. In other cases, the constant 
distension of the blood-vessels, from incessant mental occu- 
pation, so weakens then coats that at last one gives way, a 



880 APOPLEXY. 



little blood escapes, forms a clot, and there is a case of 
apoplexy. 

Very often, when a man finds his mind flagging, he spurs 
it up with wine, and this hastens on the evil day, for every 
effort the brain is forced to make, when it is really in need 
of rest, necessitates the circulation in it of still more blood, 
and consequently a still more dangerous distension of the 
blood-vessels. 

Now observe the habits of our business and professional 
men, and see if it is not true that they cultivate a tendency 
to apoplexy. The whole day long, from the time they rise 
till the time they lie down, the mind is in a constant state 
of excitement and worry ; or, in other words, the brain is 
kept gorged with blood, and its vessels distended to their ut- 
most capacity. Not only is there the actual mental work, 
but the disturbing emotions of hope, fear, joy, and despair, 
continually digging away at the brain and keeping it in a 
state of unrest ; very "likely also tobacco, and liquor are 
brought in to help ; and, with all this, the rest of the body is 
totally neglected. The skin, kidneys, bowels and stomach 
become deranged, and the lungs, perhaps, breathe the whole 
time an impure air, so that but little blood is. made, and that 
impure, but the brain has to take it nearly all. 

A man leading such a life — and thousands do so is fortun- 
ate indeed if he escape brain disease in some form, and es- 
pecially apoplexy. It is not at all an unusual event, in 
Wall-street, New York, for a sudden turn in stocks to tum- 
ble some operator down in a fit. The poor man has had the 
blood-vessels in his brain distended all- day, up to the ut- 
most they could stand, and then comes some news which 
makes his heart give an extra throb, a fresh blood' wave 
rushes to the head, the vessels burst, and down he falls ! 

The same result is arrived at, in a slower way, by those 
who steadily overwork the brain in a less excitable way. 
It is only a question of time. Newspaper editors, and wri- 
ters, are constant victims to apoplexy, and other forms of 
brain disease, from constant overwork of the brain,, and 
want of rest. Any man who begins to hear, or feel, the arteries 
beat and throb behind his ears, or who finds his eyes grow dim, 
and his hearing dull, while lie is writing or reading, may be 
sure that he is on the road to apoplexy ! If he does not then 
stop, he will probably soon see things by halves, or double, 
and on stooping, or rising suddenly, will lose his balance 
from dizziness, and perhaps be quite unable to see and hear. 
If he cannot then stop, let his mind rest, and cultivate his 
body, he had better make his will, and wait for the blow. 

No kind of medication is of any possible use in such 
cases. The only thing is to give the mind, at once, absolute 



APOPLEXY. 381 



rest, with pleasurable occupation, and resort to every means 
for developing the muscular system, and improving the 
tone of the vital organs. 

Intemperance in eating and drinking, and over-indulgence 
in any violent emotions, strongly dispose to apoplex} r , es- 
pecially if combined with neglect of proper exercise. The 
sedentary man, who works only with his mind, keeps his 
brain hot, and his body cold, which are the conditions best 
calculated to cause apoplexy, especially if he tries to stimu- : 
late himself with exciting food and drink, or is spurred on 
by powerful emotion. Hundreds of men live constantly in 
this way, on the very verge of apoplexy, just ready for 
some unlooked for, or dreaded event, or bit of news, to top- 
ple them over. Then there is often great lamentation, 
and wonder, and it is spoken of as a mysterious dispensa- 
tion of providence. 

Extravasation of Blood in the Head. 

A severe blow on the head, whether it cause fracture of 
the skull, or only concussion, may lead to extravasation of 
blood from some of the vessels, and all the symptoms of apo- 
plexy. In simple concussion, or even in fracture of the 
skull, if no portion of the bone be driven in, the patient 
usually recovers, if kept quiet. When a part of the bone 
presses on the brain, however, it must be raised, so as to re- 
live the pressure. If the injury be at the base of the brain 
there is danger of some of the large blood vessels being 
ruptured, and more serious mischief is to be apprehended. 
Usually this is indicated by bleeding from the ears. 

In all such cases search should be made at once to see if 
the skull be fractured, and if there be any part of it driven 
in, so as to cause pressure. This of course is a surgeon's 
business, but instant help may often be needed when a sur- 
geon is not at hand. It is therefore very desirable that some 
knowledge of such matters should be more general than 
it is. 

The only thing to be done in a case of concussion of the, 
brain, or simple fracture of the skull, is to keep the patient 
perfectly still, with the head cool and the extremities warm. 
As he begins to recover, if the pulse be low, stimulants 
should be cautiously given, and nutriment in an easily diges- 
ted fluid form. Bleeding is often resorted to, but I canno£ 
advise it, in any case. 

The great danger, from any accident to the head, is in in- 
flammation, followed by the secretion of pus, or matter. 
This makes pressure on the brain, just the same as a clot of 
blood would do, and leads to apoplexy just the same. Very 



382 INFLAMMATION OF THE BEAIN. 



often a patient recovers from an accident, and seems quite 
well, but dies afterwards from an apopleptic fit. In such a 
case there has probably been inflammation, perhaps quite 
mild, followed by secretion of pus, or serum, which has 
killed b} T pressure. Sometimes after an accident a tumor 
will form, or a growth of bone, within the skull, either of 
which may lead to fatal results. 

Many children have been injured by boxing the ears, a 
practice indulged in only by the cruel and ignorant. The 
concussion from a box on the ears, though it may only 
cause a dizziness at the time, may lead to chronic or acute 
inflammation, followed by a secretion of pus, or serum, re- 
sulting in water on the brain, idiocy, or death. 

Inflammation of the Brain and its Membranes. 

There may be inflammation of the brain itself, called phre- 
nitis, or of its membranes, called meningitis. And the inflam- 
mation may be either acute, or chronic. 

The distinction between phrenitis and meningitis is not of 
much practical importance, for the symptoms, causes, and 
consequences are pretty much the same in both, and one is 
apt to lead to the other. The following remarks therefore 
apply to either. 

Acute inflammation of the brain, commonly called brain fever y 
usually commences very suddenly. The first symptoms are 
apt to be over-excitement of the mind, and of the senses. 
The patient seems as if intoxicated, and the senses become 
painfully acute, so that the least sound alarms, and the light, 
even when subdued, is complained of as being too bright. 
In short, there is real delirium, accompanied very gener- 
ally by severe pain in the head. The eyes look wild and 
bloodshot, and the pupils are contracted ; the tongue is dry 
and hard ; the breathing quick and labored, and the pulse 
full and hard. 

There are also all the usual indications of fever : hot, dry 
skin ; scanty, dark urine, and occasional shivers ; twitchings 
of the muscles may also be observed, and in bad cases even 
convulsions. 

These symptoms may exist from twelve to sixty hours, 
and, if not controlled, usually end in collapse. This is shown 
Ijy a gradual subsidence of the pain and excitement, and the 
occurrence of stupor and fainting, with hiccough, which 
soon terminates in death. 

Brain fever resembles typhus, but may be distinguished 
from it by being more sudden and rapid. It is also some- 
what like delirium tremens ; but on comparing the symptoms, 
to be hereafter described, they may be readily distinguished. 



INFLAMMATION OF THE BKAIN. 383 



In Phrenitis, there is, of course, a sudden and rapid in- 
crease in the circulation of the blood in the head, which 
causes the excitement of the senses, and delirium. The 
extra flow of blood in fact excites the brain just as alcohol, 
or any other stimulant would do, only more dangerously. 

The object in view, in treating brain fever is, therefore, to 
get this overflow of blood from the head as soon as possible. 
The usual plan is to bleed at once, even to fainting, and fol- 
low that up by severe purging. 

The same objection however applies to bleeding here as 
in apoplexy. There is none too much blood in tJ<£ whole body, 
but merely in the brain, and our efforts should be directed 
to getting it away from there to some other part. 

The proportion is not altered by bleeding, while the vital 
powers are weakened, and collapse is hastened. Every drop 
of blood taken away is wanted afterwards, if the patient 
lives ; and very often, after recovery from the fever, soften- 
ing of the brain sets in as a consequence of the loss of 
blood. 

But little more can be done than what was directed in 
apoplexy. Keep the patient as still as possible, in a quiet, 
darkened room, with the head cool, and the extremities 
warm. Cut off the hair, so as to apply cooling lotions or 
bandages to the head easily and effectively, and use hot 
fomentations to the abdomen, with mustard baths, or poul- 
tices, to the feet and legs. 

Blisters are commonly applied to the feet, legs, abdomen, 
and back of the neck, or even to the shaved head ; but the 
milder means above advised will be found quite as effective. 

Sometimes, by such means, the inflammation is subdued, 
the excitement subsides, and the patient gradually becomes 
rational and free from pain. Most usually, however, the 
disease runs its course, and is followed by the natural col- 
lapse, in wiiich stage other treatment becomes necessary. 

Generally severe purging is made to follow the bleeding ; 
but it is just as unnecessary and objectionable, since it leads 
to premature collapse, and to subsequent debility. 

As soon as the patient is able to take nourishment, it 
should be given, in a fluid form, and even a little stimulant, 
as soon as ever the fever begins to abate. 

In the stage of collapse, nourishment and stimulants must 
be given more freely ; and if the patient cannot sleep, opium 
must be used, or chloral hydrate. 

When this stage is reached, the patient needs not only all 
the blood he has, but new blood, as rapidly as it can be made. 
If he has been bled, now is the time when the evil of the 
practice shows itself. 

The only hope in this stage is in nourishment, quiet, and 



384 INFLAMMATION OF TAE BEAIN. 



sleep! Recovery is always slow, and the brain is often 
seriously affected for a long time after. In a great number 
of cases, indeed, the patient never fully recovers, neither 
bodily nor mentally, especially after bleeding and purging. 

Chronic Inflammation of the Brain. 

When there is chronic inflammation of the brain it is al- 
ways confined only to some particular part. 

The whole brain seems never to be inflamed in a chronic 
form, but always acutely. The membranes, however, both 
of the brain and spinal cord, may be affected by chronic in- 
flammation over the greater part, if not the whole of their 
extent. 

Chronic Inflammation of the Membranes usually shows itself 
first in slight delirium, which gradually increases till there 
is great excitement, as in acute inflammation. After a while 
this subsides, and the patient falls into a state of mental 
dulness and final idiocy. Generally there is also consider- 
ble pain in the head, with slight fever, but not much de- 
rangement of the special senses, if any. 

The symptoms, however, are often very obscure, and may 
easily be mistaken for those of mania. 

Chronic Inflammation of the Brain usually begins with pain 
in the head, accompanied by dimness of the vision, and 
giddiness. Cramps in the limbs are also often felt, always 
with a kind of numb tingling, as if they had been asleep. 
There is also very generally a peculiar unsteadiness in walk- 
ing, as if the patient could not properly balance himself, 
and the legs are dragged, instead of being properly lifted 
up. This is a characteristic symptom ; and very often the 
first thing the patient notices is that he is apt to catch 
his toe, while walking, without however suspecting the 
cause. 

There is not usually any fever, but the general health is 
apt to suffer. 

The most marked signs of the disease are in the mind. 
The patient becomes restless, or fidgety, and cannot apply 
himself long to one thing, and seldom remembers clearly 
what he has been doing. Very soon, if the disease be not 
checked, fainting fits set in, or convulsions, or partial para- 
lysis. Sometimes paralysis is, for a long period, the only 
marked indication, and it may even pass off, but is nearly 
sure to return. Generally the paralysis is observed in the 
muscles of the legs only, causing the unsteady gait, and 
dragging of the feet, and showing that the spine is affected, 
as well as the brain. 

Chronic phrenitis, if not checked, terminates in wasting 



ACTIVE CONGESTION. 385 



away of the brain, or in its becoming softened or hardened, 
and sometimes puffed out, or overgrown. 

Softening of the brain may be caused by the pressure of pus, 
the result of inflammation, or by blood being effused in its 
substance. When caused by pus it is called white softening, 
and when by blood red softening. 

Hardening of the brain is caused by a deposit of lymph 
in its substance, like what causes swellings in other parts of 
the. body. 

Hypertrophy, or diseased overgrowth of the brain, is 
caused in a similar manner to hardening, only the material 
does not solidify, but makes a puffy growth. 

All these diseases lead to idiocy and death ; but it is 
astonishing how long the brain will continue to act, in some 
cases, even when its substance seems quite changed, or 
almost destroyed. It must be remembered also that one 
side only may be affected, and the other remain compara- 
tively sound. 

The brain is also liable to tuberculous deposits, like the 
lungs in consumption, and to cancer, and other malignant 
growths, all of which cause inflammation. 

Beyond perfect quiet of mind, change of scene and oc- 
cupation, and attention to the bodily health, but little can 
be done in chronic inflammation of the brain, because the 
mischief is done when any of the marked sjmiptoms are 
noticed. 

The great point is, for men to recognize the conditions 
which lead to the disease, and change their habits in time. 

If a man be habitually intemperate, gives way to violent 
emotions, neglects his bodily health, and overworks his 
mind, he is surely predisposing himself to inflammation of 
the brain and apoplexy. 

The time to stop, and make a change, is when he first 
finds his mind get feeble and confused, and his head hot and 
painful, with dizzy spells, and feebleness in his limbs. If 
he will, or must keep on, after these warnings, there is danger 
in the future, and no medical treatment can be of the least 
service to him. 

Congestion of the Brain. 

Determination of blood to the head, or active congestion 
of the brain, arises from derangement in its circulation. The 
fault may be in the action of the heart, driving the blood 
with too much force and frequency, or it may be in the 
blood-vessels of the brain itself. 

The symptoms are, usually, flushed face, sense of fulness 
in the eyes, with dimness of vision, violent beating of the 



33 



386 DELIRIUM TREMENS. 



arteries in the neck and temples, and headache. All the 
symptoms are made worse b} r stooping, or looking np, or by 
any unusual exertion. In bad cases there may be giddiness, 
total loss of sight for a time, and great pain in the back of 
the head. Sometimes the patient is restless, and excitable, 
and at other times dull and drowsy, with no inclination for 
mental effort ! 

This condition may endure for a long time, sometimes bet- 
ter and sometimes worse, and the tendency to it may, with 
care, even pass away. There is, however, always a liability 
to a return, and it is a dangerous condition to become con- 
firmed, as it often terminates in acute or chronic inflamma- 
tion. In fact, simple congestion, or rush of blood to the 
head, is often only the forerunner, or primary simple stage, of 
more serious disorders. 

Whenever a man has a tendency to determination of blood 
to the head, he should observe, whenever an attack come^ 
on, what he has been doing, so that he may find out what 
disposes to it, and thus be able to ward it off. Nearly al- 
ways it will be found there has been some imprudence in 
eating or drinking, over-indulgence in some strong emotion, 
or too much, or too long-continued mental work ; and, of 
course, all such things should be carefully avoided in future. 
Quiet of mind, control of the passions, moderate bodily ex- 
ertion, and the non-use of stimulants of any kind, are the 
main things to be attended to. 

In a severe attack, the head should be kept cool, while the 
patient lies still, with the head raised, and with all impedi- 
ments carefully removed from the neck. If the feet are cold, 
they should be put in hot water, or have mustard poultices 
applied to them. It is well also to rub and chafe the whole 
body, so as to draw the circulation to the surface. If the 
bowels have been a long time costive, it is also serviceable, 
in bad attacks, to give a.mild purgative. 

Delirium Tremens. 

Drunkards* delirium is a state of congestion of the brain, 
caused, apparently, by long-continued over-excitement. In 
this disease, the vessels are kept engorged with blood so 
constantly, from the action of the stimulants, that their coats 
become weakened, and cannot contract with force enough to 
assist the circulation. The consequence is that the brain is 
always over-full, and in a state of fever, as it were. The blood 
itself is also both poor and impure in quality, because diges- 
tion is imperfect, and there is no proper nutrition. 

Very often there is no delirium tremens till the stimulants 
are left off, and then it is apparently caused by the mere ces- 



DELIRIUM TREMENS. 387 



Bation of the usual excitement. In fact, this is generally the 
case ; although sometimes an attack will come on in the very 
midst of a debauch. 

Delirium tremens may result from the abuse of alcoholic 
liquors, opium, or other narcotics, or even from long-con- 
tinued mental excitement. There is no d<5ubt but that there 
is always, in this disease, an overplus of blood in the brain, 
and it is probably always impure, or much impoverished. 
There is no good ground, however, to suppose, as some have 
done, that the vapor of the alcohol itself finds its way into 
the brain, alone causes the delirium, directly. 

Some physicians contend that delirium" tremens is essen- 
tially a -nervous disease, and that it depends only incidentally 
on the congestion, which may be the case, but it is very cer- 
tain that the congestion is always present. 

The symptoms of delirium tremens are well-marked, and 
very painful to witness. At first, there is a remarkable low- 
ness of spirits, which is shown in the countenance, and is ac- 
companied by sighing, and a feeling of oppression at the heart. 
Sleep is difnciilt to get, except by the usual stimulus, and 
then it is heavy, and disturbed by bad dreams, so that it gives 
no refreshment. There is generally no appetite, the tongue is 
farred and flabby, and the pulse is slow and irregular. There 
is also a tendency to shaking in the hands, and a constant 
restlessness, or disposition to change the position of the 
body. 

As the disease progresses, great excitement sets in, even 
to delirium, with an almost total absence of sleep, except in 
short snatches, broken by starts and tremors, probably from 
bad dreams. The mind is almost constantly in a confused 
state, though there may be occasional intervals in which the 
patient rouses himself, and becomes partly rational, for a 
short time, and then he wanders off again. "There is all the 
time a state of worry, and apparent anxiety to be doing some- 
thing, but with no power to do anything." A state of fever - 
ishness next supervenes ; the skin and head become hot. and 
the feet and hands cold. A clammy perspiration breaks out 
on the face, which has a peculiar smell, something like that 
of insane people. This denotes an advanced stage of the 
disease, and those who have once smelt the peculiar odor 
can recognize delirium tremens by it at once. 

After this, the mind wanders worse and worse, and becomes 
filled with strange fancies and visions, mostly of a terrifying 
character. In fact, fear and dread seem the great character- 
istics of this disease. Horrid forms, particularly those of 
snakes, seem to follow the poor victim everywhere, and he 
shrieks with terror in his vain efforts to get away fromthem. 

Finally the stage of excitement wears itself out, and ex- 



388 DELIRIUM TREMENS. 



haustion sets in, much like that of typhus fever. The skin, 
bowels, kidneys, and all the other secreting organs cease to 
act, and the vital powers sink rapidly, till death ensues, un- 
less proper measures are promptly taken. 

The treatment of this disease, however, is pretty well un- 
derstood ; and it *can be generally cured, unless the pa- 
tient be too much run down, or the attacks come too fre- 
quently. 

Although^ delirium tremens resembles typhus fever, in 
some respects, still it may readily be distinguished from it, 
especially at first, because there is no increase of the pulse, 
and nothing feverish or inflammatory. The second stage re- 
quires a little more attention to distinguish the two ; but, if 
the habits of the patient are known, a correct judgment can 
usually be arrived at. The fear also, and dread of being 
pursued by horrid things, is almost peculiar to delirium tre- 
mens. 

Some forms of mania resemble this disease, to some ex- 
tent, but none of them present that peculiar rambling of 
the ideas, nor that dreadful fear so peculiar to delirium 
tremens. 

In treating this disease, it must be borne in mind that the 
worst symptoms follow, in all cases, the sudden stoppage of 
the stimulant, whatever that may have been, which leaves the 
system in a state of uncontrollable excitement. The first thing 
to be done is to calm and soothe, and above all, induce sleeep. 
The bowels and kidneys must also be made to act at once ; 
and, for this purpose, the compound cathartic pill, when it 
can be got, is excellent But, if that, or the compound rhu- 
barb pill, cannot be got, Epsom salts will do, or castor oil, or 
any good, quick purgative. Two or three teaspoonfuls of 
sweet nitre also will help the action of the kidneys. They 
may be given in a half tumbler of water, £nd repeated every 
two hours, till the urine flows freely. 

The great thing after these remedies have been adminis- 
tered, and while awaiting their action, is to induce deep! 
For this purpose, twenty or thirty drops of laudanum may 
be given every four hours, till the patient goes to sleep. It 
is well to give the laudanum with ten drops of ammonia to 
each dose, or thirty drops of sal volatile. 

Keeping the head cool with cold lotions, or wet bandages, 
assists very much in inducing sleep ; and, in bad cases, the 
hair should be cut off short. When the patient awakes, a 
little beef tea should be given, and some weak, hot brandy 
and water, just enough to slightly stimulate. If he remains 
tolerably calm, he may be left awake from six to ten hours 
or so, and then the laudanum should be given again, to in- 
duce another sleep ; but if he becomes very restless, it may 



HYDROCEPHALUS. 389 



b3 repeated in four or five hours — always giving the beef tea 
and stimulant when he wakes, and paying attention to acting 
on the kidneys and bowels. 

After a few good sleeps, the dose of laudanum may be 
gradually reduced, and also the stimulant, and the amount of 
nutriment increased ; but the bowels and kidneys must be 
made to act. 

In many cases, the chloral hydrate acts better than lauda- 
num, and should be used in preference. Twenty to forty 
grains may be given at a dose, in a half tumbler of water. 

In a few days solid food may be given, and some good 
tonic — such as quinine, or the compound tincture of gentian. 
The brandy, or other stimulus, may be needed for a little 
while, but the dose must be gradually lessened. It may be 
totally left off as soon as the appetite is restored, and the 
bowels and kidneys act freely. 

In the violent stages of the disease, the patient must be 
watched, and guarded, or he may injure himself or others. 
Restraint is sometimes necessary. 

Hydrocephalus. 

Water on the brain is a disease of childhood, and is princi- 
pally found in those of a scrofulous habit. The nature of it 
has already been explained, when describing the membranes 
of the brain. Acute hydrocephalus is always a result of in- 
flammation of the brain, and the first symptoms are precisely 
those described when treating upon that disease. There is 
always derangement of the digestive organs, and kidneys, 
and also of the nervous system. The patient becomes dull, 
languid, and drowsy ; complains of pain in the head, and 
soreness in various parts of the body. Sleep is fitful and 
disturbed, and there is a tendency to moan, or to call out, 
u Oh ! my head, my head ! " — and, in most cases, a peculiar, 
short, sharp cry is heard, called the watery-head cry. In 
some few cases there seeerns to be no pain, and no complaint 
is made ; the child being simply dull and drowsy. 

As the disease progresses the walk becomes more un- 
steady, there is a tendency to clench the fists, with thumb 
inside the fingers, and to throw back the head. The drowsi- 
ness may now disappear, and be succeeded by an unusual 
wakefulness. The child seems to find it difficult to support 
the head, sighs very often, has a peculiar dejected look, and 
seems to be in constant suffering 

There is also apt to be a good deal of fever in the ad- 
ranced stage, the head is very hot, and frequently the brain 
seems to swell out, at the openings of the skull bones, so 
that it may be felt with the finger. The child screams with 

33* 



390 HYDROCEPHALUS. 



pain, and all the time carries its hand to its head, as if to 
point out the seat of its suffering. 

This condition of active inflammation may last for several 
days, or even weeks, and finally passes away. Then com- 
mences, from the serous membrane, the effusion of fluid, 
which presses' upon the brain, causing drowsiness, insensi- 
bility, twitching of the muscles, or convulsions, with squint- 
ing of the eyes, and finally paralysis, with delirium. The 
swelling out of the brain becomes more evident ; the moan- 
ing, and other signs of pain, more constant, with grinding 
of the teeth, and rolling of the head from side to side, till 
•finally a severe convulsion puts an end to the suffering. 

These are the more prominent symptoms, observed in 
most cases, but they are often much varied, and sometimes 
totally different. 

The duration of the disease is also very uncertain, be- 
ing sometimes only a few days, and sometimes several 
weeks. 

In infants it usually runs its course in ten days, or two 
weeks ; but in children from five to eight j 7 ears of age it more 
frequently endures from four to six weeks. 

The immediate cause of death is pressure on the brain, 
from the fluids effused from the serous membrane. No 
known treatment is of any use, unless perhaps in the very 
earliest stages, to check the inflammation. It is doubtful, 
however, if at any time much, or any good is done, for the 
disease is probably caused by a deposit of tuberculous mat- 
ter in the brain, like that which causes consumption in the 
lungs ; and when the mischief has gone far enough to be 
noticed, it has gone too far to be cured. 

Chronic hydrocephalus, or dropsy of the brain, consists in . 
an undue effusion of fluid into the ventricles of the brain, 
as before explained. The quantity sometimes is very great, 
several gallons having been found in some cases, causing 
the head to be enormously distended. 

The dropsy may exist before birth, causing a difficulty in 
delivery, or it may come on at any period after ; but there 
are no means of knowing when it is threatening, for the 
first sure sigh is the actual enlargement of the head. 

The pressure of the water forces the bones of the skull 
apart, and stretches the integuments in all directions, so that 
the top of the head overhangs, especially before and behind. 
This overhanging of the immense top, and the small face 
beneath, has a peculiar effect, and gives the poor child a 
strange, weird appearance, 

The nervous system is always disturbed, so that the patient 
is fretful and uncertain. 

The eyesight is usually affected, even to blindness in many 



HYDROCEPHALUS. 391 



cases, and very often hearing, smell, and taste are lost, 
from pressure on the ganglions of the special senses. 

Epileptic fits are common, or convulsions, and there is a 
peculiar unsteadiness in the walk, as if the patient were 
constant!}' trying to balance. 

Various other symptoms are also observed'; but it is not 
necessary to notice them all, because the disease can never 
be mistaken. 

A few cases have been known in which the head gained an 
enormous size, and yet with no suffering, or loss of "intellect, 
or of an} 7 of the special senses. 

Children born with water on the brain seldom live long, 
and when the disease appears during the first year, the child 
seldom lives over three }~ears. In some few cases the brain 
seems to get accustomed to the usual conditions, and the 
patient grows up with a wateiy head. A few have been 
known to reach twenty, thirty, and even forty years of age. 
Nine times out of ten, however, or rather ninety-nin e times 
out of a hundred, an early death puts an end to the patient 
and the disease. In some still rarer cases the fluid has become 
absorbed, and the head has resumed its normal state. 

A scrofulous habit appears to be the great predisposing 
cause of hydrocephalus, and the immediate exciting causes 
are probably deranged nutrition, inaction of the kidneys, 
bowels, and skin, and excitement, or stimulation of the 
brain. 

Many children have probably died of this disease from the 
thoughtless efforts of their parents to make prodigies of 
them ! 

Scrofulous children are often very bright, and the vain 
parents encourage any peculiar faculty they may have, for 
the purpose of showing them off. The consequence of this 
is that the brain, which might have become healthy if lef t 
unstimulated, becomes precociously forced, and the seeds 
of disease are rapidly developed. 

Restraining children in their natural impulse to romp, to 
be noisy and restless, and perpetually changing their occu- 
pation, does them an immense amount of mischief. 

The ambition to have extra good children — that is, ic?i- 
natural ones — often does as much mischief as the ambition 
to have them geniuses. It is always an unhealthy sign to 
find children precociously thoughtful, and quiet, or con- 
cerned about serious things. To talk to children about death, 
and a future state, and to try to create in them agitating 
hopes, and fears, about what they cannot understand, is 
6ure to do them injury. If they take such things seriously 
it is a sure sign of an unhealthy brain, and inflammation, 
with its concomitants, dropsy, and death, may be looked for. 



392 PARALYSIS, OR .PALSY. 



In many cases the size of the head is but little increased, 
and 3 T et the disease goes rapidly through all its stages and 
ends fatally. In fact, sometimes there is no increase of the 
head at all, and yet the same result ensues. 

It must be remembered that a small amount of pressure, 
in some places, may do more mischief than a large amount 
in others. Sometimes also death may ensue during the in- 
flammatory or congestive stage, before any fluid has been 
secreted, and of course without any water being actually on 
the brain at all. 

It may as well be said at once, in reference to chronic hy- 
drocephalus, that there is no known treatment calculated 
to be of the smallest use, and the patient may as well be 
left alone, except as far as any means can be adopted to 
case suffering. 

Surgeons have tapped the brain, and drawn off the fluid, 
the general result being speedy death, with very rarely a 
recovery and cure. Compression has also been adopted to 
cause absorption of the fluid, but the result has not been 
satisfactoiy. 

The great thing to attend to, in children predisposed to 
hydrocephalus, is the general heath, and bodily develop- 
ment, and to keep them children, in every sense of the term. 
I have seen numbers of poor little things, with pale, anxious 
faces, timid looks, and old, wise ways, at churches and Sun- 
day schools, being catechised and drilled till their brains 
were either stupified or precociously developed, and who 
were being thus prepared for brain disease ! When one of 
such dies it is called a mysterious dispensation of provi- 
dence, and the poor little thing is said to have been too good 
for this world / It is certain that such ill-developed beings 
are never likely to be of much use in this world, nor is their 
existence likely to be one of much enjoyment to themselves, 
whether it be long or short. 

Paralysis, or Palsy. 

Paralysis, or Palsy, is not properly a disease itself, but a 
symptom, or consequence, of some other disease. Most 
frequently it is a result of inflammation, or of some organic 
derangement of the great nervous centres. 

There are two kinds of paralysis, one affecting the nerves of 
sensation, and the other the nerves of motion ; but both may 
sometimes coexist together. 

Thus the optic nerve may be paralysed, causing a peculiar 
kind of blindness (amaurosis), in which the structure of the 
eye may still remain perfect. The auditory nerve may be 
similarly affected, causing nervous deafness ; and so may the 



PARALYSIS, OS PALSY. 392 



?/, and gustatory nerves, causing loss of smell, and 
taste. The nerves of touch, or common sensation, over the 
whole body, may also be paralyzed, so that there will be no 
feeling anywhere. 

Paralysis of the nerves of motion may exist in some one 
part, or in half of the body, or sometimes in nearly the 
whole of it. When one side of the body is paralyzed it is 
called hemiplegia ; and when the lower half of the body, 
from the loins downwards is affected, it is called paraplegia. 
When the nerves of motion in the face are affected it is 
c&lled facial paralysis. Sometimes the motor nerves of the 
wrist only are paralyzed, especially in painters who work 
much with lead ; and it is then called vnrist drop. 

Palsy is a kind of incomplete paralysis, in which there is 
motion ; but it is involuntary and irregular. Sometimes, for 
instance, the head will constantly move from side to side 
without the patient being able to prevent it. This is called 
commonly shaking palsy. 

Hemiplegia is most frequent on the left side, and it usually 
comes with, or follows, an attack of apoplexy. The power 
of motion, on the affected side, may be either lost totally, 
or partially, and sensation may be, or may not be lost at the 
same time. 

The mind is generally affected to some extent, and especi- 
ally the memory, which is scarcely ever so good after an 
attack as before. Usually the arm fails first, and for a long 
time it may only feel more or less numb ; but gradually tho 
whole of that side of the body becomes affected. 

Recovery from hemiplegia, more or less perfect, occasion- 
ally takes place, and then the arm is the first part to re- 
gain its power, but it is seldom that the improvement is 
lasting. 

Hemiplegia results from disease of the brain, or from in- 
jury to it, on the side opposite to the paralysis. 

Paraplegia is a paralysis of both motion and sensation in 
the lower part of the body. When complete, there is a total 
loss of all muscular power, and of all sensation, so that the 
patient can neither move nor feel below a certain part of the 
spine. The bladder and large intestine are also paralyzed, 
so that the faeces and urine pass involuntarily. 

Sometimes the paralysis is not complete, so that the limbs 
can be dragged about, and there is some sensation left, like 
a tingling in the muscles. There may also be some sensation 
in the bladder and rectum, enough to warn when they are 
about to act, though the patient may have no power to pre- 
vent that action. 

Paraplegia generally results from softening of the spinal 
cord, following inflammation, or from some injury. It is 



394 PARALYSIS, OB PALSY. 



therefore connected with the spinal cord altogether, while 
hemiplegia is connected with the brain. 

Facial Paralysis affects the nerves of motion in the face 
only. Generally but one side is affected, and then the mouth 
is drawn over to the sound side, because the muscles act 
there, but not on the paralyzed side. 

In this form of paralysis there is some disease of the 
roots of the facial nerves, or some pressure upon them. 

Shaking Palsy usually attacks first the hands, arms, and 
neck, and then extends to the lower limbs. It has a con- 
stant tendency to encroach, and end in paralysis complete. 
hi mild cases the palsy is suspended during sleep, but not 
in bad cases. Sometimes mastication and swallowing are 
effected by jerks, or spasmodic efforts, and the bowels and 
bladder generally act more or less involuntarily. Softening 
of the spinal cord is the most frequent cause, and it often 
follows the excessive use of alcoholic liquors, or tobacco. 

The treatment of paralysis or palsy, may be summed up 
in few words. The first thing, of course, is to find out, if pos- 
sible, the physiological cause of the disease, and remove it 
if we can. In the majority of cases it is, during life, mere 
guess work as to what particular part of the nervous centres, 
the brain, or spinal cord, is affected. And even if that be dis- 
covered, there is but little, of a special character, to be done. 

Attention to the general health, tonics, and the removal of 
all debilitating and exciting causes, constitute the sum total 
of our remedial resources. Since the paralysis depends upon 
pressure, in some part of the brain or spinal cord, from ef- 
fused serum, or a clot of blood, no permanent relief can be 
looked for till that serum or clot be absorbed. 

Good friction of the surface of the body, by rough towels 
and flesh brushes, is undoubtedly beneficial, because it stim- 
ulates the nerves, and they re-act on the nervous centres. 
Electricity is also often useful for the same reason, and both 
remedies should be steadily persisted in for a length of time. 

The only special medicine of any use is strychnine, and 
this is so powerful that it should always be given, and watched, 
by some one experienced in its effects. 

In paraplegia, ergot of rye seems to be of use in some few 
cases, and setons, and issues, over the spine, are commonly 
used to remove the inflammation, or to cause absorption of the 
clot, or serum. Such means, however, are verj^ weakening 
if kept up too long, and perhaps the debility consequent on 
their use does more harm eventually, than their immediate 
action does good. 

Recoveries do take place, from all forms of paralysis, but 
the}' are very few, and no one is justified in saying that they 
ure owing to medical treatment. The steady use of friction, 



HEADACHE. 395 



and electricity, are the most likely to do good, but they 
must be persisted in for months, or years,, if necessary, be- 
cause, it must be remembered, the process of absorption of 
the matter causing pressure, is very slow. 

I once saw a man who had lain perfectly paralyzed for sev- 
eral years. The only voluntary motion of which he was ca- 
pable, was a slight rolling of the eyes. He could swallow 
when food or drink was put to the back of his mouth, but 
otherwise was as motionless as a corpse, and so remained 
till he died. What he felt, or what was his state of con- 
sciousness, he had no means whatever of making known. 

Headache. 

Headache, like palsy, is rather a result, or symptom of 
some other disease, and in some of its forms it is the precur- 
sor, or first simple indication of congestion, or inflammation, 
of the brain, or of its membranes. 

Medical writers describe many different kinds of headache, 
of which, perhaps, the following are the most distinct, ' and 
best known. 

1. Rheumatic Headache. This is felt mostly in the back, or 
front of the head, where the muscles are most spread out, 
though it is often very bad in the temples, just above the 
front of the ear. The pain often intermits, and shifts from 
o'ie point to another, occasionally locating itself along the 
muscles of the jaw. 

As a general rule it is worst at nights, and is readily 
brought on by colds, or exposure to draughts, and is very 
liable to return, like rheumatism generally. 

In this form of headache the muscles on the outside of 
the head are sore and tender, and are painful when rubbed, 
or pressed upon. In some cases they even swell, and be- 
come red and inflamed, like the limbs in inflammatory rheu- 
matism. 

The general symptoms are those of rheumatism, as we or- 
dinarily see it. The stomach is usually deranged, and there 
are apt to be deposits in the urine. Usually rheumatism in 
the head is only a part of a general attack, affecting other 
portions of the body as well, but sometimes it attacks the 
head alone. 

The treatment of this form of headache must be the same 
as for rheumatism generally, and the first thing is to get the 
bowels, stomach, liver, and kidneys working well. Then 
use tonics and anti-periodics, especially quinine. To ease 
the pain, if the patient cannot sleep, give five to ten grains 
of Dover's powders, or fifteen to thirty grains of chloral 
hydrate, or as many drops of laudanum. The head should 



396 HEADACHE. 



be kept warm, with a flannel cap if necessary, and often rub- 
bed gently with a good anodyne lotion, such as the follow- 
ing. 

1$ Alchohol half a pint. 

Camphor one ounce. 

Liquor Ammonia, (Hartshorn) one ounce. 

Laudanum one ounce. 

Of course perfect relief is to be expected only when the 
rheumatism is cured. 

"Rheumatic headache can readily be distinguished from any 
other kind by its symptoms, as above described, and by the 
fact that it is felt most outside at first, and that the muscles 
are tender, and painful when pressed. 

2. Congestive Headache. This form of headache is often 
only a mild chronic form of apoplexy, since it depends upon 
the same causes, and often terminates in acute inflamma- 
tion. 

The pain in this form of headache is felt, in a dull way, 
over and in the whole of the head, though it is perhaps worst 
at the front and back ; the face is usually flushed, the eyes 
red, and the countenance generally heavy and dull. There is 
no soreness, as in rheumatic headache, nor are the symptoms 
worse at nights. 

Usually the liver is torpid, the bowels sluggish, and the 
urine scant and high-colored. In short, there are most of 
the symptoms we usually see when there is a tendency to in- 
flammation of the brain, and apoplexy. 

The treatment of this form of headache is also the same, 
essentially, as that for inflammation of the brain. The head 
should be made cool, the feet warm, and the stomach and 
bowels properly attended to as soon as possible. Relief is 
obtained only by drawing the overplus of blood away from 
the head to other parts of the body. 

But, besides this form of congestive headache, it may also 
occur from weakness of the brain, caused by debilitating 
sickness, loss of blood, or by any enfeebling discharge. In 
such cases, the pulse is feeble and slow, the face pale and 
sallow, and the head feels as if there were no brains there to 
think with-r-in fact, it is starved. Very often, also, the feet 
swell, and, on making the slightest exertion, the heart pal- 
pitates, and the pain in the head becomes much worse. The 
most severe pain is generally felt when the cause of weak- 
ness is removed, and when an increased flow of blood takes 
place in the head. This arises from the circumstance that 
the brain has become weakened, and cannot stand the in- 
creased labor thrown upon it. As the system becomes more 
thoroughly nutrifled, and the brain stronger, the pain ceases. 



HEADACHE. 397 



This indicates the required treatment. All weakening 
losses must be stopped, and the system built up, by tonics 
and good food, as soon as possible. Instead of there being 
too much blood, there is here too little, in all parts of the 
body, and a new supply must be created as soon as possible. 
Quinine and iron are both useful. 

There is also a form of congestive headache, resulting from 
irritability of the brain and nerves ! In this case, any little 
mental disturbance, or any unusual emotion, by exciting the 
brain, or increasing the action of the heart, induces a sudden 
rush of blood, and causes the pain. Any little excitement, 
or worry, in persons of this irritable temperament, causes 
palpitation of the heart, and nervous headache, instantly. The 
pain is often intense, and is peculiarly distressing, from the 
way in which it affects the mind and disposition. 

Females are the most subject to nervous headache, partly 
from the greater natural irritability of their nervous systems, 
partly from their neglect of exercise, and, in pact, from their 
tendency to give way to emotion. 

A better physical development, and less development of 
the imagination, would correct this in most of them. 

Overwork of the mind, in any one, and neglect of the 
bodily health and development, disposes to an irritable state 
of the nervous system, and consequently, to this form of 
headache. This is the case very generally with authors, 
business men, and mere novel-reading women. 

All that can be done, both to prevent and cure this form 
of disease is, to strengthen the body, and avoid everything 
which can stimulate the mind or excite the emotions. Plenty 
of exercise in the open air, good food, cold water, complete 
mental relaxation, and no excitement. 

The best of all precautions against irritability of the brain 
and nerves is, indulgence in some hobby of a handicraft na- 
ture ; something which needs but little thought, and keeps 
the hands employed in making! The man who can thor- 
oughly enjoy carpentering, locksmithing, metal- working, 
wood-carving, or any similar occupation, has a resource 
which will be more useful to him than all the medication he 
can purchase. And so with women ; anything for them to 
do with the hands, if it be not too monotonous, and provid- 
ing it creates something. 

3. Dyspeptic, or Sick Headache. — This is properly called also 
sympathetic headache, because in it the head itself is not af- 
fected, but suffers, from sympathy, with some derangement 
of the stomach. 

Any slight error in diet, eating a little too much, or going 
too long without food, will often bring on an attack, in those 
disposed to this trouble, while they may work mentally, even 



34 



398 HEADACHE. 



to excess, without having headache— if the stomach be all 
right. 

The explanation previously given (of the nervous connec- 
tion between the brain and stomach) will make it easily un- 
derstood how this may be the case. In fact, the action of 
each organ upon the other is reciprocal, so that over-action 
of the brain may derange the stomach, or irritability of the 
stomach may affect the brain. The attack may be immedi- 
ately due either to mere irritability of the stomach, to inac- 
tion of the liver, or to constipation of the bowels. The pain 
is usually felt most over one eye, or rather in the temple, 
and the eyeball itself is frequently quite tender, and very 
sensitive to light. The arteries in the temples are also usu- 
ally distended, and throb very much, while the forehead is 
very hot. 

There is generally more or less distressing uneasiness, or 
nausea in the stomach, especially in the morning, and not 
infrequently vomiting, especially on rising, or immediately 
after eating. Generally, however, an attack does not last 
over a day and night, or, at most, into part of the following 
day, when it passes off, leaving a feeling of faintness, and of 
tenderness in the eyes. Nearly always the immediate cause 
is waiting too long for food, eating something unsuitable, or 
undergoing some sudden emotion or mental excitement, es- 
pecially on an empty stomach, or just after eating. 

No set rules can be laid down as to diet in such cases, be- 
cause what agrees with one may disagree with another. 
Careful observation will soon teach any one what should be 
avoided, in their own cases, better than any rules can. It 
may, however, be said, of persons disposed to sick head- 
ache, that they should never eat much at a time, and should 
never wait long for food. Frequent, light meals are best for 
them, of whatever experience shows suits them best. Very 
often an attack m.o,y be cut short by using some simple se- 
dative, such as tea, or a little compound spirits of lavender, 
combined with some simple food — but coffee, liquor, or 
wine, should not be used ; though a single glass of cham- 
pagne is often serviceable. 

In very severe attacks, ten, fifteen or twenty grains of 
chloral hydrate, or as many drops of laudanum may be taken, 
to induce sleep. On waking, the headache is generally gone. 
Of course, if the patient can sleep without such remedies, 
they should not be given. 

When the sick headache arises from torpid liver, or inac- 
tive bowels, it is not usually so acute, and comes on more 
gradually, but may last longer. Some people are very liable 
to this particular form of disease ; and, if they go over the 
usual time for a motion of the bowels, even for half an hour, 



HEADACHE. 399 



or, if they wait for a meal, they are sure to have headache. 
Any little inaction of the liver leads to the same result, and 
they feel dull, and Jieadachy, till exercise, or some other 
stimulus, has brought the liver into action, when they feel 
relieved at once. 

It is very probable that the trouble arises, in a great mea- 
sure, in such cases, from the blood which circulates in the 
brain being impure, as it always is in torpidity of the liver. 
The bilious matter, which the liver should remove from the 
blood, is left in it to a great extent, and is a real poison, as 
already explained. 

Many persons bring on sick headache from too early rising, 
and from working, or walking, before fereakfast, with the 
mistaken notion of getting an appetite. Many delicate fe- 
males, subject to this disease, are much better for even hav- 
ing breakfast in bed, as soon as fully awake, the exertion 
even of dressing, with an empty stomach, being sufficient to 
give them sick headache the whole day after. 

With the exception of what has been above recommended, 
it may be said that medication is useless to cure this disease. 
Nothing can be done but to try and keep the liver and bow- 
els in good working order, and be careful in regard, to diet. 
Purgatives, or emetics, are only of temporary service ; and 
the same may be said of all anti-bilious medicines, to act on 
the liver. In fact such medicines, if used too much, only in- 
crease the evil, and make the patient worse. 

The tendency to sick headache, it is some consolation to 
know, usually passes off by middle life, or earlier, and leaves 
nothing serious behind it. 

Many persons bring on, or keep up this trouble, by irregu- 
larity in the time of eating, by not masticating their food 
properly, and by using too much slops ! Man}' females es- 
pecially bring it on in this way, and keep the stomach weak 
by continually drenching it with warm fluids. 

4. Periodic Headache. This is felt almost solely in the fore- 
head, and on that account is often called brow ache! It is 
also called neuralgia in the head, beccause in many respects 
it resembles ordinary neuralgia. The great peculiarity of 
this disease is that it comes and goes, and returns again, at 
regular intervals, like intermittent fever, the intervals vary- 
ing in length in different cases. In some respects it resem- 
bles rheumatic headache, but may be distinguished from it 
by being periodic, and also because no soreness accompanies 
the pain. 

Occasionally one half of the head only will be affected, 
while the other half is quite free. It is then called hemicra- 
nia. The causes of periodic headache are unknown, but 
in ^11 probability it is dependent on some derangement in 



400 NEUBALGIA. 



the nutritive or secretory organs, owing to which the blood 
becomes imperfect, or impure. 

Generally all attempts to cure this disease are utterly in 
vain, although the time between the attacks may be often 
lengthened, so that the patient suffers from it less often. 
The first thing to be done is to regulate the liver and bowels, 
and make some thorough change in diet, and habits ; very 
often a change of air effects a cure at once. 

5. Besides the above, which comprise the forms of head- 
ache most usually met with, there are also other varieties, 
less frequently met with, and of a less serious character. 
They are usually dependent upon some kind of local irrita- 
tion. 

Thus headache commonly accompanies a cold in the head, 
or chronic irritation of the mucous membrane of the nose, 
or frontal sinus. It also often accompanies worms ; and 
with many people, whose nervous systems are peculiarly 
sensitive, any change in the atmosphere will cause head- 
ache. 

Neuralgia. 

Neuralgia is one of the most distressing pains that human 
beings can suffer from. It is also one of the least under- 
stood, and the least benefited by medical aid. It consists in 
a very severe and distressing pain in some particular spot, 
in the course of one of the»nerves, and is often unaccompan- 
ied by any signs of inflammation, or organic change. In 
some cases there is obvious congestion, or inflammation of 
the trunk of the nerve, and perhaps in all cases there is 
something of the kind, but as a general rule it cannot be 
discovered. In fact, the great peculiarity of neuralgia is 
that there is pain, and pain only, without apparent cause. 

The pain of neuralgia is peculiarly acute and agonizing, 
and is often confined to a very small spot. It is also apt to 
be periodic, or to be excited by very slight causes. It is of- 
ten described as being like cuts, or stabs, with a red hot 
knife, and many patients are made almost delirious by it. 

The least touch, or draught of cold air is enough to bring 
on an attack, or to aggravate it almost be} r ond endurance. 
Very frequently, when the pain is in the face, the muscles 
will twitch and work spasmodically, in spite of all efforts to 
prevent them. In fact, this twitching is often the first indica- 
tion of an attack coming on. 

Some of the most painful attacks of neuralgia are exper- 
ienced in the face, and they come on sharp and sudden, con- 
stituting what is often called tic doloreux. 

No disease is more irregular or uncertain. There may be 
perfect freedom from it for months, or years even, and then, it 



NEURALGIA. 401 



may return suddenly, and last for an indefinite time, on and 
off." The branches of the fifth pair of nerves on the face, 
are the most frequently attacked, but any of the nerves 
may be affected, 

Sometimes no particular sensation is felt on touching the 
affected part, but at other times it is excruciatingly tender, 
although there may be no signs of inflammation. 

The "primary predisposing causes that lead to neuralgia 
are quite obscure, but many of the exciting causes are well- 
known. Exposure to cold is one of the most frequent, and 
so is over-fatigue, or excitement. In many cases, also, when it 
the eye is affected, long exposure to intense light will bring 
on an attack ; and so will loud, or long-continued noise 
when the ear is affected. Great excitement of the olfactory 
nerve even, by smelling strong odors, or snuffing irritating 
substances, will sometimes cause neuralgia in some of the 
nerves connected with the nose. Too much mental work, 
anxiety, or powerful emotion, will, in many persons, be suffi- 
cient to excite neuralgia, while in others it may be brought 
on by torpid liver or kidneys, causing poisoning of the 
blood. But, after all, there are numerous cases, of the worst 
kind, in which no cause whatever, either immediate or re- 
mote, can be discovered. 

The treatment of neuralgia is altogether empirical, or ex- 
perimental, for no certain means of "cure are known. As a 
general rule it is advisable to pay strict attention to the 
stomach, liver, bowels, and kidneys, and then if the disease 
results from blood poisoning, as it often does, relief may be 
obtained. 

Sometimes fifteen or twenty drops of laudanum will give 
relief, or fifteen to twenty grains of chloral hydrate. In fact 
enough of this to cause sleep frequently cures. 

Laudanum may also be applied externally, over the seat 
of pain, or a thick cloth wet with chloroform till the skin 
smarts. An excellent anodyne also is bi-sulphide of carbon. 
A bit of sponge should be put in a wide-mouthed bottle, and 
wet with the bi-sulphide, and then the open mouth of the 
bottle be pressed over the painful spot, so that the vapor 
may rise from the sponge on to the skin, this often relieves. 
The patent preparation called chlorodyne has also relieved in 
numerous instances. 

In extreme cases the nerve is often cut through, or a 
small piece of it is even taken out, and when the of- 
fending part can be so removed, or disconnected from the 
brain, perfect relief is obtained. Too often, however, the 
precise part implicated is not hit upon, or the disease flits 
to some other part, and the operation does no good. It has 
even been known to make the patient worse. 

34* 



402 LOCK-JAW. 



Another operation, and which is nmch more frequently 
beneficial, is what is called hypodermic injection. That is, in- 
jection under the skin. A very small^ fine-pointed syringe 
takes up a drop or two of some anodyne fluid, such as solu- 
tion of morphine ; the point of the "syringe is then thrust 
into the skin, till it reaches the true skin underneath, and 
the fluid is injected. It of course comes into contact with 
the blood, and enters at once into the circulation, by which 
it reaches the nerve. Such an operation should be 
practised, at first, by a physician, and the injection may be 
varied in many ways. The patient can, however, soon be 
taught to do it for himself. 

Sciatica. 

This is a very painful neuralgia, affecting the sciatic nerve. 
It consists in a very acute pain, which darts down the back 
of the thigh, or along the outside of the leg down to the 
ankle. It is more persistent than neuralgia generally is, 
and is always made worse by pressure along the course of 
the nerve, where alone it is felt. This localizing of the pain, 
and the fact that moving the limb does not make it worse, 
distinguishes sciatica from rheumatism. 

Examination has shown that in this disease the nerve, or 
its sheath, is really congested, or engorged with blood, and 
the pressure resulting from this congestion causes the pain. 

In treating it, the seat of the congestion should be made 
out, as nearly as possible, and then means should be taken 
to relieve it. In some cases leeches over the inflamed spot 
are of great service, or cold lotions ; but at other times these 
remedies are useless, and mustard poultices, or hot fomenta- 
tions succeed better. There are no means that act in all 
cases alike. 

To appease the pain the same means may be used as ad- 
vised for neuralgia, including the hypodermic injection. It 
is, however, apt to be a very obstinate complaint, for which 
but little can be done. Chloral hydrate, to induce sleep, 
gives more relief than almost anything else. 

Strict attention should be paid to the bowels, stomach, 
liver, and kidneys ; and, if possible, the patient should have 
a change. When the pain is periodic quinine should be 
used. / 

Tetanus, or Lock-Jaw. 

This disease is really one of the nervous system, although 
It shows itself in a rigid spasm of the muscles, especially of 
the jaw. Those who have read the explanations previously 
given, of the nervous system, will see at once that the 



LOCK-JAW. 403 



muscles cannot act at all, except as they are excited by the 
nerves of motion. The violent spasms into which the 
muscles are thrown, therefore, in tetanus, must "be caused 
b} r some abnormal stimulus from the nerves. 

Occasionally lock-jaw comes on without any apparent 
cause, and it is then called idiopathic tetanus. In such cases 
the muscular excitation arises from a direct impulse from the 
nervous centre, but how that is originated we do not know. 

Most frequently lock-jaw follows after some injury, which 
has irritated a nerve, as in the case of a jagged wound, or 
tear of the flesh from a nail, and it is then called traumatic 
tetanus. In this case the origin of the spasm is plain. The 
nerve of sensation is injured, and an impression is conveyed 
by it to the nervous centre, from which comes back, by reflex 
action, the impulse which sets the muscles at work. 

An ordinary wound, in which no nerve is torn, or lacerated, 
ma}' produce no such effect, even though it be extensive and 
serious, while a slight tear, or puncture, may induce lock- 
jaw at once. Exposure to cold will also bring it on in some 
people. 

The symptoms are just the same in both forms of the 
disease, and they may set in very soon after the injury, or 
not till some time after. The first indications are a slight 
stiffness in some of the muscles, which gradually increases 
till some of them become rigid, or fixed. Very commonly 
this occurs in the muscles of the jaw, and is then properly 
called lock-javj, because the jaw is as immovable as if closed 
with a padlock. It is also called trismus. 

Sometimes the muscles of the back are affected, and the 
body is bent like a bow, with the stomach uppermost. This 
is called opisthotonos. When the muscles of the front of the 
body are affected the body is bent the other way, with the 
back projecting, which is called emprosthotonos. It may also 
be bent sideways, either way, and it is then called pleurostho- 



Either form of the disease, if it continues, is soon followed 
by a general spasm of the voluntary muscles, all over the 
body, causing excruciating pain, with great anxiety. 

Breathing soon becomes difficult, the heart beats faster, 
and feverishness sets in. The spasms usm^Lly get easier for 
a short space, every ten or twenty minutes, and each suc- 
ceeding spasm gets more and more severe. 

If the patient sleeps the attacks do not occur ; but usu- 
ally sleep cannot be obtained. 

Where the case is fatal, the spasms go on getting more and 
more violent and incessant, till finally the patient is worn 
out, and ceases to be able to breathe, on account of the 
muscles of the throat becoming stiffened. 



4:04 LOCK-JAW. 



Tetanus may cause death in a few hours, or it may last 
several weeks, or months, but in fatal cases seldom over ten 
days. It is always to be dreaded, and when it reaches a cer- 
tain stage is seldom recovered from. 

One of the first things to be done, in traumatic tetanus, is 
to examine the wound, and see if there be anything in, or 
about it, that may keep up the irritation. It should be 
cleansed, properly bandaged, and placed at rest. Then give 
a purgative, of any kind handiest ; and, when that has acted, 
follow it by a good sedative. Opium, or chloral hydrate, as 
'advised in neuralgia, and when the patient awakes apply cold 
water to the head and spine. 

In giving the purgative it may be necessary to force open 
the mouth, unless an opening in the teeth allows of its being 
passed down to the throat. But care should be taken to 
open the jaws gradually, and not suddenly. The cold water 
is best applied by a common watering pot, over the head, 
and spine, and the pulse should be felt all the time, so tha'i 
it may be suspended immediately the action of the heart 
begins to fail. 

Cannabis Indica, or the Indian hemp, is often very ser- 
viceable in lock-jaw, and two or three grains of the ex- 
tract may be given every three or four hours. Chloroform 
will stop the spasms, but they come on again as the effects 
of the chloroform pass off. 

There are some very active poisons, such as are used by 
the South American Indians to poison their arrows, which 
have been used, more or less successfully, in tetanus. In 
the ordinary state of the body these are very deadly ; but 
in the spasms of tetanus they seem to exert a counteractive 
effect. Curari, or Woorali, is one of the most noted of 
these poisons. 

Strychnine causes spasms like those of lock-jaw, but not 
so long continued. They also occur in hydrophobia ; but 
this can be readily distinguished from tetanus, as will be 
shown further on. 

Protracted exposure to either extreme heat or cold, or 
even violent exertion, may bring on tetanus, and so, may ir- 
ritation of the stomach, or bowels, as from worms, and 
violent emotionteven disposes to it. 

Tetanus usually comes on from four to seventeen days 
after an injiiry ; and when from a wound it seldom occurs 
after the wound is healed. 

If the spasms fully remit and weaken, there is hope ; but 
when the disease becomes really acute it nearly always ends 
fatally. The most reliance perhaps is placed upon opium, 
irr heavy doses ; but I should prefer to try large doses of 
chloral hydrate first. 



HYDROPHOBIA. 405 



Injections have been used, in the rectum, of turpentine, 
or of twenty grains of tobacco, in a pint of boiling water. 
This should stand for an hour, and then be strained. It 
often relaxes the jaws, at least for a time. 

The peculiar morbid state of the nervous system, in tetanus, 
is shown by the way in which the spasms are excited or in- 
creased. A draught of cold air, the rubbing of the clothes, 
a sudden, loud noise, or flash of light, will often increase 
them to a fearful extent. 

Experience has shown that no remedy yet known has so 
much power, in controling, and curing, tetanus, as chloral 
hydrate. But its use must be continued for some time. For 
a person not accustomed to it, fifteen grains is a proper 
medium dose to begin with ; but if this does not soothe, or 
induce sleep, twenty-five, thirty, or forty grains, or even 
more may be administered. 

More powerful remedies, like the woorali, should be used 
only by the physician. 

Hydrophobia. 

Hydrophobia, or canine madness, is a disease of the ner- 
vous system, caused by blood poisoning, from the bite of a 
rabid animal, or of another human being. It seems to affect 
the dog, cat, fox, wolf, and jackal, and even the sheep and 
horse, according to some. 

The disease may show itself soon after the bite, or not tiH 
some time after the wound is fully healed. Death some- 
times occurs in twenty-four hours after the first attack, but 
usually about the second or third day ; though it may not 
occur till the seventh or eighth. 

As long a period as nine months may elapse, after the bite, 
before the attack ; but the average period is from six to four- 
teen weeks. In these cases the poison lies latent ; but very 
often the symptoms show themselves in a few days. The 
accounts we have of many years passing after the bite, be- 
fore the disease appears, are to be distrusted. 

The poison seems to be contained in the saliva, or mucus, 
of the animal's mouth, and is conveyed into the blood by 
the wound made with the teeth. If there be no breaking of 
the skin, or no absorption of the mucus into the blood, there 
is no infection of hydrophobia. 

The idea, which some people entertain, that if a healthy 
dog bites a person, and becomes mad afterwards, that person 
will go mad also, is simply absurd. 

Usually the first symptoms of the disease are pain and red- 
ness in the wound, from which the pain gradually extends 
about the body, with stiffness, or spasm, of the muscles, 



406 HYDROPHOBIA. 



especially about the throat. The patient becomes irritable, 
anxious, and feverish, while a quantity of thick, frothy mu- 
cus pours from the mouth, and impedes the breathing. It 
is the gasping and choking caused by this mucus, and the 
spasmodic efforts made to clear the throat, which produce 
the peculiar noise that has been supposed to resemble the 
barking of a dog. x 

The most characteristic symptoms of the disease, when 
fully developed, and the most distressing to witness, is the 
spasm of the throat. This prevents the patient from swal- 
lowing, and leads to the most fearful terror and anguish at 
the idea of doing so. The patient probably longs to drink, 
but feels that it is impossible for him to do that, or to get rid 
of the horrible idea of choking. The sound, or sight, of 
water running, or pouring from one vessel to another* or 
even the motion of the air, or of any shining object before 
the eyes, will bring on the most fearful spasms. Any attempt 
to swallow produces still more alarming results, and the poor 
sufferer finally desists from the vain effort, with all his suffer- 
ings increased. 

The nervous irritability is extreme ; the least noise, or the 
smallest appearance of contradiction, or want of agreement, 
excites the most painful paroxysms of suspicion and terror. 
The eyes are fixed, wild, and staring ; the eyebrows drawn 
together, and the whole features express, only too painfully, 
the anguish that is endured. 

Sometimes there is delirium, but generally the mind is not 
seriously affected, though there seems to be no control. 
The patient appears to be aware of the unreasonableness of 
his irritability, but is powerless to prevent it. 

The final termination of the disease is in suffocation, or 
convulsions. 

As to a cure for hydrophobia, it may as well be stated at 
once that there is none known. Every likely and unlikely 
thing has been tried, but with no avail. Chloroform some- 
times mitigates the spasms, and cold water to the head and 
spine has given relief, in a few cases, but without preventing 
a fatal termination. All that can be done is to prevent the 
patient from injuring himself, or others, in his struggles, and 
wait the inevitable result. 

All the mad-stones, and quack remedies, are utterly useless, 
and have got their reputation simply from being used in 
cases where there was no hydrophobia. 

The great thing to be done, when a person has been* kitten, 
is to cut out the bitten part, if possible, or burn the wound, 
at the earliest possible moment ! If caustic is at hand, apply 
that, or nitric acid, or a hot iron, or coal ; but the application 
should be thorough, so as to burn to the very bottom of the 



HYDBOPHOBIA. 407 



wound. It is best also to suck it first, or apply a cup, and 
squeeze and wash it well. If this be done quick enough, 
before the poison is absorbed, the danger may be obviated ; 
but no time must be lost ! 

The application of mad-stones, and other popular means, 
only lose time, and do no good whatever. The only chance 
of prevention is in instant squeezing, washing, sucking, cutting 
out, and thorough burning, to destroy or remove the poison 
before it enters the circulation. 

Mr. Youatt, so celebrated for his knowledge of dogs, as- 
sures us that he has been bitten a number of times by rabid 
animals, and with no bad result. His practice was to apply 
nitrate of silver (lunar caustic) as quickh^as possible. He 
used to put bits of the caustic in the wound — pushing them 
to the very bottom of it — and leaving them there to dissolve 
away. Of course, a severe wound would be formed, and 
much sloughing would take place, but no hydrophobia. 

It is possible that the poison may often lie in the wound, 
or close by, for a long time without being absorbed ; and, 
therefore, the burning, or cutting out, should always be prac- 
tised, unless the symptoms of the disease have actually 
shown themselves. 

The symptoms in the dog are similar, in the main, to those 
described in the human being ; but there are many common 
errors on the subject. Most dogs will drink eagerly while 
mad ; though they often have to do it by jerks and -spasms. 
In fact, they are generally so eager to drink, that they up:et 
the vessel which contains the water, and then are supposed 
to do it from their dislike to the fluid. They will also often 
take to the water, and swim in it, contrary to the popular 
idea. It is not the dread of water, in either man or animal, 
that causes the spasm when they see or hear it, but the feel- 
ing that they are unable to swallow, which induces convul- 
sive spasms. 

The symptoms of hydrophobia in the dog should be gen- 
erally known ; for, by far the greater part of those called 
mad are not so, and many persons really die from nervous 
derangement, brought on by fear, after being bitten by ani- 
mals who never had the disease at all. 

The first indication of madness in a dog, is a complete 
change in his disposition. A good-tempered one becomes 
cross ; a bold one shy, or the reverse ; and a fond one, sullen 
and i^>rose. This change may be observed sometimes for 
severa clays, and then the dog becomes worse ; biting •at 
everything presented to him, or snapping at imaginary 
things. He wanders about in a restless, longing sort of way, 
as if he was looking for something, and cannot rest any- 
where. If chained, he will knaw at his chain ; or, if shut 



408 HYDBOPHOBIA. 



in, he will bite at the door, and try to force his way through 
it. All ordinary feeling seems to be lost, so that he feels 
nothing, and will bite, and hold on to a red-hot poker, with- 
out seeming to suffer. The way in which he howls and 
groans is peculiar, and very distressing to hear ; — when once 
heard it can never be forgotten. This, however, is only in 
confinement ; for, when at liberty, he runs about silently, 
and will seldom attack any one if not interfered with, or run 
against. He evidently becomes delirious at last, and fancies 
enemies all around him, at which he snaps and barks inces- 
santly. This fierce excitement soon exhausts him, and he 
dies at last in convulsions. Contrary to what is thought, he 
will usually drink water all the time, but does it so eagerly, 
that he upsets the vessel in his haste. 

And, here let me remark, that when a dog, supposed to be 
mad, has bitten any one, he should not be killed, but be shut 
up in some secure place, in the dark if possible, with water, 
and left alone. In the greater part of such cases, the animal 
will recover ; thus proving that he did not have hydrophobia, 
and the bitten person may at once feel secure. But, if the 
animal is killed, he is at once thought to have been mad, be- 
yond doubt, and the sufferer gives up all hope. The dog 
should never be killed if he can be safely shut up ; because, 
if he dies, matters are no worse — and, if he lives, there is no 
danger. 

Many-dogs are worried and hunted till they become crazed 
with terror and fury, and are then called mad, and killed at 
once. Any one bitten by such an animal is thought to be 
certain to go mad also ; and the very thought, and fear, of the 
thing, will actually induce many of the symptoms of hydro- 
phobia, causing such nervous excitement that the patient 
may soon die from it. I have no doubt but that many have 
thus died, who, if the dog had been allowed to live, would 
have recovered, because they would have seen that there was 
no danger of hydrophobia. 

I remember noting the details of one case particularly, in 
which a man was bitten by a poor hunted dog, said to be 
mad, who escaped from his pursuers into a wood and was 
lost. The man was in the greatest terror from the very first, 
and told all about him he should go mad, that he should bark 
like a dog, and bite, and go into fits at the sight of water. 
Sure enough all these symptoms commenced, and the man 
became quite delirious, raving about mad dogs, ane^ occa- 
sionally falling into convulsions. Fortunately his physician 
gave him, by force, a heavy dose of opium, which threw him 
into a profound sleep that lasted ten hours, and he awoke 
more calm, — but was going off as bad as ever, as soon as fully 
awake, so another dose was given and he slept again. Be- 



HYDKOPHOBIA. 409 



fore lie awoke the poor dog returned home quite well, only 
weak and afraid, and evidently with no hydrophobia. As 
soon as the man awoke he was told this, and shown the dog, 
— immediately all the symptoms left him, and he became quite 
well, and so remained. If the dog had been killed, the man 
no doubt would have died, because he would have felt sure 
there was no hope for him. 

All the worst symptoms of such a disease as hydrophobia 
may be brought on, in some persons, by fear, and a convic- 
tion that they have the disease, just as surely as when they 
are inoculated with it. 

The fact is, hydrophobia is a very rare disease ! Not one 
in fifty of the dqgs called mad are really so, but merely furi- 
ous, feverish, and excited, from fear and bad treatment. It 
has been found also that of those persons that are bitten by 
really rabid dogs, not one in ten take the disease. And this 
is not so strange when the matter is fully considered. The 
poison appears to exist in the saliva, or mucus ; and, if this 
does not enter the wound, there is no infection — and many 
causes may prevent it from entering. If the dog bite through 
clothing, as it often does, it is quite possible that the saliva 
may all be wiped clean off his teeth before they enter the flesh. 
In the same way, one bite may remove all the poison, so that 
another bite, immediately after, may be harmless ; and this 
may account for the fact that, of two persons bitten, one 
may become mad and the other not. A copious flow of blood 
may also wash out the poison, or it may be wiped out, by 
something rubbing the wound. 

It must be remembered, therefore, that, though dog-bites 
should always be avoided, if possible, and cauterized at once, 
no matter how healthy the animal may seem, yet there 
should be no unnecessary alarm when they occur. Few of 
the dogs called mad really are so, and few of the bites cause 
hydrophobia, even from those undoubtedly mad. Cauter- 
izing, or burning, will also remove all danger, even in the 
worst cases, if used early enough. 

The rarity of hydrophobia is the reason why so many quack 
remedies get reputations for curing it. Perhaps not one in 
fifty of the bites they are used in would cause any injury, if 
left alone, but the remedy gets all the credit ; and, in the 
cases which do turn out bad, it is supposed the remedy was 
not used soon enough. 

The so-called mad-st<ynes, are the most generally believed in. 
they are porous, and absorbent, and, being applied to the 
wound, stick there, like a new clay pipe sticks to the lips, 
and are supposed to draw out the poison. All they can do 
in that way, however, is not equal to squeezing and washing, 
or cupping, much less a thorough cauterizing or burning. 



35 



410 HYDROPHOBIA. 



Some of these I have seen are common clay slate, some 
soapstone, and others are simply burnt bones. They can do 
no good, and may do harm by losing time when every mo- 
ment is of value. 

Many erroneous notions are held as to the original cause of 
hydrophobia, and it is commonly supposed to arise from the 
heat in summer, in the dog days. At this time therefore a 
senseless and indiscriminate slaughter takes place, and all * 
dogs not killed are ordered to be muzzled. The fact is the 
heat has nothing to do with hydrophobia, and it is quite as 
prevalent in the coldest as in the hottest days. 

The real and only cause of canine madness, so far as 
known, is ungratifled sexual desire on thepart of the male ! The 
dog secretes a large amount of semen, and the necessity of 
its discharge, by connexion, is most urgent. When re- 
tained too long it causes erotic fever, which poisons the 
blood, and excites the brain, till the animal becomes rabid. 
Any one who has observed dogs after a female in heat will 
understand this. They are often delirious, though not rabid, 
and are perfectly indifferent to hunger, thirst, or pain; — 
nothing will turn them away from the object of their pursuit, 
and no threats, danger, nor blows, will deter them from grat- 
ifying their desires if they can. Now this kept up too long, 
or coming too often, without relief from gratification, causes 
madness. 

Where the males and females, in anything like equal num- 
bers, associate without restraint, dogs do not go mad. In 
Constantinople and other Eastern cities, dogs swarm, and 
breed wild in the streets, and yet madness is rare amongst 
them, thongh it is a hot country ; the reason is that they have 
free sexual intercourse. If the dog knew how to masturbate, 
he no doubt would do so, and thus obtain relief, but his 
structure makes it impossible. The male monkey, having 
a hand, always masturbates when deprived of free inter- 
course with the female, and it is well-known how prevalent 
the practice is amongst men when suffering from the same 
deprivation. If the monkey could not practice this habit 
he would, in all probability, go mad like the dog, for he is 
extremely salacious, and probably also has considerable im- 
agination, and memory to boot. 

Even among men, the total deprivation of sexual indul- 
gence, when the sexual organs are in perfect action, leads to 
most deplorable results. There is either perpetual pollution 
in some form or other, dwarfing and debilitating both body 
and mind, or there is disease of the nervous system, especi- 
ally of the brain. Hypochondria, idiocy, and mania, often 
of a furious and murderous character, frequently result in 
this way. 



SOFTENING OF THE BRAIN. 411 



Mankind are too much in the habit of speaking of this 
subject as a merely moral one, and of considering it either 
as a weakness or a vice, when the demands of nature are 
obeyed. It is, however, essentially a physical matter, and 
its moral associations are merely subsidiary and inciden- 
tal. Sexual passion is the most imperative of all animal im- 
pulses, and its indulgence, to a certain extent, is a necessity 
of nature. 

Softening of the Brain. 

Softening of the brain, (Hamollissernent,) is a more common 
disease than is supposed, and is a fruitful cause of loss 
of mind, and death. Many die from it without any one sus- 
pecting the cause. 

Sometimes the brain becomes softened, or more fluid, as a 
result of inflammation, as explained in a previous article ; 
and it may also do so from imperfect nutrition. If the 
blood be poor in quality, or poisonous, or if it be deficient 
in quantity, the whole body will suffer more or less, but par- 
ticular parts will be apt to suffer more than others. The 
brain, especially when overworked, is very apt, under such 
circumstances, to become diseased, and finally partially de- 
composed, or softened. Long-continued excesses in sexual 
indulgence, or in drinking, also predispose to this terrible 
disease. 

The softening observed is of various degrees, and pre- 
sents various appearances. The brain may be either only a 
little more flabby than usual, or it may be partly pulpy, 
and sometimes it is almost fluid, so that the remains of the 
cellular tissue actually float in it. — Sometimes it is white like 
milk, sometimes amber colored, and at other times reddish, 
or even greenish, or yellowish. The softening may either 
affect the bulk of the brain, or mainly some particular part, 
and the softened matter may be infiltrated with pus, or 
blood. Generally the softened part of the brain has no odor, 
but occasionally it has a smell of sulphuretted hydrogen, or 
like rotten eggs. 

Both the white and the gray matter are equally liable to 
this form of decay, and it may be confined to one hemisphere 
only, or may extend to both. 

Generally, but not always, softening of the brain is first 
indicated by continued severe pain in the head, without any 
indication of inflammation, or rheumatism. The pain is not 
located, but seems to oppress the whole head, inside. 

A more common symptom, however, is vertigo, and uncer- 
tain or double vision, accompanied with a decided weakening 
of the mental powers. Judgment, memory, and the power 



412 SOFTENING OF THE BRAIN. 



of keeping the mind fixed on anything, are gradually weak- 
ened, and finally lost, so that the patient sinks into complete 
imbecility. 

Some of the first signs of this decay are observed in a 
slowness in answering questions, or in stating anything, as if 
the ideas were long in coming. The tongue also appears to 
be embarrassed, and many words are spoken imperfectly. 
Dejection of mind, indifference to everything, and confirmed 
hypochondriasis are also commonly observed, with constant 
drowsiness, twitching, or numbness of the limbs. There 
may also be a loss of proper feeling in the fingers, so that 
they cannot well lay hold of objects, Unless very large. 
Squinting is often observed, or total blindness in one or 
both eyes, and also loss of hearing. 

The moral nature also, in the first stages, is apt to be en- 
tirely changed, so that the patient acts in the most extra- 
ordinary and distressing manner, and is perfectly unaffected 
by any kind of remonstrance. 

These symptoms may be more or less complete, according 
to the extent of the disease, and occasionally they remit, in 
the most singular manner, so that, for a time, the patient 
seems to be quite restored, but soon falls back into a worse 
stage than before. 

During all this, the vital functions may proceed almost as 
usual, so that the general health may not be much affected 
for some time. In fact, we do not know what stage of de- 
generation the brain must reach before its functions are 
seriously affected. In many cases it has been found very 
much softened, and more or less disorganized, without the 
mental powers being destroyed, or even much weakened. 

A point is reached at last, however, in which the breaking 
up has gone too far, and the mind comes to an end at once. 

Perhaps a comparison may here be made with a galvanic 
battery. We may have the platina, for instance, in two dif- 
ferent forms, either in a compact rolled sheet, or in the form 
of powder, and yet the effect is the same, and so it may be 
with the brain ; it may still develop nervous power when 
partially fluid. 

These remarks apply more especially to ordinary chronic 
softening ; but when there is inflammation the symptoms are 
in many respects varied. The pain in the head is sharper, 
and there is often considerable excitement at first, with de- 
lirium, while the eyes, ears, and other senses are morbidly 
sensitive to whatever acts upon them. The limbs also be- 
come stiff, and sore, with cramps, and twitchings at times. 

Sometimes there is more or less derangement of the bowels, 
stomach, and kidneys, but at other times none at all ; and 
fever also may be either present or absent. 



HARDENING OP THE BEAIN. 413 



As the disease progresses, the use of one limb, or of half 
the body is lost, sometimes suddenly, but generally by de- 
grees. The intellect may not be seriously impaired, even at 
a comparatively late stage of the disease ; but the power of 
expression is enfeebled, so that the patient expresses him- 
self slowly, with great effort, and tries to help out his words 
by motions. 

Loss of consciousness, or fainting, more or le?s complete, 
finally commences, beginning with, or immediately after 
paralysis ; but this may pass away temporarily, so that re- 
collection returns, and the mind seems re-established, but 
only for a time. Mnally, all mental power dies, the senses 
fail, and the sufferer sinks into a state of complete uncon- 
sciousness, from which he never arouses again. 

The treatment for softening of the brain, in the first stages, 
is very simple. All mental work must be forbidden, no 
stimulants used, nor narcotics, and every means must be 
employed to tone up and. strengthen the system generally. 
The only hope is in good nutrition, and perfect activity of 
all the secretions, with avoidance of excitement or strong 
emotions. Excessive sexual excitement, the abuse of liquor, 
and too much study or mental worry, are the chief exciting 
causes of softening of the brain, and they must be shunned 
by all who fear it, or have a tendency to it. 

When the symptoms are once fairly noticed, showing that 
the disease is really established, nothing certain can be done, 
and the treatment must depend upon the situation and con- 
dition of the patient, according to the principles above laid 
down. At a later stage it is utterly useless to attempt to do 
anything, except watch the patient. 

in this disease, as in apoplexy, and inflammation of the 
brain, the great thing is to attend to the first signs of de- 
rangement, and change the habits and mode of life. The 
man who will continue to overtask his mind, to indulge in 
continued sexual or other excitement, and to constantly use 
stimulants to excess, must expect apoplexy, or softening of 
the brain, and medicine cannot save him. 

Hardening of the Brain. 

Not only does the brain become softened and disintegrated, 
in the manner above described, but it may also undergo a 
destructive change of an opposite character, and become 
hardened, or indurated. The central portions seem more 
liable to this change, though it may also extend to the whole 
organ, making it sometimes almost like wax, and with a 
tendency to become horny when burnt, or treated with 
nitrous acid. 



35* 



414 TUMORS IN THE BRAIN. 



Occasionally certain parts of the brain are found as firm as 
leather, and much resembling it in appearance. In such 
cases the subject has either been more or less idiotic, or has 
imperfect command of some of the muscles of the body, 
according to which part of the brain was affected. 

The causes of hardening of the brain are not known, 
but it is most probably a result of long-continued, slight 
inflammatory action. It has been found in persons who 
have died from lead poisoning, and is common in maniacs. 

The general symptoms, and final results, of hardening of 
the brain do not vary much from those observed in many 
cases of softening. The gradual loss of memory, and all 
power of attention, and will, with paralysis, and palsy, being 
the most usual symptoms, with final idiocy, wasting away, 
and death. 

In regard to treatment it may as well be said at once, 
that no known treatment is of the slightest use in such a 
disease, for when it is far enough gone to be observed, it is 
too far gone to be cured. 

Tubercles and Tumors, and other Bodies, in the Brain. 

Tuberculous matter, precisely the same as that found in 
the lungs in consumption, is sometimes deposited in the 
brain, causing softening, and other destructive changes, ter- 
minating in death. This may be called consumption of the 
brain. It is probably scrofulous. 

There may also be found various kinds of tumors in the 
brain, which, by their pressure, cause loss of mental power, 
paralysis, palsy, apoplexy, and death. Nothing definite is 
known of their origin, nor can anything be done for them, 
except in very rare instances. Abscesses may also form in 
the brain, from injuries, or from inflammation ; and, by the 
pressure which they exert, may cause a variety of serious 
and fatal symptoms. Some bold surgeons, in such cases, 
have plunged their knives into the very substance of the 
brain, let out the matter, and saved the patient. 

Bullets and other foreign bodies have often been lodged in 
the brain, and remained there for years with no serious results, 
and even without inconvenience. In such cases, a membrane 
forms round the foreign body like a sac and keeps it steady 
in one place. It must also be understood that it never, in 
such cases, touches the medulla oblongata, nor any of the 
important ganglia of the sensorium. If these parts are 
missed, the brain itself may be cut, or handled, to a great 
extent, with no immediate apparent injury. A case once oc- 
curred in New York, where a man, while blasting rocks, had 
an iron bar some two feet long, and over half an inch in di- 



DISEASES OF THE SPINAL MARROW. 415 



ameter, blown clean through his head, and yet he recovered, 
with no bad result following. The bar entered below his 
chin, went straight up, and came out at the top of his head. 
Of course it must have missed the medulla, and the senso- 
rium, though it is wonderful how it could have done so. 

The surgeon has often sliced off portions of the brain, and 
had his fingers in its substance, without injuiy, and without 
the patient suffering from pain, or even knowing what had 
been done. In explanation of this, it must be borne in mind 
that the function of the brain is to elaborate thought, and 
consciousness, and not to feel. It is probable that, in healthy- 
persons, the brain may grow ; and that, after a portion has 
been lost, it may be reproduced— at least in certain parts, as 
Voit found it do in pigeons. 

Diseases of the Spinal Marrow. 

The spinal marrow may be the subject of injuries, inflam- 
mation, congestion, tumors, softening, hardening, and other 
forms of disintegration — like the brain. In such cases, how- 
ever, the effects are confined to the vital organs, and to the 
muscular system ; the mind not being affected. Softening of 
the cord is a common cause of paraplegia, and so is dropsy, 
or watery effusion. A clot of blood, making pressure in the 
spinal cord, may cause paralysis in all the parts below, and 
so may a tumor, or any other morbid growth. 

Injury to the spinal marrow, in any part, is almost sure to 
be followed by serious results, and it may be injured so far 
up that the whole body may be dead — that is, without feeling 
or motion — and the head only be left alive ; a living head on 
a paralyzed, or dead body. 



THE END. 



Dr. Hollick's Books and Lectures. 



It is now some years since I gave my public Lectures 
on Sexual Physiology — the first strictly popular and 
scientific ones of the kind ever delivered in this country. 
These were attended by thousands, of both ladies and 
gentlemen, at whose request I wrote a series of books, 
embodying the Lectures, but more extended. 

These books immediately obtained a large circulation, 
which has been steadily increasing, and is now larger 
than ever. 

Like the Lectures, they are intended to give useful 
information, and to gratify, in a proper manner, that 
natural wish for knowledge of the procreative functions 
which all human beings must feel. But at the same 
time they are strictly moral and scientific, though popu- 
lar ; and those who seek them for the gratification of 
mere morbid curiosity, or from vicious motives, will be 
disappointed in them. 

It is usually entirely overlooked that human beings, 
of both sexes, never can be unthinking about sexual 
matters, but always do, and always must, have their 
minds more or less occupied about them. The require- 
ments of their nature compel this, and it is vain to 
expect it to be otherwise. The only question, therefore, 
is whether it is better for men and women to have true 
ideas on such matters, or false ones ; for ideas of some 
kind they must have. 

The question scarcely admits of argument, and may 
safely be left for common sense and experience to decide. 
It must not be forgotten also that, at the present day, 
knowledge is claimed by the people as a right, not re- 
quested as a favor ; and that they are quite prepared to 
accept all the evils that may result from its possession, 
if they can enjoy its benefits. 
(416) 



417 



The important thing is to give this knowledge in a 
plain, practically useful, and unobjectional form, so that 
all may receive and be benefited by it, and none offended. 
This has been with me a special study ; and a long and 
extended experience, as a lecturer, practitioner, and author, 
has taught me that such knowledge can be so given. 

If the subject be approached in a proper spirit and 
manner, it will be so received. I have lectured to private 
audiences of thousands, both of ladies and gentlemen, on 
Sexual Physiology, using anatomical models and paint- 
ings in illustration, and never heard the slightest objec- 
tion from any one. On the contrary, I have had presented to 
me numerous votes of thanks and testimonials of appro- 
bation from all classes of the community. 

My Lectures were the first complete and popular ones 
ever delivered on Sexual Physiology in this country, 
though they have been followed by many others ; and I 
should still continue them if my professional avocations 
allowed me time. 

These books comprise all the subjects treated upon in 
the Lectures, but are much more extended and complete. 
They form, in fact, a complete library of reference, in 
which any man or woman can be sure to find, fully ex- 
plained, any sexual matter in which they may be inter- 
ested. Every one knows how constantly persons, of both 
sexes, urgently need information on such things, and 
know not where to get it. The discomfort, disease, and 
suffering which is caused by this ignorance is incalculable, 
and for the most part it has to be silently endured, 
because the sufferers shrink from publicity, and know not 
where to get the knowledge which alone can relieve them. 

These books are adapted for both sexes and for all 
conditions, and have been written and revised with the 
greatest care. None like them ever were published be- 
fore, nor are there any others like them in existence. 
There are such books adapted for medical men only, and 
there are others written only to pander to vulgar curiosity, 
or to minister to vice ; but these are altogether different. 

flgp~ They are popularly written, so that all can under- 
stand them ; they are perfectly moral and unobjection- 
able ; and yet are scientific enough for the use of students 
and medical men ! 



418 



Very few books — certainly none of this kind — ever had 
such a run of public favor before. One of them is now in 
the 300th edition, and another in the 200th, and the de- 
mand for them is steadily increasing. They are con- 
stantly kept revised, so as always to contain the latest 
information on all points, and are in this respect often 
ahead of many of the medical manuals. 

One of the books—" The Marriage Guide "—is 
intended to give to married people, or those intending to 
marry, of both sexes, all that information about them- 
selves and their mutual relations which they can need or 
desire to possess. No couple should be married without 
reading a work of this kind first. 

" The Male Organs 'Ms intended to give a man 
full information in regard to his own sexual system, its 
physiological action, its various diseases and derange- 
ments, and how its health and vigor may be preserved 
or restored. 

The Diseases of Woman is intended .to give the 
same information in regard to the female system, as 
" The Male Organs " does for the male system. The 
structure and functions of the female organs are fully 
explained, with the causes and cure of all their derange- 
ments. 

The Matron's Manual of Midwifery is 
intended to explain, in a familiar way, easily understood, 
all the phenomena of pregnancy and childbirth, so that 
in case of emergency any woman would know what to 
do for herself or others. 

The ' $ Topular Treatise on Venereal Dis- 
ease" is intended to explain all about these fearful 
scourges, and to show how they may be cured and pre- 
vented. It also, shows how they taint the whole human 
race, and how their fatal effects descend to remote gene- 
rations. 

These books are all intended for private self use. Men 
and women can, by reading them, understand them- 
selves, and know how to cure or prevent some of the 
most serious evils to which they are subject. If every 
one possessed, in time, the information these books con- 
tain, it would prevent untold misery both to young 
and old. 



419 



They are all well illustrated, both with, engravings and 
colored plates of the parts described, and are full of 
curious cases and interesting information upon all topics 
(sexual) which may be of interest or importance both to 
young and old. 

Besides giving my own experience, I have carefully 
studied all the most celebrated books on sexual science 
published in England, France, and Germany, down to 
the present day. The 300th edition of " The Marriage 
Guide " will especially be found full of new and interest- 
ing matter on the causes of difference in sex, artifi- 
cial impregnation, etc., now for the first time made 
public. 

The Tables of Contents appended to the advertisement 
of each book, wil] show the various matters treated upon, 
and give an idea of their interest and importance. 

The books are all uniform in size, binding, and general 
appearance, and are all one price — One Dollar each. 
They form, in fact, a complete library of sexual informa- 
tion, full and complete, but without a single word or 
statement to which the most fastidious could object. 

F. HOLLICK. 



420 

DR HOLLICK'S BOOKS 



THE 



OR NATURAL HISTORY OF 

GENERATION. 



PRICED—ONE DOLLAR. 



A private instructor for Married People, and those about 
to marry, both male and female, in everything relating to 
*he Anatomy and Physiology of the Generative system, in 
both sexes, and the process of Reproduction. 

This is beyond all comparison the most extraordinary 
work on Physiology ever published. There is nothing 
whatever that married people can either require or wish. 
to know but what is fully explained, and many matters 
lire introduced, of the most important and interesting char- 
acter, to which no allusion even can be found in any other 
work in our language. All the new discoveries, many of 
tb.em never before made public, are given in full, especially 
those relating to conception and sterility. 

No married person of either sex, should be without this 
book. It is utterly unlike any other ever published, and 
the matter it contains can be found nowhere else. It con- 
tains numerous Engravings, and colored Plates, designed 
especially for this work, and showing many of the nc^ 
discoveries, as well as anatomical details and Pydological 
procosses. 



421 

THE 

MALE GENERATIVE ORGANS, 

IN HEALTH AND DISEASE, 

From iJTFvijrcr to old ^ge* 

PRICE.— ONE DOLLAR. 

A comtlete practical Treatise on the Anatomy and 
Physiology of the Male Generative System, with a full 
description of the causes, and cure of all the diseases and 
derangements to which it is liable. — Adapted for every 
Maris own private use I 

This is not a treatise on Venereal Diseases, nor does it 
even refer to them, but to those derangements and difficul- 
ties, of all kinds, to which every maa is more or less liable, 
and from which in fact but few entirely escape. 

All the causes which lead to decay of the Generative 
system are fully explained, and the means pointed out by 
which it3 powers may be preserved to extreme old age /— 
More especially is explained that unseen, and usually un- 
known form of decay from which thousands become dis- 
eased, insane, and die without ever suspecting what has 
destroyed them. Even mediual men as yet know but lit- 
tle upon this important matter, which it is of the first 
moment every man shoind understand for himself, Ail 
the recipes are given in English, and the treatment is made 
eo plain that all can practise it 

This work is also fully illustrated, both with Engrav 
ings and with colored Plates, and an introductory chapter 
gives an epitome of all the new discoveries respecting the 
Female system and Generation, No other work at all like 
this was ever published. No Man rhould bo xntluyut it, 
young or old 



422 



THE MATRON'S 

MANUAL OF MIDWIFERY 

AND THE 

DURING PREGNANCY AND CHILD-BIRTH, 



A complete practical treatise upon the Art of Delive? y, 
and upon all the accidents and diseases that may occur 
during these periods. 

This work is especially intended for the instruction of 
Females themselves ; and any one of ordinary intelligence, 
upon reading it carefully through, will be able to render 
the requisite assistance in cases of emergency. 

The description of all the various Positions and Pre- 
sentations is on an entirely new plan, and is made both 
simple and intelligible. 

The management of new-born infants is also given in 
full, and the use of Ether and Chloroform during de- 
livery is discussed. 

This work contains over sixty Engravings, besides 
colored Plates, showing the various periods, and how to 
ascertain them ; the different positions ; the progress of 
delivery, etc. 



423 



THE DISEASES OF WOMAN, 

THEIR CAUSES AND CURE FAMILIARLY 
EXPLAINED. • 



With Practical Hints for their prevention, and for the 
preservation of Female Health, intended 

FOE EVEEY FEMALE'S OWN PRIVATE USE 

Illustrated with Colored Plates and with numerous En- 
gravings. 

If all the Females possessed this book in time, there 
would be incalculably less suffering and disease amongst 
them than is now seen. 

Everything relating to female health is treated upon, 

FROM INFANCY TO OLD ACE, 

and the most valuable recipes are given, together with 
practical directions, in the plainest manner. There is no 
known disease to which females are subject but what is 
here explained, and so that all can understand. 

DR. HOLLICK has received piles of letters thanking 
him for writing this book, and has been complimented 
for it by many of his public audiences of ladies. 

$W No Female should be without it, especially if 
Married. 



424 



A POPULAR TREATISE 



ON 



VENEREAL DISEASES, 

IN ALL THEIR FORMS. 

Embracing their History and Probable Origin ; their 
Consequences, both to Individuals and Society ; and the 
best Modes of Treating them. Adapted for general use. 



ILLUSTRATED BY WOODCUTS AND COLORED PLATES, 



The Special Topics treated upon in this book need not 
be here enumerated. It is sufficient to say that it ex- 
plains everything relating to this important matter, and 
in so plain and familiar a manner that any man can, 
from its instruction, know how to avoid these fearful 
scourges, or to cure himself, if it need be, when afflicted. 

§W There is more reason for all to understand this 
subject than is usually supposed, as the perusal of this 
Book will show. 



425 
JITST PUBLISHED. 

DR. HOLLICK'S NEW BOOK: 

THE NERVES AND THE NERVOUS. 

COMPRISING A FULL AND POPULAR EXPLANATION OF THE 

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 

OF THE 

BRAIN AND NERVES. 

WITH NUMEROUS 

WONDERFUL AND REMARKABLE CASES, 

ILLUSTRATING EVERY FORM OF 

NERVOUS DISEASE, 

witn its cause, prevention, and cure, so explained, as to bo 
readily understood by non-professional people. 

Including all kinds of Mania, Delusion, Hysteria, simple 
Nervousness, Second Sight, Mesmerism, Spectral Illusions, 
Ghosts, Mysterious Voices, Catalepsy, Trance, Mental and 
Moral Aberration, Softening of the Brain. Lvss of Memory and 
Mental Power, Nervous Debility, Hypochondriasis, etc., etc. 

With a full Explanation 

OF THE 

New Practice of Neuropathy; 

OR, 

THE NERVE CURE, 

OVER 500 PAGES, WITH 40 WOOD-CUTS. 

Specially Engraved for this Book. 



426 

The dbme List embraces the whole of Dr. Hollick's 
Works, which may either be obtained singly or in the set. 

PRICE, ONE DOLLAR EACH, 

All with Colored Plates. 

PUBLISHERS' AGENTS, 

THE AMERICAN NEWS CO., N. Y. 

Ant may be hai of Booksellers generally. 

J@^ They will also be sent by Post, Free, on receiving 
the money and address. 

TO THE TRADE. 

$^=* The Trade will find these works worthy of their 
special attention, as the demand for them is unprecedented 
and increasing, and the allowance most liberal. All whole- 
sale purchasers will be provided with these descriptive 
pamphlets free, and, on purchasing a certain number of the 
books, with their imprint upon them. 



AGENTS. 

Agents are wanted to circulate these books, and any 
young man of good address and character will find it ex- 
tremely profitable ; quite a large income being obtained by 
many. Apply to the 

AMERICAN HEWS COMPANY, 

NASSAU STBEET, N. Y. 

REMEMBER, 

Tltese are books that any one can confidently recommend, and 
wliich every one ought to read. 



427 
NOTICES OF DR. HOLLICK'S PUBLICATIONS. 

" We have just received a new work called ' The Mar- 
riage Guide? by Dr. F. Hollick, the well-known Author 
of the Origin of Life, and we are constrained to admit 
that it is the most extraordinary book that ever came 
under our notice. Thoroughly scientific enough for 
deeply read scholars, or for practical experimenters, it is 
yet plain and popular enough for the most ordinary 
understanding. Nowhere else in the English language 
can there be found such a complete and practically use- 
ful compendium of Physiological information, strictly 
adapted for the use of married people, or of those intend- 
ing to marry. All the new discoveries of PGUchet, Bis- 
choff, and others, are fully given, as well as many others 
by the author himself, never before made known. The 
engravings are also excellent, as well as curious. In 
fact, taking it altogether, it is beyond all question the 
Book upon these matters, and will probably become as 
popular in future, and as universally referred to, as 
Aristotleha,a formerly been. One feature which peculiarly 
distinguishes this book from all others of the kind, is the 
peculiar tone of morality and delicacy which pervades it 
all through, and which makes it both proper and useful 
to be read by all persons of both sexes, who have attain- 
ed the age of puberty. A very eminent clergyman 
authorizes us to say that he deems it a duty to intro- 
duce it privately among his flock, as the best means he 
knows of preventing and overcoming those hateful vices, 
unfortunately so destructive to soul and body, which are 
at the present time so fearfully prevalent/' — Remeic. 



" The Male Generative Organs." — This book, by 
Dr. Hollick, the eminent popular Lecturer and success- 
ful practitioner, should be in the hands of every man who 
values his health, and the preservation or restoration of 
his powers. It is complete in every particular, and it is 
the only work in the English language where that fell 
destroyer of thousands, urinary seminal loss, is fully ex- 
plained, and its cure and prevention pointed out. How 
many thousands yearly die, or become imbecile from this 
cause, who have never heard it mentioned. — Medical 
Journal. 



428 




429 



WRTTTXQ DESK AND GOLD PEN PRESENTED TO DR H. DY OKA 
OF HIS LADY CLASSES. 

Dr. Hollick — Dear Sir : Tho members of 
your class, desiring the gratification of offering 
you some testimonial of their personal regard, 
and grateful appreciation of the benefits which 
you are conferring upon them and their box 
generally, respectfully request your acceptance 
of the accompanying writing desk. 

Were it necessary, we might repeat our as- 
surances that your services to humanity will be, 
by us, long and gratefully remembered. Tho 
women of this generation have reason to rejoice 
that, by your efforte, a new and extensive field 
of information has been opened to them, whence 
they may derive treasures of knowledge, of im- 
mense importance to themselves and their pos- 
terity, hitherto concealed within professional 
enclosures. 

Wishing you health and happiness, we beg 
leave to subscribe ourselves, 

Truly your Frionds, 
Signed on behalf of the class by, 

M. G. 
O. W. B. 
Pkila. March 20, 1845. 




430 
NOTICES OF DR. HOLLICK'S LECTURES. 

[communicated.] 

Messrs. Editors.— The most scientific and useful lectures of the 
present day, which should claim the attention of every one, are 
now being delivered at Masonic Hall, by Dr. Hollick, on the sub- 
ject of Paternal Physiology and Health. The writer of this heard 
his first course, delivered during the last week, and having been 
educated to the medical profession, is, perhaps, capable of judging 
of their usefulness. There is no doubt that the general feeling of 
the medical faculty, and of an enlightened community, towards 
itinerant lecturers, has been one of disapprobation and apprehen- 
sion of quackery, but in the present instance there is certainly an 
exception. 

Dr. Dunbar, (formerly. Professor at the Washington College), 
who attended Dr. H.'s last lecture on Friday evening, was so 
pleased with the manner and matter of the lecture that he came out 
openly at the close of the lecture and stated, before the audience 
had dispersed, that he had come there at the request of a patient, 
prejudiced against the lecturer, but on hearing him he thought it 
his duty to say that the lecture was perfectly fair, scientific, cal 
culated to do a vast amount of good, and that every man, young o 
old, should hear, and would be benefited thereby. His illustratior 
are complete and beautiful, and his explanations couched in sue 
delicate language that the most fastidious can find no fault. Thos 
of your numerous readers who may devote an hour to his remain- 
ing lectures will thank you for giving this publicity. — Baltimore 
American, March 2. 



I! 



Dr. Hollick' s Lectures.— The distinction which Dr. Hollick 
has acquired as a most intelligent, judicious, and salutary lecturer 
on the interesting and important subjects of human physiology and 
health, renders any commendation from us quite unnecessary ; yet, 
in view of the fact that the course which he has lately delivered in 
this city, is, at the solicitation of many, to be repeated on this and 
the next two days at Masonic Hall, we would take occasion to 
assure all of their great value to every individual member of the 
human family. Many of the most prominent of the medical faculty 
in this city bear testimony to the excellence of these lectures, as 
calculated to be highly useful in imparting, in the most unexcep- 
tional manner, that knowledge of human physical structure and 
the laws of health, the want of which now occasions so much 
disaster and sufferings— Baltimore &un> March 1. 



431 



Dr. Hollick asd Physiology.— The second of a series of Lectures, 
by this gentleman, on human physiology, and the all important truths 
connected wfth our physical constitution, was attended by a full 
house, in National Hall, last evening. The time was well spent, and so 
appeared to think the audience. On the delivery of the first of these 
Lectures on Tuesday evening, the speaker in a comprehensive and 
well-digested exordium, placed himself and the subject right with the 
public." His manner, language and style, did the first ; his sound logic, 
his argument, his candor and research, accomplished the second. 
Apart from the interesting and apposite details of the wonders of 
reproduction, the illustrations of the immutable wisdom o£ nature, 
which teem in the animal and vegetable worlds — which 

11 Glows in each stem, and blossoms in each tree ; 
Lives through all life, extends through all extent, 
Spreads undivided, operates unspent." 

Apart from all this, Dr. Hollick's Lecture was excellent as a defence 
f truth, a vindication of the right of free and unshackled inquiry, and 
s a convincing refutation of that silly, but far too prevalent opinion 
.what there are truths of which it is better to remain in a state of igno- 
lance. Had nothing else been _ imparted in the forcible and well 
defined exordium of Dr. Hollick, than this judicious demolition of that 
fallacious, silly, but injurious twaddle which would forbid research 
to pass in advance of the old landmarks prescribed by custom, igno- 
rance or a spurious morality— even that would well deserve the public 
patronage. Truths, well 6et forth, will make an impression, whether 
their investigation be fashionable or not. There is an aflinity between 
the capacity to learn, and the truths to be learned, which always 
results, when a fitting opportunity is presented, in a free inquiry, and 
the gentleman who is bringing, in a judicious and elevated manner, a 
knowledge of those fundamental principles of our corporeal existence 
which are abused because unknown, will accomplish more good than 
half a dozen teachers of higher pretentions, and lower ability. It was 
gratifying to observe the decorum — the sense of respect for both 
speaker and subject, that was observed throughout the evening, which 
evidently shows that those who go there are actuated by higher 
motives than mere curiosity ; by desires more ennobling than a 
passing gratification ; in a word, it was clear that those who com- 
posed Dr. H's hearers, were men who know and dare to think, and 
who will profit by these most useful discourses — JV*«p Yerk Herald 



432 



"LETTERS FROM NEW YORK, NO. 11. 

* * * * There have been several courses of Lectures 
on Anatomy, this winter, adapted to popular comprehension. I rejoico 
at this ; for it has long been a cherished wish with me that a general 
knowledge of the structure of our bodies, and the laws which govern 
it, should extend from the scientific few into the common education of 
tho people. I know of nothing so well calculated to diminish vice a?\id 
vulgarity as universal and rational information on '.nese subjects. 
But "the impure state of society has so preverted naiare, and blind »>d 
oommon sense, that intelligent women, though eagerly studying tho 
structure of the Earth, the attraction of the Planets, and the repro- 
duction of Plants, seem ashamed to know anything of the structure of 
the human Body, and of those Physiological facts most intimately con- 
nected with their deepest and purest emotions, and the holiest experi- 
ence of their lives. I am often tempted to say, as Sir C. Grandison 
did to the Prude — • Wottest thou not how much m-delicacy there is in 
thy delicacy ? ' 

" r Ehe only Lectures I happened to attend were those of Dr. Hollick, 
which interested and edified me much. They were plain, familiar 
conversations, uttered and listened to with great modesty of language, 
and propriety of demeanor. The Manikin, or Artificial Anatomy, by 
which he illustrated his subject, is a most wonderful machine invented 
by a French Physician. It is made of papier mache, and represents 
the human body with admirable perfection, in the shape, coloring, and 
arrangement even to the minutest fibres. By the removal of wires it 
can be dissected completely, so as to show the locality and functions 
of the various Organs, the interior of the Heart, Lungs, &c. 

" Until I examined this curious piece of mechanism. I had very faint 
and imperfect ideas of the miraculous machinery of the house we live 
in. I found it highly suggestive of many things to my mind." * * * 

L. M. C. 

f Extract from a Letter in the " Boston Courier * of Monday. Juno 
2d by Mrs. L. M. Child.] 






i 



* 



t* 








4 -r 



^ 










% '* » K '* AG C o/^ff^ **<»> 



aV ^ 



f n \ "* A O '* 











■ 









M 



4 



f!!:'! 1 



n:<,K 






LIBRARY 



CONGRESS 




DDD173fi33bA 



■ 



